Panorama 8.8.x Operators Manual

Panorama 8.8.x Operators Manual
Operating Instructions
Datascope
Panorama® PAT I E N T M O N I TO R I N G N E T W O R K
PAT I E N T M O N I TO R I N G N E T W O R K
0070-01-0656-01_revC.indd 1
3/10/10 5:26:09 PM
Operating Instructions
Datascope
Panorama® PAT I E N T M O N I TO R I N G N E T W O R K
PAT I E N T M O N I TO R I N G N E T W O R K
Masimo SET® is a U.S. registered trademark of Masimo Corp.
Nellcor® is U.S. registered trademark of Tyco International Ltd.
Panorama® is a U.S. registered trademark of Mindray DS USA, Inc.
Passport 2® is a U.S.registered trademark of Mindray DS USA, Inc.
Symbol® is a U.S. registered trademark of Symbol Technologies, Inc.
Vigilance® is a U.S. registered trademark of Edwards Lifesciences Corporation.
View 12™ is a U.S. registered trademark of Mindray DS USA, Inc.
PureLight® is a U.S. registered trademark of the Nonin Medical, Inc.
Copyright © Mindray DS USA, Inc., 2009. All rights reserved. Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any
form without permission of Mindray DS USA, Inc.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
Table of Contents
Foreword ....................................................................................................................................................... ix
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes ....................................................................................................................... ix
Indications for Use .......................................................................................................................................... xvii
Unpacking Information .................................................................................................................................... xviii
Symbols and Descriptions ................................................................................................................................ xix
Technical Support ........................................................................................................................................... xx
System Overview ............................................................................................................. 1 - 1
Licensing Key ................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 2
Supported Devices .......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 3
Panorama Central Station......................................................................................................................... 1 - 3
Panorama ViewStation and WorkStation .................................................................................................... 1 - 3
Panorama Telemetry Server ...................................................................................................................... 1 - 4
Panorama Wireless Transceiver................................................................................................................. 1 - 4
Panorama Gateway................................................................................................................................. 1 - 5
Panorama Web Viewer............................................................................................................................ 1 - 5
Passport 2® Bedside Monitor .................................................................................................................... 1 - 6
Spectrum™ Bedside Monitor...................................................................................................................... 1 - 8
Spectrum OR™ Bedside Monitor ................................................................................................................ 1 - 10
Panorama Telepack ................................................................................................................................. 1 - 12
Network Printer ....................................................................................................................................... 1 - 14
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 15
Getting Started ................................................................................................................. 2 - 1
The Panorama Central Station .......................................................................................................................... 2 - 2
The ViewStation and the WorkStation ............................................................................................................... 2 - 4
The Main Screen ............................................................................................................................................ 2 - 7
Patient Tiles............................................................................................................................................. 2 - 7
Menu Bar ............................................................................................................................................... 2 - 10
Tabs ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 14
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 2 - 15
Common Controls and Elements ....................................................................................................................... 2 - 16
Quick Reference Guide ................................................................................................................................... 2 - 21
Auto-Admitting a Patient ........................................................................................................................... 2 - 21
Standby ................................................................................................................................................. 2 - 21
Discharge ............................................................................................................................................... 2 - 22
Display................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 23
Patient Alarms ......................................................................................................................................... 2 - 24
Viewing List Trends .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 25
Viewing Events........................................................................................................................................ 2 - 26
Viewing Disclosure Data........................................................................................................................... 2 - 26
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................. 2 - 27
Alarm Behavior ................................................................................................................ 3 - 1
General Alarm Behavior .................................................................................................................................. 3 - 2
Physiological Alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 3 - 2
Alarm Behaviors ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 2
Alarm Options ........................................................................................................................................ 3 - 3
Physiological Alarm Responses.................................................................................................................. 3 - 4
Technical Alarms ............................................................................................................................................ 3 - 6
Alarm Behaviors ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 6
Alarm Options ........................................................................................................................................ 3 - 6
Alarm Responses ..................................................................................................................................... 3 - 6
System Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ 3 - 6
Alarm Behaviors ...................................................................................................................................... 3 - 6
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
i
Table of Contents
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis.............................................................................................. 4 - 1
Lead Placement Procedures .............................................................................................................................. 4 - 2
Skin Preparation...................................................................................................................................... 4 - 2
Electrode Patches..................................................................................................................................... 4 - 2
Lead Placement Methods: AHA and IEC ..................................................................................................... 4 - 3
Arrhythmia Algorithm ...................................................................................................................................... 4 - 10
ST Segment Analysis ....................................................................................................................................... 4 - 12
Arrhythmia Alarms .......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 13
Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 4 - 14
Non-Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms................................................................................................................... 4 - 15
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................. 4 - 18
Patient Setup Functions ..................................................................................................... 5 - 1
Demographics Tab.......................................................................................................................................... 5 - 2
Communications with the Panorama Gateway ............................................................................................ 5 - 2
Accessing the Demographics Tab .............................................................................................................. 5 - 3
Entering Data in the Demographics Tab ..................................................................................................... 5 - 4
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 19
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 20
Transfer Tab ................................................................................................................................................... 5 - 22
Accessing the Transfer Tab ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 22
Room To Room Transfer Without Device ..................................................................................................... 5 - 22
Central To Central Transfer Without Device ................................................................................................ 5 - 24
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 28
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 31
Discharge Tab ................................................................................................................................................ 5 - 36
Accessing the Discharge Tab .................................................................................................................... 5 - 36
Discharging a Patient from the Central Station and the Bedside Monitor ......................................................... 5 - 36
Discharging a Patient from the Central Station............................................................................................. 5 - 37
Discharging a Patient from a Telepack Device............................................................................................. 5 - 38
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 5 - 38
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 38
Display Tab.................................................................................................................................................... 5 - 40
Accessing the Display Tab ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 40
Components of the Display Tab ................................................................................................................. 5 - 41
Configuring the Display Tab ..................................................................................................................... 5 - 45
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 48
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 48
Standby Tab .................................................................................................................................................. 5 - 49
Accessing the Standby Tab ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 49
Placing a Patient in Standby Mode ............................................................................................................ 5 - 49
Removing a Patient from Standby Mode ..................................................................................................... 5 - 50
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 5 - 50
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 51
Wave Gain Tab (Patient) ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 52
Accessing the Wave Gain Tab (Patient)...................................................................................................... 5 - 52
Changing a Patient’s Wave Gain Settings .................................................................................................. 5 - 53
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 54
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 54
Print Setup Tab (Patient) ................................................................................................................................... 5 - 55
Accessing the Print Setup Tab.................................................................................................................... 5 - 55
Changing a Patient’s Print Setup................................................................................................................ 5 - 56
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 56
ii
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Table of Contents
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 5 - 57
Patient Alarm Functions .................................................................................................... 6 - 1
Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional) ................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
Accessing the Patient Alarm Setup Tab ....................................................................................................... 6 - 2
Entering a Password ................................................................................................................................ 6 - 2
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient) ................................................................................................................................. 6 - 4
Accessing the Alarm Limits Tab.................................................................................................................. 6 - 4
Configuring Patient Alarm Limits ................................................................................................................ 6 - 5
Simultaneous Alarm Limit Editing ............................................................................................................... 6 - 7
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 7
Generating a Patient Alarm Report ............................................................................................................ 6 - 9
Testing Alarm Limits ................................................................................................................................. 6 - 9
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 10
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient) .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 12
Accessing the Alarm Responses Tab........................................................................................................... 6 - 12
Configuring Alarm Responses ................................................................................................................... 6 - 14
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 15
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 18
Views ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 1
Bedside Tab ................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 2
Accessing the Bedside Tab ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 2
Bedside Tab (All Waveforms View)............................................................................................................ 7 - 3
Generating an All Strips Report ................................................................................................................. 7 - 7
Bedside Tab (All ECG View) ..................................................................................................................... 7 - 8
Trends Tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 13
Accessing the Trends Tab ......................................................................................................................... 7 - 13
Trends Tab (List View) .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 13
Trends Tab (Graphic View) ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 19
Generating a Graphic Trend Report........................................................................................................... 7 - 21
Events Tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 23
Accessing the Events Tab.......................................................................................................................... 7 - 23
Events Tab (List View) ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 24
Event Filtering ......................................................................................................................................... 7 - 27
Events Tab (Waveforms View) ................................................................................................................... 7 - 33
Accessing the Waveforms View................................................................................................................. 7 - 33
Disclosure Tab ................................................................................................................................................ 7 - 40
Accessing the Disclosure Tab .................................................................................................................... 7 - 40
Disclosure Tab (Waveforms View) ............................................................................................................. 7 - 45
ST Tab........................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 53
Accessing the ST Tab ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 53
Generating an ST Report .......................................................................................................................... 7 - 58
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 7 - 58
Report Functions ............................................................................................................... 8 - 1
Patient Reports Tab ......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 2
Accessing the Patient Reports Tab .............................................................................................................. 8 - 2
All Strips Report....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 2
Full Disclosure Report ............................................................................................................................... 8 - 6
ST Report................................................................................................................................................ 8 - 14
Trend List Report ...................................................................................................................................... 8 - 17
Event List Report ...................................................................................................................................... 8 - 21
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
iii
Table of Contents
Patient Alarm Report ................................................................................................................................ 8 - 25
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 27
System Reports Tab ......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 29
Accessing the System Reports Tab ............................................................................................................. 8 - 29
All Strips (All Patients) Report .................................................................................................................... 8 - 30
Equipment Report .................................................................................................................................... 8 - 34
Paging Report ......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 35
Print Status Tab............................................................................................................................................... 8 - 38
Print Status Tab List Box ............................................................................................................................ 8 - 38
Removing Print Jobs from the Print Queue ................................................................................................... 8 - 38
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 39
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 39
Additional Reports .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 40
Accessing Additional Reports .................................................................................................................... 8 - 40
Event Zoom In Report ............................................................................................................................... 8 - 40
Full Disclosure Zoom In Report................................................................................................................... 8 - 43
Printing a Full Disclosure Zoom In Report .................................................................................................... 8 - 46
Graphic Trend Report .............................................................................................................................. 8 - 47
12-lead Report ........................................................................................................................................ 8 - 51
Telepack Error Log Report......................................................................................................................... 8 - 53
System Alarm Report................................................................................................................................ 8 - 55
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 8 - 58
System Setup Functions..................................................................................................... 9 - 1
Parameter Color Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 2
Accessing the Parameter Color Tab ........................................................................................................... 9 - 2
Selecting a Color for Parameter Data ......................................................................................................... 9 - 2
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 2
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 3
Touch Screen Tab .......................................................................................................................................... 9 - 4
Accessing the Touch Screen Tab................................................................................................................ 9 - 4
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 6
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 6
Installation Setup Tab ...................................................................................................................................... 9 - 7
Accessing the Installation Setup Tab........................................................................................................... 9 - 7
Entering a Password ................................................................................................................................ 9 - 7
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 8
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 8
Care Group Tab ............................................................................................................................................. 9 - 9
Accessing the Care Group Tab ................................................................................................................. 9 - 9
Editing Care Group Labels........................................................................................................................ 9 - 9
Assigning a Patient Tile to a Care Group.................................................................................................... 9 - 10
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 10
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 10
Volume Tab.................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 11
Accessing the Volume Tab ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 11
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 13
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 13
System Alarms Tab.......................................................................................................................................... 9 - 14
System Alarms (Options) Tab .................................................................................................................... 9 - 14
System Event Filtering............................................................................................................................... 9 - 18
System Alarms (Alarm Limits) Tab .............................................................................................................. 9 - 23
System Alarms (Alarm Responses) Tab........................................................................................................ 9 - 26
iv
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Table of Contents
Passwords Tab ............................................................................................................................................... 9 - 29
Accessing the Installation Setup Tab........................................................................................................... 9 - 29
Modifying a Default Password................................................................................................................... 9 - 30
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 31
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 31
Equipment Setup Tab....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 33
Accessing the Equipment Setup Tab ........................................................................................................... 9 - 33
Entering New Equipment .......................................................................................................................... 9 - 34
Modifying Equipment Included in the Equipment List .................................................................................... 9 - 35
Deleting Equipment in the Equipment List .................................................................................................... 9 - 36
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 36
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 36
More Tab....................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 39
Accessing Additional (More) Tabs ............................................................................................................. 9 - 39
Previous Tab .................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 40
Accessing Previous Tabs........................................................................................................................... 9 - 40
Date/Time Tab ............................................................................................................................................... 9 - 41
Accessing the Date/Time Tab.................................................................................................................... 9 - 41
Set Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 9 - 42
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 44
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 44
Print Setup Tab (System)................................................................................................................................... 9 - 45
Accessing the Print Setup Tab (Central Station) ............................................................................................ 9 - 45
Accessing the Print Setup Tab (ViewStation and WorkStation) ....................................................................... 9 - 46
Setting the System Default Print Setup ......................................................................................................... 9 - 46
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 46
Unit Priorities Tab............................................................................................................................................ 9 - 47
Accessing the Unit Priorities Tab ................................................................................................................ 9 - 47
Setting a Default Order in the Unit Priorities Tab.......................................................................................... 9 - 47
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 48
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 49
Unit Choices Tab ............................................................................................................................................ 9 - 50
Accessing the Unit Choices Tab (Central Station) ......................................................................................... 9 - 50
Accessing the Unit Choices Tab (ViewStation and WorkStation) .................................................................... 9 - 50
Configuring Default Report Waveform Parameters ....................................................................................... 9 - 57
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 58
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 58
Wave Gain Tab (System)................................................................................................................................. 9 - 59
Accessing the Wave Gain Tab.................................................................................................................. 9 - 59
Changing the System Default Wave Gain Settings ....................................................................................... 9 - 59
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen ................................................................................................................ 9 - 60
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 61
Wireless Tab .................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 62
Accessing the Wireless Tab ...................................................................................................................... 9 - 62
Entering Wireless Settings (Telepack-2.4) ................................................................................................... 9 - 63
Entering Wireless Settings (Telepack-608)................................................................................................... 9 - 66
Sidebar Buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 68
Error Log Sidebar Button........................................................................................................................... 9 - 69
Device ID................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 70
Connect Field.......................................................................................................................................... 9 - 70
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 9 - 72
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
v
Table of Contents
Telepack (Optional)......................................................................................................... 10 - 1
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................. 10 - 2
Button Indicators ........................................................................................................................................... 10 - 3
Nurse Call Button ................................................................................................................................. 10 - 3
Attendant Present Buttons ....................................................................................................................... 10 - 3
LEAD SELECT Button ............................................................................................................................ 10 - 3
CHECK Button ..................................................................................................................................... 10 - 4
RECORD Button ................................................................................................................................... 10 - 4
Indicator Lights ............................................................................................................................................. 10 - 4
ECG Lead Diagram LED Indicator Lights ................................................................................................... 10 - 4
Link Status LED Indicator Light.................................................................................................................. 10 - 6
Battery Status LED Indicator Light ............................................................................................................. 10 - 6
Operating Instructions ................................................................................................................................... 10 - 7
Initial Setup of Telepack ......................................................................................................................... 10 - 7
Securing the Telepack Device.................................................................................................................. 10 - 9
Telepack with Nonin SpO2 Module (Optional) ................................................................................................. 10 - 10
Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 10 - 10
Installing the SpO2 Module on the Telepack.............................................................................................. 10 - 10
Removing the SpO2 Module from the Telepack ......................................................................................... 10 - 11
Installing the Patient Cable...................................................................................................................... 10 - 12
Attaching the Finger Clip Sensor ............................................................................................................. 10 - 13
Removing the Patient Cable .................................................................................................................... 10 - 14
Approved Telepack Accessories ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 15
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................ 10 - 17
User Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 11 - 1
Touch Screen User Maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 11 - 2
Care and Cleaning of the Touch Screen ................................................................................................... 11 - 2
Telepack User Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 11 - 3
Storing the Telepack .............................................................................................................................. 11 - 3
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Telepack Device ......................................................................................... 11 - 3
Cleaning the SpO2 Module .................................................................................................................... 11 - 5
Cleaning the SpO2 Finger Clip Sensor ..................................................................................................... 11 - 6
Disposal of the Telepack Device .............................................................................................................. 11 - 6
Disposing of Batteries............................................................................................................................. 11 - 7
Parameter Specifications................................................................................................. 12 - 1
Parameter Specifications................................................................................................................................ 12 - 2
Heart Rate: HR ...................................................................................................................................... 12 - 2
Respiration: Resp................................................................................................................................... 12 - 2
NIBP .................................................................................................................................................... 12 - 3
SpO2 ................................................................................................................................................... 12 - 4
Nonin SpO2 ......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 5
IBP: mmHg............................................................................................................................................ 12 - 5
CO2 .................................................................................................................................................... 12 - 6
O2....................................................................................................................................................... 12 - 6
INSP/ET O2.......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 6
N2O .................................................................................................................................................... 12 - 7
Anesthetic Agents: Iso, Enf, Des, Sev, Hal, Agent ...................................................................................... 12 - 7
Premature Ventricular Contraction (PVC)................................................................................................... 12 - 8
Temp: T1,T2, Delta T, and T Blood .......................................................................................................... 12 - 8
ST........................................................................................................................................................ 12 - 9
Cardiac Output ..................................................................................................................................... 12 - 9
Cardiac Index ....................................................................................................................................... 12 - 10
vi
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Table of Contents
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure (PAWP)............................................................................................... 12 - 10
Battery Percentage................................................................................................................................. 12 - 10
Invalid Data Display...................................................................................................................................... 12 - 11
Alarms and Events .......................................................................................................... 13 - 1
Physiological Alarms and Events ..................................................................................................................... 13 - 2
Alarm Limit Settings................................................................................................................................ 13 - 2
Physiological Alarm Event Messages........................................................................................................ 13 - 7
Physiological Alarms and Events: Arrhythmias .................................................................................................. 13 - 9
Technical Alarms and Events .......................................................................................................................... 13 - 11
System Event Messages and Error Codes ......................................................................................................... 13 - 16
Operator Position.......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 17
Alarm Verification ......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 17
Network Tab (Optional) .................................................................................................. 14 - 1
Network Tab ................................................................................................................................................ 14 - 2
Accessing the Network Tab .................................................................................................................... 14 - 2
Sorting the Contents of the Network Tab List Box ....................................................................................... 14 - 2
Assigning Patient Tiles in the Network Tab................................................................................................ 14 - 2
Removing a Patient Tile Assignment in the Network Tab ............................................................................. 14 - 4
Removing All Patient Tile Assignments in the Network Tab .......................................................................... 14 - 4
Refreshing the Network Tab List Box ........................................................................................................ 14 - 4
Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................... 14 - 5
Paging Tab (Optional)..................................................................................................... 15 - 1
Paging Password Tab .................................................................................................................................... 15 - 2
Accessing the Paging Tab....................................................................................................................... 15 - 2
Entering a Password .............................................................................................................................. 15 - 2
Sidebar Buttons ..................................................................................................................................... 15 - 3
Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................... 15 - 3
Paging Tab .................................................................................................................................................. 15 - 4
Accessing the Paging Tab....................................................................................................................... 15 - 4
Adding a Pager .................................................................................................................................... 15 - 4
Assigning a Patient Tile .......................................................................................................................... 15 - 5
Adding All Patient Tiles to a Pager........................................................................................................... 15 - 6
Removing a Patient Tile Assignment ......................................................................................................... 15 - 6
Removing All Patient Tiles from a Pager.................................................................................................... 15 - 6
Editing a Pager ..................................................................................................................................... 15 - 7
Removing a Pager ................................................................................................................................. 15 - 7
Resending a Failed Page ........................................................................................................................ 15 - 8
Generating a Paging Report ................................................................................................................... 15 - 9
Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................... 15 - 9
Performance Specifications ............................................................................................. 16 - 1
ECG Performance Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 16 - 2
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements................................................................................. 16 - 4
Alarm Response .................................................................................................................................... 16 - 4
ST Segment Analysis .............................................................................................................................. 16 - 4
Arrhythmia Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 16 - 5
NIBP Performance Characteristics ............................................................................................................ 16 - 5
IBP Pressure Range ................................................................................................................................ 16 - 6
IBP Heart Rate Meter.............................................................................................................................. 16 - 6
Temperature Performance Requirements ................................................................................................... 16 - 6
ECG Respiration Performance Requirements.............................................................................................. 16 - 6
SpO2 ................................................................................................................................................... 16 - 6
Nonin SpO2 ......................................................................................................................................... 16 - 7
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
vii
Table of Contents
CO2 Performance Requirements .............................................................................................................. 16 - 7
CO2 Alarm........................................................................................................................................... 16 - 7
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server ................................................................................ 16 - 8
Real Time Clock .................................................................................................................................... 16 - 8
Power Supply........................................................................................................................................ 16 - 9
Operating Temperature .......................................................................................................................... 16 - 9
Operating Humidity ............................................................................................................................... 16 - 9
Operating Altitude................................................................................................................................. 16 - 9
Storage Temperature.............................................................................................................................. 16 - 9
Storage Humidity................................................................................................................................... 16 - 9
Storage Altitude .................................................................................................................................... 16 - 9
Standards............................................................................................................................................. 16 - 10
Information Display and Control .............................................................................................................. 16 - 11
Electromagnetic Compatibility ................................................................................................................. 16 - 12
Physical Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 16 - 16
Keyboard .................................................................................................................................................... 16 - 16
Mouse ......................................................................................................................................................... 16 - 16
Displays....................................................................................................................................................... 16 - 16
21" CRT Display ................................................................................................................................... 16 - 16
20" CRT Display ................................................................................................................................... 16 - 17
19" Flat Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 16 - 17
18.1" Flat Panel .................................................................................................................................... 16 - 17
Touch Screen ........................................................................................................................................ 16 - 18
Network Printer ............................................................................................................................................ 16 - 18
Requirements ........................................................................................................................................ 16 - 18
Access Points/Antennas................................................................................................................................. 16 - 18
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas/Cable Repeaters ................................................................. 16 - 19
Panorama Wireless Transceiver............................................................................................................... 16 - 19
Panorama Antenna ................................................................................................................................ 16 - 19
Cable Repeater ..................................................................................................................................... 16 - 20
Splitter ................................................................................................................................................. 16 - 20
Environmental Characteristics for the Panorama Wireless Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas............................... 16 - 20
Telepack Specifications ................................................................................................................................. 16 - 22
Safety Designations ............................................................................................................................... 16 - 22
Panorama Server Analysis ...................................................................................................................... 16 - 22
Environmental Characteristics.................................................................................................................. 16 - 23
Electromagnetic Compatibility ................................................................................................................. 16 - 23
FCC Labeling ........................................................................................................................................ 16 - 28
Compliance .......................................................................................................................................... 16 - 28
Specific Absorption Rate ........................................................................................................................ 16 - 29
Nonin SpO2 Module Specifications ................................................................................................................ 16 - 30
Environmental Characteristics.................................................................................................................. 16 - 30
Measurement Specifications.................................................................................................................... 16 - 30
Electromagnetic Compatibility ................................................................................................................. 16 - 31
Panorama Instrument Radio-608 ..................................................................................................................... 16 - 34
Approved Accessory .............................................................................................................................. 16 - 34
FCC Label ............................................................................................................................................ 16 - 34
Glossary......................................................................................................................... 17 - 1
Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations .............................................................................................................. 17 - 2
viii
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Foreword
Introduction
Foreword
The Panorama Operating Instructions are intended to provide the information required to
operate the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network. For additional information and technical
assistance, please contact an area or regional Representative.
A general understanding of the features and functions of the Panorama Patient Monitoring
Network and its components is a prerequisite for the proper use of this equipment. Therefore,
do not operate this equipment before reading these instructions thoroughly, including all
appropriate warnings and cautions.
CAUTION:
US Federal law restricts the sale of this device to, by or on
the order of a physician.
NOTE:
Figures in this manual are provided for reference purposes
only. Screens will likely differ based on the monitoring
device configuration, licenses available, parameters
selected and patient configuration of the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Network.
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Please read and adhere to all of the warnings and cautions listed throughout this manual.
A WARNING is provided to alert the user to potentially serious outcomes (death, injury or
serious adverse events) to the patient or the user.
A CAUTION is provided to alert the user that special care should be taken for the safe and
effective use of the device. They will include actions to be taken to avoid effects on patients
or users that will not be potentially life threatening or result in serious injury, but about which
the user should be aware.
A NOTE is provided when additional general information is available.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
ix
Introduction
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Warnings
WARNING: Only qualified and trained personnel or Service Personnel
should attempt to service the equipment. Service is defined
as any activity requiring the cover to be removed for
internal adjustments, parts replacements, repairs or
software upgrades of any kind to insure compatibility.
WARNING: To insure compatibility with the operating system and
applications software, use only approved components to
repair any part of the Panorama Patient Monitoring
Network. Use of unauthorized software, devices,
accessories, or cables may render the application unsuitable
for medical patient monitoring. It may also result in
increased electromagnetic emissions or decreased Immunity
of the system.
WARNING: Route cables neatly. Ensure cables are not in the way of
patient or hospital personnel.
WARNING: Do not incinerate batteries, possible explosion may occur.
WARNING: Some of the equipment on the Panorama Patient Monitoring
Network must utilize the hospital emergency power system.
Failure to do so will result in loss of monitoring during
extended periods of power failure. The back-up power time
period, for the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network, is
limited.
WARNING: The 18.1" flat panel may tip over, if the display head is
inclined to an angle greater than 45° backward tilt. If the
user elects to have the display head inclined to an angle
greater than 45° backward tilt, the flat panel must be
attached to a secure mounting surface via three screw
locations on the bottom of the base.
WARNING: Do not put MPSO (Multiple Portable Socket Outlets, i.e.,
multiple outlet extension cords) used with the Panorama
Patient Monitoring Network equipment on the floor. Connect
only approved accessories and components to the same
MPSO as the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network
equipment. Do not overload MPSOs. Use only MPSOs that
comply with the requirements of IEC 60601-1-1.
WARNING: Incorrect setting or silencing of patient alarms can
jeopardize patient safety.
WARNING: Operator should check that the current alarm presets are
appropriate prior to use on each patient.
WARNING: When the Suspend Non-Lethal alarms sidebar button is
enabled, the Panorama Central Station will not monitor any
non-lethal arrhythmias, and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
WARNING: When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is enabled, the
Panorama Central Station will not monitor any lethal or
non-lethal arrhythmias and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
x
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Introduction
WARNING: The Telepack should not be used adjacent to or stacked with
other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the
Telepack should be observed to verify normal operation in
the configuration in which it will be used.
WARNING: The Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module should only be used
with Nonin-manufactured PureLight® pulse oximeter
sensors. Using other manufacturers’ sensors can result in
inaccurate pulse oximeter performance.
WARNING: Do not use the Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module in an
explosive atmosphere or in the presence of flammable
anesthetics or gases.
WARNING: Loss of SpO2 monitoring when using the Telepack with
Nonin SpO2 module can result if any objects hinder the
pulse measurement. Ensure that no blood flow restrictions
(e.g. blood pressure cuff) hinder pulse measurements.
WARNING: The Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module does not meet
defibrillation-proof requirement per IEC 60601-1: 1990,
clause 17.h.
WARNING: Operation of the Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module below
the minimum amplitude of 0.3% modulation may cause
inaccurate SpO2 results.
WARNING: Do not use the Telepack and/or the Telepack with Nonin
SpO2 module during MRI (Magnetic Resonance Imaging)
scanning. Induced current could potentially cause burns.
Accuracy of measurements on this unit and the MRI unit
may also be affected.
WARNING: Do not use a damaged SpO2 sensor.
WARNING: Using unapproved accessories, sensors, and cables may
result in increased emission and/or decreased immunity of
this device.
WARNING: As with all medical equipment, carefully route cables and
connections to reduce the possibility of entanglement or
strangulation.
WARNING: PACEMAKER PATIENTS - Indication of the heart-rate may be
adversely affected by cardiac pacemaker pulses or by
cardiac arrhythmias. Keep pacemaker patients under close
surveillance. Refer to ‘‘ECG Performance Requirements’’ on
page 16-2 for disclosure of the pacer rejection capability.
WARNING: PACEMAKER PATIENTS - Rate meters may continue to count
the pacemaker rate during occurrences of cardiac arrest or
some arrhythmias. Do not rely entirely upon rate meter
alarms. Keep pacemaker patients under close surveillance.
WARNING: Changing the patient alarm limits at the WorkStation will
automatically change the patient alarm limits at the
Panorama Central Station AND the bedside monitor (if
applicable) for the selected patient tile.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
xi
Introduction
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Cautions
xii
CAUTION:
For proper operation do not obstruct the fan air holes.
CAUTION:
For proper operation use only hospital grade power cords.
CAUTION:
For proper operation, do not use the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Network equipment with a frayed or damaged
power cord.
CAUTION:
For proper operation never place fluids on top of this
equipment. In case of accidental spillage, wipe clean
immediately and have the system serviced to ensure no
hazard exists.
CAUTION:
Do not block the speakers. Set the volume levels so that
alarms can be heard at all times, as described in this
Operation Manual.
CAUTION:
Dispose of single use items in accordance with hospital
policy.
CAUTION:
The bedside device should be disconnected from the
Panorama Central Station when changing the CO2 units of
measurement.
CAUTION:
For proper monitoring of patient information, do not block
the operators' clear view of the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Network data display(s).
CAUTION:
If passwords are changed from the factory defaults, users
MUST ensure that they document new passwords in the
space provided in this manual. For additional information
refer to ‘‘Passwords Tab’’ on page 9-29. Failure to recall
user defined passwords will render the system UNUSABLE.
CAUTION:
The Panorama Telepack and Instrument Radio are wireless
devices and may be subject to intermittent signal dropout.
Panorama wireless devices are designed to perform with a
maximum cumulative signal dropout of one minute in a
24-hour period under ideal conditions. A crowded wireless
environment or interference from other medical or nonmedical devices, either intentional (e.g., VOIP phones,
pagers, asset tracking systems, etc.) or unintentional (e.g.,
AC motors, microwave ovens, paper shredders, etc.), may
result in a significantly increased amount of signal dropout
experienced by any one or multiple wireless device(s).
CAUTION:
Operation of the wireless product requires the prior
coordination with a frequency coordinator designated by
the FCC for the Wireless Medical Telemetry Service.
CAUTION:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Mindray DS USA, Inc. could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
CAUTION:
The Telepack and the Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module
should not be used when the Electro Surgical Unit (ESU) is
active.
CAUTION:
To avoid potential system issues, deactivate the touch screen
before cleaning.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Introduction
CAUTION:
DO NOT spray glass cleaner directly on a display as it could
possibly leak inside a non-sealed unit and cause damage.
CAUTION:
Follow your hospital protocol for handling of blood and
body fluids.
CAUTION:
The use of the Telepack may affect the functioning of other
medical electrical equipment operating in the same
frequency band.
CAUTION:
Conductive parts of electrodes and associated connectors for
applied parts and neutral electrode should not contact other
conductive parts and earth.
CAUTION:
The Telepack may not function properly, if it was subjected
to extreme mechanical forces.
CAUTION:
The Telepack may not function if the batteries installed in the
device are corroded. Use only approved batteries (P/N
0146-00-0077-01) in the Telepack and observe proper
polarity. Installing batteries with the incorrect polarity may
cause the batteries to become excessively warm.
CAUTION:
The Telepack should not be attached to the patient when the
device is being programmed into the system.
CAUTION:
Ensure that the ECG lead cable is plugged into the port
firmly, the end cap of the battery is firmly secured and the
serial port is also secured with the protective plug to
prevent fluids from entering into the Telepack.
CAUTION:
When disconnecting ECG leads from the patient, do not pull
on the leadsets. This will decrease the life of the leadsets.
Grasp the connectors on the leadset and pull gently.
CAUTION:
Ensure that the lead wires are not inadvertently caught in
the bed rails. If this happens, the insulation may get cut or
the leadset may break.
CAUTION:
Using more than one type of electrode on the same patient
should be avoided because of variations in electrical
resistance.
CAUTION:
The LEDs on the Telepack may not be clearly visible under
brightly lit conditions. The lighting should be adjusted to
ensure that all LED indicators are clearly visible.
CAUTION:
The user should monitor the Panorama Central Station for
messages from the Telepack that indicate a low battery
condition.
CAUTION:
Periodically press the CHECK button on the Telepack to
verify the battery condition.
CAUTION:
Some pacemakers may contain a respiratory sensor that
may produce artifact on an ECG waveform.
CAUTION:
Prior to sterilization, lead sets must be removed from the
Telepack. The Telepack and/or the Telepack with Nonin
SpO2 must not be sterilized.
CAUTION:
Visually inspect the battery compartment for any foreign
object prior to use.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
xiii
Introduction
xiv
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
CAUTION:
Ensure that the batteries are removed when the Telepack is
being stored.
CAUTION:
Tissue damage or inaccurate SpO2 measurements may be
caused by incorrect sensor application or use, such as
wrapping too tightly, applying supplemental tape, failing to
inspect the sensor site periodically, or failing to position
appropriately. Carefully read the sensor directions for use,
the Panorama Operating Instructions, and all precautionary
information before use.
CAUTION:
The accuracy of the SpO2 measurement may be affected if
the total cable length (including extension cables) is greater
than 3.28 yards (3 meters).
CAUTION:
Inaccurate SpO2 measurements may be caused by:
•
Incorrect sensor application or use
•
Significant levels of dysfunctional hemoglobins, (e.g.,
carboxyhemoglobin or methemoglobin)
•
Intra-vascular dyes such as indocyanine green or
methylene blue
•
Exposure to excessive illumination such as surgical
lamps (especially ones with a xenon light source),
bilirubin lamps, fluorescent lights, infrared heating
lamps, or excessive ambient light. In such cases, cover
the sensor site with opaque material.
•
Excessive patient movement
•
Venous pulsations
•
Electro-surgical interference
•
Placement of a sensor on an extremity that has a blood
pressure cuff, arterial catheter, or intra-vascular line.
•
Cold extremities due to reduced circulation.
•
Nail polish or fungus
CAUTION:
In certain situations in which perfusion and signal strength
are low, such as in patients with thick or pigmented skin,
inaccurately low SpO2 readings will result. Verification of
oxygenation should be made, especially in patients with
chronic lung disease, before instituting any therapy or
intervention.
CAUTION:
Many patients suffer from poor peripheral perfusion due to
hypothermia, hypovolemia, severe vasoconstriction,
reduced cardiac output, etc. These symptoms may cause a
loss in vital sign readings.
CAUTION:
Prolonged and continuous monitoring may increase the risk
of skin erosion and pressure necrosis at the site of the
sensor. Check the SpO2 sensor site frequently to ensure
proper positioning, alignment and skin integrity at least
every eight (8) hours; with the Adult and Pediatric re-usable
finger sensor, check every four (4) hours; for patients of
poor perfusion or with skin sensitive to light, check every 2
- 3 hours; more frequent examinations may be required for
different patients. Change the sensor site if signs of
circulatory compromise occur.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Introduction
CAUTION:
The Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module has motion tolerant
software that minimizes the likelihood of motion artifact
being misinterpreted as good pulse quality. In some
circumstances, however, the Telepack with Nonin SpO2
module may still interpret motion as good pulse quality. This
applies to all available outputs (i.e. SpO2, HR, Pleth, PPG).
CAUTION:
A functional tester cannot be used to assess the accuracy of
the pulse oximeter probe or a pulse oximeter monitor.
CAUTION:
The Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module complies with
International Standard IEC 60601-1-2:2005 for
electromagnetic compatibility for medical electrical
equipment and/or systems. This standard is designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a typical medical installation. However, because of the
proliferation of radio-frequency transmitting equipment and
other sources of electrical noise in healthcare and other
environments, it is possible that high levels of such
interference due to close proximity or strength of a source
might disrupt the performance of this device. Medical
electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding
EMC, and all equipment must be installed and put into
service according to the EMC information specified in this
manual.
CAUTION:
Use the designated cleaning plug (P/N 0003-00-0055)
when cleaning and disinfecting the Nonin SpO2 module. If
fluids enter the device, it may affect the functionality of the
module or render it unusable.
CAUTION:
In compliance with the European Directive on Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, do
not dispose of this product as unsorted municipal waste.
CAUTION:
It is important to notify Service personnel when the system
event message “System Service required - Contact Mindray
or Authorized Mindray Distributor ... (300).” is displayed.
This message indicates that while data was being written to
or read from the system hard drive, an error was detected.
Until service personnel correct this issue, patient data may
be lost (for example, demographic information, alarm
configurations, and historical patient data). Real time
parameter monitoring and alarm checking will not be
affected by this message. This message will be displayed
until reset by service personnel.
CAUTION:
DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY
REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT
TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER'S
INSTRUCTIONS.
ATTENTION: IL Y A DANGER D'EXPLOSION S'IL Y A REMPLACEMENT
INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE, REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC
UNE BATTERIE DU MÊME TYPE OU D'UN TYPE ÉQUIVALENT
RECOMMANDÉ PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU REBUT
LES BATTERIES USAGÉES CONFORMÉMENT AUX
INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
xv
Introduction
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
CAUTION:
xvi
If the Panorama system experiences a communication loss,
all Telepack ST and/or arrhythmia alarms that were active
at the time of communication loss will not produce central
station alarm notifications once communication is restored.
This is due to the automatic relearn function of the ST and/or
arrhythmia algorithm after communication is restored.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Indications for Use
Introduction
Indications for Use
Panorama Patient Monitoring Network
The indications for use for the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network include:
A. Viewing real time patient clinical and demographic data
B. Graphical and numeric trending of clinical data
C. Storing and printing of clinical and demographic data
D. Setting independent alarm limits for data sent by the bedside monitor.
The clinical data displayed by the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network is obtained from
one or more compatible physiological monitors and includes: ECG waveforms, Invasive and
Non-Invasive Blood Pressure, Blood Oxygenation (SpO2), Heart Rate, Respiration Rate,
Temperature, CO2 inspired and end tidal, Ventricular Arrhythmia analysis and ST Segment
analysis.
The Panorama Patient Monitoring Network is intended for use in a fixed location, in the
healthcare facility setting, as a central viewing station. The Panorama Patient Monitoring
Network is not intended to be directly connected to the patient at any time or installed in a
patient’s vicinity.
Panorama Telemetry System
The Panorama Telemetry System is intended for use under the direct supervision of a licensed
healthcare practitioner. The system is designed to acquire and monitor physiological data for
ambulating patients within a defined coverage area. The system processes the physiological
data to detect various ECG arrhythmia events and select physiological parameter limit
violations.
The Panorama Telemetry System is intended for installation in a hospital or clinical
environment to provide clinicians with patient physiological data, while allowing for patient
mobility.
The physiological parameters monitored include ECG, Heart Rate from ECG, Lethal and
Non-Lethal Arrhythmia Detection and ST Segment Analysis. Received data is sent to the
Panorama Server for ECG processing via Ethernet. This information can be displayed,
trended, stored and printed at the Panorama Central Station.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
xvii
Introduction
Unpacking Information
Unpacking Information
The Panorama Patient Monitoring Network must be installed by a certified Service Technician
or authorized distributor. Please contact your authorized Service Representative for
additional information.
xviii
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Symbols and Descriptions
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
Attention, Consult
Accompanying
Touchscreen
Documents / Refer to Manual
Alternating Current (AC)
Alarm On
Defibrillator proof - type CF
Direct Current (DC)
Keyboard
Alarm Off
Mouse
Alarm Mute
Input/Output
Earth Ground
Speaker
Speaker Output
Monitor
Electrical Hazard
Battery type and position
Do not dispose of this product as
unsorted municipal waste.
FCC ID:
Federal Communication
XXXXXXXXX- Commission Registration
XXXXX
Panorama® Operating Instructions
equipment
Patient
Panorama Patient Network
Network
Ethernet
Central
Panorama Central Network
Network
Ethernet
Telemetry
Panorama Telemetry Network
Network
Wireless
Fuse (IEC)
Classified by Underwriter’s
Laboratories Inc.
Mark of compliance with U.S.
and Canadian safety standards
requirement.
Non-Ionizing Electromagnetic
Radiation
Identification Number
0070-10-0707-02
xix
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
A symbol designating compliance of the Panorama Central Station
Monitoring system with the Medical Device Directive (MDD)
93/42/EEC, as a Class IIb device.
A symbol designating compliance of the Telepack with the Medical
Device Directive (MDD) 93/42/EEC, as a Class IIb medical device
and compliance with the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive (R&TTE) 1995/5/EC as a Class 2 device.
A symbol designating compliance of the Panorama Central Station
tower and the Panorama Telemetry Server with the Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive and compliance of the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Network accessories to the Medical Device Directive
(MDD) as Class I devices.
Electrostatically sensitive
Type BF applied part
Protection against ingress of liquids (please refer to your device):
Not protected (ordinary)
Protection against splashing water
Technical Support
For technical assistance please contact your area or regional Service Representative.
Additional information relating to the installation, servicing and repair of the Panorama
Patient Monitoring Network is provided in the following documents:
Panorama WMTS Installation Guide (P/N 0070-00-0571)
Panorama Service Manual (P/N 0070-00-0634)
Panorama Printer Configuration Manual (P/N 0070--00-0561)
xx
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
1.0
System Overview
This section provides a high level view of the authorized components of the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Network.
• Licensing Key
• Supported Devices
• Troubleshooting
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
1-1
Licensing Key
1.1
System Overview
Licensing Key
The Panorama Central Station uses a licensing key to regulate the operation of the system.
The licensing key controls the following settings on the Panorama Central Station:
• Number of monitoring channels; up to 16
• Number of ST licenses
• Number of arrhythmia licenses
• Number of displays
• Storage hours of full disclosure (1 hour (default), 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours)
• 12-lead data management using a View 12™ card
• Activates the communication between the Panorama Central Station(s), the
ViewStation(s), and the WorkStation(s)
• Paging
For additional information regarding licensing keys, please have a system administrator
contact a Service Representative.
1-2
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Overview
1.2
Supported Devices
Supported Devices
The Panorama Patient Monitoring Network consists of two local area networks (LAN): a
Panorama Central Network (C-LAN) and a Panorama Patient Network (E-LAN). The C-LAN
manages stored patient data and controls the data flow between systems. The E-LAN
manages real-time data by controlling the flow of data that is transmitted to/from the bedside
monitors, and the Panorama Wireless Network.
The Network may include some or all of the following devices:
1.2.1
• Panorama Central Station
• Panorama Web Viewer
• Panorama ViewStation
• Passport 2® Bedside Monitor
• Panorama WorkStation
• Spectrum™ Bedside Monitor
• Panorama Telemetry Server
• Spectrum OR™ Bedside Monitor
• Panorama Wireless Transceiver
• Panorama Telepack
• Panorama Gateway
• Network Printer
Panorama Central Station
The Panorama Central Station is a device that monitors patients, collects and stores data,
and performs alarm notification. Multiple Panorama Central Stations can be networked with
other Panorama Central Stations using Ethernet via the C-LAN. Communication between the
C-LAN and the Panorama Patient Network is managed through the Panorama Central
Station. A maximum of two displays can be used with each Panorama Central Station.
1.2.2
Panorama ViewStation and WorkStation
The Panorama ViewStation provides the capability to display patient data (including digital
data and waveforms) with assigned monitoring equipment, to be viewed at a remote
location. Patient data is transmitted from a bedside or ambulatory monitoring device to a
central station on the C-LAN and is then transmitted to the ViewStation and the WorkStation,
if these remote workstations exist on the network. The central station, which transmits the
patient data, is referred to as the host central station.
All the patient information that can be displayed at the host central station can be seen at the
ViewStation and WorkStation once the patient is assigned to a patient tile at the remote
workstation. Minor configuration changes, such as Display and Wave Gain settings, can be
made directly from the ViewStation. However, changes to patient configuration settings such
as alarm settings or patient demographic information must be performed at the host central
station. More significant configuration changes can be made at the WorkStation, such as
changing alarm limits, alarm responses, and altering patient demographic information.
The ViewStation and the WorkStation may use either a single or dual display. Single display
setups can accommodate eight (8) or 12 patient tiles. Dual display setups can accommodate
up to eight (8) patient tiles per display, showing a maximum of 16 patient tiles between the
two displays.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
1-3
Supported Devices
1.2.3
System Overview
Panorama Telemetry Server
The Panorama Telemetry Server is provided when the Panorama Wireless Network is
required. It acts as a bridge to connect wireless monitoring devices, such as Telepacks or
wireless bedside monitors, to the Panorama Central Station. The Panorama Telemetry Server
receives data from the wireless monitoring devices and converts it into a protocol recognized
by the Panorama Central Station. For wireless communication in the Wireless Medical
Telemetry Service (WMTS) band, a Panorama Wireless Transceiver and radios are required,
which transmit and/or receive data to/from remote devices using WMTS communication.
For wireless communication in the Industrial Scientific Medical (ISM) band, access points and
radios are required, which transmit and/or receive data to/from remote devices using ISM
communication.
The Panorama Telemetry Server communicates with the following remote devices:
• Panorama Telepack-608 and Panorama Telepack-608 with Nonin SpO2 module
• Panorama Instrument Radio-2.4 and Panorama Instrument Radio-608
CAUTION:
1.2.4
The Panorama Telepack and Instrument Radio are wireless
devices and may be subject to intermittent signal dropout.
Panorama wireless devices are designed to perform with a
maximum cumulative signal dropout of one minute in a
24-hour period under ideal conditions. A crowded wireless
environment or interference from other medical or
non-medical devices, either intentional (e.g., VOIP phones,
pagers, asset tracking systems, etc.) or unintentional (e.g.,
AC motors, microwave ovens, paper shredders, etc.), may
result in a significantly increased amount of signal dropout
experienced by any one or multiple wireless device(s).
Panorama Wireless Transceiver
NOTE:
The Panorama Wireless Transceiver is used for WMTS
installations only.
The Panorama Wireless Transceiver and its components serve as a bridge between the
hardwired and the wireless infrastructures. A patient using instrument telemetry can transition
from hardwired to wireless, and back, while being monitored from the same screen location
at the central station. Communication for both hardwired and wireless monitoring is capable
of supporting coverage over large areas, or on different floors of the hospital.
The Panorama Wireless Transceiver and its components control the local wireless network,
and are responsible for:
• Providing protocol conversion for telemetry equipped Mindray DS USA products.
• Receiving control information and patient data from telemetry equipped Mindray DS USA
products.
• Sending control information to telemetry equipped Mindray DS USA products.
• Acting as a conduit for moving data between the wireless network and the hardwired
network via Panorama Telemetry Server.
1-4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Overview
Supported Devices
The Panorama Wireless Transceiver device contains four LED indicator lights. The indicator
lights function as follows:
DEVICE LABEL
LED COLOR
DESCRIPTION
Power
Green
Power is applied.
Fault
Red
There is a fault in the device configuration.
Configured
Yellow
The device is configured for use.
Status
Blue
The link between the Telemetry Server and the Wireless
Transceiver is not functioning.
CAUTION:
1.2.5
Operation of the wireless product requires the prior
coordination with a frequency coordinator designated by
the FCC for the Wireless Medical Telemetry Service.
Panorama Gateway
The Panorama Gateway enables hospitals to maintain a continuous and comprehensive
history of a patient’s clinical information through the use of electronic medical records (EMR).
Bi-directional communication through the Panorama Gateway enables Admit data transfer
between the C-LAN and the HIS/CIS.
Additional Information
For additional information regarding the Panorama Gateway, refer to ‘‘Communications with
the Panorama Gateway’’ on page 5-2.
1.2.6
Panorama Web Viewer
The Panorama Web Viewer software application provides remote intranet access to any
admitted patient on the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network.
Additional Information
For additional information regarding the Panorama Web Viewer application, refer to the
Panorama Web Viewer Operating Instructions (P/N 0070-00-0681-XX).
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
1-5
Supported Devices
1.2.7
System Overview
Passport 2® Bedside Monitor
Passport 2 bedside monitors are used to monitor patient data and may use either a
hardwired or a wireless (2.4 GHz or 608 MHz) configuration. The Passport 2 sends data to
the Panorama Central Station for analysis and storage via an Ethernet connection or
remotely via the Panorama Telemetry Server. The data collected by the Passport 2 is based
on the type of lead wire set and sensors used.
If an alarm in the following table does not have an associated footnote, it may occur using
any lead wire set.
Parameters/Waveforms
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA ALARMS
ECG/Heart Rate
Leads I, II, III are available with a 3-wire
lead set.
Low Heart Rate
High Heart Rate
Leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V are
available with a 5-wire lead set.
Leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2,
V3, V4, V5, V6 are available with a
View 12™ card.
(View 12 supported by Passport 2
hardwired and WMTS 608)
ST
ST analysis is in use at the bedside
device.
ST Single
ST Dual
PVC/min.
Arrhythmia analysis is in use at the
bedside device.
Asystole
Bigeminy
Brady2
Couplet
Irregular Heart Rate2
Pause1
High PVC
Run
Trigeminy
V-Fib
V-Rhythm
V-Tach
Respiration (Source:
ECG, CO2 and Gas3
Module)
Respiration is in use at the bedside and
is derived from a valid source.
Low Respiration
High Respiration
Apnea
SpO2
SpO2 sensor is in use at the bedside
device.
Low SpO2
High SpO2
IBP1/IBP2 (Systolic,
Diastolic, Mean)
IBPx option is in use at the bedside
device.
IBP parameter labels include IBP, Art,
UA, LV, PA, CVP, ICP, LA and RA. The
label used is based on the label selected
at the bedside monitor.
Low IBPx Systolic
High IBPx Systolic
Low IBPx Diastolic
High IBPx Diastolic
Low IBPx Mean
High IBPx Mean
NOTE:
INSP/ET CO2
1
2
3
1-6
x = 1 or 2
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
device.
High CO2 Inspired
Low CO2 End Tidal
High CO2 End Tidal
Alarm will only be detected when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm will not be detected when using a View 12™ card.
Waveform not supported when using a WMTS 608 bedside device.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Overview
Supported Devices
Parameters/Waveforms (Continued)
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA ALARMS
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
O2 Inspired
O2 End Tidal
INSP/ET N2O3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
N2O Inspired
N2O End Tidal
INSP/ET Iso3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Iso Inspired
Agent Iso End Tidal
3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Enf Inspired
Agent Enf End Tidal
INSP/ET Des3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Des Inspired
Agent Des End Tidal
INSP/ET Sev3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Sev Inspired
Agent Sev End Tidal
INSP/ET Hal3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Hal Inspired
Agent Hal End Tidal
INSP/ET Agent3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Inspired Alarm
Agent ET Alarm
NIBP (Systolic,
Diastolic, Mean,
Elapsed Time)
NIBP always displayed even if
parameter not monitored.
Low NIBP Systolic
High NIBP Systolic
Low NIBP Diastolic
High NIBP Diastolic
Low NIBP Mean
High NIBP Mean
Temp 1
Temperature sensor is in use at the
bedside monitor.
Low Temperature 1
High Temperature 1
INSP/ET O2
INSP/ET Enf
1
2
3
3
Alarm will only be detected when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm will not be detected when using a View 12™ card.
Waveform not supported when using a WMTS 608 bedside device.
Additional Information
For additional information regarding Passport 2® bedside monitors, refer to the Passport 2
Operating Instructions (P/N 0070-00-0649-XX).
For information regarding the parameters that can be monitored by the Passport 2, refer to
‘‘Parameter Specifications’’ on page 12-1.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
1-7
Supported Devices
1.2.8
System Overview
Spectrum™ Bedside Monitor
Spectrum bedside monitors are used to monitor patient data and may use either a hardwired
or a wireless (2.4 GHz or 608 MHz) configuration. Currently, the Spectrum sends data to the
Panorama Central Station for viewing and storage via an Ethernet connection. The data
collected by a Spectrum is dependent on the type of lead wire set and sensors used. If an
alarm in the following table does not have an associated footnote, it may occur using any
lead wire set.
NOTE:
The CO/CI, Temp 2, and T Blood parameters are only
available if they are being monitored by the Spectrum/
Spectrum OR External Parameter Module (EPM). These
parameters are not available if they are monitored by an
Edwards Vigilance® monitor.
Parameters/Waveforms
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA ALARMS
ECG/Heart Rate
Leads I, II, III are available with a 3-wire
lead set.
Low Heart Rate
High Heart Rate
Leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V are
available with a 5-wire lead set.
Leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2,
V3, V4, V5, V6 are available with a
View 12™ card.
ST
ST analysis is in use at the bedside
device.
ST Single
ST Dual
PVC/min.
Arrhythmia analysis is in use at the
bedside device.
Asystole
Bigeminy
Brady2
Couplet
Irregular Heart Rate2
Pause1
High PVC
Run
Trigeminy
V-Fib
V-Rhythm
V-Tach
Respiration (Source:
ECG, CO2 and Gas3
Module)
Respiration is in use at the bedside and
is derived from a valid source.
Low Respiration
High Respiration
Apnea
SpO2
SpO2 sensor is in use at the bedside
device.
Low SpO2
High SpO2
IBP1/IBP2/IBP3/IBP4
(Systolic, Diastolic,
Mean)
IBPx option is in use at the bedside
device.
IBP parameter labels include IBP, Art,
UA, LV, PA, CVP, ICP, LA and RA. The
label used is based on the label selected
at the bedside monitor.
Low IBPx Systolic
High IBPx Systolic
Low IBPx Diastolic
High IBPx Diastolic
Low IBPx Mean
High IBPx Mean
NOTE:
1
2
3
1-8
x = 1, 2, 3 or 4 (IBP3 and 4 are only available if the
Spectrum/Spectrum OR External Parameter Module
(EPM) is installed)
Alarm will only be detected when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm will not be detected when using a View 12™ card.
Waveform not supported when using a WMTS 608 bedside device.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Overview
Supported Devices
Parameters/Waveforms
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA ALARMS
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
device.
High CO2 Inspired
Low CO2 End Tidal
High CO2 End Tidal
INSP/ET O23
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
O2 Inspired
O2 End Tidal
INSP/ET N2O3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
N2O Inspired
N2O End Tidal
INSP/ET Iso3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Iso Inspired
Agent Iso End Tidal
INSP/ET Enf 3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Enf Inspired
Agent Enf End Tidal
INSP/ET Des3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Des Inspired
Agent Des End Tidal
INSP/ET Sev3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Sev Inspired
Agent Sev End Tidal
INSP/ET Hal 3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Hal Inspired
Agent Hal End Tidal
INSP/ET Agent3
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
monitor.
Agent Inspired Alarm
Agent ET Alarm
NIBP (Systolic,
Diastolic, Mean,
Elapsed Time)
NIBP always displayed even if
parameter not monitored.
Low NIBP Systolic
High NIBP Systolic
Low NIBP Diastolic
High NIBP Diastolic
Low NIBP Mean
High NIBP Mean
Temp 1/Temp 2
Temperature sensor is in use at the
bedside monitor.
Low Temperature 1
High Temperature 1
Low Temperature 2
High Temperature 2
Delta T
At least two temperature sensors in use
at the bedside. Spectrum/Spectrum OR
External Parameter Module (EPM) is
installed.
Low Delta T Alarm
High Delta T Alarm
Temp Blood
Spectrum/Spectrum OR External
Parameter Module (EPM) is in use at the
bedside.
Low T blood Alarm
High T blood Alarm
Pulmonary Artery
Wedge Pressure
(PAWP)
One IBP must be labeled PA.
New PAWP Measurement
CO
Spectrum/Spectrum OR External
Parameter Module (EPM) is in use at the
bedside.
New CO Measurement
INSP/ET
1
2
3
CO23
Alarm will only be detected when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm will not be detected when using a View 12™ card.
Waveform not supported when using a WMTS 608 bedside device.
Additional Information
For additional information regarding Spectrum™ bedside monitors, refer to the Spectrum
Operating Instructions (P/N 0070-00-0648-XX).
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
1-9
Supported Devices
1.2.9
System Overview
Spectrum OR™ Bedside Monitor
Similar to the Spectrum, Spectrum OR bedside monitors are used to monitor patient data and
send it to the Panorama Central Station for viewing and storage via an Ethernet connection.
The Spectrum OR requires a hardwired configuration. The data collected by a Spectrum OR
is dependent on the type of lead wire set and sensors used.
NOTE:
The CO/CI, Temp 2, and T Blood parameters are only
available if they are being monitored by the Spectrum/
Spectrum OR External Parameter Module (EPM). These
parameters are not available if they are monitored by an
Edwards Vigilance® monitor.
Parameters/Waveforms
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA ALARMS
ECG/Heart Rate
Leads I, II, III are available with a 3-wire
lead set.
Low Heart Rate
High Heart Rate
Leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V are
available with a 5-wire lead set.
ST
ST analysis is in use at the bedside
device.
ST Single
ST Dual
PVC/min.
Arrhythmia analysis is in use at the
bedside device.
Asystole
Bigeminy
Brady2
Couplet
Irregular Heart Rate2
Pause1
High PVC
Run
Trigeminy
V-Fib
V-Rhythm
V-Tach
Respiration (Source:
ECG, CO2 and Gas
Module)
Respiration is in use at the bedside and
is derived from a valid source.
Low Respiration
High Respiration
Apnea
SpO2
SpO2 sensor is in use at the bedside
device.
Low SpO2
High SpO2
IBP1/IBP2/IBP3/IBP4
(Systolic, Diastolic,
Mean)
IBPx option is in use at the bedside
device.
IBP parameter labels include IBP, Art,
UA, LV, PA, CVP, ICP, LA and RA. The
label used is based on the label selected
at the bedside monitor.
Low IBPx Systolic
High IBPx Systolic
Low IBPx Diastolic
High IBPx Diastolic
Low IBPx Mean
High IBPx Mean
NOTE:
1 - 10
x = 1, 2, 3 or 4 (IBP3 and 4 are only available if the
Spectrum/Spectrum OR External Parameter Module
(EPM) is installed)
INSP/ET CO2
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
device.
High CO2 Inspired
Low CO2 End Tidal
High CO2 End Tidal Rate
INSP/ET O2
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
device.
O2 Inspired
O2 End Tidal
INSP/ET N2O
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
device.
N2O Inspired
N2O End Tidal
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Overview
Supported Devices
Parameters/Waveforms
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA ALARMS
INSP/ET Iso
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
device.
Agent Iso Inspired
Agent Iso End Tidal
INSP/ET Enf
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
device.
Agent Enf Inspired
Agent Enf End Tidal
INSP/ET Des
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
device.
Agent Des Inspired
Agent Des End Tidal
INSP/ET Sev
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
device.
Agent Sev Inspired
Agent Sev End Tidal
INSP/ET Hal
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
device.
Agent Hal Inspired
Agent Hal End Tidal
INSP/ET Agent
Gas Module is in use at the bedside
device.
Agent Inspired Alarm
Agent ET Alarm
NIBP (Systolic,
Diastolic, Mean,
Elapsed Time)
NIBP always displayed even if
parameter not monitored.
Low NIBP Systolic
High NIBP Systolic
Low NIBP Diastolic
High NIBP Diastolic
Low NIBP Mean
High NIBP Mean
Temp 1/Temp 2
Temperature sensor is in use at the
bedside monitor.
Low Temperature 1
High Temperature 1
Low Temperature 2
High Temperature 2
Delta T
At least two temperature sensors in use
at the bedside. Spectrum/Spectrum OR
External Parameter Module (EPM) is
installed.
Low Delta T Alarm
High Delta T Alarm
Temp Blood
Spectrum/Spectrum OR External
Parameter Module (EPM) is in use at the
bedside.
Low T blood Alarm
High T blood Alarm
Pulmonary Artery
Wedge Pressure
(PAWP)
One IBP must be labeled PA.
New PAWP Measurement
CO
Spectrum/Spectrum OR External
Parameter Module (EPM) is in use at the
bedside.
New CO Measurement
Additional Information
For additional information regarding Spectrum OR™ bedside monitors, refer to the Spectrum
OR Operating Instructions (P/N 0070-00-0670-XX).
For information regarding the parameters that can be monitored by the Spectrum OR, refer to
the ‘‘Parameter Specifications’’ on page 12-1.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
1 - 11
Supported Devices
1.2.10
System Overview
Panorama Telepack
The Panorama Telepack is a portable, wireless patient telemetry unit that can operate for an
extended period of time on a disposable battery source. It can measure 3 or 5 Lead ECG
and can also report on SpO2 data when the optional SpO2 module is attached. Telepack
models are available for transmission at either 2.4 GHz (802.11 b/g) or 608MHz (WMTS
band), depending on the region of use. Unless otherwise specified, “Telepack” refers to the
Panorama Telepack-2.4 (2.4 GHz) and Telepack-608 (608 MHz) models.
The Telepack provides basic remote ECG monitoring of a patient, which includes heart rate,
ST, PVC, and arrhythmia. The Telepack sends data to the Panorama Central Station for
analysis and storage. The type of data that can be collected by a Telepack is dependent on
the type of lead wire set and options configured for the connected patient.
Panorama Telepack-2.4
The Telepack-2.4 utilizes the 2.4 GHz wireless band (802.11 b/g). The Telepack-2.4 does
not require a Panorama Server. It communicates directly to the appropriate Panorama
Central Station via a wireless Access Point network installed throughout the specified
coverage area. These Access Points interface with the Panorama Central Station using
Ethernet components.
Panorama Telepack-608
The WMTS Telepack utilizes the 608MHz wireless bands using a frequency division multiple
access method. The Telepack has the capability to transmit to the Panorama Server through
an antenna network installed throughout the specified coverage area.
Panorama Telepack with Nonin SpO2 Module
The Telepack may also monitor SpO2 if the Nonin SpO2 module is connected to the Telepack
device. The module measures functional oxygen saturation of arterial hemoglobin (% SpO2)
and pulse rate (bpm) for adult patients.
NOTE:
The Panorama Central Station is used to program,
configure, monitor and collect data for the Panorama
Telepacks.
Parameters/Waveforms
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PANORAMA
ALARMS
ECG/Heart Rate
Waveform leads I, II, III are available with a 3-wire
lead set.
Low Heart Rate
High Heart Rate
Waveform leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V are
available with a 5-wire lead set.
ST
*)
1 - 12
ST analysis is enabled
ST Single
ST Dual
Alarm only available when the Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module is connected
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Overview
Supported Devices
Parameters/Waveforms
PANORAMA
ALARMS
PARAMETERS
SETTINGS
PVC/min.
Arrhythmia analysis is enabled
Asystole
Bigeminy
Brady2
Couplet
Irregular Heart Rate
High PVC
Run
Trigeminy
V-Fib
V-Rhythm
V-Tach
SpO2
Telepack with Nonin SpO2 Module
Low SpO2*
High SpO2*
*)
Alarm only available when the Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module is connected
Additional Information
For information regarding how to program and configure a Panorama Telepack, refer to the
‘‘Wireless Tab’’ on page 9-62.
For additional information regarding Panorama Telepacks, refer to ‘‘Telepack (Optional)’’ on
page 10-1.
For additional information regarding the Nonin SpO2 Module, refer to the ‘‘Telepack with
Nonin SpO2 Module (Optional)’’ on page 10-10.
For information regarding the care and maintenance of a Panorama Telepack, refer to ‘‘User
Maintenance’’ on page 11-1.
For information regarding the parameters monitored by a Panorama Telepack, refer to
‘‘Parameter Specifications’’ on page 12-1.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
1 - 13
Supported Devices
1.2.11
System Overview
Network Printer
The Network Printer provides a vehicle for printing collected data from the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Network. One Panorama Central Station is capable of supporting up to two
printers.
The following network printers are approved for use with the Panorama Central Station:
• HP LaserJet 4050n
• HP LaserJet 4100n
• HP LaserJet 4200n
• HP LaserJet 4250n
• HP LaserJet 4350n
• HP LaserJet P4015n
NOTE:
The HP LaserJet 4250n/4350n printer is intended for use
with Panorama software version 8.2.5 or higher.
Additional Information
For information regarding the setup and configuration of a printer with the Panorama Central
Station, refer to the Panorama Printer Configuration Manual (P/N 0070-00-0561).
1 - 14
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Overview
1.3
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential issues that may occur with the monitor.
MESSAGE/ISSUES *
REASON
SOLUTION
Wandering ECG
Respiration artifact.
Try a different base line lead
configuration.
Noisy ECG traces
Loose or dry electrodes.
Apply new electrodes.
Defective electrode wires.
Replace wires as necessary.
Patient cable or leads are routed
too close to other electrical
devices.
Eliminate 60Hz interference. Use
ECG cable with built-in filter block.
Low Amplitude ECG
Electrode could be positioned
over a bone or muscle mass.
Reposition electrodes. Select ECG
SIZE button.
Excessive Electrosurgical
Interference
Inadequate skin prep prior to
application of electrode.
Repeat skin prep and electrode
placement procedures.
Add additional gel to electrodes.
Intermittent Signal
Connections not tight and
properly secured.
Ensure proper connection.
(Electrode to lead, lead to cable,
cable to monitor.)
Electrodes dry.
Reprep skin and apply fresh moist
electrodes.
Cable or lead wires damaged.
Check with continuity tester.
Electrodes dry.
Reprep skin and apply fresh, moist
electrodes.
Alarm limits set too close to
patient's normal heart rate.
Readjust.
Rwave wrong size.
Must be twice the amplitude of
other part of wave form.
Excessive patient movement or
muscle tremor.
Reposition electrodes and secure
with tape if necessary.
Gain set too low. (Set through
SIZE button.)
Readjust as required.
Skin improperly prepared.
Abrade skin.
Possibly not patient's normal
complex.
Check with 12 lead
electrocardiogram.
Electrode could be positioned
over a bone or muscle mass.
Reposition electrodes.
Waveforms Not Moving
FREEZE button may have been
pressed.
Select the FREEZE button to
unfreeze the trace.
Temperature Probes not
Working
Poor contact from probes to body.
Check the body surface contact at
the probe tip. Reposition or apply
thermoconductive gel.
Display Appears to be
Off
Mains power switch may not be
on.
Check main power switch on side
panel.
Unit may not be plugged into an
AC outlet.
Check power cord (Is it plugged
in?).
If used as a portable, battery
pack may be drained.
If battery pack is drained, plug
into an AC outlet to recharge the
battery. A period of 16 hours is
required for a full charge.
Excessive alarms: heart
rate, lead fault
Low Amplitude ECG
Signal
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
1 - 15
Troubleshooting
System Overview
MESSAGE/ISSUES *
REASON
SOLUTION
Disabled Alarm Tone,
QRS Tone or Other
Function
MUTE button pressed.
Check for alarm mute symbol and
message.
Beep volume low.
Increase beep volume.
ECG Base Line With No
Wave form
The Gain control is not set high
enough. Set through SIZE button.
Readjust as required.
Lead wires and patient cable not
fully inserted into proper
receptacle.
Check insertion.
Cable or lead wires damaged.
Check with lead continuity tester.
Patient moving excessively.
Secure lead wires and cable to
patient.
Base Line Wander
Damped Invasive Wave
form
No waveform for an
invasive BP
Reposition electrodes
Electrodes dry.
Reprep skin and apply fresh moist
electrodes.
Static build up around patient.
Check with hospital engineer.
Air bubbles in tubing.
Eliminate air from tubing.
Kinked catheter.
Slightly alter position of catheter.
Catheter against wall of blood
vessel.
Check for leaks at connector.
Blood in tubing.
Pump pressure bag up to 300
mmHg.
Improper attachment of
transducer to monitor.
Check transducer connection.
Faulty transducer.
Try a different transducer.
Recorder Report is Blank
Thermal paper may be installed
incorrectly. (upside down)
Remove paper and reinstall with
paper feeding off of the spool
from the bottom.
Resp. Wave form Too
Large
Scales set inappropriately.
Change lead selection.
Resp. Wave form Too
Small
Patient breathing shallow or
turned on side.
Scale set inappropriately.
Change lead selection
False Apnea Alarm
Apnea delay may be improperly
set. Patient may be having
frequent episodes of CVA.
Choose another apnea delay.
Scale size may be too low.
Reposition electrodes to better
detect respirations.
Due to increased impedance.
Chest hair under electrodes.
Prep chest.
CHK Lead
CVA
*
1 - 16
Patient's respiration.
Dried electrode gel.
Change electrodes.
Electrode off.
Replace electrode.
Lead off.
Replace lead.
Cracked lead wires.
Replace lead wires.
Poor skin prep.
Clean and abrade skin before
applying electrodes.
Can be caused by shallow
breathing or an apnea event.
Check the patient
Adjust scales or leads if necessary.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Overview
Troubleshooting
MESSAGE/ISSUES *
REASON
SOLUTION
No Resp. Wave form or
Rate Displayed
Patient not connected to a patient
safety cable.
Turn respiration on (“OFF” will be
displayed in Resp. window).
Check that proper patient cable is
used.
Patient connected using Patient
ESIS Choke/Cable.
Use 3-wire lead Patient Cable non ESIS.
BAD CARD
View 12™ card is not the correct
version or the card data has
become corrupt.
Obtain replacement card.
Artifact
View 12™ card is detecting
muscle artifact or electrical
interference from auxiliary
devices.
Check leads, follow skin
preparation procedure.
Check for electrical interferences,
replace wires as necessary.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
1 - 17
Troubleshooting
System Overview
This page intentionally left blank.
1 - 18
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
2.0
Getting Started
This section provides an overview of the Panorama Central Station, the ViewStation and the
WorkStation.
•
The Panorama Central Station
•
The ViewStation and the WorkStation
•
The Main Screen
•
Common Controls and Elements
•
Quick Reference Guide
•
Troubleshooting
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2-1
The Panorama Central Station
2.1
Getting Started
The Panorama Central Station
The Panorama Central Station collects patient data from both wireless and hardwired devices
and displays it based on its configured settings. Data is collected from the bedside monitors
(Passport 2®/Spectrum™) and Panorama Telepacks (2.4 GHz and 608 Mhz).The type of
data that is collected and viewed is determined by the monitoring device and the selected
parameters.
The Panorama Central Station uses either a single or dual display. Single display setups can
accommodate eight (8) or 12 patient tiles. Dual display setups can accommodate up to eight
(8) patient tiles per display, showing a maximum of 16 patient tiles between the two displays.
The full screen display (shown in FIGURE 2-1) includes patient tiles for viewing patient data
and a menu bar for navigating the system.
NOTE:
The Paging menu button will only be displayed if the Paging
option has been installed.
Patient Tiles
Menu Bar
FIGURE 2-1 Full Screen Display (Central Station with Paging Option Installed)
2-2
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
The Panorama Central Station
The Panorama Central Station uses a split-screen display (shown in FIGURE 2-2) to allow
users to simultaneously enter patient information, and monitor patient data. The top half of
the screen displays patient data, while the bottom half of the screen is converted to a work
space for entering and modifying patient information.
Patient Tiles
Tab
Menu
Bar
FIGURE 2-2 Split-Screen Display (Central Station with Paging Option Installed)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2-3
The ViewStation and the WorkStation
2.2
Getting Started
The ViewStation and the WorkStation
The ViewStation and the WorkStation may display patient tiles from other Panorama Central
Stations on the network from a remote location(s). The host central station’s Panorama
Central Network (C-LAN) configuration settings, and the software that is installed at the
remote location, determine the level of functionality available for each patient tile. A hospital
area or department may also choose to restrict remote location access to its patient tiles by
configuring its C-LAN configuration settings to off.
NOTE:
C-LAN configuration settings are established by the System
Administrator and are based on the needs of the individual
hospital or hospital area.
The host central station C-LAN configuration settings available are:
HOST CENTRAL STATION C-LAN
NETWORK SETTING
2-4
REMOTE LOCATION PATIENT TILE
Full
Patient tiles from the host central station will have
full interactive functionality when using a
WorkStation or view-only functionality when
using a ViewStation.
View Only
Patient tiles from the host central station will have
view-only functionality regardless of the software
installed at the remote location.
Off
Patient tiles from the host central station cannot
be seen from any remote location.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
The ViewStation and the WorkStation
Patient Tiles
Menu Bar
FIGURE 2-3 Full Screen Display (ViewStation and WorkStation)
The full screen display (shown in FIGURE 2-3) includes patient tiles for viewing patient data
and a menu bar for navigating the system.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
The Network and Mute All menu bar buttons are only
displayed at the ViewStation and the WorkStation.
0070-10-0707-02
2-5
The ViewStation and the WorkStation
Getting Started
The ViewStation and the WorkStation use a split-screen display (shown in FIGURE 2-4) to
allow users to view patient information and monitor patient data. The top half of the screen
displays patient data, while the bottom half of the screen is used to view patient data in more
detail.
Patient Tiles
Tab
Menu
Bar
FIGURE 2-4 Split-Screen Display (ViewStation)
2-6
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
2.3
The Main Screen
The Main Screen
The Main Screen for the Panorama Central Station, the ViewStation, and the WorkStation is
used to monitor patient data and to navigate the system.
The Main Screen includes the following elements:
2.3.1
•
Patient Tiles (shown in FIGURE 2-1/FIGURE 2-2)
•
Menu Bar (shown in FIGURE 2-1/FIGURE 2-2)
•
Tabs (shown in FIGURE 2-2)
Patient Tiles
Patient tiles (shown in FIGURE 2-5) are the core elements of the Panorama system. Patient
tiles display patient information and data that is obtained from an external monitoring
device. One patient and one monitoring device are assigned to each patient tile. The number
of active patient tiles displayed at the Panorama Central Station is dependent on the number
of patient tiles that were purchased with the system.
Each patient tile is divided into the following sections:
•
VIEW/MUTE Button
•
Care Group Indicator
•
Digital Data Tile
•
REC Button
•
Patient Status Line
•
Waveform Data Tile
l
VIEW/MUTE Button
Care Group Indicator
REC Button
Patient Status Line
Waveform Data Tile
Digital Data Tile
FIGURE 2-5 Patient Tile
For information regarding admitting a patient to the Panorama Central Station, refer to
‘‘Auto-Admitting a Patient’’ on page 2-21. For information regarding the assignment of
monitoring devices to a patient tile, refer to the ‘‘Equipment Setup Tab’’ on page 9-33.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2-7
The Main Screen
Getting Started
VIEW/MUTE Button
The VIEW/MUTE buttons share the same location within the patient tile. The button that is
displayed is dependant on the operating state of the patient tile. During normal operating
conditions, the VIEW button (shown in FIGURE 2-5) is displayed in the patient tile. During an
alarm condition, the MUTE button is displayed in the patient tile.
NOTE:
The MUTE button is not available at the ViewStation or the
WorkStation.
The VIEW button is available in a patient tile when no alarm conditions exist. When the
VIEW button is selected, the full-screen display changes to the split-screen mode and
provides access to the Bedside, Trends, Events, Disclosure and ST tabs.
TAB
PURPOSE
Bedside
Provides an expanded view of a patient’s digital and waveform data.
Trends
Provides list and graphic views of a patient’s historical digital data.
Events
Provides a list of the events that have occurred for a patient tile. If
waveform data is associated with an event it may also be viewed in
the Events tab.
Disclosure
Provides a view of a patient’s historical waveform data. Data may be
displayed in a compressed or magnified view.
ST
Allows for the configuration and display of a patient’s ST data.
The MUTE button is available in the patient tile when an alarm condition exists. The MUTE
button silences the audio portion of a patient alarm for the configured time period.
Care Group Indicator
The Care Group indicator (shown in FIGURE 2-5) is a rectangular bar that represents the
care group to which a patient tile is assigned. Colors can be assigned to care group
indicators. A black indicator is displayed if a patient tile is not assigned to a care group.
For additional information regarding care groups, refer to the ‘‘Care Group Tab’’ on page
9-9.
NOTE:
2-8
Colorized Care Group indicators are not available at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
The Main Screen
Digital Data Tile
The digital data tile (shown in FIGURE 2-5) may include the following patient information:
•
Digital data measurements
Examples of digital data parameters include: Heart Rate, Respiration, SpO2,
Temperature, NIBP, PVC, and ST. The parameters available to a patient tile are
dependent on the selected monitoring device.
Digital data is shown in the color assigned to the parameter.
•
Alarms on/Alarms off icon
•
ST analysis icon
•
Arrhythmia analysis icon
•
Heart Rate parameter lead
For information regarding supported devices and the parameters measured by each, refer to
‘‘Supported Devices’’ on page 1-3. For information regarding the parameters displayed in
the digital data tile, refer to ‘‘Parameter Specifications’’ on page 12-2.
The following table lists the icons that may be shown in a digital data tile.
Digital Data Icons
ICON
MEANING
All of the alarms for the selected patient are enabled.
At least one alarm for the selected parameter is disabled.
Arrhythmia analysis is active for the selected patient. This icon is only
applicable to the Heart Rate tile.
ST analysis is active for the selected patient. This icon is only applicable to
the Heart Rate tile.
Lead labels for the Heart Rate parameter include I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V,
V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6, depending on the lead set used. This icon is
only applicable to the Heart Rate tile. For additional information, refer to
‘‘Parameter Specifications’’ on page 12-2.
Lead labels are always shown in the Heart Rate tile when an ECG lead is
used.
During an alarm condition, the parameter’s digital data tile flashes in the color that is
associated with its assigned alarm priority.
•
The digital data flashes in red when a Priority 1 alarm occurs.
•
The digital data tile flashes in yellow when a Priority 2 alarm occurs.
•
The data is displayed in yellow (constant, not flashing) when a Priority 3 alarm occurs.
REC Button
The REC button (shown in FIGURE 2-5) prints an All Strips Report for the selected patient tile.
Selecting the REC button sends a print request to the Print Status tab and prints an All
Strips Report. The All Strips Report provides real-time monitoring data for the selected patient.
For additional information, refer to the ‘‘All Strips Report’’ on page 8-2.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2-9
The Main Screen
Getting Started
Patient Status Line
The Patient Status line (shown in FIGURE 2-5) displays patient demographic information,
physiological event messages and technical event messages. Demographic information (Last
Name, First Name, Bed, ID) is only shown if it was provided. Demographic information is
displayed as configured in the Unit Choices tab.
The following guidelines regulate the display of messages in the Patient Status line:
•
A patient’s demographic information, if available, is displayed in white text.
•
All Alarm Priority 1 physiological messages are displayed in red text.
•
Alarm Priority 2/3 physiological messages are displayed in yellow text.
•
Mute Time messages, if alarms have been silenced, are displayed in the color
associated with the alarm priority.
•
Technical event messages are displayed in white text.
Waveform Data Tile
The Waveform Data tile (shown in FIGURE 2-5) displays the waveform data that was selected
for the patient tile. The Waveform Data portion of a patient tile is capable of displaying up to
two of the following waveform data parameters: ECG, Pleth, Respiration, IBP, O2, and
Agent. The available parameters are dependant on the selected monitoring device. For
information regarding supported devices, and parameters measured, refer to ‘‘Supported
Devices’’ on page 1-3.
Waveforms display in a patient tile using the following guidelines:
•
Each waveform tile includes its own baseline.
•
Waveforms are shown in a patient’s configured color, wave gain, pacer enhancement
and filter settings. If individual configurations are not set, the system default settings are
used.
For information regarding the selection of patient waveform data, refer to the ‘‘Display Tab’’
on page 5-40. For information regarding the parameters that can be shown in the waveform
tile, refer to ‘‘Parameter Specifications’’ on page 12-2.
2.3.2
Menu Bar
The Panorama Central Station, ViewStation, and the WorkStation menu bars (shown in
FIGURE 2-6, FIGURE 2-7, and FIGURE 2-8) are used to view the system status, provide
navigation for the application, and view the system time and date. All menu bars are fixed at
the bottom of the screen.
2 - 10
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
The Main Screen
Menu bar selections include:
•
System Status Line
•
Menu Buttons
•
System Date/Time
System Status Line
System Date/Time
Menu
Buttons
FIGURE 2-6 Panorama Central Station Menu Bar
System Status Line
System Date/Time
Menu
Buttons
FIGURE 2-7 Panorama Central Station Menu Bar - Paging Option Enabled
System Date/Time
System Status Line
Menu
Buttons
FIGURE 2-8 ViewStation and WorkStation Menu Bar
System Status Line
The System Status line (shown in FIGURE 2-7) displays messages regarding the status of the
individual central station, ViewStation, or WorkStation. The System Status line is located
above the menu buttons, in the menu bar. System status messages refer to the operation of
the system. For a listing of System Status messages, refer to ‘‘System Event Messages and
Error Codes’’ on page 13-16.
Menu Buttons
Menu buttons (shown in FIGURE 2-7) provide access to additional interactive screens. When
a menu button is selected, a series of corresponding tabs is opened. The tabs that are
displayed will vary depending on whether the patient tile is accessed from the central station,
ViewStation, or from a WorkStation. For specific information related to a specific tab or
button, refer to the appropriate chapter in this book or to the book index.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2 - 11
The Main Screen
Getting Started
Table 2-1 provides a list of the tabs that are associated with each menu button.
TABLE 2-1
BUTTON
PURPOSE
Patient Setup
Provides access to the following tabs:
Patient Alarms
Report
•
The Demographics tab is used to enter and modify patient
demographic information (i.e, Last name, First name, ID, Bed,
Height, Weight, etc.).
•
The Transfer tab is used to move patient information from tile
to tile within a Panorama Central Station or between central
stations.
•
The Discharge tab is used to remove a patient from centralized
monitoring.
•
The Display tab is used to select the parameter information
displayed in a patient tile.
•
The Standby tab is used to temporarily suspend monitoring
while preserving patient settings and historical data.
•
The Wave Gain tab is used to adjust the wave gain used for
displayed patient waveforms.
•
The Print Setup tab is used to select the parameters that are
printed in a patient report.
Provides access to the following tabs:
•
The Patient Alarm Setup tab is an optional,
password-protected tab used to restrict access to the Patient
Alarm Limits and Alarm Responses tabs.
•
The Alarm Limits tab is used to set a patient alarm limit
thresholds.
•
The Alarm Responses tab is used to configure system
behaviors during alarm conditions.
Provides access to the following tabs:
•
The Patient Reports tab is used to request patient-specific
reports.
•
The System Reports tab is used to request system reports.
•
The Print Status tab is used to display the list of print requests
that have been made and the status of each request.
*
Disable ECG is available on version 8.7.1 and above.
** Indicates button is not available at the ViewStation or the WorkStation
*** Indicates button is only available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation
2 - 12
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
The Main Screen
TABLE 2-1
BUTTON
PURPOSE
System Setup
Provides access to the following tabs:
•
The Parameter Color tab is used to create the system default
color and parameter assignment.
•
The Print Setup tab is used to assign a system default printer
for report printing.
•
The Touch Screen tab is used to turn the touch screen on and
off and recalibrate the touchscreen display.
•
The Installation Setup tab is a password-protected tab used
to restrict access to the following tabs:
• The Care Group tab is used to create the system level care
group assignment.
• The Volume tab is used to adjust system default volume levels
for physiological alarms.
• The System Alarms tab is used to create system default
settings for alarms.
• The Passwords tab is used to create passwords that control
access to the system.
• The Equipment Setup tab is used to enter information
regarding external monitoring devices used with the
Panorama Central Station.
• The More/Previous tab is used to navigate to the forward
and backward between the sets of System Setup tabs.
• The Date/Time tab is used to select the system default date
and time formats.
• The Unit Priorities tab is used to establish the system default
order of parameters.
• The Unit Choices tab is used to adjust the system default
settings for Discharge at Bedside, Pacer Enhancement, Pacer
Reject, Paging Demographics, Paging Password Protection,
Demographic Line information, Disable ECG*, Height,
Weight, Temperature, CO2, and Trend Display.
• The Wave Gain tab is used to adjust the system default
wave gain setting for displaying waveforms.
• The Wireless tab is used to program wireless monitoring
devices.
** Paging (Optional)
The Paging tab allows for the configuration of pager information for
a Panorama Central Station that has the paging option enabled.
NOTE:
*** Network
When using a dual display setup, the
Paging menu bar button will be
disabled if the Paging tab is active on
the other display.
Provides access to the following tab:
•
The Network tab is used to access and select monitored
patients on the Panorama Central Network (C-LAN) for viewing
at a ViewStation or a WorkStation.
*
Disable ECG is available on version 8.7.1 and above.
** Indicates button is not available at the ViewStation or the WorkStation
*** Indicates button is only available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2 - 13
The Main Screen
Getting Started
TABLE 2-1
BUTTON
PURPOSE
** Mute All (Optional)
This button does not provide access to any tab. When selected, the
Mute All button silences the audio alarms for all patient tiles at a
ViewStation or a WorkStation for the configured amount of time. The
Mute All button does not affect the audio or visual alarm indicators
at the bedside monitor or at the host central station.
Print
The Print button provides an additional method to print patient
information and reports.
NOTE:
The Print menu bar button will be
disabled when in the Normal
Screen mode.
*
Disable ECG is available on version 8.7.1 and above.
** Indicates button is not available at the ViewStation or the WorkStation
*** Indicates button is only available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation
System Date/Time
The System Date/Time (shown in FIGURE 2-6, FIGURE 2-7, and FIGURE 2-8) portion of
the menu bar displays the system’s date/time information. The system date/time is displayed
in the format selected in the Date/Time tab. For additional information regarding the time
and date formats available, refer to ‘‘Date/Time Tab’’ on page 9-41.
2.3.3
Tabs
Tabs (shown in FIGURE 2-9) are used to access different screens associated with the
Panorama Central Station, ViewStation, and the WorkStation. Tabs are accessed using menu
buttons, or the patient tile VIEW button. Each tab includes sidebar buttons for expanded
functionality.
Tabs
Sidebar
Buttons
FIGURE 2-9 Tab Architecture
2 - 14
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
2.3.4
The Main Screen
Sidebar Buttons
Sidebar buttons (shown in FIGURE 2-9) are used to perform an action (such as suspend
alarms, enable arrhythmia, or return to the Normal Screen mode), add functionality to the
tab (such as Skip to, Graphic, and Alarm Responses), or change the contents of the tab (such
as Alarm Responses or Alarm Limits).
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2 - 15
Common Controls and Elements
2.4
Getting Started
Common Controls and Elements
This section provides information regarding several types of controls and elements that are
used throughout the system.
Common controls and elements include:
•
Buttons
•
Progress Bar
•
Message Dialog Boxes
•
Keyboard Dialog Box
•
Keypad Dialog Box
•
Weight Dial Dialog
•
Height Dial Dialog
Buttons
Buttons provide additional options or perform an action when selected. For example:
•
To perform an action. This type of button temporarily changes its appearance to indicate
that it has been selected.
FIGURE 2-10 illustrates the change in appearance for an Action button before and after
it is selected.
Unselected
Selected
Unselected
Selected
FIGURE 2-10 Action Buttons
•
To enable/disable a function. This type of button changes its appearance to indicate if
the function is enabled or disabled.
FIGURE 2-11 illustrates the change in appearance for a Function (or latched) button
before and after it is selected. When one of these buttons is selected, its function will
remain in effect until the button is released. In the first example shown in FIGURE 2-11,
the alarms will be suspended until the button is unselected.
Unselected
Selected
Unselected
Selected
FIGURE 2-11 Function and Check Box Buttons
2 - 16
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
Common Controls and Elements
Progress Bar
The Panorama Central Station uses progress bars to indicate the progress of a lengthy
operation.
FIGURE 2-12 Progress Bar
Message Dialog Boxes
The Panorama Central Station uses message dialog boxes to verify an action (shown in
FIGURE 2-13) and to provide information (shown in FIGURE 2-14).
A Question message dialog box contains Yes and No buttons.
•
The Yes button confirms the action, closes the message box and enables all applicable
sidebar buttons.
•
The No button cancels the action, closes the dialog box and enables applicable controls
and sidebar buttons.
FIGURE 2-13 Message Dialog Box (Question)
An Informational message dialog box contains an OK button.
The OK button closes the message box and enables all applicable controls and sidebar
buttons.
FIGURE 2-14 Message Dialog Box (Informational)
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
All controls are disabled when a Message dialog box is
displayed.
0070-10-0707-02
2 - 17
Common Controls and Elements
Getting Started
Keyboard Dialog Box
The Panorama Central Station uses a keyboard dialog box (shown in FIGURE 2-15) to enter
and edit alphanumeric information. The buttons on the keyboard dialog box are similar to a
standard computer keyboard.
NOTE:
Tab controls are disabled when the keyboard dialog box is
displayed.
Field
Name
Edit Box
Caps Lock Indicator
FIGURE 2-15 Keyboard Dialog Box
The keyboard dialog box includes:
•
The name of the selected field
•
An Edit box to show the entered value
•
A Close button to discard changes
•
An Enter button to accept changes
•
A Backspace (<==) button to clear a single character in the edit box
•
A Caps Lock button to enable or disable caps lock
A Caps Lock indicator is shown when Caps Lock is enabled.
Keypad Dialog Box
The Panorama Central Station uses the keypad dialog box (shown in FIGURE 2-16) to enter
and edit numeric information. The buttons in the keypad dialog box are similar to a standard
calculator.
NOTE:
2 - 18
Tab controls are disabled when the keypad dialog box is
displayed.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
Common Controls and Elements
Field Name
Edit Box
Acceptable Range
FIGURE 2-16 Keypad Dialog Box
The keypad dialog box includes:
•
The name of the selected field
•
An Edit box to show the entered value
•
The acceptable range of values
•
A Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the edit box
•
A CE button to delete a single number from the edit box
•
A Cancel button to discard changes
•
An OK button to accept changes
Weight Dial Dialog
The Weight dial dialog can be used to quickly set the pounds and ounces (Neonate patient
size only) for a patient’s weight.
Field Name
Current Weight
Dial Controls
FIGURE 2-17 Weight Dial Dialog (Spectrum bedside device, Neonate patient size)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2 - 19
Common Controls and Elements
Getting Started
Field Name
Current Weight
Dial Control
Adjustment Buttons
FIGURE 2-18 Weight Dial Dialog (Passport 2 bedside device, all patient sizes)
The Weight dial dialog includes:
•
The name of the selected field
•
A text box to show the selected value
•
A dial control to select the weight
• Turn in a clockwise direction to sequentially increase the numeric value
• Turn in a counter-clockwise direction to sequentially decrease the numeric value
•
Adjustment buttons to sequentially increase or decrease the numeric value
•
A Done button to accept changes
•
A Cancel button to discard changes
Height Dial Dialog
The Height dial dialog functions similarly to the Weight dial dialog. For additional
information, refer to the Weight Dial Dialog.
2 - 20
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
2.5
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
The quick reference guide provides abbreviated procedural information for the operation of
the Panorama Central Station.
For additional information, refer to the Panorama Quick Reference Guide
(P/N 0002-08-7538).
Quick reference procedures include:
• Auto-Admitting a Patient
• Standby
• Discharge
• Display
• Patient Alarms (Limits and Responses)
• Viewing List Trends
• Viewing Events
• Viewing Disclosure Data
NOTE:
2.5.1
Demographic information is bi-directionally shared between
the bedside monitor and the Panorama Central Station.
Auto-Admitting a Patient
Auto-admit allows for the immediate monitoring of a patient at the Panorama Central Station.
To auto-admit a patient:
1. Verify that the monitoring device is in the Equipment List. For information on how to
access the Equipment List, refer to the “Equipment Setup Tab” on page 9-33.
2. Connect/attach the monitoring device to the patient.
3. Turn on the monitoring device. The monitoring device begins monitoring the patient. The
parameters that are monitored are dependent on the monitoring device.
4. Verify that the patient is being monitored at the central station.
NOTE:
2.5.2
Auto-admit uses the system default settings for monitoring
the patient.
Standby
Standby mode suspends the monitoring of a patient at the Panorama Central Station while
retaining the patient’s historical data and setup priorities. It is important that a patient in this
mode be alternatively monitored. The Standby tab is also available at the WorkStation.
To activate Standby mode at the central station or the WorkStation:
1. Select the Patient Setup menu button.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
3. Select the Standby tab.
• The Panorama Standby Only button places the patient in Standby at the
Panorama Central Station.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2 - 21
Quick Reference Guide
Getting Started
• The Bedside and Panorama Standby button places the patient in Standby at the
Panorama Central Station and the bedside monitor.
NOTE:
The Bedside and Panorama Standby button is not available
when using a Telepack device.
4. Select a patient’s Standby location.
a. Select a location from the patient location list
b. Choose the Select button
To activate Standby mode at the bedside monitor:
• Select the STANDBY button on the front of the bedside monitor. This method places both
the bedside monitor and the Panorama Central Station in Standby mode.
To remove a patient from the Standby mode at the Panorama Central Station or the
WorkStation:
1. Select the Patient Setup menu button.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
3. Select the Standby tab.
4. Select the Resume Monitoring button. Monitoring is resumed at the Panorama
Central Station.
To remove a patient from the Standby mode at the Panorama Central Station and the bedside
monitor:
• Select the STANDBY button on the front panel of the bedside monitor. Monitoring
resumes at the Panorama Central Station and the bedside monitor.
For additional information on Standby, refer to the "Standby Tab’’ on page 5-49.
2.5.3
Discharge
The discharge function discharges a patient from a patient tile and resets the Panorama
Central Station for the next patient. This tab is available at the WorkStation.
To discharge a patient:
1. Select the Patient Setup menu button.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
3. Select the Discharge tab.
4. Select the Bedside and Panorama Discharge button.
2 - 22
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
Quick Reference Guide
5. A message dialog box is displayed.
a. If at least two of the three required demographic fields (First Name, Last Name,
Patient ID) are entered, the following message is displayed: Are you sure you
want to discharge this patient? Selecting Yes will move the patient to
the discharge list. The YES button discharges the patient. The NO button
continues monitoring the patient.
b. If at least two of the three required demographic fields are not completed, the
following message is displayed: The patient’s data and submitted print jobs
will be deleted because at least two of the following fields, First
Name, Last Name or ID have not been filled in. Do you still want to
proceed with the discharge? The YES button discharges the patient. The NO
button continues monitoring the patient.
To discharge a patient from a bedside monitor:
1. Select the DISCHARGE button on the front of the bedside monitor.
2. Select a discharge option.
• The Discharge From Monitor option erases all patient information at the bedside
monitor.
• The Discharge From Central option erases all patient information at the Panorama
Central Station.
• The Discharge From Both option erases all patient information at the Panorama
Central Station and at the bedside monitor.
NOTE:
When using the Discharge From Central and Discharge From
Both options, if two of the three demographic fields (First
Name, Last Name, and ID) have been completed prior to the
patient’s discharge, the patient is moved to the Discharge
list at the Panorama Central Station and may be retrieved.
NOTE:
If a patient is discharged from the Panorama Central Station
but not from the patient monitor, the Panorama Central
Station tile will not be available for a new patient until a
discharge has been performed at the patient monitor.
3. Verify the selection. The Are you sure? confirmation dialog box is displayed.
• The Yes selection confirms the patient discharge.
• The No selection discards the patient discharge.
For additional information regarding discharging a patient, refer to "Discharging a Patient
from the Central Station and the Bedside Monitor’’ on page 5-36.
2.5.4
Display
The Display tab controls the order of patient data tiles and the waveforms that are shown on
the Main Screen.
To change the patient tile display order at an individual Panorama Central Station,
ViewStation, or WorkStation:
1. Select the Patient Setup menu button.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
3. Select the Display tab.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2 - 23
Quick Reference Guide
Getting Started
4. Select a digital parameter tile to change a digital parameter. Select a waveform tile to
change a waveform.
5. Select a parameter from the Parameter list.
6. Choose the Select button to confirm the choice.
For additional information regarding parameter display, refer to the ‘‘Display Tab’’ on page
5-40.
2.5.5
Patient Alarms
Patient alarms provide for customized alarm limits and responses based on patient need. For
additional information on patient alarms, refer to ‘‘Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional)’’ on
page 6-2.
Alarm Limits
Alarm limits are the configured threshold settings used to monitor patient parameters. If a
parameter does not fall within the configured threshold settings, an alarm occurs. When
using a bedside monitor, patient alarm limit information will continuously be transmitted
between the bedside monitor, the Panorama Central Station, ViewStation, and the
WorkStation.
WARNING: Changing the patient alarm limits at the WorkStation will
automatically change the patient alarm limits at the
Panorama Central Station AND the bedside monitor (if
applicable) for the selected patient tile.
To adjust alarm limits:
1. Select the Patient Alarms menu button.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
3. Select the Alarm Limits tab.
4. Select the parameter alarm limits to adjust. Use the slider bars to adjust the alarm limits.
To adjust alarm limits at the bedside monitor, refer to bedside monitor’s Operating
Instructions for the Passport 2® (P/N 0070-00-0649-XX), Spectrum™ (P/N
0070-00-0648-XX), or Spectrum OR™ (P/N 0070-00-0670-XX).
For additional information on Alarm Limits, refer to "Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)’’ on page 6-4.
Alarm Responses
Alarm Responses determine the behavior of alarms when an alarm violation occurs at the
Panorama Central Station.
To adjust alarm responses:
1. Select the Patient Alarms menu button.
2 - 24
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
Quick Reference Guide
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
3. Select the Alarm Responses tab.
4. Select the parameter.
5. Adjust the alarm responses for the parameter.
For additional information on alarm responses, refer to "Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)’’ on
page 6-12.
Muting Alarms
To mute a non-latched alarm (for example, IBP):
• Select the MUTE button in the alarming patient tile to silence the alarm violation for the
configured time period.
NOTE:
The MUTE button is not available at the ViewStation or the
WorkStation.
For additional information on muting an alarm, refer to "VIEW/MUTE Button’’ on page 2-8.
To mute a latched alarm (for example, lethal arrhythmias):
•
Select the digital data area or waveform area of the alarming patient tile to
acknowledge the alarm AFTER the alarm condition is resolved.
•
Select the MUTE button in the alarming patient tile to silence the alarm violation for the
configured time period.
NOTE:
The audio and visual indicators for a latched alarm will
continue until the alarm is acknowledged, even if the alarm
condition no longer exists.
NOTE:
Selecting the digital data or waveform area of the alarming
patient tile, at the host central station, also acknowledges
the alarm at the ViewStation and the WorkStation.
For additional information about latched alarms, refer to ‘‘Latching’’ on page 3-3.
2.5.6
Viewing List Trends
The Trends tab displays all available digital data for a patient, in a list format.
To view List Trends at the Panorama Central Station:
1. Select the VIEW button in the desired patient tile.
2. Select the Trends tab.
• Select the Print menu bar button to print the trends list.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2 - 25
Quick Reference Guide
Getting Started
To adjust the trend display period:
1. Select the Patient Setup menu button.
2. Select the Display tab.
3. Select the Trend Display sidebar button.
For additional information regarding the Trends List, refer to "Trends Tab (List View)’’ on
page 7-13.
2.5.7
Viewing Events
The Events tab displays all events and related waveform data for a patient.
To view events:
1. Select the VIEW button in the desired patient tile.
2. Select the Events tab.
• Select the Print menu bar button to print the events list.
3. Select the Events Filtering sidebar button to change the filter used in the event list.
For additional information regarding events, refer to ‘‘Events Tab’’ on page 7-23.
4. To view the waveform data associated with an event, highlight the desired event and
select the View Waveform sidebar button.
The event waveform can be printed by selecting the Print menu bar button.
2.5.8
Viewing Disclosure Data
The Disclosure tab displays all of the patient’s historical waveform data, and associated
numeric information, for a selected time period.
To view disclosure data:
1. Select the VIEW button in the desired patient tile.
2. Select the Disclosure tab.
3. Select the Display Choices sidebar button to change the waveforms being viewed.
a. Select the Print menu bar button or one of the menu bar Print (x) Hour(s)
(x=number of hours to print) button to print the disclosure information.
b. Select the Skip To sidebar button to view a specific time in a patient monitoring
history.
4. For a magnified view of the waveform, highlight a waveform and select the Zoom In
button.
a. Select the Print menu bar button to print the magnified disclosure information.
For additional information regarding disclosure, refer to the ‘‘Disclosure Tab’’ on page 7-40.
2 - 26
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Getting Started
2.6
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential issues that may occur when admitting a patient to the
Panorama Central Station.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Cannot admit patient/patient
data not displayed at central
station.
Previous patient not discharged
from system and/or monitoring
device.
Discharge patient from system.
Monitoring device not
assigned to Panorama
Equipment List.
Assign device to Panorama
Equipment List.
Panorama not installed as an
option (for
Passport 2®/Spectrum™ only).
Access the Installation Menu,
Options submenu at the
bedside device. For additional
information, refer to the
Passport 2, Spectrum, or
Spectrum OR™ Operating
Instructions.
Network setting on monitoring
device is incorrect.
Access the Installation Menu,
System Information submenu at
the bedside device. For
additional information, refer to
Passport 2, Spectrum, or
Spectrum OR™ Operating
Instructions.
Telepack batteries may need to
be replaced.
Test batteries, and if necessary,
replace.
Telepack batteries improperly
installed.
Reinstall batteries.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
2 - 27
Troubleshooting
Getting Started
This page intentionally left blank.
2 - 28
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
3.0
Alarm Behavior
This section outlines the alarm types available in the system and the conditions that would
trigger an alarm condition.
•
General Alarm Behavior
•
Physiological Alarms
•
Technical Alarms
•
System Alarms
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
3-1
General Alarm Behavior
3.1
Alarm Behavior
General Alarm Behavior
The Panorama Central Station uses alarms to send notification when a patient’s physiological
status changes, a patient has a specific technical issue, or when there is a system violation.
When a patient is first admitted, the default system alarm settings are in effect. Individual
patient alarm settings can be modified by using the Patient Alarms button at the central
station or the WorkStation.
WARNING: Changing the patient alarm limits at the WorkStation will
automatically change the patient alarm limits at the
Panorama Central Station AND the bedside monitor (if
applicable) for the selected patient tile.
By default, alarm settings send notification using:
•
Visual indicators
•
Audible indicators
The three alarm types used in this system include physiological, technical, and system.
3.2
Physiological Alarms
Physiological alarms indicate a violation of a monitored patient's physiological alarm
thresholds or arrhythmia analysis settings. For additional information regarding alarm
thresholds and arrhythmia analysis settings, refer to ‘‘Alarms and Events’’ on page 13-1.
3.2.1
Alarm Behaviors
The visual and audio indicators associated with a physiological alarm are:
Visual Indicators
Visual indicators provide visual notification when an alarm threshold is violated. When a
physiological alarm condition is triggered, the digital data portion of the patient tile flashes
(if the alarm priority is set to 1 or 2), and a text message displays in the Patient Status line.
The physiological alarm behavior varies depending on the parameter, and on the alarm
priority associated with the parameter. This is discussed in further detail in the ‘‘Physiological
Alarm Responses’’ on page 3-4.
Audio Indicators
Audio indicators provide audible notification when an alarm threshold is violated. Audio
indicators may vary depending on the alarm severity, alarm type, system setup and
configuration.Audio alarms are triggered by:
•
The onset of an alarm condition, provided the alarm delay is not active.
•
A configured alarm delay, if alarm delay is active.
Audio alarm options are configured in the System Alarms (System Alarm Options) tab. By
default, audio alarms are enabled.
NOTE:
3-2
Audio alarms will be triggered at the ViewStation and the
WorkStation when there is an alarm occurring at the host
central station.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Alarm Behavior
Physiological Alarms
Once the alarm condition is resolved and/or acknowledged, the audible alarm stops, unless
the alarm is latched. For additional information regarding alarm limits, refer to ‘‘Alarm Limit
Settings’’ on page 13-2. For additional information regarding alarm latching, refer to
‘‘Latching’’ on page 3-3.
3.2.2
Alarm Options
The alarm options associated with a parameter dictate how the system responds when an
alarm occurs.
Bedside Alarm Tracking
Bedside Alarm Tracking provides an automatic bi-directional flow of alarm limit change and
alarm delay information, between a patient bedside monitor and a Panorama Central
Station.
Latching
Alarm latching denotes that the audio and visual indicators, associated with an alarm
condition, will not automatically stop even when the patient alarm condition is resolved.
By default, lethal alarm events and nurse call events are automatically latched. Physiological
alarm events can be configured to be latched or unlatched, and non-lethal alarms cannot be
latched. When permitted, this option can be enabled/disabled in the System Alarms
(System Alarm Options) tab.
The patient tile MUTE button temporarily silences the alarm condition for the configured time
period. However, if that latched alarm is not acknowledged during the configured time
period, the alarm indicators resume. Once a patient alarm condition is resolved, it must be
acknowledged at the central station and at the bedside monitor. If it is not acknowledged, all
audio and visual alarm indicators continue at the central station and at the bedside monitor,
even if the alarm condition is resolved.
To acknowledge a latched alarm condition at the central station, once the condition is
resolved, perform one of the following to the affected patient tile:
•
Select the digital data area
•
Select the waveform area
•
Select the VIEW button
NOTE:
Acknowledging a latched alarm at the host central station
patient tile acknowledges the alarm at the associated
ViewStation and WorkStation patient tile.
NOTE:
Acknowledging a latched alarm at the bedside monitor
does not acknowledge the alarm at the host central station,
ViewStation, or WorkStation patient tile.
To acknowledge a latched alarm at a Passport 2 and/or Spectrum bedside monitor, refer to
the Passport 2 and/or Spectrum Operating Instructions.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
3-3
Physiological Alarms
Alarm Behavior
Once a latched alarm condition is acknowledged, the alarm indicators discontinue until
another alarm condition occurs. Acknowledging the alarm at the central station will not
discontinue the alarm at the bedside monitor, and acknowledging the alarm at the bedside
monitor will not discontinue the alarm at the central station, ViewStation, or WorkStation.
Apnea Latching
The conditions for apnea latching follow standard latching procedures, however apnea
latching is associated with an apnea alarm condition. This option can be enabled/disabled
in the System Alarms (System Alarm Options) tab. By default, Apnea Latching is enabled.
NOTE:
Respiratory apnea alarm condition events are detected by
the bedside monitor.
NOTE:
Acknowledging an apnea latched alarm at the central
station patient tile also acknowledges the alarm at the
associated ViewStation and WorkStation patient tile.
NOTE:
Acknowledging an apnea latched alarm at the bedside
monitor does not acknowledge the alarm at the host central
station, ViewStation, or WorkStation patient tile.
Alarm Delay
Alarm Delay is the configurable time period required before an alarm is triggered. Alarm
Delay will not effect the Apnea Alarm, ST Alarms, the non-lethal arrhythmia alarms, or the
lethal arrhythmia alarms. When permitted, this option can be enabled/disabled in the
System Alarms (System Alarm Options) tab. By default, an Alarm Delay time is not
specified.
ST Alarm Delay
ST alarm delay postpones the trigger of the ST alarm for a configured time period. When
permitted, this option can be configured in the System Alarms (System Alarm Options)
tab.
3.2.3
Physiological Alarm Responses
The alarm responses associated with a physiological alarm are as follows.
3.2.3.1
Alarm Priorities
The Panorama Central Station supports three alarm priorities. When alarm priority is
turned on, the choices available are Alarm Priority of 1, 2 or 3. Alarms may be turned off by
using the Priority Off setting. Alarm priorities associated with lethal alarm parameters cannot
be changed from their default value of Priority 1. However, all other parameters can be
modified. The alarm priority used to configure a parameter defines the alarm severity.
When a parameter is assigned a Priority Off, there are no visual or audio alarm indicators
associated with the alarm event, however Print on Alarm and Save To Event options
are still available.
Alarm priorities are configured in the patient Alarm Responses and the System Alarms
(System Alarm Responses) tabs.
3-4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Alarm Behavior
Physiological Alarms
For additional information about defining a parameters alarm priority, refer to ‘‘Configuring
Alarm Responses’’ on page 6-14 and ‘‘Setting the System Alarms Responses’’ on page 9-27.
Priority 1 Alarms
Priority 1 alarms are the most severe alarm type. Lethal-arrhythmia alarms (Asystole, V-Tach,
and V-Fib) are automatically configured as Priority 1 alarms and cannot be modified. Priority
1 alarm conditions cause the applicable parameter sub-tile to flash in red, display a red text
message in the Patient Status line, and use a Priority 1 alarm sound. A parameters’ alarm
priority is configured in the System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) tab.
Priority 2 Alarms
Priority 2 alarms are less severe than Priority 1 alarms, and have different visual and audio
indicators. Heart rate (HR), ST Single, and ST Dual default to Priority 2 alarms. Priority 2
alarm conditions cause the applicable parameter sub-tile to flash in yellow (for a
physiological alarm), display a yellow text message in the Patient Status line, and use a
Priority 2 alarm sound (if alarm delay is not enabled). A parameters’ alarm priority is
configured in the System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) tab.
Priority 3 Alarms
Priority 3 alarms are the least severe of the three alarm priorities. By default, temperature
(T1/T2), respiration, and SpO2 are Priority 3 alarms. Priority 3 alarm conditions cause the
applicable parameter sub-tile to display in constant yellow, display a yellow text message in
the Patient Status line, and use a Priority 3 alarm sound (if alarm delay is not enabled). A
parameters’ alarm priority is configured in the System Alarms (System Alarm Responses)
tab.
Priority Off
Alarm priority can be turned off for certain alarms. Parameters configured to use Priority Off
do not have any visual or audio alarm indicators, however, the Print on Alarm and Save
To Event alarm response options still function.
3.2.3.2
Save To Event
Save To Event enables the Panorama Central Station to save a 20 second snapshot of a
specific alarm event so that it can later be retrieved and studied in more detail. The Save To
Event option is disabled at the ViewStation.
3.2.3.3
Print on Alarm
Print on Alarm automatically generates a patient All Strips Report when a specified alarm
is triggered. The patient tile Print on Alarm option is enabled at the ViewStation and functions
in the same manner as the host central station. Changes made to the patient tile Print on
Alarm option, at the ViewStation, will not affect the patient tile Print on Alarm option at the
host central station. For additional information about the All Strips Report, refer to the ‘‘All
Strips Report’’ on page 8-2.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
3-5
Technical Alarms
3.3
Alarm Behavior
Technical Alarms
Technical alarms are patient specific and are related to technical issues that occur with
cables, leads, and parameter sensors. The ViewStation technical event alarm notification will
follow those settings at the host central station.
3.3.1
Alarm Behaviors
The visual and audio indicators associated with a technical alarm are as follows:
Visual Indicators
Technical visual indicators display as white text messages in the Patient Status line.
Audio Indicators
Technical alarm audio indicators are based on Technical Events Sound settings in the
System Alarms (System Alarm Options) tab, the event type and the Volume tab settings.
3.3.2
Alarm Options
There is one alarm option available for a technical alarm.
Technical Event Sound
The Technical Events Sound option enables/disables audio notification when a technical
alarm is triggered. Some events, for example, a Communications Lost event, send an
audio alarm notification even when the Technical Events Sound option is disabled.
3.3.3
Alarm Responses
Alarm responses are not available for technical alarms, with the exception of the Nurse Call
technical event.
3.4
System Alarms
System alarm events are associated with system-wide issues at the Panorama Central Station.
3.4.1
Alarm Behaviors
The visual and audio indicators associated with a system alarm are as follows:
Visual Indicators
System alarm visual indicators display as white text messages in the System Status line.
Audio Indicators
System audio alarm indicators are based on the settings in the Volume tab.
3-6
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
4.0
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
This section describes lead placement, arrhythmia, and ST analysis.
• Lead Placement Procedures
• Arrhythmia Algorithm
• ST Segment Analysis
• Arrhythmia Alarms
• Troubleshooting
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
4-1
Lead Placement Procedures
4.1
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead Placement Procedures
Site preparation and ECG electrode placement directly impact the quality of an ECG signal.
Optimizing an ECG signal is imperative for accurate monitoring.
The processes involved in successful lead placement include:
• Skin Preparation
• Electrode Patches
• Lead Placement Methods: AHA and IEC
4.1.1
Skin Preparation
Proper skin preparation is essential to obtain accurate ECG data. Electrode sites should be
clean, dry and should provide a smooth flat surface. Incidental electrical activity and
inaccurate readings may occur due to incorrect skin preparation.
The following skin preparation is recommended for secure patch application:
1. Shave the chest hair in a 2-4 inch diameter of the electrode site.
2. Use a dry gauze pad to remove excess skin oils, skin cells and residue from the
electrode sites. Never rub the skin until it is raw or bleeding.
NOTE:
4.1.2
Prepare the electrode site with alcohol only if the skin is
extremely greasy. If alcohol is used as a drying agent,
always allow the skin to dry before placing the electrode
patch on the skin.
Electrode Patches
NOTE:
Store electrode patches at room temperature and open just
prior to use.
NOTE:
Avoid more than one type of electrode on a patient because
of variations in electrical resistance.
NOTE:
Avoid placing electrode patches directly over boney
prominences or over any high activity movement areas such
as shoulders or arms because muscle motion produces
electrical activity. If an electrode patch is placed over a large
muscle such as the pectorals, the monitor may detect this
additional muscle activity, which could lead to false
arrhythmia calls.
1. Peel the backing off of the electrode patch only when it is ready for use to prevent
evaporation of the contact gel medium. Visually inspect the contact gel medium for
moistness. If the gel medium is not moist, do not use the electrode patch. Dry electrode
patches are not conductive.
NOTE:
4-2
If using the snap type electrode wires, attach the electrode
patch to the lead wire before placing patch on the patient.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead Placement Procedures
2. Attach the electrode patch to the skin at the prepared site. Smooth the electrode patch
down in a circular motion to ensure proper skin contact. If using soft gel electrodes,
never push down directly over the contact gel medium as this may displace the gel and
cause monitoring artifact. If using hard gel electrodes, it is recommended that during
application, the center of the electrode should be slightly pressed onto the skin to ensure
direct contact. Consult the electrode patch manufacturer’s instructions for specific use.
3. Secure the lead wires to the patient according to hospital practice. For additional
information, refer to “Lead Placement Methods: AHA and IEC” on page 4-3. If using a
Panorama Telepack, always secure the device to the patient according to hospital
standard.
WARNING: As with all medical equipment, carefully route cables and
connections to reduce the possibility of entanglement or
strangulation.
NOTE:
4.1.3
It is recommended that electrode patches be changed at
least every 24-36 hours to maintain proper contact with the
skin. Some patients may require electrodes to be changed
more often. Electrode patches are disposable and should not
be reused or reapplied. Try to avoid reusing the exact same
electrode site during reapplication. If an electrode becomes
wet with fluid, change the electrode patch.
Lead Placement Methods: AHA and IEC
The lead placement procedure that is utilized has a direct impact on the quality of an ECG
waveform. The algorithm works best when a patient’s R wave is significantly larger than the P
or T waves to avoid difficulty in identifying the appropriate waves. On some patients,
electrode patch placement and/or the ECG lead viewed may need to be adjusted to obtain
a more significant R wave.
The following section outlines lead placement procedures for the American Heart Association
(AHA) and the International Electro-Technical Commission (IEC).
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
4-3
Lead Placement Procedures
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
3-wire Lead Set
A 3-wire lead set can monitor one of three ECG vectors (I, II, or III). The recommended 3-wire
ECG lead placement is as follows.
White
Black
Red
FIGURE 4-1 3-wire Lead Placement (AHA)
FIGURE 4-2 3-wire Lead Placement (IEC)
•
Place RA (white) electrode under right clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place R (red) electrode under right clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place LA (black) electrode under left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place L (yellow) electrode under left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
5-wire Lead Set
A 5-wire lead set can monitor seven ECG vectors (I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, and V)
simultaneously. The recommended 5-wire ECG lead placement is as follows.
4-4
FIGURE 4-3 5-wire Lead Placement (AHA)
FIGURE 4-4 5-wire Lead Placement (IEC)
•
Place RA (white) electrode under the right
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib cage
frame.
•
Place R (red) electrode under the right clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
•
Place LA (black) electrode under the left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
Place L (yellow) electrode under the left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib cage
frame.
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place RL (green) electrode on lower right
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place N (black) electrode on lower right
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place V (brown) chest lead in the proper
positioning for desired lead V1-V6.
•
Place C (white) chest lead in the proper
positioning for the desired lead C1-C6.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead Placement Procedures
View 12™ Card
A View 12™ card utilizes a 10-wire ECG lead set that can monitor 12 ECG vectors (I, II, III,
aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6) simultaneously. The recommended lead
placement for a View 12™ card is as follows.
FIGURE 4-5 View 12™ Card Lead
Placement (AHA)
FIGURE 4-6 View 12™ Card Lead
Placement (IEC)
•
Place RA (white) electrode under the right
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place R (red) electrode under the right
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place LA (black) electrode under the left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place L (yellow) electrode under the left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place RL (green) electrode on lower right
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place N (black) electrode on lower right
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place V1 (brown) chest lead in the fourth
intercostal space, right sternal border.
•
Place C1 (white) chest lead in the fourth
intercostal space, right sternal border.
•
Place V2 (brown) chest lead in the fourth
intercostal space, left sternal border.
•
Place C2 (white) chest lead in the fourth
intercostal space, left sternal border.
•
Place V3 (brown) chest lead midway
between V2 and V4 on a straight line.
•
Place C3 (white) chest lead midway
between C2 and C4 on a straight line.
•
Place V4 (brown) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, mid-clavicular line.
•
Place C4 (white) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, mid-clavicular line.
•
Place V5 (brown) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, anterior axillary line.
•
Place C5 (white) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, anterior axillary line.
•
Place V6 (brown) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, mid-axillary line.
•
Place C6 (white) chest lead in the fifth
intercostal space, mid-axillary line.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
4-5
Lead Placement Procedures
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead II Monitoring
The recommended lead placement for Lead II monitoring is as follows.
4-6
FIGURE 4-7 Lead II Monitoring (AHA)
FIGURE 4-8 Lead II Monitoring (IEC)
•
Place RA (white) electrode under right
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place R (red) electrode under right
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place LA (black) electrode under left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
Place L (yellow) electrode under left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib
cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the lower
left abdomen within the rib cage frame.
Select the ECG Lead II at the bedside
Select the ECG Lead II at the bedside
monitor. Lead II is the direct electrical line
monitor. Lead II is the direct electrical
between the RA (white) electrode and the
line between the R (red) electrode and
LL (red) electrode.
the F (green) electrode.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead Placement Procedures
Modified Chest Lead (MCL) Monitoring
The recommended lead placement for MCL monitoring is as follows.
FIGURE 4-9 MCL Monitoring with a
3-wire Lead Set (AHA)
FIGURE 4-10 MCL Monitoring with a
3-wire Lead Set (IEC)
•
Place RA (white) electrode under left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place R (red) electrode under left clavicle,
mid-clavicular line within the rib cage frame.
•
Place LA (black) electrode on the right sternal
border, fourth intercostal in the rib cage
frame.
•
Place L (yellow) electrode on the right sternal
border, fourth intercostal in the rib cage
frame.
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the lower left
abdomen within the rib cage frame.
Lead I is the direct electrical line between
Select ECG Lead I for MCL 1 monitoring.
Lead I is the direct electrical line between the
the RA (white) electrode and the LA (black)
R (red) electrode and the L (yellow)
electrode.
electrode.
Select ECG Lead II for MCL 6 monitoring.
Lead II is the direct electrical line between
Select ECG Lead II for MCL 6 monitoring.
Lead II is the direct electrical line between
the RA (white) electrode and the LL (red)
the L (red) electrode and the F (green)
electrode.
electrode.
Select ECG Lead I for MCL 1 monitoring.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
4-7
Lead Placement Procedures
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Neonatal Electrode Placement
(use only with Passport® and Spectrum™)
When using a 3-wire lead set, ECG lead placement on a neonate is usually directed towards
obtaining the best possible respiration data through the ECG thoracic impedance technique.
Thoracic impedance is usually measured between the Right Arm and Left Arm electrode
patches. These patches should be placed on the chest directly across from each other to
optimize the measuring of the neonate’s chest movement.
The recommended lead placement for neonate monitoring is as follows.
FIGURE 4-11 Neonatal 3-wire Lead
Placement (AHA)
FIGURE 4-12 Neonatal 3-wire Lead
Placement (IEC)
•
•
Place RA (white) electrode under patient left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib cage
frame.
Place R (red) electrode under patient left
clavicle, mid-clavicular line within the rib cage
frame.
•
Place LA (black) electrode right sternal border, •
fourth intercostal space within the rib cage
frame.
Place L (yellow) electrode right sternal border,
fourth intercostal space within the rib cage
frame.
•
Place LL (red) electrode on the patient’s lower
left abdomen within the rib cage frame.
•
Place F (green) electrode on the patient’s lower
left abdomen within the rib cage frame.
Using a Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulator (TENS)
Since a TENS unit transmits electrical impulses, avoid placing ECG electrode patches near
the TENS electrodes. ECG electrode patches may need to be repositioned and the ECG lead
viewed may need to be adjusted until the optimum ECG tracing is obtained.
4-8
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Lead Placement Procedures
Monitoring a Pacemaker Patient
The recommended lead placement for a pacemaker patient is as follows.
Pacer
White
Pacer
Red
Yellow
Black
Green
Red
FIGURE 4-13 Placement for a
Pacemaker Patient 3-wire Lead (AHA)
White
Pacer
V
Brown
Green
FIGURE 4-14 Placement for a
Pacemaker Patient 3-wire Lead (IEC)
Red
V
White
Black
Black
Red
FIGURE 4-15 Placement for a
Pacemaker Patient 5-wire Lead (AHA)
Pacer
Yellow
Green
FIGURE 4-16 Placement for a
Pacemaker Patient 5-wire Lead (IEC)
A Pacemaker patient usually requires a different electrode patch placement configuration
than a non-pacemaker patient.
Do not place an ECG electrode directly over the pacemaker generator. Place the electrode
patches 3-5 inches away from the pacemaker generator area to avoid electrical interference.
If the electrode patches are placed closer to pacemaker generator, the ECG will contain
artifact, sometimes called “picket fence syndrome.” For example, if the pacemaker generator
is located in the right subclavian area, relocate the Right Arm (white) electrode closer in
towards the center of the chest.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
4-9
Arrhythmia Algorithm
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
WARNING: PACEMAKER PATIENTS - Indication of the heart-rate may be
adversely affected by cardiac pacemaker pulses or by
cardiac arrhythmias. Keep pacemaker patients under close
surveillance. Refer to ‘‘ECG Performance Requirements’’ on
page 16-2 for disclosure of the pacer rejection capability.
CAUTION:
4.2
Some pacemakers may contain a respiratory sensor that
may produce artifact on an ECG waveform.
Arrhythmia Algorithm
The Panorama Central Station uses an arrhythmia algorithm to monitor ECG waveform data.
The arrhythmia analysis feature is intended to detect ventricular rhythms only. However, due
to physiologic differences in patient populations, the arrhythmia algorithm may occasionally
result in a false alarm or may not recognize certain arrhythmia patterns.
The algorithm creates ECG waveform templates based on a patient’s normal ECG data and
uses them to analyze newly received data. The algorithm verifies that data is free from noise
and artifact, and that it does not deviate from the patient’s normal ECG rhythms.
A normal ECG waveform typically includes consistent spacing between R waves, a sharp
and well defined QRS complex, and an ECG baseline that is free of noise and artifact. The
computerized arrhythmia algorithm works best when the patient’s R wave is significantly
larger than the P wave and the T wave. If the R wave is not significantly larger than other
lower voltage waves on the ECG tracing, the computer may have some difficulty in
identifying the appropriate waves. On some patients, electrode patch placement and/or the
viewed ECG lead may need to be adjusted in order to obtain a significant R wave.
R
ST Point
J Point
P
ISO Point
ST deviation
(Depression or Elevation)
T
Q
40 to 80 msec
S
FIGURE 4-17 Sample Waveform
Noise and Artifact
The presence of noise or artifact in an ECG waveform makes the accurate detection and
classification of heart beats difficult. To best optimize performance, all leads should be free
of noise. If artifact is present on any ECG lead/waveform, then the arrhythmia processing,
alarm processing, and quality of the monitoring function may be adversely affected.
4 - 10
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Arrhythmia Algorithm
Some of the causes of ECG noise include poor skin preparation, improperly attached
electrodes, dried electrode gel, defective lead wires, and patient movement. The algorithm
uses several techniques to differentiate a patient’s QRS complexes from noise sources.
If noise levels are too high, the following will occur until the signal quality is re-established:
• Beat detection is suspended
• All rhythm calls are suspended
• An ECG Noise message is displayed in the Patient Status line at the Panorama
Central Station when the noise continues beyond the configured noise delay
Heart Rate Meter
Heart Rate is computed using the 16 most recent R-R intervals for heart rates above 48 beats
per minute while 4 R-R intervals are used at rates equal to or less than 48 beats per minute.
All detected beats are used to compute the heart rate. A separate ventricular rate is used in
the algorithm to determine rhythms like ventricular tachycardia and ventricular run.
Filtering Pacer Signals
In order to prevent pacer pulses from being mistaken for QRS complexes, they are removed
from the ECG data sent to the arrhythmia algorithm for analysis. Pacer pulses are shown on
the Panorama Central Station and bedside monitors as exaggerated vertical lines.
ECG Amplitude
The QRS detection threshold algorithm setting is fixed between 0.15 and 0.45 mV to avoid
detecting noise spikes or P-waves as valid beats. Changing the display gain (or wave gain)
on the monitor does not affect the signal that is used by the algorithm for beat detection. For
optimal performance, the leads selected for monitoring should have an amplitude of 0.5 to 1
mV or more.
Learning
The process of learning is used to establish a normal beat template for a patient. The learn
period is dependent on heart rate and dominant pattern. Learning should not be initiated
during a primarily ventricular rhythm because an ectopic beat may be established as normal.
A learn should be initiated when beats are not being properly detected, or when they are
being erroneously classified. However, if a signal is not strong enough, or lead data is
extremely noisy, better signal quality must be established before a learn can be effective.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
4 - 11
ST Segment Analysis
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Beat Detection and Typing
The following table describes the leads that are used for beat detection and beat typing.
DESCRIPTION
3-WIRE LEAD SET
5-WIRE LEAD SET
VIEW 12™ CARD
Leads used for Beat
Detection
Determined by viewed
lead
II and V
V1 and V5
Leads used for Beat
Typing
Determined by viewed
lead
II, V, and I
V1, V5, and II
Leads used for V-Fib
Detection
Determined by viewed
lead
II and V
V1 and V5
The search for the next beat begins after a refractory period to avoid detecting T-waves as
valid QRS complexes. The minimum QRS amplitude that can be detected is between 0.15
mV and 0.45 mV depending on the width of the QRS complex.
Beat typing aligns and compares each new heart beat to reference templates that were
previously stored in the system. A beat typing algorithm classifies the beats.
• If an incoming beat matches a template that has already been classified, it is given the
same label as the template. The template parameters are updated with the features from
this new beat.
The real time ECG analysis library incorporates ventricular ectopic beat detection as a part
of arrhythmia analysis.
• Beats are measured for compensatory pause, QRS width, QRS positive and negative
areas, and R wave positive and negative amplitudes. This process uses multiple leads
when available.
• A scoring algorithm is then applied to those measurements to determine whether or not a
beat is ectopic.Beat detection and typing uses the monitored lead whenever a 3-wire lead
set is used.
4.3
ST Segment Analysis
The ST segment of an ECG waveform (shown in FIGURE 4-17) represents the period from the
end of ventricular de-polarization, to the beginning of ventricular re-polarization, or the end
of the QRS complex (the J point) and the beginning of the T-wave. ST Segment analysis is
used to monitor the oxygen supply and the viability of the heart muscle.
ST deviation is the vertical distance between the isoelectric (ISO) point level and signal level
at ST point.
The ISO point is located between the end of the P-wave and the onset of the QRS complex.
The ISO point provides the baseline for this measurement.
The ST point is a fixed distance from the J point at the end of the QRS complex. The ST point
can be configured to 40, 60, or 80 milliseconds past the J-point, independent of the heart
rate. By default, the ST point is positioned as follows:
• at 80 milliseconds for heart rates less than or equal to 120 beats per minute
• at 60 milliseconds for heart rates greater than 120 beats per minute
4 - 12
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Arrhythmia Alarms
ST segments are typically calculated on graph paper with a scale of 1cm/mV, and measured
in millimeters where one millimeter is equivalent to 0.1 mV. The reliability of ST
measurements is lowered with the presence of atrial fibrillation, flutter, and erratic baseline
changes.
Selecting leads that contain the least amount of baseline flutter will improve measurement
accuracy, but accurate ST deviation measurement is dependent on the correct location of the
ISO and ST points.
All available ECG leads are analyzed to measure deviations in the ST segment.
The displayed ST data is updated approximately every 10 seconds.
Learning
The process of learning is used to establish normal beat templates or a stable baseline for
accurate ST analysis. To establish this baseline, the system evaluates the first sixteen normal
beats based on readings from leads II, V, and I.
To establish an accurate baseline, it is recommended that learning be done when the patient
is in stable condition, not moving, and has an ECG rhythm that is free of artifact. Learning
should not be initiated during a primarily ventricular rhythm or other ECG rhythm irregularity
because an ectopic beat may be established as normal.
Learning automatically occurs when:
• Arrhythmia analysis is turned on
• ST analysis is turned on
• Patient monitoring resumes and patient is removed from the Standby mode
• A 3-wire lead set is in use and the current ECG lead is changed
ECG Filters
The ST segment of an ECG waveform often contains low amplitude signals with low
frequency content. To preserve low frequency signal content, the high pass filter is set to 0.05
Hz when ST analysis is turned on.
4.4
Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia alarms are activated based on the patterns in the patient ECG waveform rhythms.
Beat detection for a 5-lead wire set is determined by using a combination of leads II and V.
When using a 3-lead wire set, beat detection is determined by using only the viewed lead.
The following lethal and non-lethal arrhythmia alarms may be detected by the arrhythmia
algorithm. For additional information regarding alarm behavior at the Panorama Central
Station, refer to ‘‘Alarm Behavior’’ on page 3-1.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Cardiac arrhythmia alarm condition events are detected and
processed by the bedside monitor. When using a Telepack
device, the detection and processing of the event is done by
the Panorama Central Station.
0070-10-0707-02
4 - 13
Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
NOTE:
4.4.1
Arrhythmia alarms are not available for the Neonate
patient size.
Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms
A lethal arrhythmia is an arrhythmia that can be life threatening to a patient if left untreated.
Ventricular Tachycardia (V-Tach), Ventricular Fibrillation (V-Fib), and Asystole alarms are
classified as lethal arrhythmia alarms. These alarms automatically default to Alarm Priority 1.
NOTE:
Lethal arrhythmia alarms may be configured to have a
different alarm sound than other physiological alarms. The
sounds used are determined during system setup and
configuration.
NOTE:
Lethal arrhythmia alarms are latched alarms and must be
acknowledged after the condition is resolved. To
acknowledge the alarm, select the digital data area or the
waveform area of the affected patient tile.
NOTE:
If a lethal arrhythmia alarm condition exists, and a
transition to a different lethal arrhythmia alarm condition
occurs, a new event will be stored and a printout will be
generated, as configured.
NOTE:
When a V-Tach or V-Fib alarm occurs and is replaced by an
Asystole alarm, the Asystole alarm will be paged. This will
occur if Paging has been installed on the central station; the
Asystole alarm paging delay timer has expired; and the
alarm condition still exists when the paging delay timer has
expired.
Asystole Alarm
An Asystole alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when no QRS complexes
are detected for the configured time period in the absence of Ventricular Fibrillation. When
using a View 12™ card, the time period range for an Asystole alarm is between three (3)
and eight (8) seconds. When using a 3 or 5-wire lead set, the time period range for an
Asystole alarm is between three (3) and ten (10) seconds.
The Asystole alarm is a Priority 1 alarm event that:
• Produces an Alarm Priority 1 visual and audio alarm indicators once the condition is
identified.
• Causes a red Asystole text message to display in the Patient Status line.
Ventricular-Fibrillation (V-Fib) Alarm
A V-Fib alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when a fibrillated waveform (P,
QRS or T waves can no longer be identified) is detected. V-Fib is defined as “irregular,
disorganized electrical activity of the heart”. The ECG signal for V-Fib continuously changes
shape, interval, and amplitude. The V-Fib detection algorithm runs in parallel to the beat
detection algorithm and continuously examines the incoming data.
The V-Fib alarm is a Priority 1 alarm event that:
• Produces Alarm Priority 1 visual and audio alarm indicators once the condition is
identified.
4 - 14
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Arrhythmia Alarms
• Causes a red V-Fib text message to display in the Patient Status line.
Ventricular Tachycardia (V-Tach) Alarm
A V-Tach alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station as follows:
• The V-Tach lethal arrhythmia alarm is activated when the configured number of
consecutive PVCs is reached at a rate equal to or greater than the V-Tach threshold.
The range of the V-Tach rate is 100 to 180 beats. The range of the V-Tach threshold is
3-15 bpm.
A V-Tach alarm is a Priority 1 alarm event that:
• Produces the Alarm Priority 1 visual and audio alarm indicators once the condition is
identified.
• Causes a red V-Tach text message to display in the Patient Status line.
4.4.2
Non-Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms
A Non-Lethal Arrhythmia is an arrhythmia that is most likely not life threatening to a patient.
Bigeminy, Bradycardia, Couplet, Irregular Heart Rate, Pause, PVC, Run, Trigeminy, and
Ventricular Rhythm (V-Rhythm) alarms are non-lethal arrhythmia alarms, and depending on
the alarm, default to Alarm Priority 2 or 3 (except for Bradycardia).
NOTE:
Non-Lethal arrhythmia alarms are not latched alarms and
can be acknowledged at anytime.
Bigeminy Alarm
The Bigeminy alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when three or more
cycles of one PVC coupled to one normal beat are detected.
The Bigeminy alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Bigeminy alarm condition.
• The Bigeminy alarm causes a yellow Bigeminy text message to display in the Patient
Status line.
Bradycardia (Brady) Alarm
The Brady alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when the heart rate falls to a
value 10% lower than the user selected value for low heart rate alarm.
NOTE:
The Bradycardia alarm is not available when using a
View 12™ card.
NOTE:
The Brady alarm will not be suspended when the Suspend
Non-Lethals sidebar button is selected.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
4 - 15
Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
NOTE:
Brady alarms may be configured to have a different alarm
sound than other non-lethal physiological alarms. The
sounds used are determined during system setup and
configuration.
The Brady alarm has priority settings of 1 and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 1, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 1 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Bradycardia alarm condition.
• The Bradycardia alarm causes a Brady text message to display in the Patient Status line.
The color of the message is dependant on the alarm priority configured.
Couplet Alarm
The Couplet alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when two consecutive PVCs
are detected between normal beats.
The Couplet alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Couplet alarm condition.
• The Couplet alarm causes a yellow Couplet text message to display in the Patient Status
line.
Irregular Heart Rate Alarm
The Irregular Heart Rate alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when the
measured variation in the R-R interval over a period of time exceeds a preset limit established
by the arrhythmia algorithm.
NOTE:
The Irregular Heart Rate alarm is not available when using
a View 12™ card.
The Irregular Heart Rate alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Irregular Heart Rate alarm condition.
• The Irregular Heart Rate alarm causes a yellow Irregular HR text message to display in
the Patient Status line.
Pause Alarm
The Pause alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when no beat is detected
during an interval that is greater than 1.8 R-R and when the next beat is not a PVC.
4 - 16
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
NOTE:
Arrhythmia Alarms
The Pause alarm is only available when using a View 12™
card.
The Pause alarm has priority settings of 1, 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 1, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 1 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Pause alarm condition.
• The Pause alarm causes a Pause text message to display in the Patient Status line. The
color of the message is dependant on the configured alarm priority.
PVC/minute Alarm
The High PVC alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when the number of PVCs
detected per minute exceeds the configured threshold. The PVC rate alarm can be set to Off,
or 1 to 30 PVCs per minute.
NOTE:
The PVC/min counter will be set to invalid and display (---)
when Asystole, V-Tach, V-Fib, or V-Rhythm is detected.
The High PVC alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the High PVC alarm condition.
• The High PVC alarm causes a yellow High PVC text message to display in the Patient
Status line.
Run Alarm
The Run alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when the number of consecutive
PVCs occur at a rate that exceeds the user defined V-Tach rate from 3 beats in a row to one
beat less than the user defined V-Tach threshold. For additional information about V-Tach,
refer to the definition for ‘‘Ventricular Tachycardia (V-Tach) Alarm’’ on page 4-15.
The Run alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Run alarm condition.
• The Run alarm causes a yellow Run text message to display in the Patient Status line.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
4 - 17
Troubleshooting
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Trigeminy Alarm
The Trigeminy alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when three or more
cycles of one PVC coupled to two normal beats are detected. This rhythm could also cause
an Irregular HR alarm.
The Trigeminy alarm has priority settings of 2, 3 and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the Trigeminy alarm condition.
• The Trigeminy alarm causes a yellow Trigeminy text message to display in the Patient
Status line.
Ventricular Rhythm (V-Rhythm) Alarm
The V-Rhythm alarm is activated at the Panorama Central Station when the number of
consecutive PVCs is greater than three and the ventricular rate is less than the configured
V-Tach threshold.
The V-Rhythm alarm has priority settings of 2, 3, and OFF. When the setting is:
• Set to 2, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 2 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to 3, the Panorama Central Station produces an Alarm Priority 3 sound once the
condition is identified.
• Set to OFF, the Panorama Central Station does not produce any audio alarm indicators
for the V-Rhythm alarm condition.
• The V-Rhythm alarm causes a yellow V-Rhythm text message to display in the Patient
Status line.
4.5
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur. For additional
assistance troubleshooting arrhythmia analysis, please contact a Mindray DS USA Clinical
Educator at 1-800-288-2121 (U.S and Canada only) or 201-995-8000 (outside U.S. and
Canada).
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
Noisy ECG traces
*
4 - 18
REASON
SOLUTION
Loose or dry electrodes.
Apply fresh, moist electrodes.
Defective electrode wires.
Replace wires as necessary.
Patient cable or leads are
routed too close to other
electrical devices.
Eliminate 60 Hz interference.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
Troubleshooting
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Excessive Electro-surgical
Interference
Wrong ECG cable used.
Use ECG cable with internal filter
block.
NOTE: Respiration monitoring
via the ECG electrodes
will not be available
when using the cable.
Intermittent Signal
Excessive alarms: heart
rate, lead fault
Low Amplitude ECG
Signal
Muscle noise.
Inadequate skin preparation
prior to application of
electrode, tremors, tense
subject, and/or poor
electrode placement.
Repeat skin preparation and
electrode location procedures.
Apply fresh, moist electrodes. Avoid
areas of the torso that are very
muscular.
Patient may have a
pacemaker that contains a
respiratory sensor.
Reposition electrodes to reduce ECG
artifact.
Connections not tight and/or
properly secured.
Ensure proper connection. (cable to
monitor, cable to lead, lead to
electrode).
Electrodes dry or loose.
Repeat skin preparation and apply
fresh, moist electrodes.
Cable or lead wires
damaged.
Check with continuity tester.
Electrodes dry
Repeat skin preparation and apply
fresh, moist electrodes.
Alarm limits set too close to
patient's normal heart rate.
Adjust alarm limits.
R-wave wrong size
Must be twice the amplitude of the
other waves, like the P and T waves.
Excessive patient movement
or muscle tremor.
Reposition electrodes and secure
with tape, if necessary.
Electrode could be positioned
over a bone or muscle mass.
Move ECG patches closer towards
each other.
Electrodes dry/old
Apply fresh, moist electrodes.
Skin improperly prepared
Abrade skin.
This could be the patient’s
normal QRS complex.
Verify with 12-lead
electro-cardiogram.
Gain set too low.
Readjust the ECG wave gain as
required. Refer to the Wave Gain
Tab (System) for instructions on
adjusting the wave gain setting.
NOTE: Changing the ECG
wave gain does not
affect the arrhythmia
algorithm.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
4 - 19
Troubleshooting
Arrhythmia and ST Analysis
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No ECG Waveform
Gain set too low.
Readjust the ECG wave gain as
required. Refer to the Wave Gain
Tab (System) for instructions on
changing the wave gain setting.
NOTE: Changing the ECG
wave gain does not
affect the arrhythmia
algorithm.
Base Line Wander
*
4 - 20
Lead wires and patient cable
not fully or properly inserted.
Check for proper insertion.
Cable or lead wires
damaged.
Check with lead continuity tester.
Patient moving excessively.
Secure lead wires and cable to
patient.
Patient's respiration
Reposition electrodes
Electrodes dry or loose
Repeat skin preparation and apply
fresh, moist electrodes.
Static build up around patient.
Check with biomedical engineer.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
5.0
Patient Setup Functions
This section describes patient setup at the Panorama Central Station.
• Demographics Tab
• Transfer Tab
• Discharge Tab
• Display Tab
• Standby Tab
• Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
• Print Setup Tab (Patient)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5-1
Demographics Tab
5.1
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
The Demographics tab (shown in FIGURE 5-1) allows for the entry and modification of
patient demographic information (such as name, age, and weight) and patient settings (such
as care group, pacer, arrhythmia, and ST). The Demographics tab is only accessible when
the selected patient tile is assigned to a monitoring device. The default settings for patient
demographics are defined by the Unit Choices tab, which is described in the “Unit Choices
Tab” on page 9-50.
The Demographics tab is available at the ViewStation (shown in FIGURE 5-3) but is for
viewing purposes only. When a patient tile is assigned at the ViewStation, it will always
display the demographic information of the associated host central station patient tile,
provided the patient tile is in an active state.
The Demographics tab is available at the WorkStation and may be used in the same
manner as it is at the central station. Similar to the central station, demographic changes
made to a patient tile at the WorkStation will be sent to the central station, View Only
Workstation, and bedside monitor (if applicable).
Automatic updating of the demographic information at the remote workstation will also occur
when communication is interrupted, for example:
• The monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode at the central station
• The monitoring device is not communicating with its host central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the ViewStation and/or the
WorkStation is lost (Central Communications Lost)
NOTE:
5.1.1
The host central station(s) C-LAN configuration settings and
the software installed at the remote location dictates the
functionality available for each patient tile. For additional
information, refer to ‘‘The ViewStation and the
WorkStation’’ on page 2-4.
Communications with the Panorama Gateway
If the central station is communicating with an Electronic Medical Records (EMR) system
through the Panorama Gateway, entry of demographic information into the Demographics
tab will differ slightly from the data entry instructions that follow. When using an EMR system,
any changes to patient demographics made at the central station and/or bedside monitor
will not be sent to the EMR system.
For the central station to be recognized by the EMR system, specific demographics content,
referred to as the “Patient Key”, must be entered in the Demographics tab. Each facility
has its own unique "Patient Key." The “Patient Key” consists of the required ID # and,
optionally, one or more of the following Patient Menu demographics fields:
• First Name
• Last Name
• Bed # (may be entered for Telepack devices only)
5-2
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
Once the correct "Patient Key" has been entered, communication with the EMR system must
be verified. Since the Panorama Gateway can be purchased with Admit/Discharge/Transfer
(ADT) messaging only, Results messaging only or ADT messaging with Results messaging, this
verification differs as follows:
ADT Messaging
For a Panorama Gateway that has ADT messaging, verify that communication with the EMR
system has been established as follows:
• If demographics information corresponding to the following fields was not part of the
“Patient Key” but was entered into the EMR system, these fields should auto-populate:
• ID #
• First name
• Last name
• Date of Birth
• Gender
• If the fields do not auto-populate, verify that the “Patient Key” was correctly entered and
that the patient demographics were entered in the EMR system. If the fields still do not
auto-populate after verification, contact the EMR administrator.
Results Messaging
For a Panorama Gateway that has Results messaging, verify that communication with the
EMR system has been established by checking the charting system to ensure that patient’s
vital signs data has been uploaded. If the charting system is not displaying this information,
contact the EMR administrator.
5.1.2
Accessing the Demographics Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The Demographics tab is
displayed.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital or waveform area. The Demographics tab
is enabled.
FIGURE 5-1 Demographics Tab (Central Station using a Bedside Monitor device)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5-3
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
FIGURE 5-2 Demographics Tab (WorkStation using a Bedside Monitor device)
FIGURE 5-3 Demographics Tab - Bedside and/or Telepack (ViewStation)
NOTE:
5.1.3
The layout and functionality of the Demographics tab
changes based on the type of monitoring device assigned to
the patient tile.
Entering Data in the Demographics Tab
This section outlines entering and modifying data in the Demographics tab.
NOTE:
Patient demographic information cannot be edited at the
ViewStation.
Select the Patient to be Set Up/Modified
Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
Device Label Field
The Device Label field displays the identification label for the device assigned to the
selected patient tile.
The device label cannot be entered or modified in the Demographics tab. Device Label
data is entered and modified via the ‘‘Equipment Setup Tab’’ as described on page 9-33.
Bed Field
The Bed field is used to display and enter the label data for bed assignment. The Bed field
can only be entered, or modified, at the bedside monitor.
5-4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
NOTE:
When using a WMTS 608 bedside monitor, 15 characters
may be entered at the bedside monitor but only the first five
(5) characters will be displayed in the Bed field.
Entering a value in the Bed Field (Telepack)
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Bed field. The keyboard dialog box is
displayed.
2. Enter a bed value.
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard entry.
• The Close button discards the changes.
• The Enter button accepts the changes.
Last Name Field
The Last Name field is used to enter the last name of a patient. A patient's last name can
be entered at the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at
either the bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally
between the devices.
NOTE:
If the central station is communicating with an EMR system
via the Panorama Gateway, this field may auto-populate
once the “Patient Key” has been correctly entered.
1. Select the Last Name field. The keyboard dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter the patient’s last name (maximum of 15 characters).
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box.
• The Close button discards the changes.
• The Enter button accepts the changes.
First Name Field
The First Name field is used to enter the first name of a patient. A patient's first name can
be entered at the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at
either the bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally
between the devices.
NOTE:
If the central station is communicating with an EMR system
via the Panorama Gateway, this field may auto-populate
once the “Patient Key” has been correctly entered.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the First Name field. The keyboard dialog box
is displayed.
2. Enter the patient’s first name (maximum of 15 characters).
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5-5
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box.
• The Close button discards the changes.
• The Enter button accepts the changes.
For additional information, refer to ‘‘Simultaneous Patient Demographic Tab Editing’’ on
page 5-17.
ID Field
The ID field is used to enter the ID of a patient. A patient's ID can be entered at the bedside
monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at either the bedside, or at the
central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally between the devices.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the ID field. The keyboard dialog is displayed.
2. Enter the patient’s ID.
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled. Accept or reject the text entered in
the keyboard dialog box.
For additional information, refer to ‘‘Simultaneous Patient Demographic Tab Editing’’ on
page 5-17.
Height Fields
The Height field is used to enter the height of a patient. A patient's height can be entered at
the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at either the
bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally between the
devices.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Height field. The Height dialog box (shown
in FIGURE 5-4) is displayed.
FIGURE 5-4 Height Dialog Box
5-6
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
2. Rotate the dial control or use the arrow buttons to select a value in the Height dialog
box. Refer to the following value ranges.
CONTROLS
INCHES (in)
CENTIMETERS (cm)
Range
8.0 to 120.0 in
20.0 to 305.0 cm
Dial Control
Increases number of inches when
turned in a clockwise direction
Increases number of centimeters
when turned in a clockwise
direction
Decreases number of centimeters
when turned in a counter-clockwise
direction
Decreases number of inches when
turned in a counter-clockwise direction
Single arrow
Increases/decreases inches by 0.5 in
until 20.0 in is reached
Increases/decreases cm by 1.0 cm
until 120.0 cm is reached
Increases/decreases inches by 1.0 in
until 120.0 in is reached
Double arrow
Increases/decreases inches by 5.0 in
until 20.0 in is reached
Increases/decreases cm by 10.0
cm until 305.0 cm is reached
Increases/decreases inches by 10.0 in
until 120.0 in is reached
3. Accept or reject the value in the Height dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the selection.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Demographics tab.
For additional information, refer to ‘‘Simultaneous Patient Demographic Tab Editing’’ on
page 5-17.
Gender Field
The Gender field is used to enter the gender of a patient. A patient's gender can be entered
at the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at either the
bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally between the
devices.
NOTE:
If the central station is communicating with an EMR system
via the Panorama Gateway, this field may auto-populate
once the “Patient Key” has been correctly entered.
Select the Gender button until the desired gender selection is displayed.
Weight Field
The Weight field is used to enter the weight of a patient. A patient's weight can be entered
at the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered at either the
bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally between the
devices.
For additional information regarding the Weight dialog box, refer to the “Weight Dial
Dialog” on page 2-19.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5-7
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Weight field. The Weight dialog box (shown in
FIGURE 5-5 and FIGURE 5-6) is displayed.
FIGURE 5-5 Weight Dialog Box
(Passport 2, all patient
sizes)
FIGURE 5-6 Weight Dialog Box
(Spectrum, Neonate patient
size)
2. Rotate the dial control or use the arrow buttons to select a value in the Weight dialog
box. Refer to the following value ranges.
3. Rotate the dial control or use the arrow buttons to select a value in the Weight dialog
box. Refer to the following value ranges.
TABLE 5-1 Spectrum (Adult and Pediatric patient size)
CONTROLS
POUNDS (lbs)
KILOGRAMS (kgs)
Range
1 lb to 1100 lbs
1 kg to 500 kg
Pound/Kilogram Dial
Control
Increases number of pounds when
turned in a clockwise direction
Decreases number of pounds
when turned in a
counter-clockwise direction
Increases number of kilograms
when turned in a clockwise
direction
Decreases number of kilograms
when turned in a counter-clockwise
direction
Single arrow
Increases/decreases by 1 lb each
time button is selected
Increases/decreases by 1 kg each
time button is selected
Double arrow
Increases/decreases by 10 lbs
each time button is selected
Increases/decreases by 10 kgs
each time button is selected
TABLE 5-2 Spectrum (Neonate patient size)
CONTROLS
5-8
POUNDS (lbs)
KILOGRAMS (kgs)
Range
Refer to TABLE 5-1
10 kg to 10000 kg
Single arrow
Refer to TABLE 5-1
Increases/decreases by 10 kgs
each time button is selected
Double arrow
Refer to TABLE 5-1
Increases/decreases by 100
kgs each time button is selected
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
TABLE 5-3 Spectrum (Neonate patient size)
CONTROLS
POUNDS (lbs)
KILOGRAMS (kgs)
Range
0 lb to 22 lbs
Refer to TABLE 5-2
0 oz to 15 oz
Refer to TABLE 5-2
Pound Dial Control
Increases number of pounds when
turned in a clockwise direction
Refer to TABLE 5-2
Decreases number of pounds when
turned in a counter-clockwise direction
Ounces Dial Control
Increases number of ounces when
turned in a clockwise direction
Refer to TABLE 5-2
Decreases number of ounces when
turned in a counter-clockwise direction
TABLE 5-4 Passport 2 (All patient sizes) and Telepack (Adult patient size)
CONTROLS
POUNDS (lbs)
KILOGRAMS (kgs)
Range
0.1 to 1100.0 lbs
0.1 to 500.0 kg
Pound/Kilogram
Dial Control
Increases number of pounds when
turned in a clockwise direction
Increases number of kilograms when
turned in a clockwise direction
Decreases number of pounds when
turned in a counter-clockwise
direction
Decreases number of kilograms when
turned in a counter-clockwise direction
0.1 (Increases/decreases by 0.1 lb
each time button is selected until 10.0
lbs is reached)
0.1 (Increases/decreases by 0.1 kg
each time button is selected until 10.0
kg is reached)
0.5 (Increases/decreases by 0.5 lbs
each time button is selected once
10.0 lbs is reached)
0.5 (Increases/decreases by 0.5 kgs
each time button is selected until 100.0
kgs is reached)
1.0 (Increases/decreases by 1.0 lbs
each time button is selected until
1100.0 lbs is reached)
1.0 (Increases/decreases by 1.0 kgs
each time button is selected until 500.0
kgs is reached)
0.1 (Increases/decreases by 1.0 lb
each time button is selected until 10.0
is reached)
1.0 (Increases/decreases by 1.0 kg
each time button is selected until 10.0
kg is reached)
5.0 (Increases/decreases by 5.0 lbs
each time button is selected once
100.0 lbs is reached)
5.0 (Increases/decreases by 5.0 kgs
each time button is selected until 100.0
kgs is reached)
10.0 (Increases/decreases by 10.0
lbs each time button is selected until
1100.0 lbs is reached)
10.0 (Increases/decreases by 10.0
kgs each time button is selected until
500.0 kgs is reached)
Single arrow
Double arrow
4. Accept or reject the selection made in the Weight dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the selection.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Demographics tab.
For additional information, refer to ‘‘Simultaneous Patient Demographic Tab Editing’’ on
page 5-17.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5-9
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
Patient Size Field
The Patient Size field is used to identify the size of the patient in the selected patient tile.
The options for patient size include Adult, Pediatric and Neonate. The default patient size is
Adult.
The value for the Patient Size field must be selected at the bedside monitor.
NOTE:
Verify monitoring settings when the Patient Size is changed.
Date Of Birth Field
The Date Of Birth field is used to enter the patient’s date of birth. A patient's date of birth
can be entered at the bedside monitor or the Panorama Central Station. Information entered
at either the bedside, or at the central station, is automatically transmitted bi-directionally
between the devices.
NOTE:
If the central station is communicating with an EMR system
via the Panorama Gateway, this field may auto-populate
once the “Patient Key” has been correctly entered.
To enter a date of birth:
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Date Of Birth field. The Date Of Birth
dialog box (shown in FIGURE 5-7) is displayed.
Edit Box
Dial Control
FIGURE 5-7 Date Of Birth Dialog Box
2. Rotate the dial controls to select the month, day and year values. Refer to the following
value ranges.
TIME FRAME
RANGE
Month
1 to 12
Day
Dependant on the month selected
Year
1891 to current year
3. Accept or reject the selection made in the Date Of Birth dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the selections.
• The Cancel button discards the selections, closes the dialog box and returns to the
Demographics tab.
5 - 10
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
For additional information, refer to ‘‘Simultaneous Patient Demographic Tab Editing’’ on
page 5-17.
Doctor Field
The Doctor field is used to enter the name of the patient’s doctor.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Doctor field. The keyboard dialog box is
displayed.
2. Enter the patient’s doctor (maximum of 15 characters).
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box.
• The Close button discards the changes.
• The Enter button accepts the changes.
Comments Field
The Comments field is used to enter notes for the selected patient tile.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Comments field. The keyboard dialog box is
displayed.
2. Enter a note (maximum of 31 characters).
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box.
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator displays when Caps Lock is enabled.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box.
• The Close button discards the changes.
• The Enter button accepts the changes.
5.1.3.1
Pacer Configuration
Select the Pacer sidebar button to adjust a patient’s Pacer Enhancement and Pacer
Filter settings. The default Pacer Settings are determined in the system setup Unit Choices
tab. For additional information regarding unit choices, refer to “Unit Choices Tab” on
page 9-50 and to “Monitoring a Pacemaker Patient” on page 4-9.
• Pacer Enhancement visually marks pacemaker-induced ECG complexes with a
colored vertical spike. It can be enabled or disabled in the Pacer Setting dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 5-8).
NOTE:
A yellow vertical spike will be displayed when a paced beat
has been detected and the ECG waveform color is not set to
yellow.
A green vertical spike will be displayed when a paced beat
has been detected and the ECG waveform color is set to
yellow.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 11
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• Pacer Filtering adjusts the time period during which pacemaker-induced ECG
complexes are filtered for ECG sampling. The preset options for the Pacer Filter are 0 to
80 ms (in increments of 20). The Pacer Filter is selected in the Pacer Setting dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 5-8).
FIGURE 5-8 Pacer Setting Dialog Box
To enter Pacer Settings:
NOTE:
For additional information regarding lead placement
procedures for pacemaker patients, refer to “Monitoring a
Pacemaker Patient” on page 4-9.
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Pacer sidebar button. The Pacer Setting
dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the Pacer Enhancement button to enable or disable this setting for the patient.
• A checkmark indicates that Pacer Enhancement is enabled.
• An empty box indicates that Pacer Enhancement is disabled.
3. Select the Pacer Filter button until the desired setting is displayed. The selections for
Pacer Filter range from 0 to 80 ms (in increments of 20).
4. Accept or reject the selections made in the Pacer Setting dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the selections.
• The Cancel button discards the selections, closes the dialog box and returns to the
Demographics tab.
5.1.3.2
Arrhythmia Setup
Select the Arrhythmia sidebar button to:
• Enable or disable arrhythmia analysis (for Telepack device only)
• Adjust the system default V-Tach Rate, Asystole Delay, V-Tach Thresholds, and ECG
Noise Delay.
NOTE:
5 - 12
The Arrhythmia sidebar button is not available at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
FIGURE 5-9 Arrhythmia Menu Dialog Box (Telepack)
FIGURE 5-10 Arrhythmia Menu Dialog Box (Bedside)
1. Select the All Arrhythmia On/Off check box button (shown in FIGURE 5-9) to enable or
disable arrhythmia analysis for the system.
• A checkmark in the All Arrhythmia On/Off box indicates that arrhythmia analysis is
enabled.
• An empty box indicates that arrhythmia analysis is disabled.
NOTE:
Arrhythmia analysis can be enabled for Telepack devices if
an Arrhythmia license is available. When arrhythmia
analysis is enabled, a license is automatically assigned to a
patient.
NOTE:
The All Arrhythmia On/Off check box button is only
displayed and enabled when using a Telepack device. This
check box is not available when using a bedside monitor
(shown in FIGURE 5-10). Arrhythmia analysis must be
enabled or disabled at the beside monitor.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 13
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
2. Rotate the dial control to change the V-Tach Rate. The range available is 100-180 bpm,
in 5 bpm increments.
3. Select the Asystole Delay button to change the asystole delay time for arrhythmia
processing. When using a 3 or 5-wire lead set, the range available is 3-10 seconds.
When using a View 12™ card, the range available is 3-8 seconds.
4. Select the V-Tach Threshold button to change the V-Tach threshold settings. The range
available is 3-15 beats.
5. Select the ECG Noise Delay button to change the noise delay setting. The range
available is 3-30 seconds.
NOTE:
The ECG Noise Delay button is only displayed and enabled
when using a Telepack device. This button is not available
when using a bedside monitor (shown in FIGURE 5-10). ECG
Noise Delay must be enabled or disabled at the beside
monitor.
6. Accept or reject the selections made in the dialog box.
• Select the Done button to accept the selections.
• Select the Cancel button to discard the selections, close the dialog box and return to
the Unit Choices tab.
For additional information, refer to ‘‘Simultaneous Patient Demographic Tab Editing’’ on
page 5-17.
5.1.3.3
Configuring Care Groups
Select the Care Group sidebar button to assign a specific care group to a patient tile. Care
groups allow user-defined categorization of patient tiles. Care groups may represent a
care-giver, hospital department, or a special condition. Each care group button has a color
indicator that, when assigned to a patient, appears to the right of the VIEW button in the
patient tile. The system default settings for Care Groups are defined in the System Care
Group tab. For additional information, refer to the “Care Group Tab” on page 9-9.
The Care Group tab and the associated colorized indicators are not available at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
To select a care group:
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Care Group sidebar button. The Care
Group dialog box (shown in FIGURE 5-11) is displayed.
Care Group Button
FIGURE 5-11 Care Group Dialog Box
5 - 14
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
2. Select a Care Group button.
3. Accept or reject the Care Group selection.
• The Done button accepts the care group selection.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Demographics tab.
5.1.3.4
Settings (Telepack)
Select the Settings sidebar button to establish the type of ECG monitoring filter that will be
used for the Telepack device at the central station or the WorkStation. There are two types of
monitoring available:
NOTE:
The Settings sidebar button is not available at the
ViewStation.
• The Monitor filter establishes the frequency response range for non-ST ECG monitoring.
• The ST filter establishes the frequency response range for ST diagnostic monitoring.
To enter settings for a Telepack:
1. From the Demographics tab, select the Settings sidebar button. The Settings dialog
box (shown in FIGURE 5-12) is displayed.
FIGURE 5-12 Settings Dialog Box
2. Select the ST (optional) check box to enable or disable ST analysis for the selected
patient.
• A checkmark in the ST box indicates that ST analysis is enabled.
• An empty box indicates that ST analysis is disabled.
• When the ST check box is empty, the Monitor filter is automatically enabled.
NOTE:
If ST licenses are available, an ST license is automatically
assigned to the patient when ST is enabled.
NOTE:
When using a 3-lead set, ST is performed on the lead being
viewed.
3. Select the Monitor or ST filter mode.
NOTE:
One filter box must always be populated. When a filter
mode is selected, the other mode is automatically disabled.
• A checkmark in the Monitor filter box indicates that the Monitor filter is enabled and
ST analysis is disabled.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 15
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• A checkmark in the ST filter box indicates that the ST analysis is enabled and the
Monitor filter is disabled.
4. Accept or reject the selections.
• The Done button accepts the selections.
• The Cancel button discards the selections, closes the dialog box and returns to the
Demographics tab.
5.1.3.5
Retrieving Discharged Patients
Select the Retrieve Discharged Pt. sidebar button to retrieve a patient from the discharge
list. A patient is only added to the discharge list if at least two of the three demographic fields
(First Name, Last Name, ID) were previously entered.
NOTE:
The Retrieve Discharged Pt. sidebar button is not available
at the ViewStation or the WorkStation.
The Retrieve Discharged Patient Setting view (shown in FIGURE 5-13) provides a list
of the discharged patients that can be retrieved. The list has four columns labeled First Name,
Last Name, ID, and Discharge Time. Each row in the list contains at least two of the three
demographic indicators and the discharge time for a patient. The list displays the 15 most
recently discharged patients. When the next patient is added to the list, the oldest patient
data on the list is removed and permanently deleted from the system.
• A discharged patient can be retrieved into a patient tile that is not actively monitoring a
patient.
• A discharged patient can be retrieved into any patient tile that has an assigned device.
• A discharged patient can be retrieved into a tile assigned a different monitoring device
than was previously assigned to that patient.
Retrieving a discharged patient into a patient tile:
• Allows for active monitoring of the retrieved patient
• Restores Trend, Event, and Disclosure records
• Restores Wave Gain and Trend Display settings
• Restores patient’s alarm limit settings to reflect those at the bedside monitor
• Does not restore patient’s alarm limit settings when using a Telepack device
NOTE:
If the destination device and the source device are different,
the source devices sensor display setup will be reset to the
system default settings of the destination device.
To retrieve a discharged patient:
1. Select the Retrieve Discharged Pt. sidebar button in the Demographics tab. The
Retrieve Discharged Patient Setting view (shown in FIGURE 5-13) is displayed.
5 - 16
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
FIGURE 5-13 Retrieve Discharged Patient Setting View
2. Select the patient to be retrieved.
3. Accept or reject the patient retrieval in the Retrieve Discharged Patient Setting
view.
• The Done button accepts the patient retrieval.
• The Cancel button discards the patient retrieval, closes the view, and returns to the
Demographics tab.
5.1.3.6
Simultaneous Patient Demographic Tab Editing
Bedside Menu
If using a bedside device with the Panorama Central Station, patient demographic changes
cannot be made at the bedside monitor, central station, and the WorkStation simultaneously.
The bedside device will take precedence, followed by the central station, ending with the
WorkStation. When an attempt is made to make changes simultaneously, the message
These settings are currently being edited remotely. will be displayed at the central
station or WorkStation, depending on where the change was initiated. If there are multiple
WorkStations on the network, the first WorkStation that initiates the change will take
precedence over any other WorkStation attempting to implement the same change.
These are the scenarios in which this message will be displayed:
Patient Menu (Passport 2, Spectrum, and Spectrum OR only)
• The Patient Menu is active at the bedside monitor and then the Demographics tab is
opened at the central station or the WorkStation
• The Demographics tab is active at the central station or WorkStation and then the
Patient Menu is opened at the bedside monitor
Arrhythmia Menu (Passport 2, Spectrum, and Spectrum OR only)
• The Arrhythmia Menu is active at the bedside monitor and then the Arrhythmia Menu
dialog is opened at the central station
• The Arrhythmia Menu dialog is active at the central station and then the Arrhythmia
Menu is opened at the bedside monitor
CO Setup Menu (applies to the Spectrum and Spectrum OR only)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 17
Demographics Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• The CO Setup Menu is active at the bedside monitor and then the Demographics
tab is opened at the central station or the WorkStation
• The Demographics tab is active at the central station or the WorkStation and then
the CO Setup Menu is opened at the bedside monitor
Hemodynamic Calculations Menu (applies to the Spectrum and Spectrum OR
only)
• The Hemodynamic Calculations Menu is active at the bedside monitor and then the
Demographics tab is opened at the central station or the WorkStation
• The Demographics tab is active at the central station or the WorkStation and then
the Hemodynamic Calculations Menu is opened at the bedside monitor
Drug Calculator (applies to the Spectrum and Spectrum OR only)
• The Drug Calculator is active at the bedside monitor and then the Demographics
tab is opened at the central station or the WorkStation
• The Demographics tab is active at the central station or the WorkStation and then
the Drug Calculator is opened at the bedside monitor
Central Station or WorkStation
The message These settings are currently being edited remotely. will be displayed
at the WorkStation when the WorkStation Demographics tab is active and then the
Demographics tab is opened at the central station. In this scenario, the central station will
take precedence, followed by the WorkStation.
This message will also be displayed at the WorkStation when the WorkStation patient
Alarm Limits or Alarm Responses tab is active and then the Alarm Limits or Alarm
Responses tab is opened at the central station. In this scenario, the central station will take
precedence, followed by the WorkStation.
Acknowledging the Message
To close the These settings are currently being edited remotely. message dialog,
select the OK button. Acknowledging this message will convert the Demographics tab at
the central station or WorkStation to a read-only state and editing will not be permitted. Once
the menu at the bedside device or central station is closed or times out (timeout applies to
bedside device only), the Demographics tab will become active again and editing can
resume.
Unsaved central station or WorkStation changes made in the First Name keyboard dialog,
Date Of Birth dialog, Height dialog box, ID keyboard dialog, Last Name keyboard dialog,
Weight dialog box, or Arrhythmia Menu (applies to central station only) dialog box will be
discarded.
For additional information regarding the bedside monitor menus, refer to bedside monitor’s
Operating Instructions for the Passport 2® (P/N 0070-00-0649-XX), Spectrum™ (P/N
0070-00-0648-XX), or Spectrum OR™ (P/N 0070-00-0670-XX).
5 - 18
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
NOTE:
5.1.4
While the Demographics tab is in a read-only state because
the Patient Menu is open at the bedside, the Pacer,
Arrhythmia, and Care Group sidebar buttons will be
enabled.
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Pacer
This sidebar button was previously described on page 5-11.
Arrhythmia
This sidebar button was previously described on page 5-12.
Care Group
This sidebar button was previously described on page 5-14.
Retrieve Discharged Pt.
This sidebar button was previously described on page 5-16.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 19
Demographics Tab
5.1.5
Patient Setup Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Demographics tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Can not admit Patient to
this tile. No Device
attached to this tile
There is no device assigned to
the selected tile.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a patient
tile that has a device attached
to it or attach a device to the
selected patient tile.
The Arrhythmia sidebar
button is disabled.
No equipment is assigned to
the patient tile.
Select a different patient tile.
The selected patient is in the
Standby mode.
Remove the selected patient tile
from Standby mode.
Monitoring device is in
Communications Lost state.
Restore communication to
central station.
The Arrhythmia Menu at the
bedside monitor is active.
Wait for the bedside monitor
Arrhythmia Menu to time out or
be closed or, use the bedside
monitor to make the necessary
arrhythmia changes.
The selected patient tile is in
Standby mode.
Remove the selected patient tile
from Standby mode.
The message These settings
are currently being edited
remotely is displayed.
Select the OK button to close
the message box and enable
the sidebar button.
The filter mode cannot be
Monitor when ST is on
Monitor mode cannot be
selected while ST is enabled.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Turn off ST
select the correct filter mode.
Turning on ST will change
your ECG filtering to ST
mode
ST mode was selected while in
Monitor mode.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select the
correct filter mode.
Retrieve Discharged
Patient Failed: The
destination tile is
currently occupied.
A patient cannot be retrieved
into an occupied tile.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a vacant
patient tile before attempting to
retrieve a patient.
No demographic data is
displayed at ViewStation or
WorkStation for the selected
patient tile.
The host central station is in a
Central Communications Lost
mode.
Resolve the communication
error at the host central station.
Patient tile does not contain a
care group indicator
If viewing patient tile from the
central station, a care group
has not been indicated.
Assign the patient tile to a care
group.
Patient tile is being viewed
from a ViewStation or a
WorkStation, which does not
support this feature.
To discern if the patient is
assigned to a care group, view
the patient tile from the host
central station.
The Care Group dialog box
was closed while the bedside
device’s Patient Menu is active.
Select the OK button to close
the message box and enable
the sidebar button.
The Pacer, Care Group, and
the Retrieve Discharged
Pt. sidebar buttons are
disabled.
These settings are
currently being edited
remotely.
*
5 - 20
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Demographics Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Retrieve Discharged
Patient Settings tab was
closed while the bedside
device’s Patient Menu is active.
The Arrhythmia Menu dialog
box was closed while the
bedside device’s Patient Menu
is active.
The Pacer Settings dialog box
was closed while the bedside
device’s Patient Menu is active.
The CO Setup Menu is opened
at the bedside monitor while
the Demographics tab is
active at the central station or
WorkStation.
The Demographics tab is
active at the central station or
WorkStation and then the CO
Setup Menu is opened at the
bedside monitor.
The Hemodynamic
Calculations Menu is opened
at the bedside monitor while
the Demographics tab is
active at the central station or
WorkStation.
The Demographics tab is
active at the central station or
WorkStation and then the
Hemodynamic Calculations
Menu is opened at the bedside
monitor.
The Arrhythmia Menu at the
central station was closed and
all changes were discarded.
The Arrhythmia Menu was
opened at the bedside monitor.
Use the bedside monitor to
make the arrhythmia changes.
Close the Arrhythmia Menu at
the bedside monitor and then
reenter the Arrhythmia Menu
dialog box at the central
station or WorkStation.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 21
Transfer Tab
5.2
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
The Transfer tab (shown in FIGURE 5-14) enables the transfer of a patient’s data from one
device to another. Two types of transfers can be performed through the Transfer tab:
• Room To Room Transfer Without Device
• Central To Central Transfer Without Device
The Transfer tab is not available at the ViewStation or the WorkStation. Patient transfers can
only be performed at a host central station.
5.2.1
Accessing the Transfer Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital tile or waveform area.
3. Select the Transfer tab. The Transfer tab is enabled.
.
FIGURE 5-14 Transfer Tab
5.2.2
Room To Room Transfer Without Device
A Room To Room Transfer Without Device is used to transfer patient data stored at
the Panorama Central Station from one patient tile (the source) to another (the destination).
Historical patient data is preserved upon successful completion of the transfer, with the
exception of historical paging data. If Paging is enabled at the central station, a successful
Room to Room Transfer Without Device shall delete any rows in the Failed Pages tab for the
transferred patient.
For information regarding changes that occur at the destination tile when the transfer is
complete, refer to ‘‘Effects of the Transfer’’ on page 5-23.
The Room To Room Without Device button is enabled under the following conditions:
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient is selected as the source
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient, but placed in Standby mode, is
selected as the source
5 - 22
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient, but experiencing a Communications
Lost event, is selected as the source
To perform a Room To Room Transfer Without Device:
1. Select the patient tile to be transferred. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data
or waveform area.
2. Select the Room To Room Without Device button. The following prompt is
displayed: Please touch tile to which you wish to transfer the patient.
3. Select a destination tile that has a device assigned. The message All of the patient's
data will be deleted in the destination tile. Do you still want to continue
with the transfer? is displayed.
• The Yes button initiates the transfer. As the transfer proceeds, there is no
indication in the Transfer tab.
If the destination tile is in Standby mode when the transfer is complete, the
digital data labels and the demographic information will be displayed in the
patient tile, but the digital data values and waveforms will not be displayed until
the device is returned to the normal monitoring mode.
If the destination tile is in a Communications Lost state when the transfer is
complete, the tile is blank and all buttons on the Transfer tab are unavailable.
The tile remains blank until communication has been re-established.
When the transfer is complete, the source tile is blank and the destination tile
remains blank until the patient is connected to the monitoring device.
If the destination tile is in a Waiting for Patient state when the transfer is
complete, the tile will display the Waiting for Patient message until the
destination device is activated.
NOTE:
When the transfer is complete, a Room Transfer
event and an Admit event are recorded in the Event
database.
NOTE:
After a Room To Room Transfer Without Device, the
patient’s Paging settings will remain the same.
•
5.2.2.1
The No button terminates the transfer and returns to the Transfer tab.
Effects of the Transfer
The following is a list of the changes that occur at the destination tile when a Room To
Room Transfer Without Device is complete:
Display
• The transferred patient's parameter display changes only when the destination device
does not support the source device parameters.
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 1 changes to ECG II when the
destination device does not support the source device's waveform 1 parameter and has a
5 lead ECG cable.
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 1 changes to the active lead when
the destination device does not support the source device's waveform 1 parameter and
has a 3 lead ECG cable.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 23
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 2 changes to OFF when the
destination device does not support the source device's waveform 2 parameter.
• If the source device is a bedside monitor, the units for CO2 and temperature will change
to that of the destination device.
• If the destination device and the source device are different, the source devices sensor
display setup will be reset to the system default settings of the destination device.
• The care group is set to the system default at the destination device.
Demographics
• For all transfers to a bedside monitor, the bed ID and patient size change to those of the
destination device. The remaining demographic data only changes when the destination
device has experienced a Communications Lost event. When communication is
re-established, the remaining demographic data is taken from the destination device.
• For all transfers to a Panorama Telepack, the bed ID is cleared and the patient size
changes to Adult (the Telepack default). The remaining demographic data is preserved.
Alarms
• The transferred patient's Alarm Limits, Alarm Delay, and ST Alarm Delay change to those
of the destination device.
• All alarms for the transferred patient become enabled, discontinuing all Alarm Suspended
settings.
5.2.3
Central To Central Transfer Without Device
A Central To Central Transfer Without Device is used to transfer patient data stored
at one Panorama Central Station to a different Panorama Central Station. Historical patient
data is preserved upon successful completion of the transfer, with the exception of historical
failed page data. If Paging is enabled at the central station, a successful Central To Central
Transfer Without Device will delete any rows in the Failed Pages tab for the transferred
patient.
The Central To Central Without Device button is enabled under the following
conditions:
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient is selected as the source
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient, but placed in Standby mode, is
selected as the source
• When a patient tile actively monitoring a patient, but experiencing a Communications
Lost event, is selected as the source
For information regarding changes that occur at the destination tile when the transfer is
complete, refer to ‘‘Effects of the Transfer’’ on page 5-27.
5.2.3.1
Source Panorama
1. A prerequisite for the transfer is that certain patient demographic information must exist.
In the patient tile to be transferred, ensure that the appropriate information has been
provided in at least two of the three demographic fields (Last Name, First Name, and
ID).
5 - 24
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
2. Ensure that the device name for the Source Panorama is properly entered into the
Equipment List at the Destination Panorama, as described in the ‘‘Equipment Setup Tab’’
on page 9-33.
3. Ensure that the device name for the Destination Panorama is properly entered into the
Equipment List at the Source Panorama, as described in the ‘‘Equipment Setup Tab’’ on
page 9-33.
4. Select the patient tile to be transferred. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data
or waveform area.
5. Select the Central To Central Without Device button. The Select Destination
Panorama list box (shown in FIGURE 5-15) is displayed.
FIGURE 5-15 Select Destination Panorama List Box
6. Select the Destination Panorama device from the Select Destination Panorama list
box.
• Select the Done button. The message Are you sure you want to transfer the
selected patient? is displayed with the following two choices:
• Select the Yes button to initiate the first part of the transfer process and
return to the Transfer tab. In the Transfer tab, the message Central
Transfer in progress is displayed next to the Central To Central
Without Device button, which has been disabled.
• Select the No button to terminate the transfer and return to the Transfer
tab.
• Select the Cancel button to terminate the transfer and return to the Transfer tab.
If the transfer process is initiated, it will continue as described in following section,
“Destination Panorama”. As the transfer process continues, the procedure will refer to
messages and a progress bar that will display at the Source Panorama.
5.2.3.2
Destination Panorama
When a Central To Central Transfer Without Device has been requested from
another Panorama Central Station, the message Transfer In Request from [the Source
Panorama name]. Accept/Reject in Transfer Dialog. is displayed in the system
status line of the Destination Panorama.
1. At the Destination Panorama, select a tile that has a monitoring device attached.
2. From the menu bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
Patient Setup are displayed.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 25
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
3. Select the Transfer tab. The Transfer tab (shown in FIGURE 5-14) is displayed.
4. Select the Accept/Reject button on the Transfer tab. The Transferred In Patient
view (shown in FIGURE 5-16) is displayed.
FIGURE 5-16 Transferred In Patient View
• Select the Accept button. The message All of the patient's data will be deleted in
the destination tile. Do you still want to continue with the transfer? is
displayed with the following two choices:
• The Yes button begins the transfer and returns to the Transfer tab. While the transfer
is in progress, the following conditions exist:
In the Transfer tab of the Destination Panorama, the message Incoming
Transfer In progress is displayed next to the Accept/Reject Patient button,
which has been disabled. A progress bar displays below the Accept/Reject
Patient button.
In the Transfer tab of the Source Panorama, a progress bar displays below the
Central To Central Without Device button.
If the destination tile is in Standby mode when the transfer is complete, the digital data
displays but the waveform does not display. Upon returning to normal monitoring mode,
the waveform is displayed.
If the destination tile is in a Communications Lost state when the transfer is complete,
the tile is blank and all buttons on the Transfer tab are unavailable. The tile remains
blank until communication has been re-established.
If the destination tile is in a Waiting for Patient state when the transfer is complete, the
tile will display the Waiting for Patient message until the destination device is activated.
When the transfer is complete, the message Transfer In Complete is displayed on the
system status line of the Destination Panorama and the message Transfer Out
Complete is displayed on the system status line of the Source Panorama.
When the transfer is complete, the source tile is blank and the destination tile remains
blank until the patient is connected to the monitoring device.
NOTE:
When the transfer is complete, a Central Transfer event and
an Admit event are recorded in the event database.
• The No button returns to the Transfer tab without terminating the transfer.
5 - 26
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
• The Reject button terminates the transfer and returns to the Transfer tab. The message
Transfer Out rejected by [the Destination Panorama name] Central. is
displayed in the system status line of the Source Panorama.
• The Cancel button returns to the Transfer tab without terminating the transfer.
NOTE:
A Central To Central Transfer Without Device can fail if the
network connection is lost or if either Panorama loses
power during the process. If a Central To Central Transfer
Without Device fails while in progress, the patient
information from the source tile is saved to a Failed Transfer
List at the Source Panorama.
The Failed Transfer List stores a maximum of five failed
transfers. If the maximum is reached, the Central To Central
Without Device button is disabled. A Central To Central
Transfer Without Device cannot be initiated until at least one
of the failed transfers is either recovered, deleted or
transferred using one of the sidebar buttons in the Transfer
tab. For additional information, refer to ‘‘Sidebar Buttons’’
on page 5-28.
5.2.3.3
Effects of the Transfer
The following is a list of the changes that occur at the destination tile when a Central To
Central Transfer Without Device is complete:
Display
• The transferred patient's parameter display changes, but only when the destination
device does not support the source device parameters.
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 1 changes to ECG II when the
destination device does not support the source device's waveform 1 parameter and has a
5-lead ECG cable.
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 1 changes to the active lead when
the destination device does not support the source device's waveform 1 parameter and
has a 3-lead ECG cable.
• The transferred patient's parameter display waveform 2 changes to OFF when the
destination device does not support the source device's waveform 2 parameter.
• If the source device is a bedside monitor, the units for CO2 and temperature will change
to that of the destination device.
• If the destination device and the source device are different, the source devices sensor
display setup will be reset to the system default settings of the destination device.
• The care group is set to the system default at the destination device.
Demographics
• For all transfers to a bedside monitor, the bed ID and patient size change to those of the
destination device. The remaining demographic data only changes when the destination
device has experienced a Communications Lost event. When communication is
re-established, the remaining demographic data is taken from the destination device.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 27
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• For all transfers to a Panorama Telepack, the bed ID is cleared and the patient size
changes to Adult (the Telepack default). The remaining demographic data is preserved.
Alarms
• The transferred patient's Alarm Limits, Alarm Delay and ST Alarm Delay change to those
of the destination device.
5.2.4
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Recover Patient
When a Central To Central Transfer Without Device has failed, the Recover
Patient sidebar button is used to retrieve patient information that was collected in the Failed
Transfer List.
The list box in the Recover Failed Transfer Patients view (shown in FIGURE 5-17) has
three columns labeled First Name, Last Name and ID. The list contains at least two of these
three demographic indicators.
1. Select a destination tile on the Source Panorama to which the patient information is to be
recovered. Ensure that the destination tile has a device assigned.
2. Select the Recover Patient sidebar button. The Recover Failed Transfer Patients
view is displayed.
FIGURE 5-17 Recover Failed Transfer Patients View
3. Select the patient whose information is to be recovered from the list.
• Select the Recover button. The message All of the patient's data will be deleted
in the destination tile. Do you still want to continue with the transfer? is
displayed with the following two choices:
• The Yes button deletes all of the patient’s data that may have been previously stored
for the destination tile, returns to the Transfer tab and the recovery process begins.
When the recovery is complete, the patient information is removed from the Failed
5 - 28
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
Transfer List and the destination tile displays the recovered patient information, except
in the following situations:
• If the destination tile is in Standby mode when the recovery is complete, the
digital data displays but the waveform does not display. Upon returning to normal
monitoring mode, the waveform is displayed.
• If the destination tile is in a Communications Lost state when the recovery is
complete, the tile is blank and all buttons on the Transfer tab are unavailable.
The tile remains blank until communication has been re-established. Once
communication is re-established, the destination tile will populate with the
demographic information available at the destination bedside monitor.
• The No button terminates the recovery process and returns to the Transfer tab.
• Select the Cancel button to return to the Transfer tab.
Delete Failed Patient
When the Failed Transfer List has reached its maximum of five failed transfers, the Delete
Failed Patient sidebar button is used to delete patient information from the list.
The list box in the Delete Failed Transfer Patients view (shown in FIGURE 5-18) has
three columns labeled First Name, Last Name and ID. The list will contain at least two of
these three demographic indicators.
1. Select the Delete Failed Patient sidebar button. The Delete Failed Transfer
Patients view is displayed.
FIGURE 5-18 Delete Failed Transfer Patients View
2. Select the patient whose information is to be deleted from the list.
• Select the Delete button. The message Are you sure that you want to delete
this failed transfer? is displayed with the following choices:
NOTE:
If the Yes button is selected, all of the patient’s data will be
unrecoverable. Once the patient is deleted from the list, the
patient will not be displayed in the Retrieve Discharged List
and therefore, cannot be retrieved.
• Selecting the Yes button when the Delete Failed Transfer Patient list is empty deletes all
of the selected patients data from the Failed Transfer List and then returns to the
Transfer tab.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 29
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
• Selecting the Yes button when the Delete Failed Transfer Patient list contains more
patients will delete all of the selected patients data from the Failed Transfer List and
then keep the Delete Failed Transfer Patients list open.
• When the deletion is complete, the patient information is removed from the Delete
Failed Transfer Patient list.
• The No button terminates the deletion process and returns to the Transfer tab.
• The Cancel button returns to the Transfer tab.
Transfer From Failed List
The Transfer From Failed List sidebar button is used to resume a transfer of patient
information that was collected in the Failed Transfer List when a Central To Central
Transfer Without Device failed. The patient data and settings collected in the Failed
Transfer List at one Panorama Central Station are transferred to a room in an area monitored
by a different Panorama Central Station. Historical patient data is preserved upon successful
completion of the transfer.
The list box in the Transfer Failed Transfer Patients view (shown in FIGURE 5-19) has
three columns labeled First Name, Last Name and ID. The list contains at least two of these
three demographic indicators.
1. Select the Transfer From Failed List sidebar button. The Transfer Failed Transfer
Patients view is displayed.
FIGURE 5-19 Transfer Failed Transfer Patients View
2. Select the patient whose information is to be transferred from the list.
• The Transfer button displays the Select Destination Panorama list box (shown in
FIGURE 5-15) displays. Go to step 6 on page 5-25 and continue the transfer process.
When a Destination Panorama is selected, the patient information is removed from the
Failed Transfer List.
• The Cancel button returns to the Transfer tab.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
5 - 30
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.2.5
Transfer Tab
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Transfer tab.
Room To Room Transfer
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Patient tile shown with
demographic text and
digital data labels, but no
waveforms and/or digital
values are displayed
The selected tile is still in the
Bedside and Panorama
Standby mode.
Return the monitoring device to its
active monitoring state.
The Room To Room
Without Device button
is disabled.
The Transfer Failed list is full.
The list stores a maximum of 5
failed transfers.
Delete a patient from this list before
transferring.
A patient tile is not selected
on the Main Screen.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The selected patient tile has a
device assigned but is not
monitoring a patient.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The selected patient tile has
no device assigned.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The Failed Patient List
is full. Delete a
patient from this list
before transferring.
The Transfer Failed list is full.
The list stores a maximum of 5
failed transfers.
Delete a patient from this list before
transferring.
Unable to select a patient
tile on the Panorama
Display.
A message box is currently
being displayed.
Close the message box or wait for it
to time out and close automatically.
The destination and
source tile cannot be
the same. Please try
again.
The original source tile was
selected when the prompt
“Please touch tile to which you
wish to transfer the patient.”
was displayed.
Restart the transfer process and
select an appropriate destination tile
when prompted. Do not select the
original source tile.
The destination tile
must have a device
assigned to perform
the transfer.
The destination tile does not
have a device assigned.
Restart the transfer process and
select a destination tile that has a
device assigned when prompted.
This Tab is in use by
another display. Can
not be updated from
more than one
display at the same
time.
An attempt was made to open
the Transfer tab on one
display when it is already
open on the other display.
Select the OK button and use the
open Transfer tab.
At the destination tile, the
digital data is displayed
but the waveform is not
displayed
The destination tile was in
Standby mode when the
transfer completed.
Return to normal monitoring mode.
Room to Room Transfer
Without device failed
Another tab was selected
during the transfer process.
Restart the transfer process and do
not select another tab until the
transfer process is complete.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 31
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
Room To Room Transfer (Continued)
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The destination tile is blank
and all buttons on the
Transfer tab are
unavailable.
The destination tile was in a
Communications Lost
state when the transfer
completed.
Re-establish communication.
Unable to perform
operation on tile:
Central to Central
Transfer Out in
progress
A Central to Central transfer
Out has been initiated at the
source central station but not
been accepted or rejected at
the destination central station
for the selected tile.
Accept or reject the transfer at the
destination central station, and then
initiate Room to Room Transfer
again.
A Central to Central transfer
Out is in process at the source
central station
Accept or reject the transfer at the
destination central station, and then
initiate Room to Room Transfer
again.
A Central to Central transfer
In is in progress for the
selected tile, which is actively
monitoring a patient, and a
Room to Room transfer is
attempted into the same
selected tile.
Wait until the Central to Central
transfer In is complete, then attempt
transfer again.
A Central to Central transfer
In has been initiated at the
source central station but not
accepted or rejected at the
destination central station for
the selected tile, and another
Central to Central transfer is
attempted for another patient
into the same selected tile.
Wait until the Central to Central
transfer In is complete, then attempt
transfer again.
The Central to Central
Without Device button in the
Transfer Tab was selected
when a Central to Central
transfer In is in progress for
the selected tile, and the
selected tile is actively
monitoring a patient.
Wait until the Central to Central
transfer In is complete, then attempt
transfer again.
A Central to Central transfer
In is in progress for the
selected tile, which has an
assigned device that is not
actively monitoring a patient,
and a Room to Room transfer
for another patient is initiated
into the same selected tile.
Wait until the Central to Central
transfer In is complete, then attempt
transfer again.
The destination device has not
been activated.
Activate the destination device.
Unable to perform
operation on tile:
Central to Central
Transfer In in
progress.
The Waiting for
Patient message is
displayed in the heart rate
digital tile.
*
5 - 32
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
Central To Central Transfer
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Central To Central
Without Device button
is disabled.
The Transfer Failed list is full.
The list stores a maximum of 5
failed transfers.
Delete a patient from this list before
attempting to transfer.
A patient tile is not selected
on the Main Screen.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The selected patient tile has a
device assigned but is not
monitoring a patient.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The selected patient tile has
no device assigned.
Select the patient tile that is intended
to be transferred.
The Failed Patient List
is full. Delete a
patient from this list
before transferring.
The Transfer Failed list is full.
The list stores a maximum of 5
failed transfers.
Delete a patient from this list before
transferring.
Available central list
is empty.
There are no central stations
found on the network.
Contact the System Administrator for
assistance.
The patient cannot be
transferred because
at least two of the
following fields: First
Name, Last Name or
ID has not been
entered.
The appropriate information
has not been entered into at
least two of the three
demographic fields (Last
Name, First Name and ID) on
the Demographics tab.
Enter the appropriate information
into at least two of the three
demographic fields (Last Name, First
Name, and ID) on the
Demographics tab.
Selecting the Done button
on the Select Destination
Panorama list box
terminates the transfer and
returns to the Transfer tab.
A Destination Panorama
device was not selected from
the list box before selecting
the Done button.
Repeat the transfer procedure and
ensure that a Destination Panorama
device is selected from the Select
Destination Panorama list box before
selecting the Done button.
Transfer Out Rejected.
Timeout at [the
Destination
Panorama name]
Central.
The Accept/Reject Patient
button on the Transfer tab at
the Destination Panorama was
not selected within 10 minutes
of initiating the Central To
Central Transfer Without
Device.
Repeat the transfer procedure and
ensure that the Accept/Reject
Patient button on the Transfer tab
at the Destination Panorama is
selected within 10 minutes of
initiating the transfer.
Transfer In Request
from [the Source
Panorama name]
cancelled due to user
timeout.
At the Destination Panorama,
either the Accept or Reject
button on the Transferred In
Patient view of the Transfer
tab was not selected within
10 minutes of initiating the
Central To Central Transfer
Without Device.
Repeat the transfer procedure and
ensure that either the Accept or
Reject button on the Transferred In
Patient view of the Transfer tab is
selected within 10 minutes of
initiating the Central To Central
Transfer Without Device.
Transfer In Request
from [the Source
Panorama name]
rejected: Transfer In
already in progress
A transfer in was initiated and
accepted at the destination
central station, and then
another transfer in to the same
destination central station is
attempted.
Wait until the first transfer in is
complete, then repeat transfer
procedure.
The Accept/Reject
Patient button is
disabled.
A transfer request has not
been received from any other
Panorama Central Station.
This does not require a solution.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 33
Transfer Tab
Patient Setup Functions
Central To Central Transfer (Continued)
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The destination tile
must have a device
assigned to perform
the transfer.
The destination tile does not
have a device assigned.
Select the OK button on the message
box and then select a destination tile
that has a device assigned.
Please touch tile to
which you wish to
transfer the patient.
A destination tile has not been
selected at the Destination
Panorama.
Select a destination tile that has a
device assigned.
Failed Transfer Out:
System Error.
(Source Panorama)
The selected Destination
Panorama device was not
properly defined in the
equipment list.
Repeat the transfer procedure and
ensure that the desired Destination
Panorama device is properly defined
in the Equipment List.
There is an interruption in the
network connection between
the Source and Destination
Panoramas.
Determine the cause of the
interruption and correct.
The selected Destination
Panorama device was not
properly defined in the
equipment list.
Repeat the transfer procedure and
ensure that the desired Destination
Panorama device is properly defined
in the Equipment List.
There is an interruption in the
network connection between
the Source and Destination
Panoramas.
Determine the cause of the
interruption and rectify.
This Tab is in use by
another display. Can
not be updated from
more than one
display at the same
time.
An attempt was made to open
the Transfer tab on one
display when it is already
open on the other display.
Select the OK button and use the
open the Transfer tab.
At the destination tile, the
digital data is displayed
but the waveform is not
displayed
The destination tile was in
Standby mode when the
transfer completed.
Return to normal monitoring mode.
ID number truncated.
More than 10 characters
were entered in the ID field at
the WMTS 608 bedside
device.
Do not enter more than 10
characters when using a WMTS 608
bedside device because only 10
characters will be transferred to the
central station.
The destination tile is blank
and all buttons on the
Transfer tab are
unavailable.
The destination tile was in a
Communications Lost
state when the transfer
completed.
Re-establish communication.
Waiting for Patient
message is displayed in
the heart rate digital tile.
The destination device has not
been activated.
Activate the destination device.
Available monitor list
is empty.
The Central To Central
Transfer Without Device
button was selected but there
are no other Panorama
devices on the network.
Try and transfer to another central
station on a different network. If
unsuccessful, contact the System
Administrator for assistance.
Failed Transfer In:
System Error.
(Destination Panorama)
*
5 - 34
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Transfer Tab
Recovering Failed Transfer Patient Data
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Recover Failed
Transfer sidebar button
is disabled.
The Failed Transfer List is
empty.
No solution required.
Selecting the Recover
button has no effect.
A patient has not been
selected from the Failed
Transfer List.
Select the patient whose information
is to be recovered from the list and
then select the Recover button.
Select the tile to place
the recovered patient
in
A destination tile on the
Source Panorama was not
selected before pressing the
Recover button.
Select a destination tile on the
Source Panorama.
The destination tile
must have a device
assigned to perform
the transfer
The destination tile does not
have a device assigned.
Select the OK button to return to the
Recover Failed Transfer Patients
view. Select a destination tile that
has a device assigned and continue
the transfer procedure.
The Waiting for Patient
message is displayed in
the heart rate digital tile.
The destination device has not
been activated.
Activate the destination device.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Deleting Failed Transfer Patient Data
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Delete Failed
Transfer sidebar button
is disabled.
The Failed Transfer List is
empty.
No solution required.
Selecting the Delete
button has no effect.
A patient has not been
selected from the Failed
Transfer List.
Select the patient whose information
is to be deleted from the list and then
select the Delete button.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Transferring Failed Transfer Patient Data
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Transfer From
Failed List sidebar button
is disabled.
The Failed Transfer List is
empty.
No solution required.
Selecting the Transfer
button has no effect.
A patient has not been
selected from the Failed
Transfer List.
Select the patient whose information
is to be transferred from the list and
then select the Transfer button.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 35
Discharge Tab
5.3
Patient Setup Functions
Discharge Tab
The Discharge tab (shown in FIGURE 5-20) is used to discharge a patient from a patient
tile. If the required demographic information was previously entered for the patient to be
discharged, the patient will be moved to the list of retrievable patients. For additional
information regarding retrieving a patient, refer to ‘‘Retrieving Discharged Patients’’ on page
5-16.
The Discharge tab is not available at the ViewStation. Patient discharge can be performed
at the host central station, the WorkStation, or the bedside monitor. Any change in the patient
tile’s state will be communicated and changed at the host central station and bedside
monitor, if applicable.
NOTE:
5.3.1
The host central station(s) C-LAN configuration settings and
the software installed at the remote location dictates the
functionality available for each patient tile. For additional
information, refer to ‘‘The ViewStation and the
WorkStation’’ on page 2-4.
Accessing the Discharge Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital tile or waveform area.
3. Select the Discharge tab. The Discharge tab is enabled.
FIGURE 5-20 Discharge Tab
5.3.2
Discharging a Patient from the Central Station and the Bedside
Monitor
NOTE:
Discharge from the bedside monitor and the central station
or WorkStation can only be performed when the central
station Discharge at Bedside button in the Unit Choices tab is
set to ON. For additional information regarding the Unit
Choices tab, refer to the “Unit Choices Tab” on page 9-50.
1. Select the tile of the patient to be discharged. Choose a patient tile by selecting its
digital data or waveform area.
5 - 36
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Discharge Tab
2. Select the Bedside and Panorama Discharge button (shown in FIGURE 5-20).
One of two messages will be displayed:
• If the patient tile contains all the required demographic information (at least two of the
three demographic fields, First Name, Last Name, ID must be populated), the Are you
sure you want to discharge this patient? Selecting Yes will move the
patient to the discharge list dialog box is displayed.
• The Yes button discharges the selected patient from the central station and the
bedside monitor. It also moves the patient to the central station discharge list.
• The No button cancels the discharge
• If the patient tile does not contain all the required demographic information (at least
two of the three demographic fields, First Name, Last Name, ID must be populated) the
message The patient’s data and submitted print jobs will be deleted
because at least two of the following fields: First Name, Last Name or
ID has not been filled in. Do you still want to proceed with the
discharge? is displayed.
• The Yes button completes the discharge deleting all patient data and
unprocessed print jobs
• The No button cancels the discharge
5.3.3
Discharging a Patient from the Central Station
NOTE:
Discharge from the central station is only available when
the bedside monitor is in a Communications Lost state.
1. Select the tile of the patient to be discharged. Choose a patient tile by selecting its
digital data or waveform area.
2. Select the Discharge Patient button. The Local Discharge Only! Patient will
not be discharged at bedside. Do you still want to proceed with
discharge? message is displayed.
• If the Yes button is selected and at least two of the three demographic fields, First
Name, Last Name, ID are populated, the Are you sure you want to discharge
this patient? Selecting Yes will move the patient to the discharge list
message box will be displayed.
• The Yes button completes the discharge and moves the patient to the
central station discharge list
• The No button cancels the discharge
• If the Yes button is selected and the patient tile does not contain all the required
demographic information (at least two of the three demographic fields, First Name,
Last Name, ID must be populated) the message The patient’s data and
submitted print jobs will be deleted because at least two of the
following fields: First Name, Last Name or ID has not been filled in. Do
you still want to proceed with the discharge? is displayed.
• The Yes button completes the discharge deleting all patient data and
unprocessed print jobs
• The No button cancels the discharge
• The No button cancels the discharge
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 37
Discharge Tab
5.3.4
Patient Setup Functions
Discharging a Patient from a Telepack Device
The same messages described in “Discharging a Patient from the Central Station and the
Bedside Monitor” on page 5-36 will be displayed, with one exception. If the Yes button is
selected after the message Are you sure you want to discharge this patient?
Selecting Yes will move the patient to the discharge list is displayed, the Telepack
will be discharged from the central station. Discharging a Telepack device can only be done
from the central station. Once discharged, all the patient information will be cleared.
5.3.5
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
5.3.6
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Discharge tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No patient Selected!
This message appears in the
demographic field when either
a patient tile has not been
selected or an empty tile was
selected.
Select an active patient tile.
The patient’s data and
submitted print jobs will
be deleted because at
least two of the following
fields: First Name, Last
Name or ID has not been
filled in. Do you still want
to proceed with the
discharge?
The selected patient does not
have at least two of the three
demographic fields completed.
The demographic fields include
First Name, Last Name, and
ID.
Select the No button to close
the dialog, then enter the
required demographic
information.
The The patient’s data and
submitted print jobs will
be deleted because at
least two of the following
fields: First Name, Last
Name or ID has not been
filled in. Do you still want
to proceed with the
discharge? dialog box is
open and was automatically
closed without any user
interaction.
The bedside monitor has gone
into a Communications Lost
state.
Restore the connection
between the Panorama Central
Station and the monitoring
device. If unable to restore the
connection, select the
Discharge Patient button to
discharge the equipment from
the patient tile.
Unable to perform
operation on tile: Central
to Central Transfer Out in
progress.
A Central to Central transfer
Out has been initiated at the
source central station but not
accepted or rejected at the
destination central station for
the selected tile, and the
Discharge Patient button is
pressed in the Discharge tab
at the source central station.
Wait until the Central to
Central transfer is complete,
then discharge the patient.
*
5 - 38
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Discharge Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Unable to perform
operation on tile: Central
to Central Transfer In in
progress.
A Central to Central transfer In
is in progress for the selected
tile and the selected tile is
actively monitoring a patient,
and the Discharge Patient
button is pressed in the
Discharge tab at the
destination central station.
Wait until the Central to
Central transfer is complete,
then discharge the patient.
The Discharge Patient
button in the Discharge tab is
disabled.
The Discharge at Bedside
setting in the Unit Choices
tab is set to OFF.
If a patient discharge is
necessary, it must be
performed from the bedside
monitor.
The Discharge tab needs to
be refreshed.
Select another tab and then
return to the Discharge tab.
No patient is selected.
Select a patient tile.
The bedside monitor has gone
into a Communications Lost
state.
Verify the connection between
the Panorama Central Station
and the monitoring device.
The Discharge at Bedside
setting in the Unit Choices
tab is set to OFF.
No solution required.
The Discharge Patient
button in the Discharge tab is
enabled.
A Telepack device is in use.
No solution required.
Local Discharge Only!
Patient will not be
discharged at bedside.
Do you still want to
proceed with discharge?
The bedside monitor is in a
Communications Lost state.
Verify the connection between
the Panorama Central Station
and the monitoring device.
The Local Discharge Only!
Patient will not be
discharged at bedside.
Do you still want to
proceed with discharge?
dialog box is open and was
automatically closed without
any user interaction.
The beside monitor is no
longer in a Communications
Lost state.
If the Discharge at Bedside
button in the Unit Choices
tab is set to ON, proceed with
the discharge by selecting the
Discharge Patient button. If
it is set to OFF, the discharge
must be performed from the
bedside.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 39
Display Tab
5.4
Patient Setup Functions
Display Tab
The Display tab (shown in FIGURE 5-21) is used to select the digital and waveform
parameters that will appear in the selected patient tile. The default settings for patient tiles
are defined by the Unit Choices tab, which is described in the “Unit Choices Tab” on
page 9-50. The layout and functionality of the Display tab will change based on the type of
monitoring device assigned to the selected patient tile.
The Display tab is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation (shown in
FIGURE 5-22), and functions in the same manner as it does at the host central station. When
a patient tile is assigned at the ViewStation or the WorkStation, it will initially use the display
settings of the associated patient tile at the host central station, provided the patient tile is in
an active state. .
After this initial transfer, changes made to the host central station, the ViewStation and/or the
WorkStation patient tile Display tab will be independent of each other unless
communication is interrupted. Automatic updating of the display settings at the remote
workstation patient tile will occur if any of the following occur:
• The monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode at the central station
• The monitoring device is not communicating with its host central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the ViewStation and/or the
WorkStation is lost (Central Communications Lost)
NOTE:
5.4.1
The host central station(s) C-LAN configuration settings and
the software installed at the remote location dictates the
functionality available for each patient tile. For additional
information, refer to ‘‘The ViewStation and the
WorkStation’’ on page 2-4.
Accessing the Display Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital tile or waveform area.
3. Select the Display tab. The Display tab is enabled.
FIGURE 5-21 Display Tab
5 - 40
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Display Tab
FIGURE 5-22 Display Tab (ViewStation and WorkStation)
5.4.2
Components of the Display Tab
Digital Parameter Data
The Panorama Central Station is capable of showing three to five digital data parameters in
each patient tile.
Parameter List
FIGURE 5-23 Display Tab - Parameter List shown
Parameter List
FIGURE 5-24 Display Tab - Parameter List shown (ViewStation and WorkStation)
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
The Parameter list box is not displayed in the Display tab
until a parameter tile is selected.
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 41
Display Tab
Patient Setup Functions
NOTE:
When using a WMTS 608 wireless bedside device with a
View 12™ card, all 12 leads will be available in the
Parameter list, but only the waveforms for leads I, II, III,
aVR, aVL, aVF, and V1 will be displayed in the patient tile.
Digital data tiles display a minimum of three and a maximum of five parameters depending
on the parameters selected.
A digital data tile consists of three equal-size tiles. The Heart Rate (HR) parameter is always
shown in the first tile. The remaining two tiles can each be divided into two sub-tile areas. If
the associated device is a Telepack, the Battery Percentage parameter (shown in
FIGURE 5-25) will occupy one sub-tile.
FIGURE 5-25 Battery Percentage Digital Data Tile (Telepack)
Parameters occupy 1 or 2 sub-tile areas. The number of digital data parameters that can be
displayed is dependent on the type of parameters selected. For example, the NIBP parameter
uses two data tiles while the Respiration parameter uses one data tile.
FIGURE 5-26 NIBP and Respiration Digital Data Tiles
Table 5-1 shows the number of sub-tiles that each parameter occupies. For a list of the
parameters listed by monitoring device, refer to ‘‘Supported Devices’’ on page 1-3. For
additional information regarding the setup of a patient tile, refer to the ‘‘Display Tab’’ on
page 5-40.
.
TABLE 5-1
Number of Sub-tiles Occupied by a Parameter
5 - 42
PARAMETERS
# OF SUB-TILES OCCUPIED
Heart Rate
2
NIBP
2
Respiration
1
SpO2
1
IBP
2
Temperature
1
CO2
2
O2
2
N2 O
2
Agent
2
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Display Tab
TABLE 5-1
Number of Sub-tiles Occupied by a Parameter
PARAMETERS
# OF SUB-TILES OCCUPIED
PVC
1
ST
1
CO/CI
2
PAWP
1
Battery Percentage
1
NOTE:
Digital data is shown in the color configured for the
parameter. For additional information, refer to the
‘‘Parameter Color Tab’’ on page 9-2.
Heart Rate Tile
The Heart Rate tile (shown in FIGURE 5-27) shows the heart rate measurement, the lead
through which the measurement is acquired and icons for Arrhythmia/ST analysis.
FIGURE 5-27 Heart Rate Digital Data Tile
The Heart Rate tile follows additional digital data rules.
For example, the Heart Rate tile:
• Always occupies the first digital data tile
• Displays an ECG lead label for the lead acquiring the data
• Displays an
icon if arrhythmia analysis is enabled
• Displays an
icon if ST analysis is enabled
• Displays the standby location for a patient in Standby mode
Tile Display Rearrangement
Depending on the number of parameters selected, a blank tile may be displayed in the
Display tab. A blank tile will not be displayed on the Main Screen because the system will
automatically populate the empty sub-tiles based on the type of monitoring device:
• Telepack: the parameters in the Main Screen tile will automatically rearrange to
remove the blank tiles.
• Bedside: the parameters in the Main Screen tile will automatically rearrange to
compress user selections with the remaining digital data tiles populating based on the
next parameter available in the Unit Priorities tab.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 43
Display Tab
Patient Setup Functions
Waveform Parameter Data
The patient tile is capable of showing up to two waveforms for a patient (shown in
FIGURE 5-28).
NOTE:
The initial central station wave default settings come from
the System Wave Default settings, if settings were
configured.
FIGURE 5-28 Display Tab - Waveform Data
FIGURE 5-29 Display Tab - Waveform Data (ViewStation and WorkStation)
The first waveform is always an ECG waveform. The second waveform can be any other
waveform parameter available for the associated device or, if desired, it can be turned off.
Each waveform has its own baseline.
NOTE:
Waveforms display in the color that was selected for the
parameter. For additional information, refer to the
‘‘Parameter Color Tab’’ on page 9-2.
The following table shows the available waveform parameters.
5 - 44
WAVEFORM
PARAMETER
AVAILABLE WAVEFORMS
ECG Lead
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
•
The ECG waveforms available are dependent on the lead set used.
•
ECG waveforms use the Pacer Enhancement and Filter Settings that were
selected in the Demographics tab for the selected patient tile.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Display Tab
WAVEFORM
PARAMETER
Waveform 2
5.4.3
AVAILABLE WAVEFORMS
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6, Resp, SpO2, IBP1, IBP2,
IBP3, IBP4, CO2, O2, Agent (Iso, Enf, Sev, Hal, Des)
•
The ECG waveforms available are dependent on the lead set used. The
waveform chosen for the ECG Lead waveform will not be included in the
parameter list because it cannot be used in both waveform positions.
•
The remaining parameters available for the second waveform are
dependent on the monitoring device associated with the patient tile.
Configuring the Display Tab
This section describes how to configure parameter tiles in the Display tab.
ViewStation and WorkStation patient tiles will initially display the same display settings of the
associated patient tile at the host central station. For additional information regarding the
transfer of display settings from the host central station, refer to the ‘‘Trends Tab’’ on page
7-13.
Selecting a Patient’s Parameter Data
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
2. Select the parameter tile to be modified. The Parameter list is displayed.
3. From the Parameter list, select the parameter to be viewed or turn the parameter OFF.
NOTE:
Digital parameters and the first waveform parameter
cannot be turned off.
NOTE:
The OFF option is only available in the Parameter list when
Waveform 2 is selected in the Waveform Display area.
When OFF is selected, the message “Are you sure you want
to turn off the parameter” is displayed.
• Digital Parameters include Heart Rate, Respiration, IBP, NIBP, Temp, ST, PVC, SpO2,
N2O, CO2, O2, Cardiac Output (CO), Cardiac Index (CI), T Blood, Delta T,
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure (PAWP), Battery Percentage (for a Telepack device
only), and Agent.
NOTE:
The CO/CI, Temp 2, and T Blood parameters are only
available if they are being monitored by the Spectrum/
Spectrum OR External Parameter Module (EPM). These
parameters are not available if they are monitored by an
Edwards Vigilance® monitor.
• Waveform Parameters include I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6.
4. Choose the Select button to highlight the selected parameter. The parameter is shown in
the selected patient tile.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
A digital parameter can only be shown in one parameter
tile at any given time.
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 45
Display Tab
5.4.3.1
Patient Setup Functions
Configuring a Trend Display Interval
Select the Trend Display sidebar button to configure the interval at which a patient’s trend
data will be displayed at the Panorama Central Station, ViewStation, and the WorkStation.
Regardless of which Trend Display interval is selected, NIBP, CO/CI, and PAWP trend
records will be displayed.
When a patient tile is assigned at the ViewStation or the WorkStation, it will initially display
the Trend Display interval of the associated host central station patient tile, provided the
patient tile is communicating with the central station. The Trend Display sidebar button is
available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation and it may be used in the same manner as
it is at the central station. For additional information regarding the transfer of trend interval
settings from the host central station, refer to the ‘‘Trends Tab’’ on page 7-13.
The default setting for a Trend Display interval is determined by the Unit Choices tab. For
additional information regarding the Unit Choices tab, refer to ‘‘Unit Choices Tab’’ on
page 9-50.
NOTE:
Trends data is automatically stored in one minute intervals.
The Trend Display interval selected does not affect how
trend information is stored in the database, just how it is
displayed.
NOTE:
Changing the Trend Display interval in the Display tab
automatically adjusts the Trend Display interval in the
Trends tab. Changing the Trend Display interval in the
Trends tab automatically adjusts the Trend Display interval
in the Display tab.
To select the Trend Display interval:
1. From the Display tab, select the Trend Display sidebar button. The Trend Display
dialog box (shown in FIGURE 5-30) is displayed.
FIGURE 5-30 Trend Display Dialog Box
2. Select the Interval button until the desired interval period is displayed. Interval periods
include 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, and 2 hours.
3. Select the Done or the Cancel button.
• The Done button accepts the selection.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Display tab.
5 - 46
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Display Tab
With the exception of NIBP, CO/CI, and PAWP, selecting the Done button will change the
Trend Display interval in the Trends tab based on the standard clock time intervals. Refer to
the following table:
INTERVAL
TREND RECORDS DISPLAYED IN TRENDS TAB
1 minute
All trend records will be displayed.
5 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 5, 10, 20, 25, 30,
35, 40, 45, 50, and 55 minutes will be displayed.
10 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, and
50 minutes will be displayed.
15 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 15, 30, and 45
minutes will be displayed.
30 minutes
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, and 30minutes will be
displayed.
1 hour
All trend records having a timestamp of 0 minutes (for example,
12:00, 1:00, 2:00) will be displayed.
2 hour
All trend records having a timestamp of 0 minutes for even hours
only (for example, 12:00, 2:00, 4:00) will be displayed.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 47
Display Tab
5.4.4
Patient Setup Functions
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Restore Previous Settings
Select the Restore Previous Settings sidebar button to return patient display settings to
those in use when the tab was opened.
Trend Display
This sidebar button was previously described on page 5-46.
Disable ECG
Disable ECG is available on version 8.7.1 and above. See page 9-54 for setting the system
default for displaying the Disable ECG sidebar button.
If the system has been configured, the Disable ECG sidebar button is displayed when a
Telepack device with an SpO2 module is connected. Select the Disable ECG sidebar button
to disable the display of ECG waveform(s) for the patient(s) if the current Heart Rate source is
not ECG.
The Disable ECG sidebar button is disabled if the patient is in Standby mode, during
communications loss, or if the Telepack does not have an SpO2 module connected.
NOTE:
If the Disable ECG sidebar button is latched and the Heart
Rate source changes to ECG, the Disable ECG sidebar button
will be unlatched and the ECG waveform(s) will be
re-enabled.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes and dialog boxes.
5.4.5
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Display tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No Patient Selected!
This message is displayed in
the demographic field when
either a patient tile has not
been selected or an empty tile
was selected.
Select an active patient tile.
V2, V3, V4, V5, or V6 was
selected from the Parameter list
but the waveform is not
displayed in patient tile.
A WMTS 608 wireless bedside
device with a View 12 card is
in currently in use. When using
this device type, the V2-V6
waveforms will not be
displayed.
Select a different waveform
from the Parameter list.
The parameter tiles in the
Display tab are disabled.
A valid patient tile is not
selected.
Select an active patient tile.
*
5 - 48
Change to a hardwired or 2.4
GHz wireless device.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.5
Standby Tab
Standby Tab
The Standby tab (shown in FIGURE 5-31) is used to place a patient in Standby mode at the
Panorama Central Station, the WorkStation or the bedside monitor. Standby mode
temporarily suspends all patient monitoring, alarm processing, and trending activity.
The Standby tab is available at the WorkStation and it may be used in the same manner as
it is at the central station. Any change in the patient tile’s state will be communicated and
changed at the host central station and bedside monitor, if applicable.
5.5.1
NOTE:
Patients placed in the Standby mode should be closely
monitored.
NOTE:
The host central station(s) C-LAN configuration settings and
the software installed at the remote location dictates the
functionality available for each patient tile. For additional
information, refer to ‘‘The ViewStation and the
WorkStation’’ on page 2-4.
Accessing the Standby Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital tile or waveform area.
3. Select the Standby tab. The Standby tab is enabled.
FIGURE 5-31 Standby Tab
5.5.2
Placing a Patient in Standby Mode
This section outlines placing a patient in the Standby mode from the Panorama Central
Station.
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
2. From the menu bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
3. Select the Standby tab. The Standby tab is displayed.
4. Select the type of Standby mode to be used for the patient.
a. Select the Panorama Standby Only/Standby button to discontinue patient
monitoring at central station but continue monitoring the patient at the bedside.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 49
Standby Tab
Patient Setup Functions
NOTE:
If using a Telepack device, the Panorama Standby Only
button will be labeled Standby.
b. Select the Bedside and Panorama Standby button to discontinue monitoring
the patient at the central station and at the bedside monitor.
The Patient Location list box is displayed (shown in FIGURE 5-32).
FIGURE 5-32 Standby Tab with Patient Location List displayed
5. Select a patient location from the Patient Location list box, which includes:
• Standby
• Therapy
• ER
• Cath Lab
• Bath
• In Transit
• X-ray
• OR
6. Choose the Select button to confirm the Standby location selected. The text for the
standby location is shown in the patient tile, and all monitoring, alarm processing and
trend storage is suspended.
5.5.3
Removing a Patient from Standby Mode
To remove a patient from Standby mode:
1. From the menu bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Select the Standby tab. The Standby tab is displayed.
• If the patient is in the Panorama Standby Only mode, select the Resume
Monitoring button.
The message Are you sure that you want to return the patient from
Panorama standby is displayed. Select the YES button to return the patient from
standby mode and resume monitoring or the NO button to keep the patient in Standby
mode.
• If the patient is in the Bedside and Panorama Standby mode, select the
STANDBY button on the bedside monitor.
5.5.4
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
5 - 50
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.5.5
Standby Tab
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Standby tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No Patient Selected!
This message is displayed in
the demographic field when
either a patient tile has not
been selected or an empty tile
was selected.
Select an active patient tile.
A patient in bedside
standby cannot be
directly placed into
Panorama only standby
This message is displayed
when the selected patient is
already in Standby mode at
the bedside monitor or was just
released from Standby mode at
the bedside monitor.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Resume
monitoring at the bedside
monitor before trying to
change standby locations.
Wait a moment and try to put
the patient in Standby mode
again.
Patient in auto standby
may only be released
from bedside
This message is displayed
when the Bedside and
Panorama Standby button
is selected for a patient that is
already in Standby mode at
the Panorama Central Station
and the Bedside monitor.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Release the
patient from Standby mode
at the bedside monitor before
trying to change the patient’s
Standby mode.
The Standby tab for the
selected patient tile is disabled
at the WorkStation.
The central station from where
the patient tile was networked
is configured as View Only.
No solution required.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 51
Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
5.6
Patient Setup Functions
Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
The Wave Gain tab (shown in FIGURE 5-33) is used to change the wave gain settings for
the selected patient’s available waveforms. The layout, functionality, and buttons available in
this tab will change based on the type of monitoring device assigned to the selected patient
tile.
NOTE:
Changing the ECG wave gain does not affect the arrhythmia
algorithm.
The Wave Gain tab is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation, and functions in
the same manner as it does at the host central station. When a patient tile is assigned at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation, it will initially display the wave gain settings of the
associated host central station patient tile, provided the patient tile is communicating with the
central station.
After this initial transfer, changes made to the host central station, the ViewStation and/or the
WorkStation patient tile Wave Gain tab will be independent of each other unless
communication is interrupted. Automatic updating of the wave gain settings at the remote
workstation patient tile will occur if any of the following occur:
• The monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode at the central station
• The monitoring device is not communicating with its host central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the ViewStation and/or the
WorkStation is lost (Central Communications Lost)
The default host central station wave gain settings are defined by the System Wave Gain
tab, which is described in the “Wave Gain Tab (System)” on page 9-59.
5.6.1
Accessing the Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
1. From the menu bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital tile or waveform area.
3. Select the Wave Gain tab. The Wave Gain tab is enabled.
FIGURE 5-33 Wave Gain Tab
5 - 52
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
FIGURE 5-34 Wave Gain Tab (ViewStation and WorkStation)
5.6.2
Changing a Patient’s Wave Gain Settings
This section outlines entering and modifying a patient’s wave gain settings using the Wave
Gain tab.
ViewStation and WorkStation patient tiles will initially display the same wave gain settings of
the associated patient tile at the host central station. For additional information regarding the
transfer of wave gain settings from the host central station, refer to ‘‘Wave Gain Tab
(Patient)’’ on page 5-52.
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
2. In the Wave Gain tab, select the ECG mm/mV button until the desired wave gain
displays. The settings available for the ECG wave gain include 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 20.0,
and 30.0 mm/mV.
3. Select the IBPx mmHg buttons until the desired wave gain displays. The settings
available for the IBPx wave gain include 0-20, 0-40, 0-80, 60-140, 0-160, 0-225,
0-320, and (-10) -10 mmHg.
NOTE:
If the IBPx button(s) have been labeled at the bedside
monitor, the same label(s) will be displayed on the
individual wave gain button(s).
4. Select the Resp Gain button until the desired wave gain is displayed. The settings
available for the resp gain wave gain include 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
5. Select the CO2 (%, kPa, mmHG) button until the desired wave gain is displayed.
• The settings available for the CO2 % wave gain include 5.0, 7.5, and 10.0 %.
• The settings available for the CO2 kPa wave gain include 5.0, 7.5, and 10.0 kPa.
• The settings available for the CO2 mmHg wave gain include 40, 60, and 100 mmHg.
6. Select the O2 % button until the desired wave gain is displayed. The settings available
for the O2 wave gain include 18 - 30, 18 - 60, and 18 - 100 %.
7. Select the AGENT % button until the desired wave gain is displayed. The settings
available for the agent wave gains include 0 - 1.0, 0 - 2.5, 0 - 5.0, 0 - 10.0,
0 - 15.0, and 0 - 20.0 %.
8. Select the Done button to accept the wave gain settings shown in the Wave Gain tab. A
patient’s wave gain settings will not be changed unless the Done button is selected.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 53
Wave Gain Tab (Patient)
5.6.3
Patient Setup Functions
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Restore Previous Settings
Select the Restore Previous Settings sidebar button to return patient display settings to
those in use when the tab was opened.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
5.6.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
patient Wave Gain tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No Patient Selected!
This message is displayed in
the demographic field when
either a patient tile has not
been selected or an empty tile
was selected.
Select an active patient tile.
The patient’s wave gain
settings did not change
The Done button was not
selected after the patient’s
wave gain settings were
changed.
Adjust the patient’s wave gain
settings and select the Done
button when the settings are
completed.
*
5 - 54
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
5.7
Print Setup Tab (Patient)
Print Setup Tab (Patient)
The Print Setup tab (shown in FIGURE 5-35) is used to select the waveforms that will be
printed when an All Strips, Event Zoom-In, or Full Disclosure Zoom-In report is generated for
the selected patient tile. The waveforms included in this tab will change based on the
parameters in use and the type of monitoring device that is assigned to the selected patient
tile. The default settings for the waveform portion of the Print Setup tab are defined by the
system Print Setup tab, which is described in the “Print Setup Tab (System)” on page 9-45.
The Print Setup tab is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation, and functions in
the same manner as it does at the host central station. When a patient tile is assigned at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation, it will initially display the print setup configuration settings of
the associated host central station patient tile, provided the patient tile is communicating with
the central station.
After this initial transfer, changes made to the host central station, the ViewStation and/or the
WorkStation patient tile Print Setup tab will be independent of each other unless
communication is interrupted. Automatic updating of the print setup configuration settings at
the remote workstation patient tile will occur if any of the following occur:
• The monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode at the central station
• The monitoring device is not communicating with its host central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the ViewStation and/or the
WorkStation is lost (Central Communications Lost)
5.7.1
Accessing the Print Setup Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the Patient Setup menu button. The tabs associated with
patient setup are displayed.
2. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital tile or waveform area.
3. Select the Print Setup tab. The Print Setup tab is enabled.
FIGURE 5-35 Patient Print Setup Tab (Central Station)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 55
Print Setup Tab (Patient)
Patient Setup Functions
FIGURE 5-36 Patient Print Setup Tab (ViewStation)
FIGURE 5-37 Patient Print Setup Tab (WorkStation)
5.7.2
Changing a Patient’s Print Setup
This section outlines entering and modifying a patient’s print setup via the Print Setup tab.
Customizing a Patient’s Print Setup
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
2. In the Print Setup tab, select a check box button to enable/disable the printing of a
parameter. The patient’s print setup settings are instantly changed.
The Parameters available in the Print Setup tab are dependent on the lead set and/or
monitoring device connected to the patient.
• A check mark in a parameter check box indicates that the parameter is selected and
will print the patient’s All Strip Report, Event Zoom-In, and Full Disclosure Zoom-In
Reports.
• An empty parameter check box indicates that the parameter is not selected and will
not print the patient’s All Strip Report, Event Zoom-In, and Full Disclosure Zoom-In
Reports.
5.7.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Restore Previous Settings
Select the Restore Previous Settings sidebar button to return patient display settings to
those in use when the tab was opened.
5 - 56
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Setup Functions
Print Setup Tab (Patient)
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
5.7.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
patient Print Setup tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No Patient Selected!
This message appears in the
demographic field when either
a patient tile has not been
selected or an empty tile was
selected.
Select an active patient tile.
A waveform does not print
The waveform is not selected in
the patient’s Print Setup tab.
Select the waveform in the
patient’s Print Setup tab.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
5 - 57
Print Setup Tab (Patient)
Patient Setup Functions
This page intentionally left blank.
5 - 58
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
6.0
Patient Alarm Functions
This section describes the configuration of patient alarms at the Panorama Central Station.
• Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional)
• Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
• Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
6-1
Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional)
6.1
Patient Alarm Functions
Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional)
The Patient Alarm Setup tab (shown in FIGURE 6-1) provides password protected access
to the patient alarm configuration. When the correct password is entered, the Alarm Limits
and the Alarm Responses tabs are opened.
The Patient Alarm Setup tab is only shown if the Password Protection option is set to ON
in the System Alarms tab. If Password Protection is OFF, the Patient Alarms menu
button provides direct access to the Alarm Limits and the Alarm Responses tabs. For
additional information, refer to the ‘‘System Alarms Tab’’ on page 9-14.
The Patient Alarm Setup tab is available at the central station and the WorkStation.
6.1.1
Accessing the Patient Alarm Setup Tab
From the menu bar, select the Patient Alarms menu button. The Patient Alarm Setup
tab is displayed.
FIGURE 6-1 Patient Alarm Setup Tab
6.1.2
Entering a Password
To enter a password:
1. Select the Password text box in the Patient Alarm Setup tab. The keyboard dialog
box is displayed.
2. Use the keyboard dialog box to enter the Alarm password that was created in the
Passwords tab (maximum 15 characters). For security purposes asterisks (*) are
shown for each typed character. For additional information regarding passwords, refer
to the ‘‘Passwords Tab’’ on page 9-29 or contact your System Administrator.
NOTE:
Passwords are case sensitive.
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator is shown when Caps Lock is enabled.
• The Close button discards the changes
• The Enter button accepts changes
6-2
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Patient Alarm Setup Tab (Optional)
3. The Alarm Limits (shown in FIGURE 6-2) and the Alarm Responses (shown in
FIGURE 6-6) tabs are shown after the correct password is entered. For additional
information about alarm limits and alarm responses, refer to “Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)”
on page 6-4 and “Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)” on page 6-12.
6.1.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar button is used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
6.1.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Patient Alarm Setup tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Incorrect password.
Please try again.
The wrong password was
entered in the Password text
box.
Select the OK button to close the
dialog box. Enter the correct
password in the text box.
The password was entered in
the wrong case.
Re-enter the password turning on/off
the keyboard dialog Caps Lock key.
The wrong password was
entered two consecutive times
in the Password text box.
Select the OK button to close the
dialog box. Enter the correct
password in the text box.
Incorrect password.
This is your last
chance. Please try
again
The password was entered in
the wrong case.
The Patient Alarm
Setup tab closes and the
central station is returned
to a full screen monitoring
display.
*
The wrong password was
entered three consecutive
times in the Password text
box.
Reopen the Patient Alarm Setup
tab and enter the correct password
in the text box.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
6-3
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
6.2
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
The patient Alarm Limits tab (shown in FIGURE 6-2) adjusts patient alarm limit settings. The
alarm limits available will change according to the type of monitoring device assigned to the
selected patient tile. The fields discussed in this section may not apply to all users. For
additional information regarding alarm limit settings, refer to ‘‘Alarms and Events’’ on page
13-1.
The patient Alarm Limits tab is available at the ViewStation (shown in FIGURE 6-3) but is
for viewing purposes only. When a patient tile is assigned at the ViewStation, it will always
display the alarm limit settings of the associated host central station patient tile.
The patient Alarm Limits tab is available at the WorkStation and functions in the same
manner as it does at the host central station but contains fewer sidebar buttons. Similar to the
central station, alarm limit changes made at the WorkStation will be sent to the central
station, View Only Workstation, and bedside monitor (if applicable).
Automatic updating of the alarm limit settings at the remote workstation will also occur when:
• The monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode at the central station
• The monitoring device is not communicating with its host central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the ViewStation and/or the
WorkStation is lost (Central Communications Lost)
WARNING: Changing the patient alarm limits at the WorkStation will
automatically change the patient alarm limits at the
Panorama Central Station AND the bedside monitor (if
applicable) for the selected patient tile.
NOTE:
6.2.1
The host central station(s) C-LAN configuration settings and
the software installed at the remote location dictates the
functionality available for each patient tile. For additional
information, refer to ‘‘The ViewStation and the
WorkStation’’ on page 2-4.
Accessing the Alarm Limits Tab
From the menu bar, select the Patient Alarms button. If the Patient Alarm Setup tab is
displayed, enter the password in the Password text box. The Alarm Limits and Alarm
Responses tabs are displayed.
6-4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
Patient Demographic Field
Up Arrow
Patient Size
High Alarm
Limit Button
Slider
Control
Low Alarm
Limit Button
Down Arrow
Single Arrow Button
Double Arrow Button
Scroll Bar
FIGURE 6-2 Alarm Limits Tab
Patient Size
Patient Demographic Field
Single Arrow Button
Double Arrow Button
Scroll Bar
FIGURE 6-3 Alarm Limits Tab (ViewStation)
6.2.2
Configuring Patient Alarm Limits
The following procedure is used for modifying patient alarm limits in the Alarm Limits tab.
The order in which the alarm slider controls are shown in the Alarm Limits tab is selected
in the ‘‘Unit Priorities Tab’’ on page 9-47.
ViewStation patient tiles will always display the same patient alarm limit settings of the
associated patient tile at the host central station. For additional information regarding the
transfer of alarm limit settings from the host central station, refer to ‘‘Alarm Limits Tab
(Patient)’’ on page 6-4.
NOTE:
The alarm slider controls in the patient Alarm Limits tab are
disabled at the ViewStation.
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
6-5
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
Patient Alarm Functions
2. Use the scroll bar or the arrow buttons to locate the parameter to be modified.
• Double arrow buttons display the next/previous page of parameter slider controls
(until the first/last page is reached).
• Single arrow buttons display the next/previous slider control (until the last control is
shown).
3. Set the High Alarm Limit button for the selected parameter. This button is either
labeled OFF or contains an alarm limit value. A high alarm limit is set using the up/
down arrow buttons on the parameter’s vertical scroll bar or by moving the alarm’s
slider control.
4. Set the Low Alarm Limit button for the selected parameter. This button is either
labeled OFF or contains an alarm limit value. A low alarm limit is set using the up/down
arrow buttons on the parameter’s vertical scroll bar or by moving the alarm’s slider
control.
Alarm limit adjustments made at the Panorama Central Station are automatically sent to the
monitoring device.
For additional information regarding the default alarm limit ranges, refer to ‘‘Alarms and
Events’’ on page 13-1.
Auto Set Alarms Button
The Auto Set button automatically recalculates alarm limit settings to the percent indicated
(shown in Table 6-1) above and below the current measured value.
NOTE:
The Auto Set button does not affect the SpO2, ST, PVC,
Arrhythmia Run or Apnea Delay settings.
NOTE:
The Auto Set button is not available at the ViewStation.
TABLE 6-1 Auto Set Percent Indicator
6-6
ALARM
PERCENT INDICATOR
(APPROXIMATE)
Heart Rate
30%
Respiration
30%
IBP Systolic
20%
IBP Diastolic
20%
IBP Mean
20%
NIBP Systolic
20%
NIBP Diastolic
20%
NIBP Mean
20%
ET CO2 (mmHg)
20%
INSP CO2 (mmHg)
20%
ET CO2 (%)
20%
INSP CO2 (%)
20%
ET CO2 (kPa)
20%
INSP CO2 (kPa)
20%
Temp (F°)
3%
Temp (C°)
3%
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
TABLE 6-1 Auto Set Percent Indicator (continued)
6.2.3
ALARM
PERCENT INDICATOR
(APPROXIMATE)
Delta Temp (F°)
25%
Delta Temp (C°)
25%
Simultaneous Alarm Limit Editing
If using a bedside device with the Panorama Central Station, alarm limit and alarm response
configuration changes cannot be made at the bedside monitor, central station, and
WorkStation simultaneously. The bedside device will take precedence, followed by the
central station, ending with the WorkStation.When an attempt is made to make changes
simultaneously, the message These settings are currently being edited remotely.will
be displayed at the central station or WorkStation, depending on where the change was
initiated. If there are multiple WorkStations on the network, the first WorkStation that initiates
the change will take precedence over any other WorkStation attempting to implement the
same change.
These are the scenarios in which this message will be displayed:
• The Alarm Limits Menu is active at the bedside monitor and then the patient Alarm
Limits tab is opened at the central station or the WorkStation
• The Alarm Limits tab is active at the central station or the WorkStation and then the
Alarm Limits Menu is opened at the bedside monitor
In both of these scenarios, unsaved changes made in the Alarm Limits tab will be
discarded.
To close this message dialog, select the OK button. Acknowledging this message will convert
the Alarm Limits tab at the central station to a read-only state and editing will not be
permitted. Once the Alarm Limits Menu is closed at the bedside device, the Alarm Limits
tab will become active again and editing can resume.
For additional information regarding the bedside monitor menus, refer to bedside monitor’s
Operating Instructions for the Passport 2® (P/N 0070-00-0649-XX), Spectrum™ (P/N
0070-00-0648-XX), or Spectrum OR™ (P/N 0070-00-0670-XX).
6.2.4
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Restore Previous Settings
Select the Restore Previous Settings sidebar button to return patient display settings to
those in use when the tab was opened.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
The Restore Previous Settings sidebar button is not available
at the ViewStation.
0070-10-0707-02
6-7
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
Patient Alarm Functions
Suspend All Alarms (Optional)
Select the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button to suspend, for a user configured period of
time, all numeric physiological, lethal arrhythmia, non-lethal arrhythmia, and technical
alarms at the Panorama Central Station for the selected patient tile. The Suspend All
Alarms sidebar button is only shown if the Suspend Alarms option is ON in the System
Alarms tab.
WARNING: When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is enabled, the
Panorama Central Station will not monitor any lethal or
non-lethal arrhythmias and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
NOTE:
The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is not available at
the ViewStation.
NOTE:
The amount of time an alarm is suspended is dependent on
the configured System Suspend All Timeout setting.
When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is selected:
• The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button changes to white with black text.
• The All Alarms Suspended message displays in red text in the Patient Status line of
the patient tile. For additional information regarding the Patient Status line, refer to the
‘‘Patient Status Line’’ on page 2-10.
To resume the monitoring of alarms, select the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button.
• When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is disabled, the button changes to blue
with white text. Alarms are now re-enabled for the selected patient.
Suspend Non-Lethal
Select the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button to suspend all numeric, technical and
non-lethal arrhythmia alarms for the selected patient tile. Lethal arrhythmia alarms continue to
be monitored at the Panorama Central Station when non-lethal arrhythmia alarms are
suspended.
WARNING: When the Suspend Non-Lethal alarms sidebar button is
enabled, the Panorama Central Station will not monitor any
non-lethal arrhythmias, and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
NOTE:
The Suspend Non-lethal sidebar button is not available at
the ViewStation.
NOTE:
The Brady alarm will not be suspended when the Suspend
Non-Lethals sidebar button is selected.
When the Suspend Non-Lethal button is selected:
• The Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button changes to white with black text.
• The Non-Lethal Alarms Suspended message displays in yellow text in the Patient
Status line of the patient tile. For additional information regarding the Patient Status line,
refer to the ‘‘Patient Status Line’’ on page 2-10.
To resume the monitoring of non-lethal alarms, select the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar
button.
6-8
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
• When the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button is disabled, the button changes to blue
with white text. Non-lethal alarms are now re-enabled for the selected patient.
Relearn (Telepack Only)
Select the Relearn sidebar button to relearn/refresh ST and Arrhythmia data at the
Panorama Central Station.
NOTE:
The Relearn button is only available when ST and/or
arrhythmia analysis is enabled.
NOTE:
The Relearn sidebar button is not available at the
ViewStation.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
6.2.5
Generating a Patient Alarm Report
To review the patient’s alarm settings in a report, generate a Patient Alarm Report. This report
can be generated directly from the Alarm Limits tab by selecting the Print menu bar
button.
For additional information regarding the Patient Alarm Report, refer to ‘‘Patient Alarm
Report’’ on page 8-25.
6.2.6
Testing Alarm Limits
Any alarm may be tested to ensure that it is functioning as intended. To test an alarm:
NOTE:
For the purposes of this example, use the SpO2 alarm limit
slider. These directions apply to any parameter that uses an
alarm slider control.
1. Follow the steps in the ‘‘Configuring Patient Alarm Limits’’ on page 6-5 to access the
Alarm Limits tab.
2. Scroll to the SpO2 alarm slider.
3. To trigger the SpO2 alarm high limit, move the slider to the current value or below the
current value to trigger the alarm.
4. To trigger the alarm low limit, move the slider to current value or above the current value
to trigger the alarm.
5. Once testing is complete, reset the alarm limit to the desired value.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
6-9
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
6.2.7
Patient Alarm Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
patient Alarm Limits tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No Patient Selected!
This message appears in the
demographic field when either
no patient tile or an empty
patient tile has been selected.
Select an active patient tile.
Communications Lost
Communication between the
Panorama Central Station and
the monitoring device for the
selected patient tile has been
interrupted.
Verify the connection between
the Panorama Central Station
and the monitoring device. For
example, is the monitoring
device out of range?
All of the sidebar buttons
(except the Normal Screen
button) are disabled.
An empty patient tile is
selected.
Select a valid patient tile by
touching the digital or
waveform area of the patient
tile.
All Alarms Suspended
The Suspend All Alarms
function is enabled. All numeric
physiological, lethal
arrhythmia, non-lethal
arrhythmia and technical alarm
processing for the selected tile
has been suspended.
Resume alarm processing by
selecting the Suspend All
Alarms sidebar button and
disabling the Suspend All
Alarms function.
Non-Lethal Alarms
Suspended
The Suspend Non-Lethal
function is enabled. Alarm
processing for numeric
physiological, technical and
non-lethal alarms has been
suspended for the selected tile.
Resume alarm processing by
selecting the Suspend
Non-Lethal sidebar button
and disabling the Suspend
Non-Lethal function.
These settings are
currently being edited
remotely.
The Alarm Limits Menu is
opened at the bedside monitor
while the Alarm Limits tab is
active at the central station
The Alarm Limits tab is active at
the central station and then the
Alarm Limits Menu is opened at
the bedside monitor.
The Print menu bar button is
disabled.
The message These settings
are currently being edited
remotely. is displayed.
Select the OK button to close
the message box and enable
the sidebar button.
Close the Alarm Limits menu at
the bedside device.
The Suspend All Alarms
and Suspend Non-Lethal
sidebar buttons are disabled.
The message These settings
are currently being edited
remotely. is displayed.
Select the OK button to close
the message box and enable
the sidebar button.
Close the Alarm Limits menu at
the bedside device.
The patient alarm limits were
cleared from the Alarm
Limits tab.
*
6 - 10
The patient size was changed
at the bedside monitor.
No solution required. Within
20 seconds, the alarm limits
from the bedside will be
displayed at the central station.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient)
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Restore Previous
Settings sidebar button not
functioning.
The previous alarm limits were
cleared because the Alarm
Limits tab was open while the
patient size was changed at
the bedside monitor.
No solution required. Within
20 seconds, the alarm limits
from the bedside will be
displayed at the central station.
The Suspend All Alarms
sidebar button is not displayed.
The Suspend Alarms option in
the System Alarm Options tab
option is set to OFF or
Non-Lethal.
If this feature is needed,
contact the System
Administrator to change the
System Alarm Options.
The Suspend Non-Lethals
and Suspend All Alarms
sidebar buttons are not
displayed.
The Suspend Alarms option in
the System Alarm Options tab
option is set to OFF.
If this feature is needed,
contact the System
Administrator to change the
System Alarm Options.
The Alarm Limits tab is
disabled at the WorkStation.
The central station from where
the patient tile was networked
is configured as View Only.
No solution required.
The Alarm Responses tab is
disabled at the WorkStation.
The central station from where
the patient tile was networked
is configured as View Only.
No solution required.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
6 - 11
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
6.3
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
The Alarm Responses tab (shown in FIGURE 6-4 and FIGURE 6-6) is used to adjust the
behavior or response of an alarm during an alarm condition.
The Alarm Responses tab is available at the ViewStation (shown in FIGURE 6-7) but is for
viewing purposes only. When a patient tile is assigned to the ViewStation, it will always
display the alarm response settings of the associated host central station patient tile.
The patient Alarm Responses tab is available at the WorkStation and functions in the
same manner as it does at the host central station but contains fewer sidebar buttons. Similar
to the central station, alarm response changes made at the WorkStation, with the exception
of the Print on Alarm settings, will be sent to the central station, View Only Workstation, and
bedside monitor (if applicable). The Print on Alarm setting is independent of the central
station settings or updates.
Automatic updating of the alarm response settings at the remote workstation will also occur
when:
• The monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode at the central station
• The monitoring device is not communicating with its host central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the ViewStation and/or the
WorkStation is lost (Central Communications Lost)
NOTE:
6.3.1
The host central station(s) C-LAN configuration settings and
the software installed at the remote location dictates the
functionality available for each patient tile. For additional
information, refer to ‘‘The ViewStation and the
WorkStation’’ on page 2-4.
Accessing the Alarm Responses Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the Patient Alarms menu button. If the Patient Alarm
Setup tab displays, enter the password in the Password text box. The Alarm Limits
and Alarm Responses tabs are displayed.
2. Select the Alarm Responses tab. The Alarm Responses tab is displayed.
6 - 12
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
Patient Demographic Field
Selected Parameter
List Box
FIGURE 6-4 Alarm Responses Tab (Central Station)
Patient Demographic Field
Selected Parameter
List Box
FIGURE 6-5 Alarm Responses Tab (WorkStation)
Patient Demographic Field
Selected Parameter
List Box
FIGURE 6-6 Alarm Responses Tab - Paging Option Enabled (Central Station)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
6 - 13
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
Patient Alarm Functions
Patient Demographic Field
Selected Parameter
List Box
FIGURE 6-7 Alarm Responses Tab (ViewStation)
6.3.2
Configuring Alarm Responses
To configure patient alarm responses at the central station, complete the following:
NOTE:
Alarm response changes are effective immediately after the
tab is exited.
1. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area.
• The patient’s Last Name and Bed number are shown in the Demographics field,
if this information was previously entered in the Demographics tab.
2. Select the alarm to be modified.
• The Alarm Responses list box shows the alarms that can be modified.
• When a alarm is selected, it is shown in white with black text and is shown in the edit
box.
3. Select the alarm priority for the parameter. To set an alarm priority, select the Priority
button until the alarm priority setting is shown. Alarm priority is associated with the
severity of an alarm condition. It determines the audio and visual indicators that occur
during an alarm condition.
Alarm priority settings may include OFF, 1, 2, and 3. Each alarm has a predetermined
alarm priority settings.
• Priority 1 are the most severe alarms (lethal alarms).
• Priority 2 are alarms of medium severity (most numeric physiological alarms).
• Priority 3 are the least severe alarms (technical alarms).
• Priority OFF disables audio feedback for the selected alarm at the Panorama Central
Station.
For additional information on alarm behavior, refer to ‘‘Alarm Behavior’’ on page 3-1.
4. The Print on Alarm button automatically prints alarm data during an alarm condition.
• The ON option automatically prints the alarm events when the alarm condition occurs.
• The OFF option suspends the printing of alarm events during an alarm condition.
6 - 14
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
5. The Save To Event button automatically saves alarm data in the Events database when
an alarm condition occurs.
• The ON option automatically saves alarm data during an alarm condition.
• The OFF option does not save alarm data during an alarm condition.
6.3.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Restore Previous Settings
Select the Restore Previous Settings sidebar button to return patient display settings to
those in use when the tab was opened.
NOTE:
The Restore Previous Settings sidebar button is not available
at the ViewStation.
Suspend All Alarms (Optional)
Select the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button to suspend all numeric physiological, lethal
arrhythmia, non-lethal arrhythmia, and technical alarms at the Panorama Central Station for
the selected patient tile. The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is only shown if the
Suspend Alarms option is ON in the System Alarms tab.
WARNING: When the Suspend Non-Lethal alarms sidebar button is
enabled, the Panorama Central Station will not monitor any
non-lethal arrhythmias, and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
NOTE:
The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is not available at
the ViewStation or at the WorkStation.
When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is selected:
• The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button changes to white with black text.
• The All Alarms Suspended message displays in red text in the Patient Status line of
the patient tile. For additional information regarding the Patient Status line, refer to the
‘‘Patient Status Line’’ on page 2-10.
To resume the monitoring of alarms, select the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button.
• When the Suspend All Alarms sidebar button is disabled, the button changes to blue
with white text. Alarms are now re-enabled for the selected patient.
Suspend Non-Lethal
Select the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button to suspend all numeric, technical and
non-lethal arrhythmia alarms for the selected patient tile. Lethal arrhythmia alarms continue to
be monitored at the Panorama Central Station when non-lethal arrhythmia alarms are
suspended.
WARNING: When the Suspend Non-Lethal alarms sidebar button is
enabled, the Panorama Central Station will not monitor any
non-lethal arrhythmias, and will not display numeric
physiological or technical alarms for the selected patient tile.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
6 - 15
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
Patient Alarm Functions
NOTE:
The Suspend Non-lethal sidebar button is not available at
the ViewStation or at the WorkStation.
NOTE:
The Brady alarm will not be suspended when the Suspend
Non-Lethals sidebar button is selected.
When the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button is selected:
• The Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button changes to white with black text.
• The Non-Lethal Alarms Suspended message displays in yellow text in the Patient
Status line of the patient tile. For additional information regarding the Patient Status line,
refer to the ‘‘Patient Status Line’’ on page 2-10.
To resume the monitoring of non-lethal alarms, select the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar
button.
• When the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button is disabled, the button changes to blue
with white text. Non-lethal alarms are now re-enabled for the selected patient.
Alarm Setup (Optional)
Select the Alarm Setup sidebar button to configure the ST Alarm Delay and the Alarm
Delay, for the selected patient tile, when using a Telepack device.
NOTE:
The Alarm Setup sidebar button is not available at the
ViewStation.
To configure alarm delay:
1. Select the Alarm Setup button. The Alarm Setup dialog box (shown in FIGURE 6-8)
is displayed.
FIGURE 6-8 Alarm Setup Dialog Box
2. Select the ST Alarm Delay time period for the selected patient’s alarm. ST Alarm
Delay is the period of time that the Panorama Central Station delays the notification of
an ST alarm. ST Alarm Delay options include 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 1 minute, 90
seconds, 2 minutes and 3 minutes.
3. Select the Alarm Delay time period for the selected patient’s alarm. Alarm Delay is the
period of time that the Panorama Central Station delays the notification of an alarm.
Alarm Delay options include None, 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 4 seconds, 5
seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds and 8 seconds.
6 - 16
NOTE:
The Alarm Delay setting does not affect the alarm
notification for ST, Apnea, or Arrhythmia.
NOTE:
Changing the alarm delay becomes effective immediately
and affects the patient’s current alarm delay setting.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Alarm Functions
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
4. Select the Done or the Cancel button.
• The Done button accepts the configured alarm delay settings and returns to the
Alarm Responses tab.
• The Cancel button discards the configured alarm delay settings and returns to the
Alarm Responses tab.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
6 - 17
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)
6.3.4
Patient Alarm Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
patient Alarm Responses tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No Patient Selected!
This message appears in the
demographic field when either
no patient tile or an empty
patient tile has been selected.
Select an active patient tile.
Communications Lost
Communication between the
Panorama Central Station and
the monitoring device for the
selected patient tile has been
interrupted.
Check the connection between
the Panorama Central Station
and the monitoring device. For
example is the monitoring
device out of range?
All of the sidebar buttons
(except the Normal Screen
button) are disabled.
An empty patient tile is
selected.
Select a valid patient tile by
touching the digital or
waveform area of the patient
tile.
All Alarms Suspended
The Suspend All Alarms
function is enabled. All alarm
processing for the selected tile
has been suspended.
Resume alarm processing by
selecting the Suspend All
Alarms sidebar button and
disabling the Suspend All
Alarms function.
Non-Lethal Alarms
Suspended
The Suspend Non-Lethal
function is enabled. Alarm
processing for numeric
physiological, technical and
non-lethal alarms has been
suspended for the selected tile.
Resume alarm processing by
selecting the Suspend
Non-Lethal sidebar button
and disabling the Suspend
Non-Lethal function.
The Suspend All Alarms
sidebar button is not displayed.
The Suspend Alarms option in
the System Alarm Options tab
option is set to OFF or
Non-Lethal.
If this feature is needed,
contact the System
Administrator change the
System Alarm Options.
The Suspend Non-Lethals
and Suspend All Alarms
sidebar buttons are not
displayed.
The Suspend Alarms option in
the System Alarm Options tab
option is set to OFF.
If this feature is needed,
contact the System
Administrator change the
System Alarm Options.
*
6 - 18
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
7.0
Views
This section describes the tabs that are available when the VIEW button is selected from the
Panorama Central Station Main Screen.
• Bedside Tab
• Trends Tab
• Events Tab
• Disclosure Tab
• ST Tab
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7-1
Bedside Tab
7.1
Views
Bedside Tab
The Bedside tab provides an expanded view of the selected patient data. The parameters
selected, and the lead set used, determines the data that is displayed in the Bedside tab.
The data in the Bedside tab can be displayed in two different views, the All Waveforms
view and the All ECG view. Both views are discussed in the following sections.
The Bedside tab (shown in FIGURE 7-2) is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation
(shown in FIGURE 7-11) and functions in the same manner as it does at the host central
station. The Bedside tab will display the bedside data from the central station provided the
patient tile is in an active state.
7.1.1
Accessing the Bedside Tab
To access the Bedside tab (shown in FIGURE 7-1 and FIGURE 7-2), select the VIEW button
located on the left side of the patient tile.
NOTE:
When using a 3-wire lead set with bedside device or a
Telepack using a 3-wire or 5-wire lead set, the Bedside tab
will always be in the All ECG mode (as shown in
FIGURE 7-4).
NOTE:
When in the All ECG view, the color of the All ECG sidebar
button changes from dark blue with white lettering to white
with black lettering. This indicates that this view will
continue to display until the All ECG sidebar button is
selected again.
Patient Demographic Field
Digital Data Area
Waveform Area
NIBP Area
Digital Data Area
Data Display Area
FIGURE 7-1 Bedside Tab - All Waveforms View
7-2
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Bedside Tab
Patient Demographic Field
Digital Data Area
NIBP Area
Waveform Area
Digital Data Area
Data Display Area
FIGURE 7-2 Bedside Tab - All Waveforms View (ViewStation and WorkStation)
7.1.2
Bedside Tab (All Waveforms View)
The All Waveforms view of the Bedside tab (shown in FIGURE 7-1 and FIGURE 7-2)
displays an expanded view of the selected patient tile.
7.1.2.1
Components of the All Waveforms View
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic field displays the last name and bed number of the selected patient,
if this data was entered.
NIBP Area
The All Waveforms view includes a NIBP area that displays the NIBP systolic, diastolic,
mean, and elapsed time when an active patient is selected.
If applicable, the following icons display on the right side of the NIBP area:
•
Indicates that Pacer Enhancement is enabled.
•
Indicates that ST analysis is enabled.
•
Indicates that arrhythmia analysis is enabled.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7-3
Bedside Tab
Views
Digital Data Area
The All Waveforms view contains a digital data area that may display the following
patient parameters:
• PVC
• Temperature 1
• Temperature 2
• Temp Blood
• CO/CI
• N2O
NOTE:
The Delta T parameter will not display in the digital data
area.
NOTE:
The CO/CI, Temp 2, and T Blood parameters are only
available if they are being monitored by the
Spectrum/Spectrum OR External Parameter Module (EPM).
These parameters are not available if they are monitored by
an Edwards Vigilance® monitor.
Data Display Area
When in the All Waveforms view, the data display area of the Bedside tab displays the
configured patient parameters in a waveform and digital data tile format. The waveform
area of the Bedside tab displays in the left portion of the data display area and the digital
representation of the waveform displays to the right. In this view, three to six
waveforms/digital tiles can be displayed at one time. Parameters experiencing an alarm
condition will display a different background color indicating the severity of the alarm. If ST
is enabled on the ECG waveform, the digital data section of the Bedside tab includes an ST
lead label that specifies the lead from which the displayed data is acquired.
The first digital tile always displays one ECG lead along with the patient heart rate (HR). The
ECG waveform displayed is the same that is shown in the waveform area of the patient tile.
If the selected device is a Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module and the All Waveforms view
is displayed, the SpO2 waveform will always be positioned after the patient heart rate.
When the selected device is a bedside monitor, the other waveforms/digital tiles represent
the available waveforms for the selected patient tile. The waveforms/digital tiles that appear
in the Bedside tab are based on the parameters configured at the patient monitoring
device.
The order in which the subsequent waveforms display is determined by the order defined in
the Unit Priorities tab. The color associated with the waveforms/digital tiles is determined
by the configured parameter color defined in the System Setup tab. A unit of measure
label and an alarm status bell icon for each parameter also displays in the digital portion of
the display area. The color of the waveform/digital tiles is determined by the configured
parameter color.
7-4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
7.1.2.2
Bedside Tab
Navigating in the All Waveforms View
If the waveforms exceed the capacity of the viewable screen, use the navigational buttons to
locate the desired waveform. The buttons are described as follows:
• The up arrow button moves the group of displayed waveforms up one position within
the ordered set of waveforms
• The down arrow button moves the group of displayed waveforms down one position
within the ordered set of waveforms
7.1.2.3
Performing ECG Waveform Measurements
ECG waveform measurements for time and amplitude can be performed in the All
Waveforms view by using the Measure dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-3).
FIGURE 7-3 Measure Dialog Box
The Measure dialog box can only be accessed once the Freeze sidebar button has been
selected. When the Freeze sidebar button is selected, the All ECG sidebar button is
replaced with the Measure sidebar button.
When the Measure dialog box is first accessed, it contains five interval buttons. Once an
interval button is selected, two changes occur:
• Navigational buttons and the Clear and Calculate buttons are displayed in the
Measure dialog box
• Reference and measurement lines are displayed in the Bedside tab waveform area
The navigational buttons displayed depend on the selected interval. The left and right arrow
buttons are available when using the PR, QRS, QT, and R to R intervals. The up and down
arrow buttons are available when using the ST interval.
Vertical Measurements (Time)
1. Select either the PR, QRS, QT, or R to R intervals. A dashed vertical reference line is
placed to the left of the solid vertical reference line.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Adjustments can be made to both the solid vertical reference
line and/or the vertical dashed reference line. Selecting the
interval button a second time toggles between the two
reference lines. When a reference line is active, it
blinks/flashes on the screen.
0070-10-0707-02
7-5
Bedside Tab
Views
2. Adjust the location of the vertical reference line as follows:
• For coarse adjustments, select the desired location on the touch screen. The reference
line will move to that point.
• For fine adjustments, use the left/right arrow buttons to position the reference line at
the desired point.
3. Once the vertical reference line appears in the desired location, select the Calculate
button. The measurement populates the text box beside the selected interval.
• If another vertical measurement is desired, select another interval button.
• To delete a measurement, select the interval button that needs to be to reset, then select
the Clear button.
Horizontal Measurements (Amplitude)
1. Select the ST interval. A dashed horizontal reference line is placed above the solid
horizontal reference line.
NOTE:
Adjustments can be made to both the horizontal solid
reference line and/or the horizontal dashed reference line.
Selecting the interval button a second time toggles between
the two reference lines. When a reference line is active, it
blinks/flashes on the screen.
2. Adjust the location of the dashed, horizontal reference line as follows:
• For coarse adjustments, select the desired location on the touch screen. The reference
line will move to that point.
• For fine adjustments, use the up/down arrow buttons to position the reference line at
the desired point.
3. Once the dashed, horizontal reference line appears in the desired location, select the
Calculate button. The measurement populates the text box beside the ST interval.
• If another horizontal measurement is desired, select another interval button.
• To delete the ST measurement, select the ST interval button, then select the Clear
button.
7.1.2.4
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this view.
Lead
Select the Lead sidebar button to cycle through each of the waveforms in the ECG ordered
set. The Lead sidebar button is not available when using a:
• Telepack device with a 3 or 5-wire lead set
• Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module with a 3-wire lead set
7-6
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Bedside Tab
All ECG
Select the All ECG sidebar button to change to the All ECG view of the Bedside tab. The
Bedside tab remains in the All ECG view until the All ECG button is selected again. The
All ECG sidebar button is not available when using a:
• Telepack device with a 3 or 5-wire lead set
• Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module with a 3-wire lead set
For additional information about the All ECG view, refer to the ‘‘Bedside Tab (All ECG
View)’’ on page 7-8.
Freeze
Select the Freeze sidebar button to halt the updating of digital parameter data and
waveforms currently displayed in the Bedside tab. The Bedside tab remains frozen until
the Freeze sidebar button is selected again. Freezing the Bedside tab does not affect the
waveform or any real time alarms in the upper half of the Normal Screen.
When the Freeze sidebar button is selected, the All ECG sidebar button is replaced by the
Measure sidebar button.
Measure
Select the Measure sidebar button to activate the Measure dialog box (shown in
FIGURE 7-3). The Measure dialog contains reference and measurement lines to measure the
time and amplitude of an ECG waveform. For additional information regarding ECG
waveform measurements, refer to "Performing ECG Waveform Measurements" on
page 7-10.
Mark Event
Select the Mark Event sidebar button to save the current data to the Event database as a
‘Central User Marked Event.’ This can be useful for noting such things as the time when a
medication was administered.
NOTE:
The Mark Event sidebar button is not available at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.1.3
Generating an All Strips Report
To review a patient’s real-time data, generate an All Strips Report. This report can be
generated directly from the Bedside tab by selecting the Print menu bar button.
For additional information regarding the All Strips Report, refer to the ‘‘All Strips Report’’ on
page 8-2.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7-7
Bedside Tab
7.1.3.1
Views
Troubleshooting
For All Waveforms view troubleshooting information, refer to "Troubleshooting" on
page 7-11.
7.1.4
Bedside Tab (All ECG View)
The Bedside tab All ECG view displays all the ECG waveforms available based on the
lead set currently in use.
7.1.4.1
Accessing the All ECG View
To access the All ECG view (shown in FIGURE 7-4), select the All ECG sidebar button from
the Bedside tab All Waveforms view.
Patient Demographic Field
Digital Data Area
NIBP Area
Waveform Area
Lead Indicator
Area
Data Display Area
FIGURE 7-4 Bedside Tab - All ECG View (Central Station)
7-8
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Bedside Tab
Patient Demographic Field
Digital Data Area
Waveform Area
NIBP Area
Lead Indicator
Area
Data Display Area
FIGURE 7-5 Bedside Tab - All ECG View (ViewStation and WorkStation)
7.1.4.2
Components of the All ECG View
Patient Demographic Field
The description of this field was previously described on page 7-3.
NIBP Area
The description of this area was previously described on page 7-3.
Digital Data Area
The description of this area was previously described on page 7-4.
Data Display Area
When in the All ECG view, the waveform area of the Bedside tab displays all the ECG
waveforms based on the lead set currently in use. The waveform area of the Bedside tab
displays in the left portion of the data display area and the ECG lead indicator displays to
the right.
The first digital tile displays one ECG lead along with the patient heart rate (HR). The ECG
waveform displayed is the same waveform shown in the waveform area of the patient tile,
except when a View 12™ card is in use. In this case, the first waveform displayed will always
be ECG Lead I. When a 3 or a 5-wire lead is used, the ECG lead that appears in the first
waveform position is selected from the Display tab. The other waveforms/lead tiles
represent the available waveforms/leads for the selected patient tile. The order in which the
subsequent waveforms appear is based on the order specified by the ordered set. The
waveforms/lead tiles that appear are based on the lead set currently in use.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7-9
Bedside Tab
7.1.4.3
Views
Navigating in the All ECG View
If the waveforms exceed the capacity of the viewable screen, use the navigational buttons to
locate the desired waveform. The buttons are described as follows:
• The up arrow button moves the group of displayed waveforms up one position within
the ordered set of waveforms
• The down arrow button moves the group of displayed waveforms down one position
within the ordered set of waveforms
When a View 12™ card is in use, the double up arrow/down arrow can be used to
navigate:
• The double up arrow button displays the previous set of ECG waveforms
• The double down arrow button displays the next set of ECG waveforms
7.1.4.4
Performing ECG Waveform Measurements
ECG waveform measurements for time and amplitude can be performed in the All ECG view
by using the Measure dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-3). For additional information about
performing waveform measurements, refer to ‘‘Performing ECG Waveform Measurements’’
on page 7-5.
7.1.4.5
Sidebar Buttons
The sidebar buttons available in this view are the same as the sidebar buttons described in
the All Waveforms view. Please refer to page 7-6 for a full description of each of the
sidebar buttons.
7 - 10
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
7.1.4.6
Bedside Tab
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
either of the Bedside tab views.
MESSAGE/ISSUE*
REASON
SOLUTION
A waveform parameter
is not displayed.
If the waveform parameter
exists, it has not been
scrolled into view on the
display.
Use the navigation buttons to scroll to the
desired parameter waveform.
The waveform parameter is
not being monitored at the
bedside.
Connect the sensor(s) for the waveform
parameter to the patient.
No equipment is assigned to
the selected tile.
Assign a monitoring device to the patient
tile.
Patient is in the “Panorama
Standby Only” mode
Remove patient from Panorama
Standby Only by selecting the
Resume Monitoring button in the
Standby tab.
Patient is in the “Bedside and
Panorama Standby Only”
mode
Remove patient from Bedside and
Panorama Standby Only by
pressing the STANDBY button on front
panel of the bedside monitoring device.
Selected tile is in the
Discharge state.
Retrieve discharged patient.
(for NIBP area only)
The equipment assigned to
the selected tile does not
support the NIBP parameter.
Assign a monitoring device that supports
NIBP to the selected tile.
Up arrow/down arrow
button is not available
or is disabled
View 12™ card is in use
Use double up/down arrow button to
navigate
NIBP/Digital Data area
empty
There are less than six
waveforms available.
Double up
arrow/down arrow
button is not available
View 12™ card is not in use
First waveform position
not affected when
navigation up/down
arrow button is used
The first waveform is not
affected by the navigational
buttons.
Lead/All ECG
sidebar button is
unavailable
No equipment is assigned to
the selected tile.
Assign a monitoring device to the patient
tile.
Patient is in the “Panorama
Standby Only” mode.
Remove patient from Panorama
Standby Only by selecting the
Resume Monitoring button in the
Standby tab.
Patient is in the “Bedside and
Panorama Standby Only”
mode.
Remove patient from Bedside and
Panorama Standby Only by
pressing the STANDBY button on front
panel of the monitoring device.
Selected tile is in the
Communications Lost state or
Discharge state.
Verify connection to central stations
and/or retrieve discharged patient.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 11
Bedside Tab
Views
MESSAGE/ISSUE*
REASON
SOLUTION
Selected device is a Telepack
with a 3 or 5-wire lead set.
Selected device is a
Passport 2 or Spectrum with
a 3 or 5-wire lead set.
Lead sidebar button is
disabled
Select the All ECG sidebar button to
change to the Normal display mode.
The selected device is a:
No solution required.
•
Telepack device with a 3
or 5-wire lead
•
Telepack with Nonin
SpO2 module attached
with a 3-wire lead set
The All ECG sidebar button
is latched.
Select the All ECG sidebar button to
enable the Lead sidebar button.
Buttons in Measure
dialog box are
unavailable
Interval is not selected.
Select an interval.
A waveform parameter
is not displayed.
If the waveform parameter
exists, it has not been
scrolled into view on the
display.
Use the View More sidebar button to
scroll to the desired parameter
waveform.
The waveform parameter is
not being monitored at the
bedside.
Connect the sensor(s) for the waveform
parameter to the patient.
The patient tile is in the
Bedside and Panorama
Standby mode.
If necessary, remove the patient tile from
this mode.
The patient tile is in the
Panorama Standby
Only mode.
If necessary, remove the patient tile from
this mode.
The patient tile is in the
Communications Lost
state.
Restore communications with the bedside
monitor.
The patient tile is in a
Waiting for Patient state.
Restore communications with the bedside
monitor.
The Print menu bar
button is disabled.
7 - 12
Bedside tab is in the All ECG
display or Freeze mode.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
7.2
Trends Tab
Trends Tab
The Trends tab provides access to a patient’s trended digital data. Trend data is
automatically displayed in one minute intervals unless an alternate Trend Display interval
was selected. If the Trends tab is selected before the first interval is reached, or before the
first NIBP, CO/CI, or PAWP measurement occurs, the list will be empty. All previously
collected parameter data will be displayed, even if the parameter is not currently being
monitored.
The monitoring device, utilized parameters, and configured settings determines the data that
is displayed in the Trends tab. The configured trend display settings determine at what
interval the trends data will be displayed in the Trends tab.
The Trends tab is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation and functions in the
same manner as it does at the host central station. The Trends tab will display the trend data
from the central station provided the patient tile is communicating with the central station.
A patient’s trended digital data can be viewed in two formats, either as a list, or graphically.
Both views are discussed in the following sections.
7.2.1
Accessing the Trends Tab
1. Select the VIEW button on the desired patient tile. The Bedside tab is displayed.
2. Select the Trends tab. The Trends tab is displayed in the List view (shown in
FIGURE 7-6).
Patient Demographic Field
Old Data Page Down Scroll Down
Scroll Up
Page Up
New Data
FIGURE 7-6 Trends Tab - List View (Central Station, ViewStation, and WorkStation)
7.2.2
Trends Tab (List View)
The List view of the Trends tab (shown in FIGURE 7-6) provides a list of all of the trended
digital data for the selected patient and is displayed first when the Trends tab is accessed.
Each trend record is displayed as a row in the list, in descending chronological order. The
most recent trend record appears at the top.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 13
Trends Tab
Views
When the List view of the Trends tab is selected, the top row in the list is highlighted. Each
trend record's date and time display in the first column. All subsequent columns display
parameter data in the order that was specified in the Unit Priorities tab. For additional
information, refer to ‘‘System Setup Functions’’ on page 9-1.
If a priority 1 physiological alarm condition existed for a parameter during the time of trend
record storage, that parameter’s data will be highlighted in red.
If a priority 2 or 3 physiological alarm condition existed for a parameter during the time of
trend record storage, that parameter’s data will be highlighted in yellow.
7.2.2.1
Components of the List View
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic field displays the last name and bed number of the selected patient,
if this data was entered.
7.2.2.2
Navigating in the List View
If the List view exceeds the capacity of the viewable screen, use the navigational buttons
and scroll bars to locate the desired parameter data.
Scrolling through the List
There are three methods of scrolling through the list rows:
• Use the New Data button
or the Old Data button
, both located
below the horizontal scroll bar, to display the most current or the oldest trend records
filtered to the current Trend display settings for the selected patient.
• Use the Page Down (double down-arrow) and Page Up (double up-arrow) buttons,
located below the horizontal scroll bar, to scroll through one page of the list at a time.
• Use the up and down arrows, located below the horizontal scroll bar, for single row
scrolling.
Scrolling through the Parameters
Use the left and right arrows of the horizontal scroll bar for single parameter scrolling or drag
the scroll box to move quickly through the parameters.
Previous Event Button
Select the Previous Event button to locate and highlight the previous event condition that
occurred before the currently highlighted row.
Next Event Button
Select the Next Event button to locate and highlight an event that occurred after the
currently highlighted trend in the list box.
7 - 14
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
7.2.2.3
Trends Tab
Configuring a Trend Display Interval
Select the Trend Display sidebar button to configure the interval at which a patient’s trend
data will be displayed. Regardless of which Trend Display interval is selected, NIBP, CO/CI,
and PAWP trend records will be displayed.
ViewStation and WorkStation patient tiles will initially display the same trend interval settings
of the associated patient tile at the host central station. For additional information regarding
the transfer of trend interval settings from the host central station, refer to the ‘‘Trends Tab’’ on
page 7-13.
The default setting for a Trend Display interval is determined by the Unit Choices tab. For
additional information regarding the Unit Choices tab, refer to ‘‘Unit Choices Tab’’ on
page 9-50.
NOTE:
Trends data is automatically stored in one minute intervals.
The Trend Display interval selected does not affect how
trend information is stored in the database, just how it is
displayed.
NOTE:
Changing the trend display setting in the List Trend tab
automatically adjusts the trend display setting in the Display
tab. Changing the trend display setting in the Display tab
automatically adjusts the trend display setting in the List
Trend tab.
To select the Trend Display interval:
1. From the Display tab, select the Trend Display sidebar button. The Trend Display
dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-7) is displayed.
FIGURE 7-7 Trend Display Dialog Box
2. Select the Interval button until the desired interval period is displayed. Interval periods
include 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, and 2 hours.
3. Select the Done or the Cancel button.
• The Done button accepts the selection.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Display tab.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 15
Trends Tab
Views
With the exception of NIBP, CO/CI and PAWP, selecting the Done button will change the
Trend Display interval in the Trends tab based on the standard clock time intervals. Refer to
the following table:
INTERVAL
7.2.2.4
TREND RECORDS DISPLAYED IN TRENDS TAB
1 minute
All trend records will be displayed.
5 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 5, 10, 20, 25, 30,
35, 40, 45, 50, and 55 minutes will be displayed.
10 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, and
50 minutes will be displayed.
15 minute
All trend records having a timestamp of 0, 15, 30, and 45
minutes will be displayed.
30 minutes
All trend records having a timestamp of 0 and 30 minutes will be
displayed.
1 hour
All trend records having a timestamp of 0 minutes (for example,
12:00, 1:00, 2:00) will be displayed.
2 hour
All trend records having a timestamp of 0 minutes for even hours
only (for example, 12:00, 2:00, 4:00) will be displayed.
Printing a Trend List Report from the List View
Multiple hours of trend data can be printed to a Trends List Report directly from List view.
To indicate the time interval for printing this report:
1. From the List view, select the Print menu bar button. The Print Selection dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 7-8) is displayed.
FIGURE 7-8 Print Selection Dialog Box
2. Select the Print Current button, a time interval button, or the Cancel button.
• Select the Print Current to create a one page Trend List Report.
• Select one of the time interval buttons. The choices are print 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
3. Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
For additional information regarding this report, refer to ‘‘Trend List Report’’ on page 8-17.
7.2.2.5
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this view.
7 - 16
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Trends Tab
Graphic
Select the Graphic sidebar button to open the Graphic view of the Trends tab. For
additional information regarding the Graphic view, refer to "Accessing the Graphic View"
on page 7-19.
Trend Display
This sidebar button was previously described on page 7-15.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.2.2.6
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
List view of the Trends tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
There is no data in the List
view of the Trends tab.
A patient has not been
admitted to the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the selected tile or
choose a tile that already has an
admitted patient.
The Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
If the column of parameter
data exists, it has not been
scrolled into view on the
display.
Use the scroll bar located along the
bottom of the Trend list to scroll to the
desired parameter column.
The parameter has not been
monitored for this patient.
Connect the sensor(s) for the
parameter to the patient.
There is no data in the Trend
database because the
Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
The last row in the list is
already highlighted.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
There is no data in the Trend
database because the
Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
The first row in the list is
already highlighted.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
A column of parameter
data is not displayed.
No more data found
(Page Down Button)
No more data found
(Page Up Button)
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 17
Trends Tab
Views
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No more data found
(Previous Event Button)
There is no event data in the
Trend database.
Wait until an event is recorded to the
Trend database.
None of the rows that are
below the currently
highlighted row contain a
parameter with an event
condition.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
The last row in the list is
already highlighted.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
There is no event data in the
Trend database.
Wait until an event is recorded to the
Trend database.
None of the rows that are
above the currently
highlighted row contain a
parameter with an event
condition.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
The first row in the list is
already highlighted.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the List
view of the Trends tab.
There is no data in the Trend
database because the
Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
A patient has not been
admitted to the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the selected tile or
choose a tile that already has an
admitted patient.
The Trends List data is still
loading.
Wait for the Trends List data to finish
loading.
The Print Selection dialog
box is open.
Close the Print Selection dialog
box.
The trends data is loading.
Wait until the trends data is loaded.
No more events found
(Next Event Button)
The Graphic and Trend
Display sidebar buttons
are disabled.
The Print menu bar button
is disabled.
*
7 - 18
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
7.2.3
Trends Tab
Trends Tab (Graphic View)
The Graphic view of the Trends tab (shown in FIGURE 7-9) provides a graphical
representation of all of the trended digital data for a selected patient. All previously collected
data is displayed, even if the parameter is not currently being monitored.
The Graphic view for each parameter includes a range bar, plot area and parameter area
for the selected time. A maximum of three parameters can be scrolled into the viewable area
of the display.
When the Graphic view is displayed, a movable reference line, that crosses the three
available plot areas, is initially placed at the same date/time as the row (trend record) that
was highlighted in the List view. The trend record data that is displayed in the parameter
area is defined by the location of the reference line.
The Graphic view is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation and functions in the
same manner as it does at the host central station.
7.2.3.1
Accessing the Graphic View
1. Select the VIEW button on the desired patient tile. The Bedside tab is displayed.
2. Select the Trends tab. The Trends tab is displayed in the List view.
3. Select the Graphic sidebar button. The Trends tab is displayed in the Graphic view.
Patient
Demographic Field
Range Bars
Page Left
Alarm
Indicators
Plot Area
Time Line
Reference Line
Date/Time
Area
Display Time
Interval
Parameter Area
Page Right
FIGURE 7-9 Trends Tab - Graphic View (Central Station, ViewStation, and WorkStation)
7.2.3.2
Components of the Graphic View
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic field displays the last name and bed number of the selected patient,
if this data was entered.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 19
Trends Tab
Views
Alarm Indicator Area
Vertical lines that are displayed in the alarm indicator area denote the time at which an
alarm occurred. The color of each vertical line in the alarm indicator area denotes the
priority of the alarm.
Date/Time Area
The date/time area indicates the date and time associated with the location of the reference
line.
Display Time Interval
The display time interval is the current setting for the viewable snapshot and is one page of
the Graphic view. When the Graphic view opens, the default display time interval is two
hours.
Time Line
The time line displays nine equally spaced time values based on the display time interval.
Range Bars
The range bar for each parameter is displayed with the maximum and minimum values for
that parameter. Each range bar is displayed in the color of the parameter as described in the
Parameter Color tab.
Plot Areas
The plotted trend records are displayed in the following format:
• One plotted point for single sensor parameters
• A line connecting the inspired value and end tidal value for dual sensor parameters
• A line connecting the systolic and diastolic values and a single dot for the mean value
for multi-sensor parameters
Each plotted trend record is displayed in the color of the parameter as described in the
Parameter Color Tab.
Parameter Areas
The trend record data that is displayed in the parameter area is defined by the location of the
reference line. For parameters that have experienced an alarm event, the background color
of the parameter area is based on the alarm priority at the time of trend record storage.
If there is no data at the location of the reference line, the parameter areas will display the
parameter label and/or the unit of measurement.
7.2.3.3
Navigating in the Graphic View
Scrolling through the Parameters
A vertical scroll bar is located along the right side of the parameter area. The up and down
arrows on the scroll bar can be used for single parameter scrolling or the bar can be
dragged to move quickly through a large number of parameters.
7 - 20
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Trends Tab
Scrolling through the Time Line
There are two methods of scrolling through the time line:
• Use the left arrow button to move the reference line to the previous trend record on the
time line and the right arrow button to move the reference line to the next trend record
on the time line.
• Use the Page Left (double left-arrow) button to scroll to the previous page and the Page
Right (double right-arrow) button to scroll to the next page. Increments are based on
the display time interval.
Zoom In Button
The Zoom In button decreases the display time interval to a minimum of 2 hours, in two
hour increments.
Zoom Out Button
The Zoom Out button increases the display time interval to a maximum of 8 hours, in two
hour increments.
7.2.3.4
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this view.
List
Select the List sidebar button to return to the List view of the Trends tab.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.2.4
Generating a Graphic Trend Report
To review the trends for the selected patient tile in a graphical format, generate a Graphic
Trend Report. This report can be generated directly from the Trends tab by selecting the
Print menu bar button.
For additional information regarding the Graphic Trend Report, refer to the ‘‘Graphic Trend
Report’’ on page 8-47.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 21
Trends Tab
7.2.4.1
Views
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
There is no trend data in
the display.
A patient has not been
admitted to the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the selected tile or
choose a tile that already has an
admitted patient.
The Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
The parameter areas only
display the parameter
label and/or the unit of
measurement.
There is no data at the
location of the cursor line.
Move the cursor line to a point on
the time line where data is known to
exist.
No more data found
(Page Left Button)
There is no data in the Trend
database because the
Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
The first recorded data has
been reached. No further
data exists before this time.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
There is no data in the Trend
database because the
Trends tab was selected
before the first interval was
reached or before the first
NIBP measurement occurred.
Wait until the first interval is reached
or until the first NIBP measurement
occurs.
The most recent recorded data
has been reached. No further
data exists after this time.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
Time out of range
(Zoom In Button)
The minimum display time
interval has been reached.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
Time out of range
(Zoom Out Button)
The maximum display time
interval has been reached.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
Time out of range
(Left Arrow Button)
The minimum display time
interval has been reached.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
Time out of range
(Right Arrow Button)
The maximum display time
interval has been reached.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Graphic view of the Trends tab.
The List sidebar button is
disabled.
A message box is being
displayed.
Close the message box.
No more data found
(Page Right Button)
*
7 - 22
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
7.3
Events Tab
Events Tab
The Events tab lists all the events for a selected patient tile. The monitoring device, utilized
parameters, and configured settings determine the events that are saved in the Events list.
All previously collected data is displayed, even if the parameter is not being monitored.
NOTE:
If a lethal arrhythmia alarm condition exists, and a
transition to a different lethal arrhythmia alarm condition
occurs, a new event will be stored and a printout will be
generated, as configured.
The Events tab is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation (shown in FIGURE 7-11)
and functions in the same manner as it does at the host central station, with the exception of
the delete event buttons. The Events tab will display the event data from the central station,
provided the patient tile is communicating with the central station.
The Events tab displays events in two formats, either as a list, or as a waveform. Both views
are discussed in the following sections.
7.3.1
Accessing the Events Tab
1. Select the VIEW button on the desired patient tile. The Bedside tab is displayed.
2. Select the Events tab. The Events tab is displayed in the List view (shown in
FIGURE 7-10).
Patient Demographic Field
Total Number of Events
Old Data Page Down Scroll Down
Scroll Up
List Box
Page Up
New Data
FIGURE 7-10 Events Tab - List View
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 23
Events Tab
Views
Patient Demographic Field
Total Number of Events
Old Data Page Down Scroll Down
Scroll Up
List Box
Page Up
New Data
FIGURE 7-11 Events Tab - List View (ViewStation and WorkStation)
7.3.2
Events Tab (List View)
The List view lists all the events for the selected tile in a column format. Each event record is
displayed as a row in the list, with the most recent filtered event record at the top of the list.
The remaining events display in descending chronological order. For additional information
regarding events filtering, refer to ‘‘Events Filtering’’ on page 7-31.
7.3.2.1
Components of the List View
Patient Demographic Area
The List view patient demographic area will display the last name and bed number of the
selected patient, if this data was entered. In addition, the total number of events currently in
the Events database will display beside the patient demographic information.
Events Tab List Box Area
The List view displays each event record as a row in the list box. The list box is capable of
displaying a maximum of 1000 rows at one time. If the1000 row maximum is reached, and
new events occur, the oldest events will automatically be deleted from the Events database.
When the List view is first selected, the top row in the list will be highlighted. The event
record date and time is displayed in the first column, the event description is displayed in the
second column, and the heart rate (HR) is displayed in the third column (shown in
FIGURE 7-10). All subsequent columns display parameter data in the order specified in the
Unit Priorities tab.
NOTE:
7 - 24
All previously collected parameter data is displayed in the
Events tab list box, even if the parameter is not currently
being monitored.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
Alarm Indicators
If there was an alarm associated with an event, the specific parameter value will be
highlighted in the Event list. For example, if a Priority 1 physiological or bedside alarm
condition existed for a parameter at the time of event record storage, that parameter’s data is
highlighted in red. If a Priority 2 or 3 physiological or bedside alarm condition existed for a
parameter at the time of event record storage, that parameter’s data is highlighted in yellow.
7.3.2.2
Navigating in the List View
If the List view list exceeds the capacity of the viewable screen, use the navigational buttons
and scroll bars to locate the desired parameter data.
Scrolling through the List
There are three methods of scrolling through the list rows:
• Use the New Data button
or the Old Data button
, both located
below the horizontal scroll bar, to display the most current or the oldest events for the
selected patient.
• Use the Page Down (double down-arrow) and Page Up (double up-arrow) buttons,
located below the horizontal scroll bar, to scroll through one page of the list at a time.
• Use the up and down arrows, located below the horizontal scroll bar, for single row
scrolling.
Scrolling through the Parameters
Use the left and right arrows of the horizontal scroll bar for single parameter scrolling or drag
the scroll box to move quickly through the parameters.
7.3.2.3
Deleting Event Records
Remove event records from the List view by selecting the Delete Single Event button
and/or the Delete Events button.
Delete Single Event Button
Select the Delete Single Event button to remove a single event record from the List view.
NOTE:
The Delete Single Event button is not available at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
To delete a single event record:
1. From the List view, select the event record to be deleted.
2. Select the Delete Single Event button. A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
3. Select Yes or No.
• The Yes button deletes the event record. The event record is removed from the Events
list.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
If the Events List is open at the ViewStation or WorkStation
when the host central station confirmation dialog box “Yes”
button is selected, the message “Events were deleted from
the database. Press the OK button to refresh the list.” will
be displayed at the ViewStation or the WorkStation.
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 25
Events Tab
Views
• The No button does not delete the event.
NOTE:
Not all event records can be deleted. Refer to the “Alarms
and Events” chapter for more information regarding which
events cannot be deleted.
Delete Events Button
Select the Delete Events button to remove multiple events from the List view. Events are
deleted from the first selected event downward, towards the older events. For example, to
delete the five most recent events in the list, select the first event in the list, then select the
Delete Events button. Verify the number of events to delete is correct, then select the
Delete button.
NOTE:
The Delete Events button is not available at the ViewStation
or the WorkStation.
To delete multiple events:
1. From the List view, select the first event to be deleted.
2. Select the Delete Events button. The Delete Events dialog box (shown in
FIGURE 7-12) is displayed.
FIGURE 7-12 Delete Events Dialog Box
3. Select the 0 in the Number Of Events text box. The keypad dialog box is displayed.
4. Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of events to delete (between 1-50), then
select the OK button. The numeric keypad closes and the Delete Events dialog box is
displayed.
5. Select the Delete or Cancel button.
• Select the Delete button to remove the events.
• Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box and leave the Events list
unmodified.
6. Selecting the Delete button prompts a confirmation box to display.
• Select the Yes button to delete the event records. The event records are removed from
the Events list.
NOTE:
If the Events List is open at the ViewStation or WorkStation
when the host central station confirmation dialog box “Yes”
button is selected, the message “Events were deleted from
the database. Press the OK button to refresh the list.” will
be displayed at the ViewStation or the WorkStation.
• Select the No button to close the dialog box and leave the Events list unmodified.
7 - 26
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
NOTE:
7.3.2.4
Not all event records can be deleted. Refer to the “Alarms
and Events” chapter for more information regarding which
events cannot be deleted.
Refreshing the List View
Depending on the event type, the event may not be displayed in the List view until the list is
regenerated or refreshed. To refresh the List view, select any neighboring tab, such as the
Disclosure or ST tabs, then reselect the Events tab. This will refresh the List view so it will
display the most current events.
7.3.3
Event Filtering
The Events tab provides an event filter as a means of controlling the events displayed in the
List view. Filters can be configured based on time and on parameters. Since the Event list
contains historical data, the event filter is available even when the patient tile is experiencing
a Communications Lost condition or is in a Panorama Standby Only or Bedside
and Panorama Standby mode.
The initial central station event filter settings come from the System Event Filter settings, if
settings were configured. ViewStation and WorkStation patient tiles will initially display the
same event filter settings of the associated patient tile at the host central station. For
additional information regarding the transfer of event filter settings from the host central
station, refer to the ‘‘Trends Tab’’ on page 7-13.
7.3.3.1
Accessing the Events Filter
To access the events filter, select the Events Filtering sidebar button from the Events tab
List view.
Event Filter Text Box
FIGURE 7-13 Event Tab (Events Filtering)
7.3.3.2
Components of the Events Filter
Event Filter Text Box
The Event Filter text box is where the selected filter settings are displayed. Upon admission,
the Event Filter text box lists “All” as the filter. This means that the events (maximum of 1000)
for the selected patient tile will be displayed in the Events tab. Event filters can be
configured based on time and/or parameters.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 27
Events Tab
Views
Done Button
Select the Done button to close the All Event Filter view and display the Events tab with
the configured filter settings.
Cancel Button
Select the Cancel button to close the All Event Filter view and display the Events tab with
the previously configured filter settings.
7.3.3.3
Time Filters
By indicating a start time and an end time, the view will only include events within the
configured time period.
Accessing the Time Filter
To access the Time Filter (shown in FIGURE 7-14), select the Time sidebar button from the
Events Filter view. If any previously selected time ranges were specified, they will be
displayed in the Event Filter text box beside the Time: label, and in the Start Time and End
Time text boxes.
FIGURE 7-14 Time Event Filter
Clearing Time Filters
To remove previously entered time filters, select the Clear button from the Time Filter view.
Configuring a Time Filter
To enter a start time:
1. Select the Start Time text box. The Start Time dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-15) is
displayed.
7 - 28
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
FIGURE 7-15 Start Time Dialog Box
2. Rotate the dial controls to select the hour and minute values.
3. Rotate the dial controls to select the month, day and year values. Refer to the following
value ranges.
TIME FRAME
RANGE
Month
Month range to be inclusive within the limits of the oldest event to the
most recent event in the selected patient tile’s Events database.
Day
Day range to be inclusive within the limits of the oldest event to the
most recent event in the selected patient tile’s Events database.
Year
Year range to be inclusive within the limits of the oldest event to the
most recent event in the selected patient tile’s Events database.
4. Accept or reject the selection made in the Start Time dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the selections. When the Done button is selected, the date
and time selected populates the Start Time text box, End Time text box, and the Event
Filter text box.
• The Cancel button discards the selections, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Time Event Filter view.
To enter an end time:
1. Select the End Time text box. The End Time dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-16) is
displayed.
FIGURE 7-16 End Time Dialog Box
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 29
Events Tab
Views
2. To enter the end time, follow steps 2, 3, and 4 from the previous section (entering a Start
Time).
7.3.3.4
Parameter Filters
By selecting specific parameters, the Events tab will only display the events that contain the
chosen parameter. Parameter filters can be configured for physiological and technical
events. The physiological events listed are dependent on the assigned monitoring device and
the technical events listed are dependent on the ECG lead wire set currently in use.
Accessing the Parameter Filter
To access the Parameter Filter (shown in FIGURE 7-17), select the Param sidebar button
from the All Events view. By default, the physiological events are shown first. If any
previously selected parameters were specified, they will be displayed in the Event Filter text
box beside the Param: label.
FIGURE 7-17 Parameter Event Filter View
Configuring a Parameter Filter
To configure a parameter filter:
1. If a technical event filter is needed, select the Tech button.
NOTE:
By default, the physiological events are displayed when the
Param sidebar is selected.
2. Move/remove the selected events by using any of the buttons described in the following
table:
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Remove All
Removes all the events listed in the Selected Events list box and
from the Event Filter text box.
Add/Right Arrow
Adds the selected event to the Selected Events list box, and to the
Event Filter text box.
Remove/Left Arrow
Removes the chosen event from the Selected Events list box and
from the Event Filter text box.
NOTE:
7 - 30
A maximum of five physiological and/or technical events
may be added to the Selected Events list at one time.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
3. Select the Done button to apply the selected event filter and return to the List view or
select the Cancel button to restore the previously chosen filter settings.
7.3.3.5
Printing an Events List Report from the List View
Multiple hours of event data can be printed to an Events List Report directly from the List
view.
To indicate the time interval for printing this report:
1. From the List view, select the Print menu bar button. The Print Selection dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 7-8) is displayed.
2. Select the Print Current button, a time interval button, or the Cancel button.
• Select the Print Current to create a one page Trend List Report.
• Select one of the time interval buttons. The choices are print 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
3. Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
For additional information about this report, refer to the ‘‘Event List Report’’ on page 8-21.
7.3.3.6
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons can be used to expand the functionality of this view.
View Waveforms
For additional information regarding the functionality of this sidebar button, refer to
‘‘Accessing the Waveforms View’’ on page 7-33.
Events Filtering
For additional information regarding the functionality of this sidebar button, refer to ‘‘Event
Filtering’’ on page 7-27.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.3.3.7
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
List view of the Events tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
Sidebar buttons disabled
when Events tab
selected.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
No patient in the tile
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
*
SOLUTION
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 31
Events Tab
Views
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No data in Events list.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
None of the existing event
data meets the criteria of the
current event filter.
Change the event filter.
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
Events list column headers
not displayed.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
The View Waveform
and Events Filtering
sidebar buttons are
disabled.
The Events List is empty or
none of the existing event
data meets the criteria of the
current event filter.
Change the event filter.
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
Some items cannot be
deleted.
Specific types of events
cannot be removed from the
Event list.
Refer to the Alarms and Events
chapter.
Events were deleted
from the database.
Press the OK button
to refresh the list.
This message will appear if
the Events List is open at the
ViewStation or WorkStation
when an event is deleted from
the host central station Events
database.
Select the OK button.
The Print menu button is
disabled.
The event data is loading.
Wait until the event data is loaded.
Events are filtered but an
event filter was not
created.
A system event filter may have
been created.
Contact the System Administrator to
see if a system event filter exists.
*
7 - 32
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
7.3.4
Events Tab
Events Tab (Waveforms View)
The Waveforms view (shown in FIGURE 7-18) of the Events tab displays waveform data
for the selected patient. In order for the event to display in the Waveforms view, there must
be waveform data associated with the event. Physiological alarm events and ‘marked events’
are stored as waveform data. All previously collected data is displayed, even if the
parameter is not currently being monitored.
7.3.5
Accessing the Waveforms View
1. Select the VIEW button on the desired patient tile. The Bedside tab is displayed.
2. Select the Events tab. The List view is displayed.
3. Select a physiological alarm event or marked event (for example, High Heart Rate
Alarm) from the List view for the selected patient, then select the View Waveforms
sidebar button. The selected event is displayed in the Waveforms view (shown in
FIGURE 7-18).
,
Patient Demographic Area
Vertical Navigation Buttons
Event Description Area
Digital Data Area
ST Button
Data Display Area
Date Area
NIBP Area
Time Interval Area
Colored Vertical Cursor Line
Horizontal Navigation Buttons
FIGURE 7-18 Waveforms View of the Events Tab
7.3.5.1
Components of the Waveforms View
Patient Demographic Area
The patient demographic area displays the patient’s last name and bed number, if available.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 33
Events Tab
Views
Digital Data Area
The following seven (7) parameters can display in the digital data area depending on the
bedside monitor configuration.
• PVC/min
• Temperature 1
• Temperature 2
• T Blood
• N2O
• CO/CI
• PAWP
NOTE:
The Temperature 1, Temperature 2, and T Blood parameters
are only displayed when they are used in the calculation of
the Delta Temperature parameter.
Time Interval Area
The time interval area is displayed in one second intervals. A total of nine seconds can be
viewed on the screen at one time. Each second shown displays a time label over each
one-second grid line in the waveform area.
Event Description Area
The event description area displays the event that was selected in the Event List view. For
example, a High Heart Rate Alarm.
NIBP Area
The NIBP area displays the NIBP systolic pressure, diastolic pressure, mean pressure, and
elapsed time.
Date Area
The date area indicates the date the event occurred and was stored in the Events database.
Data Display Area
If data is available, the Waveforms view displays 20 seconds of waveform data. The
initial Waveforms view displays the first nine seconds of waveform data before the alarm
was triggered, and can display three to four waveforms and/or digital data tiles at one time.
Colored Vertical Cursor Line
The colored vertical cursor line extends from the first waveform to the last waveform on the
display. The colored vertical cursor line can be moved to indicate the specific time within the
event.
7.3.5.2
Navigating in the Waveforms View of the Events Tab
Navigating in the Waveforms view is accomplished by using buttons. When the
Waveforms view is first opened, the colored vertical cursor line will be positioned in the
far right position.
7 - 34
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
Vertical Navigation Buttons
Double Up Arrow Button
Select the double up arrow push button to display the previous page of waveforms in the
ordered set. This button will be disabled if the first waveform in the ordered set is already
visible in the data display area.
Up Arrow Button
Select the up arrow button to move the group of waveforms displayed up one position
within the set of available waveforms. This button will be disabled if the first waveform in the
ordered set is already visible in the data display area.
Double Down Arrow Button
Select the double down arrow button to display the next page of waveforms in the
ordered set. This button will be disabled if the last waveform in the ordered set is already
visible in the data display area.
Down Arrow Button
Select the down arrow button to move the group of waveforms displayed down one
position within the ordered set of available waveforms. This button will be disabled if the last
waveform in the ordered set is already visible in the data display area.
Horizontal Navigation Buttons
Previous Event Button
Select the Previous Event to locate and display an event that occurred earlier than the
current event time began.This button will be disabled when there are no more events that
have a time less than the current event time.
Double Left Arrow Button
Select the double left arrow button to display the previous nine seconds of event data,
provided this data was collected. This button will be disabled if the vertical cursor is
positioned at the beginning of the stored data for the event.
Left Arrow Button
Select the left arrow button to move the colored vertical cursor line one second back in
time. This button will be disabled if the vertical cursor is positioned at the beginning of the
stored data for the event.
Right Arrow Button
Select the right arrow button to move the colored vertical cursor line one second forward
in time. This button will be disabled if the vertical cursor is positioned at the end of the stored
data for the event.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 35
Events Tab
Views
Double Right Arrow Button
Select the double right arrow button to display the next nine seconds of event data,
provided this data was collected. This button will be disabled if the vertical cursor is
positioned at the end of the stored data for the event.
Next Event Button
Select the Next Event button to locate and highlight an event that occurred after the
currently highlighted event in the list box.
7.3.5.3
ST Button
Select the ST button to open the Waveforms view ST dialog box.
Waveforms View ST Dialog Box
The Waveforms view ST dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-19) displays the current and
reference values for all the leads where ST was performed during the selected event. The
number of leads that display in this dialog box is dependent on the number of leads used
during the event. If the ST option has been enabled, the ST button will be enabled even if ST
is not currently being monitored. If ST was never enabled for the patient tile, the ST button
will be disabled.
FIGURE 7-19 Waveforms View ST Dialog
Date and Time Text Area
The date/time text area, located at the top of the Waveforms view ST dialog, displays the
date and time the ST data displayed was acquired. When the ST dialog box navigation
buttons (moving forward or backward in time) are used, this area will be updated to reflect
the date and time of the ST data currently displayed in the dialog box.
Left Arrow Button
Select the left arrow button to view the ST data for the previous second of the event.
Right Arrow Button
Select the right arrow button to view the ST data for the next second of the event.
7 - 36
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
Done Button
Select the Done button to close the Waveforms view ST dialog.
7.3.5.4
Comments Dialog Box (Optional)
With the addition of system-wide paging, a paging notification can be sent to clinicians to
alert them that a specific event type has occurred. If a page was sent for a selected event in
the Waveforms view, an asterisk (*) will appear beside the event in the event description
area (shown in FIGURE 7-18). The paging information related to the event can be viewed by
selecting the Comments sidebar button. The Comments dialog box will display either a
Page Sent or a Page Failed message. If the selected event does not have an asterisk
beside the event description, this indicates that a page has not been sent for the selected
event. In this case, the Comments sidebar button will be disabled.
7.3.5.5
Sidebar Buttons
The Waveforms view may contain up to six sidebar buttons.
View List
Select the View List sidebar button to return to the Events list.
Lead
Select the Lead sidebar button to cycle through each of the waveforms in the ECG lead
ordered set. The Lead sidebar button is not available when using a:
• Telepack device with a 3 or 5-wire lead set
• Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module with a 3-wire lead set
All ECG
Select the All ECG sidebar button to access the All ECG mode of the Events tab. When the
All ECG button is white, this indicates the Events tab is in the All ECG mode. The
Waveforms view remains in the All ECG mode until the All ECG sidebar button is
selected again. The All ECG sidebar button is not available when using a:
• Telepack device with a 3 or 5-wire lead set
• Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module with a 3-wire lead set
NOTE:
If a 5-wire or 12-lead set was previously used for the
selected patient, the All ECG sidebar push button will
always be enabled.
Measure
Select the Measure sidebar button to activate the Measure dialog box (shown in
FIGURE 7-3). The Measure dialog contains reference and measurement lines to calculate the
time and amplitude of an ECG waveform. For instructions on the use of the Measure button,
refer to ‘‘Performing ECG Waveform Measurements’’ on page 7-5.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
The Print menu bar will be enabled when the Measure
dialog box is open.
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 37
Events Tab
Views
Comments (Optional)
This sidebar button was previously described in the ‘‘Comments Dialog Box (Optional)’’ on
page 7-37. If the Paging feature is unavailable at the central station, the Comments
sidebar button will not be displayed.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.3.5.6
Printing an Event Zoom In Report from the Waveforms View
To print a Event Zoom In Report from the Waveforms view, select the Print button from the
menu bar (shown in FIGURE 2-1).
7.3.5.7
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Waveforms view of the Events tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
Sidebar buttons disabled
when Events tab
selected.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
No patient in the tile
There is no patient admitted to
the selected tile.
Admit a patient to the tile.
Patient tile not selected.
Select a patient tile.
No Waveform data is
collected for this
event.
The selected event is not a
physiological alarm event.
Refer to the Alarms and Events
chapter.
The correct alarmed event
is selected from the List
view but no waveform is
displayed in View
Waveforms view.
A 3-lead wire set is being
used and the active lead was
changed from when the event
originally occurred.
Return to the lead that was active
when the event occurred, then try to
view the waveform again.
Events were deleted
from the database.
Press the OK button
to refresh the list.
When viewing a patient tile’s
Event Zoom In tab at the
ViewStation or WorkStation,
pressing the Next Event
and/or Previous Event button
to an event that has been
deleted from the database,
will display the message
“Events were deleted from the
database. Press the OK button
to refresh the list.” at the
ViewStation or WorkStation.
Select the OK button to close the
message box.
Next Event button is
disabled.
The last event is selected in
the list, therefore, there are no
events to view next.
Select an earlier event.
Previous Event button is
disabled.
The first event is selected in
the list, therefore, there are no
previous events to view.
Select a later event.
*
7 - 38
SOLUTION
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Events Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
ST button is disabled
ST was never enabled for the
selected patient tile.
If the patient tile requires ST analysis,
and there is an ST license available,
enable ST from the bedside monitor.
Lead sidebar button is
disabled
The selected device is a:
No solution required.
•
Telepack device using a 3
or 5-wire lead
•
Telepack with Nonin
SpO2 module attached
with a 3-wire lead set
The All ECG sidebar button is
latched.
Select the All ECG sidebar button to
enable the Lead sidebar button.
CO/CI data is not
displayed in Waveforms
view but is displayed in
Events list.
Currently, CO/CI waveform
data is not displayed in the
Waveforms view.
No solution required.
No more events found
The colored vertical cursor is
positioned at the first or the
last event in the Events
database.
No solution required.
Comments sidebar
button is not displayed in
sidebar.
The Paging option is not
present on the central station
licensing key.
Obtain a licensing key that contains
the Paging option.
Comments sidebar
button is disabled.
No paging information was
sent for the selected event.
If a page should have been sent for
the selected event type, verify the
Page On Alarm settings in the Alarm
Responses tab.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 39
Disclosure Tab
7.4
Views
Disclosure Tab
The Disclosure tab provides access to a patient’s disclosure database. The disclosure
database is a collection of continuous, running, available waveforms that can store between
1 and 72 hours of disclosure data, depending on the type of license key that is issued for the
system. License keys are issued for 1-hour, 24-hour, 48-hour, and 72-hour periods.
Each record in the database includes the time of the record, digital data, patient alarm
events and all of the waveforms (with the exception of the O2 and Agent waveforms) that
were available for the patient at the time of the record storage. When a patient’s disclosure
database reaches the maximum number of records allowed, the next new record replaces
the oldest record.
The Disclosure tab is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation (shown in
FIGURE 7-20) and functions in the same manner as it does at the host central station. The
Disclosure tab will display the disclosure data from the central station, provided the patient
tile is communicating with the central station.
A patient’s disclosure data can be viewed in two different formats. The default view is the
Compressed view. The other is the Waveforms (magnified) view. Both views are
discussed in the following sections.
7.4.1
Accessing the Disclosure Tab
1. Select the VIEW button on the desired patient tile. The Bedside tab will be displayed.
2. Select the Disclosure tab. The Disclosure tab (shown in FIGURE 7-20) Compressed
view is displayed.
Patient Demographic Field
Date
Sensor Label
FIGURE 7-20 Disclosure Tab - Compressed View (Central Station, ViewStation,
WorkStation)
7 - 40
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
7.4.1.1
Disclosure Tab
Components of the Compressed View
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic field displays the last name and bed number of the selected patient,
if this data was entered.
Waveform Area
The waveform area of the Disclosure tab provides a compressed view of the selected
patient’s historical waveform data. A maximum of 10 minutes of waveform data can be
scrolled into the viewable area of the display. Each row of historical disclosure data in the
waveform area is displayed in one minute intervals. Each waveform is displayed in the
designated color of the parameter.
On initial entry to the Compressed view of the Disclosure tab, the ECG waveform
displayed is the first waveform shown in the main screen.
The waveforms displayed in the Disclosure tab are based on the sensors currently in use.
Any previously collected data is displayed, even if the parameter is not currently being
monitored. Newly stored waveform data does not immediately update the disclosure
waveform area. Selecting another control in the Disclosure tab causes the waveform area
to refresh and updates the newly stored waveform data.
Blank sections of a disclosure waveform occur during the storage of a row of data when:
• The system time has been altered
• The device has been placed into Standby mode
• The device is in a Communications Lost state
• The Panorama Central Station has been restarted
The entire waveform area will be blank if the selected patient tile does not have a monitoring
device attached or if there is no historical disclosure data in the patient’s database.
Time, Date, and Sensor Label
The actual time the data was stored is displayed on the left side of the waveform. The format
of the time display follows the System Time Format as defined in the ‘‘Date/Time Tab’’ on
page 9-41.
The date the selected waveform data was recorded is displayed in the upper right corner of
the waveform area (shown in FIGURE 7-20).
A sensor label for the selected waveform data is also displayed in the upper right corner of
the waveform area, just below the date (shown in FIGURE 7-20).
Event Markers
The Disclosure tab uses event markers to indicate that an event (such as an alarm
condition) has occurred. Event markers are small, color coded, horizontal lines that are
drawn above the disclosure waveform at the onset of the event. The color codes for the event
markers are defined as follows:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 41
Disclosure Tab
Views
• Red event markers indicate that a Level 1alarm occurred
• Yellow event markers indicate that either a Level 2 or a Level 3 alarm occurred
• Blue event markers indicate that a user marked event occurred at either the Panorama
Central Station or the bedside monitor and/or that the Nurse Call button was pressed
on the Panorama Telepack
• Orange event markers indicate that a Communications Lost event or a clock
adjustment occurred
7.4.1.2
Navigating in the Waveform Area
If the Disclosure tab waveforms exceed the capacity of the viewable screen, use the
navigational buttons to locate the desired waveform. The buttons are described as follows:
Previous Event Button
Select the Previous Event button to locate the next event in the patient’s disclosure
database that occurred before the time at the upper left corner of the compressed view.
Next Event Button
Select the Next Event button to locate the next event marker in the Compressed view that
occurred after the current marker time.
Zoom In Button
Select the Zoom In button to magnify a selected area from the compressed view of the
patient’s disclosure waveform.
Zoom Out Button
Select the Zoom Out button to return the magnified view of the patient’s disclosure
waveform to the compressed view of the waveform. The Zoom Out button is only enabled
when the magnified view of the waveform is displayed.
Scrolling through the Waveforms
If the disclosure database exceeds the capacity of the viewable screen (10 minutes), there
are two methods of scrolling through the waveforms. Arrow buttons located along the right
side of the view (next to the sidebar) function as follows:
• Use the single up-arrow and single down-arrow buttons to scroll up or down a single
row.
• Use the Page Up (double up-arrow) and Page Down (double down-arrow) buttons to
scroll through one page of disclosure waveforms at a time to view earlier or later data.
7 - 42
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
7.4.1.3
Disclosure Tab
Changing the Displayed Waveform
Select the Display Choices sidebar button to select the waveform that will be displayed in
the Compressed view of the Disclosure tab. The Display Choices dialog box (shown in
FIGURE 7-21) displays the choices that are available based on the monitoring device, ECG
lead set, and utilized sensors. Any previously used parameters, ECG lead set or sensors are
displayed, even if they are not currently in use.
NOTE:
The sensor selected in the Display Choices dialog will remain
until the Disclosure tab is exited.
NOTE:
The O2 and Agent parameters are not available in the
Display Choices list box.
To change the sensor currently displayed in the Disclosure tab:
1. Select the Display Choices sidebar button. The Display Choices dialog box is
displayed.
FIGURE 7-21 Display Choices Dialog Box
2. Select the desired waveform to be displayed from the Display Choices dialog box.
• Select the Cancel button to return to the Disclosure tab.
• Select the Done button return to the Disclosure tab and view the selected waveform.
7.4.1.4
Locating Specific Disclosure Data
Select the Skip To sidebar button to choose a different time period from the selected
patient’s disclosure database. The date and time the data was stored is displayed on the left
side of the waveform.
NOTE:
The time and date selected in the Skip To dialog will remain
until the Disclosure tab is exited.
To locate a specific time in the disclosure database:
1. Select the Skip To sidebar button. The Skip To dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-22) will
be displayed.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 43
Disclosure Tab
Views
FIGURE 7-22 Skip To Dialog Box
2. Rotate the dial controls to select the time and date to be displayed. Ensure that the
selected time and date are within the timeframe of the database.
• Select the Cancel button to return to the Disclosure tab.
• Select the Done button to return to the Disclosure tab with the selected date
displayed in the date area, and the selected time displayed in the upper left corner of
the waveform area.
7.4.1.5
Printing a Full Disclosure Report from the Compressed View
Multiple hours of disclosure data can be printed to a Full Disclosure Report directly from the
Compressed view.
To indicate the time interval for printing this report:
1. From the Compressed view, select the Print menu bar button. The Print Selection
dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-8) is displayed.
2. Select the Print Current button, a time interval button, or the Cancel button.
• Select the Print Current to create a one page Trend List Report.
• Select one of the time interval buttons. The choices are print 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
3. Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
7.4.1.6
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this view.
Display Choices
Select the Display Choices sidebar button to select the waveform that will be displayed in
the Compressed view of the Disclosure tab. For additional information regarding this
option, refer to ‘‘Changing the Displayed Waveform’’ on page 7-43.
Skip To
Select the Skip To sidebar button to choose a different time period from the selected
patient’s disclosure database. For additional information regarding this option, refer to
‘‘Locating Specific Disclosure Data’’ on page 7-43.
7 - 44
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Disclosure Tab
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.4.1.7
Troubleshooting
For Compressed view troubleshooting information, refer to "Troubleshooting" on
page 7-50.
7.4.2
Disclosure Tab (Waveforms View)
The Waveforms view displays a selected area from the Compressed view of the patient’s
disclosure waveform (shown in FIGURE 7-23).
Patient Demographic Field
Date Field
Event Description Field
Digital Data Field
NIBP Field
Time Interval Field
Colored Vertical Cursor Line
Data Display Area
Horizontal Navigational Buttons
Vertical Navigational Buttons
FIGURE 7-23 Disclosure Tab (Waveforms View)
7.4.2.1
Accessing the Waveforms View
1. Select the VIEW button on the desired patient tile. The Bedside tab is displayed.
2. Select the Disclosure tab. The Waveforms view (shown in FIGURE 7-23) is
displayed.
3. Select a zoomed in area using one of the following methods:
• Selecting the Zoomed In button without highlighting the waveform displays the
magnified view beginning with the time at the upper left corner of the compressed
waveform area.
• A section of the waveform can be highlighted by selecting a starting point and
dragging to an end point. Selecting the Zoom In button displays a magnified view of
the highlighted section.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 45
Disclosure Tab
7.4.2.2
Views
Components of the Waveforms View
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic area displays the patient’s last name and bed number, if available.
Digital Data Field
The following seven (7) parameters can display in the digital data area depending on the
bedside monitor configuration.
• PVC/min
• Temperature 1
• Temperature 2
• T Blood
• N2O
• CO/CI
• PAWP
NOTE:
The Temperature 1, Temperature 2, and T Blood parameters
are only displayed when they are used in the calculation of
the Delta Temperature parameter.
Time Interval Field
The time interval field is displayed in one second intervals. A total of nine seconds can be
viewed on the screen at one time. Each second shown displays a time label over each
one-second-grid line in the waveform area.
Event Description Field
The event description field displays the event that was selected in the Event List view. For
example, a High Heart Rate Alarm.
NIBP Field
The NIBP field displays the NIBP systolic pressure, diastolic pressure, mean pressure, and
elapsed time.
Date Field
The date area indicates the date the event occurred and was stored in the Events database.
Data Display Area
If data is available, the Waveforms view displays 20 seconds of waveform data. The
initial Waveforms view displays the first nine seconds of waveform data before the alarm
was triggered, and can display three to four waveforms and/or digital data tiles at one time.
Colored Vertical Cursor Line
The colored vertical cursor line extends from the first waveform to the last waveform on the
display. Each movement of the colored vertical cursor line indicates the specific time in the
event.
7 - 46
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
7.4.2.3
Disclosure Tab
Navigating in the Waveforms View of the Disclosure Tab
Navigating in the Waveforms view is accomplished by using buttons. When the
Waveforms view is first opened, the colored vertical cursor line will be positioned in the
far left position.
Vertical Navigation Buttons
Double Up Arrow Button
Select the double up arrow push button to display the previous page of waveforms in the
ordered set. This button will be disabled if the first waveform in the ordered set is already
visible in the data display area.
Up Arrow Button
Select the up arrow button to move the group of waveforms displayed up one position
within the ordered set of available waveforms. This button will be disabled if the first
waveform in the ordered set is already visible in the data display area.
Double Down Arrow Button
Select the double down arrow button to display the next page of waveforms in the
ordered set. This button will be disabled if the last waveform in the ordered set is already
visible in the data display area.
Down Arrow Button
Select the down arrow button to move the group of waveforms displayed down one
position within the ordered set of available waveforms. This button will be disabled if there
are less than nine seconds of earlier data to display.
Horizontal Navigation Buttons
Previous Event Button
Select the Previous Event button to locate and display an event that occurred earlier than
the current event time began. This button will be disabled when the colored vertical cursor is
positioned at the start time of the first event in the database.
Double Left Arrow Button
Select the double left arrow button to display the previous nine seconds of event data,
provided this data was collected. This button will be disabled if the colored vertical cursor
line is positioned at the start time of the first record in the database.
Left Arrow Button
Select the left arrow button to move the colored vertical cursor line one second back in
time. This button will be disabled when the colored vertical cursor is positioned at the start
time of the first record in the database.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 47
Disclosure Tab
Views
Right Arrow Button
Select the right arrow button to move the colored vertical cursor line one second forward
in time.
Double Right Arrow Button
Select the double right arrow button to display the next nine seconds of event data,
provided this data was collected.
Next Event Button
Select the Next Event button to locate and highlight an event that occurred after the
currently highlighted event in the Waveforms view.
7.4.2.4
ST Button
Select the ST button to open the Full Disclosure Zoom In ST dialog box.
Full Disclosure Zoom In ST Dialog Box
The Full Disclosure Zoom In ST dialog box (shown in FIGURE 7-19) displays the current and
reference values for all the leads where ST was performed during the selected event. The
number of leads that display in this dialog box is dependent on the number of leads used
during the event. If the ST option has ever been enabled for the selected patient tile, the ST
button will be enabled even if ST is not currently being monitored. If ST was never enabled
for the patient tile, the ST button will be disabled.
FIGURE 7-24 Full Disclosure Zoom In ST Dialog
Date and Time Text Area
The date/time text area, located at the top of the Full Disclosure Zoom In ST dialog, displays
the date and time the ST data displayed was acquired. When the ST dialog box navigation
buttons (moving forward or backward in time) are used, this area will be updated to reflect
the date and time of the ST data currently displayed in the dialog box.
Left Arrow Button
Select the left arrow button to view the ST data for the previous event second.
7 - 48
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Disclosure Tab
Right Arrow Button
Select the right arrow button to view the ST data for the next event second.
Done Button
Select the Done button to close the Full Disclosure Zoom In ST dialog.
7.4.2.5
Comments Dialog Box (Optional)
With the addition of system-wide paging, a paging notification can be sent to clinicians to
alert them that a specific event type has occurred. If a page was sent for a selected event in
the Waveforms view, an asterisk (*) will appear beside the event in the event description
area (shown in FIGURE 7-18). The paging information related to the event can be viewed by
selecting the Comments sidebar button. The Comments dialog box will display either a
Page Sent or a Page Failed message. If the selected event does not have an asterisk
beside the event description, this indicates that a page has not been sent for the selected
event. In this case, the Comments sidebar button will be disabled.
7.4.2.6
Sidebar Buttons
The Waveforms view may contain up to six sidebar buttons.
Zoom Out
Select the Zoom Out sidebar button to return to the Compressed view of the Disclosure
tab.
Lead
Select the Lead sidebar button to cycle through each of the waveforms in the ordered set.
The Lead sidebar button is not available when using a:
• Telepack device with a 3 or 5-wire lead set
• Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module with a 3-wire lead set
All ECG
Select the All ECG sidebar button to access the All ECG mode of the Disclosure tab. When
the All ECG button is white, this indicates the Disclosure tab is in the All ECG mode. The
Waveforms view remains in the All ECG mode until the All ECG sidebar button is
selected again. The All ECG sidebar button is not available when using a:
• Telepack device with a 3 or 5-wire lead set
• Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module with a 3-wire lead set
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
If a 5-wire or 12-lead set was previously used for the
selected patient, the All ECG sidebar push button will
always be enabled.
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 49
Disclosure Tab
Views
Measure
Select the Measure sidebar button to activate the Measure dialog box (shown in
FIGURE 7-3). The Measure dialog contains reference and measurement lines to calculate the
time and amplitude of an ECG waveform. For instructions on the use of the Measure button,
refer to ‘‘Performing ECG Waveform Measurements’’ on page 7-5.
NOTE:
The Print menu bar will be enabled when the Measure
dialog box is open.
Comments (Optional)
This sidebar button was previously described in the ‘‘Comments Dialog Box (Optional)’’ on
page 7-49. If the Paging feature is unavailable at the central station, the Comments
sidebar button will not be displayed.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.4.2.7
Printing a Full Disclosure Zoom In Report from the Waveforms
View
To print a Full Disclosure Zoom In Report from the Waveforms view, select the Print button
from the Menu Bar (shown in FIGURE 2-1).
7.4.2.8
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Disclosure tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No patient in the tile
The selected tile is not actively
monitoring a patient.
Choose a tile that is actively
monitoring a patient.
All displays are blank and
all buttons (except
Normal Screen) are
disabled.
The selected patient tile does
not have any stored historical
data.
The selected patient tile has not been
monitoring long enough to have
stored any data. Wait for new data
to accumulate.
The selected patient tile does
not have a device attached.
Choose a tile that is actively
monitoring a patient.
The Display Choices dialog
box is displayed.
Close the Display Choices dialog
box.
All buttons (except
Normal Screen) are
disabled.
*
7 - 50
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
Disclosure Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
A section of the waveform
is blank.
The system time was altered
during the storage of the row
of data.
Wait for new data to accumulate.
The device was placed into
Standby mode during the
storage of the row of data.
Restore the system to normal
operating mode to resume data
collection.
The device experienced a
Communications Lost
event during the storage of the
row of data.
Determine the cause of the
Communications Lost condition
and rectify to resume data collection.
The Panorama was restarted
during the storage of the row
of data.
Wait for new data to accumulate.
There is no event data in the
Disclosure database.
Wait until an event is recorded to the
Disclosure database.
There are no more events in
the patient’s Disclosure
database that occurred
before the time at the upper
left corner of the compressed
view.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab.
The oldest data is at the upper
left corner of the compressed
view.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab.
There is no event data in the
Disclosure database.
Wait until an event is recorded to the
Disclosure database.
There are no more events in
the patient’s Disclosure
database that occurred after
the time at the lower right
corner of the compressed
view.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab.
The most recent data is at the
lower right corner of the
compressed view.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab.
Time out of range
(Page Up button)
There are less than 10 rows of
data that are newer than the
top row.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab. Wait for new data
to accumulate.
Time out of range
(Page Down button)
There are less than 10 rows of
data that are older than the
top row.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab. Data is not
available.
Time out of range
(single up-arrow button)
There is no new data to
display.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab. Wait for new data
to accumulate.
Time out of range
(single down-arrow button)
There is no older data to
display.
Select the OK button to close the
message box and return to the
Disclosure tab. Data is not
available.
No more events found
(Previous Event Button)
No more events found
(Next Event Button)
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 51
Disclosure Tab
Views
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Time out of range
(Done button in the Skip
To dialog box)
A time and date that is older
than the oldest data or newer
than the most recent data was
entered in the Skip To dialog
box.
Select the OK button to close the
message box. Select the Skip To
sidebar button and enter a time and
date that is within the time frame of
the database.
ST button is disabled
ST was never enabled for the
selected patient tile.
If the patient requires ST analysis,
and there is an ST license available,
enable ST for the selected patient
tile.
Comments sidebar
button is not displayed in
sidebar
The Paging option is not
present on the central station
licensing key.
Obtain a licensing key that contains
the Paging option.
There is a gap between
waveform times
Either the central station and
monitoring device were not
communicating during that
time (Communications Lost) or
the system time was changed
in the Date/Time tab.
No solution required.
Comments sidebar
button is disabled.
No paging information was
sent for the selected event.
If a page should have been sent for
the selected event type, verify the
Page On Alarm settings in the Alarm
Responses tab.
The current event was
deleted from the
database. Press the
OK button to refresh
the data.
This message will be
displayed when viewing a
patient tile’s Full Disclosure
Zoom In tab at the
ViewStation or WorkStation,
and the Next Event and/or
Previous Event button is
selected to view an event that
has been deleted from the
database.
Select the OK button to close the
message box.
The Previous Event
button is disabled.
The cursor is positioned at the
first record of the Disclosure
database.
No solution required.
Lead sidebar button is
disabled
The selected device is a:
No solution required.
•
Telepack device with a 3
or 5-wire lead set
•
Telepack with Nonin
SpO2 module attached
with a 3-wire lead set
The All ECG sidebar button is
latched.
*
7 - 52
Select the All ECG sidebar button to
enable the Lead sidebar button.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
7.5
ST Tab
ST Tab
The ST tab is used to view and configure the current ST templates or view the ST numeric
data for the selected patient tile. The number of ST templates or ST numeric data displayed
depends on the type of ECG lead set and the monitoring device currently in use.
ST templates are displayed when using a hardwired or wireless 2.4 GHz bedside device, or
Telepack device. When using any of these devices, the ST templates can be adjusted directly
from the Panorama Central Station.
When using a WMTS 608 wireless bedside device, only numeric data is displayed (shown
in FIGURE 7-26). ST configuration settings must be adjusted at the bedside device.
The ST tab is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation but is for viewing purposes
only. When a patient tile is assigned at the ViewStation and/or the WorkStation, it will
always display the ST information of the associated host central station patient tile provided
the patient tile is in an active state.
Automatic updating of the ST information at the remote workstation will also occur when:
• The monitoring device is placed in the Standby mode at the central station
• The monitoring device is not communicating with its host central station (Communications
Lost)
• Communication between the host central station and the ViewStation and/or the
WorkStation is lost (Central Communications Lost)
7.5.1
Accessing the ST Tab
1. Select the VIEW button in the selected patient tile. The Bedside tab is displayed.
2. Select the ST tab. The ST tab (shown in FIGURE 7-25 or FIGURE 7-26) is displayed.
Patient Demographic Field
ST Template Area
ST Status Field
FIGURE 7-25 ST Tab - Hardwired Bedside Monitor (5-wire lead set)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 53
ST Tab
Views
Patient Demographic Field
ST Numeric Data
ST Status Field
FIGURE 7-26 ST Tab - WMTS 608 Wireless Bedside Device (View 12™ card installed)
Patient Demographic Field
ST Template Area
ST Status Field
FIGURE 7-27 ST Tab - Hardwired Bedside Monitor - 5-wire lead set (ViewStation and
WorkStation)
7.5.1.1
Components of the ST Tab
Patient Demographic Field
The patient demographic field displays the last name and bed number of the selected patient,
if this data was entered.
ST Status Field
The ST Status field displays the status of ST analysis at the Panorama Central Station. The
Status field only displays one message at any given time. The available status messages
include:
7 - 54
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
ST Tab
• No License indicates that an ST license is not available for the selected patient tile.
• Disabled indicates that the ST algorithm on the bedside monitoring device is currently
disabled.
• Relearning indicates that the ST algorithm is enabled and is in the learning phase of ST
analysis.
• Real Time indicates that the ST algorithm is enabled, a successful learn phase has been
completed, and the most current data is being displayed.
• Patient in Standby indicates that the selected patient tile is in a standby state.
• Communications Lost indicates that the Panorama Central Station is not
communicating with the monitoring device.
ST Template Area (Device Dependent)
The ST template area will display ST templates and digital data for each ECG lead that is
utilized when using a hardwired bedside device, a wireless 2.4 GHz bedside device, or a
Telepack device. ECG lead labels are shown at the top of the ST template area. These labels
represent the ST data currently displayed.
NOTE:
When using a 3 or 5-wire lead set, ST is invalidated when
the measured ST value exceeds range, and/or paced
rhythm persists for more than 45 seconds.
When using a View 12™ card, ST is invalidated when the
measured ST value exceeds range, and/or paced rhythm
persists for more than 30 seconds.
For all lead wire sets, ST is also invalidated during detected
episodes of Asystole, V-Fib, V-Tach, and V-Rhythm.
NOTE:
ST templates are not displayed when using a WMTS 608
bedside device.
• When utilizing a 3-wire lead set, the ST tab will contain one ST template for the lead that
is currently being monitored.
• When utilizing a 5-wire lead set, the ST tab will contain seven ST templates.
• When utilizing a View 12™ card, the ST tab will contain 12 ST templates.
Reference ST
• The reference ST template is displayed in white
• The digital data for the reference ST displays at the bottom of the ST template area
• The reference ST template displays dashes (- - -) when ST is relearning, when there is no
data available, or when the data is invalid
Current ST
• The current ST template is displayed in yellow
• The digital data for the current ST will be shown at the bottom of the ST template area
• The current ST template will display dashes (- - -) when ST is relearning, when there is no
data available, and when the data is invalid
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
ST templates and digital data will not be shown in the ST
template areas during an ST learn phase.
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 55
ST Tab
Views
Point Control Arrows
FIGURE 7-28 Point Control Arrows in ST Tab (5-wire Lead Set)
7.5.1.2
Configuring ST (Device Dependent)
Configuration settings are device dependent and can only be performed when using a
hardwired bedside device, a wireless 2.4 GHz bedside device, or a Telepack device. When
using a WMTS 608 bedside device, ST configuration settings must be performed at the
bedside monitor.
NOTE:
If the ECG Lead set is changed during ST configuration, the
ST tab will automatically be closed and returned to the
normal screen mode.
To configure ST points:
1. Select the Config ST sidebar button in the ST tab. The ISO, J/ST and ST Point controls
(shown in FIGURE 7-28) are displayed in the ST tab.
2. Select a point control arrow to configure the ISO reference line. The ISO reference line is
displayed in white.
• Select the left arrow to move the ISO reference line to the left one step setting.
• Select the right arrow to move the ISO reference line to the right one step setting.
3. Select a point control arrow to configure the J/ST reference line. The J reference line is
displayed in yellow. The ST reference line is displayed in green.
• Select the left arrow to move the J/ST reference line to the left one step setting.
• Select the right arrow to move the J/ST reference line to the right one step setting.
NOTE:
7 - 56
Due to monitor resolution restrictions, adjustments to the
J/ST reference lines may not always be shown.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
ST Tab
4. Select the ST Point button to select the desired ST Point. Changing the ST point will
move the ST reference line to the right of the J reference line for the selected number of
milliseconds. The options that are available for ST Point include 40, 60, 80 and 60/80
milliseconds.
5. Select the Done button.
7.5.1.3
Simultaneous ST Configuration Editing
If using a bedside device with the Panorama Central Station, ST configuration changes
cannot be made at the bedside monitor and at the central station simultaneously. When an
attempt is made to do this, the bedside device will take precedence and the message These
settings are currently being edited remotely. will be displayed central station.
These are the scenarios in which this message will be displayed:
• The ST Menu is active at the bedside monitor and then the ST tab is opened at the
central station
• The ST tab is active at the central station and then the ST Menu is opened at the
bedside monitor
To close this message dialog, select the OK button. Acknowledging this message will convert
the ST tab at the central station to a read-only state and editing will not be permitted. Once
the ST Menu is closed at the bedside device, the ST tab will become active again and editing
can resume.
In both of these scenarios, unsaved changes made in the central station Config ST tab will be
discarded, and the system will return to the ST tab.
For additional information regarding the bedside monitor menus, refer to bedside monitor’s
Operating Instructions for the Passport 2® (P/N 0070-00-0649-XX), Spectrum™ (P/N
0070-00-0648-XX), or Spectrum OR™ (P/N 0070-00-0670-XX).
7.5.1.4
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this view.
Config ST
Select the Config ST sidebar button to configure the ST templates in the ST tab. Selecting the
Config ST sidebar button will display the controls (shown in FIGURE 7-28) needed to
configure the ST templates. When the Config ST sidebar button is selected, it is replaced by
the Done sidebar button.
NOTE:
The Config ST sidebar button is not available when using a
WMTS 608 wireless bedside device.
NOTE:
The Config ST sidebar button is not available at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
Done
Select the Done sidebar button to confirm the selected ST configuration.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 57
ST Tab
Views
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
7.5.2
Generating an ST Report
To review the current and reference digital values with the associated ST templates for the
selected patient tile, generate an ST Report. This report can be generated directly from the ST
tab by selecting the Print menu bar button.
NOTE:
The Print button is not available when using a WMTS 608
wireless bedside device.
For additional information regarding the ST Report, refer to the ‘‘ST Report’’ on page 8-14.
7.5.3
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the ST
tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
No Patient Selected! is
displayed in the ST tab
demographics text box
This message appears in the
demographic field when an
empty patient tile has been
selected.
Select an active patient tile.
No License is displayed in ST
tab status text box
The monitoring device does not
have an ST license or ST has
been disabled.
Obtain an ST license and/or
enable ST at the monitoring
device.
Disabled is displayed in ST
tab status text box
ST is disabled at the monitoring
device.
Enable ST.
Relearning is displayed in ST
tab status text box
ST was just enabled at the
monitoring device.
Wait for a successful learn
phase to complete.
Real Time is displayed in ST
tab status text box
ST is enabled and a successful
learn phase has been
completed.
No solution required.
Patient in Standby is
displayed in ST tab status text
box
The selected patient tile is in a
standby state.
The message will be removed
when monitoring is resumed.
Communications Lost is
displayed in the ST tab status
text box
The central station is in a
Communications Lost state.
The message will be removed
when communications is
restored.
“---” displays in ST template
ST data displays as invalid
because monitor may be in a
learning phase or patient is in
an ECG rhythm that does not
allow for ST monitoring (V-Fib,
Asystole, etc.)
Wait until learn phase is
complete and/or re-establish
normal ECG.
ST templates are present but
contain no ST data.
Monitoring device is in relearn
mode.
Wait for Real Time to display in
ST tab status text box.
*
7 - 58
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Views
ST Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The These settings are
currently being edited
remotely message is
displayed.
Select the OK button to close
the message box and enable
the sidebar button.
Close the ST Menu at the
bedside device.
ST templates are not available
in the ST tab.
A WMTS 608 wireless bedside
device is in use.
View the ST templates at the
bedside device.
The Print menu bar button is
disabled.
The selected patient tile does
not have an ST license.
If necessary, activate an ST
license for the patient tile.
The selected tile is in a learn
phase.
Wait for the learn phase to
complete.
ST has been disabled.
If an ST license is available,
enable a license for the patient
tile.
The patient tile is in the
Bedside and Panorama
Standby mode.
If necessary, remove the patient
tile from this mode.
The patient tile is in the
Panorama Standby Only
mode.
If necessary, remove the patient
tile from this mode.
The patient tile is in the
Communications Lost state.
Restore communications with
the bedside monitor.
The These settings are
currently being edited
remotely. message is
displayed.
Select the OK button to close
the message box and enable
the sidebar button.
Close the ST Menu at the
bedside device.
These settings are
currently being edited
remotely.
The ST tab is displayed and the
assigned device is a WMTS
608 bedside monitor.
ST numerics can be
documented by generating a
Trend List Report.
The patient tile is in a Waiting
for Patient state.
Restore communications with
the bedside monitor.
The ST Menu is opened at the
bedside monitor while in the
Config ST mode at the central
station.
Wait until the changes are
made at the bedside monitor.
If necessary, close the ST menu
at the bedside to enable the ST
menu at the central station.
The ST tab is active at the
central station and then the ST
Menu is opened at the bedside
monitor.
The central station Config ST
tab is active and then the ST
Menu is opened at the bedside
monitor.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
7 - 59
ST Tab
Views
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Config ST tab at the central
station was closed and all
changes were discarded.
The ST Menu was opened at
the bedside monitor.
Use the bedside monitor to
make the ST configuration
changes.
Close the ST Menu at the
bedside monitor and then
reenter the Config ST tab at the
central station.
The Config ST sidebar button
is disabled.
The These settings are
currently being edited
remotely message is
displayed.
Select the OK button to close
the message box and enable
the sidebar button.
Close the ST Menu at the
bedside device.
*
7 - 60
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
8.0
Report Functions
This section outlines the types of reports that can be generated by the Panorama Central
Station.
• Patient Reports Tab
• System Reports Tab
• Print Status Tab
• Additional Reports
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8-1
Patient Reports Tab
8.1
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
The Patient Reports tab (shown in FIGURE 8-1) is used to print patient-specific reports.
The following reports can be printed from the Patient Reports tab:
• All Strips Report
• Full Disclosure Report
• ST Report
• Trend List Report
• Event List Report
• Patient Alarm Report
8.1.1
Accessing the Patient Reports Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the Report button.
2. Select the Patient Reports tab. The Patient Report tab is displayed.
3. Choose a patient tile by selecting its digital data or waveform area. If available, the
patient’s last name and bed number display in the patient demographic field.
Patient Demographic Field
FIGURE 8-1 Patient Reports Tab
8.1.2
All Strips Report
The All Strips Report (shown in FIGURE 8-2 and FIGURE 8-3) contains real-time monitoring
data, all current digital numeric values and all current configured waveforms for the selected
patient tile. The report includes a header, digital data, waveform data and a footer section.
NOTE:
8-2
This report is not available when the selected patient tile is
in a Communications Lost, Waiting for Patient, or Standby
state.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
FIGURE 8-2 All Strips Report (Page 1)
FIGURE 8-3 All Strips Report (Page 2)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8-3
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-4 All Strip Report - Printed by Print on Alarm
8.1.2.1
Header
The All Strips Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.1.2.2
Digital Data
The All Strips Report’s digital data section displays measurements for the digital data
parameters currently available for the selected patient tile. The displayed parameter order is
determined by the system Unit Priorities tab. The digital data section contains the
following:
8-4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
• A parameter label
• A numeric measurement
• A unit of measure label
• A heart rate (HR) value
• Dashes (--) to indicate missing or invalid digital data.
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) to indicate alarming parameter values
NOTE:
8.1.2.3
Digital Data is only shown on the first page of the report.
Waveform Data
The waveforms that print in the All Strips Report’s waveform data section depend on which
leads are currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup function.
The first page of this report contains four waveforms. The middle pages of the report will
contain six waveforms while the last page may contain one to six waveform strips depending
on the waveforms available. Each waveform in this report represents approximately 10
seconds of data; five seconds prior to the time of the print request and 5 seconds after the
print request. A waveform label (i.e., ECG Lead II) is shown above each strip to identify the
data source and the unit of measurement (i.e.,%, RPM, BPM, mmHg, kPa). Pleth, ECG and
Respiration do not display a unit of measurement. The waveforms displayed in the report are
shown on a calibrated grid and contain a scale bar.
If the All Strips Report printed as a result of a Print on Alarm, the event that prompted the
report will print below the report digital data in bold.
For pacemaker patients that have Pacer Enhancement enabled, the report displays a vertical
bar to indicate the firing of the pacemaker impulse.
For information on selecting the waveforms that can be printed in this report, refer to the
"Print Setup Tab (Patient)" on page 5-55.
8.1.2.4
ECG Waveforms
The ECG waveforms shown in the All Strips Report are based on the ECG lead wire set
currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup tab. The ECG waveform
report displays the following:
• An ECG lead label
• A wave gain scale bar and a calibration pulse for wave gains less than 30 mm/mV
• A calibrated grid
• Current ECG monitoring label
• A continuous straight line for active ECG leads that are not connected
Non-ECG Waveforms
The non-ECG waveforms shown in the All Strips Report only include the non-ECG parameters
in use at the time of the print request.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8-5
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
All non-ECG waveforms in the report contain a parameter label and a unit of measure label.
Non-ECG waveforms in the report contain a wave gain scale bar if the waveform is
available at the time of the print request. If the waveform is not available, the report prints
blank data for the specified time period. Also:
• If the IBP waveform was labeled at the bedside monitor, the report contains that IBP label.
• If the Anesthetic Agent was identified at the bedside monitor, the report contains that
Agent label.
Footer
The All Strips Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
Printing an All Strips Report
The All Strips Report is printed in landscape orientation, using any of the following methods:
• Select the Print All Strips button in the Patient Reports tab. Selecting the Print All
Strips button will post an All Strips Report print request for the selected patient.
• Select the REC button in a patient tile.
• Select the Print menu bar button in the Bedside tab.
• Enable the Print on Alarm option in the Alarm Responses tab when there is an alarm
condition.
• Select the Strip button on a Passport 2®.
• Select the Strip button on a Spectrum™.
• Select the Print button on a Telepack (refer to “Button Indicators” on page 10-3).
NOTE:
To print this report for all active patients, use the System
Reports tab Print All Strips/All Patients report.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
For report troubleshooting messages and issues, refer to “Troubleshooting” on page 8-27.
8.1.3
Full Disclosure Report
The Full Disclosure Report provides a compressed view of a patient’s historical ECG (shown
in FIGURE 8-5 and FIGURE 8-6) and non-ECG (shown in FIGURE 8-7 and FIGURE 8-8)
waveform data. This report includes a header, waveform data, and a footer.
8-6
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
FIGURE 8-5 Full Disclosure Report (Page 1- ECG waveform layout)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8-7
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-6 Full Disclosure Report (Page 2- ECG waveform layout)
8-8
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
FIGURE 8-7 Full Disclosure Report (Page 1- non-ECG waveform layout)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8-9
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-8 Full Disclosure Report (Page 2 - non-ECG waveform layout)
8.1.3.1
Header
The Full Disclosure Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8 - 10
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.1.3.2
Patient Reports Tab
Waveform Data
The ECG waveforms shown in the Full Disclosure Report are based on the ECG lead wire set
currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup tab.
ECG Waveform Format
The ECG waveform format for the Full Disclosure Report includes five columns. This format is
used for reports that show ECG parameter waveforms.
• The first column contains the time (hour and minute) of the disclosure record. The time
format follows the system format specified in the Date/Time tab.
• The second column contains a heart rate (HR) value. The heart rate value shown is from
the last second of data that was collected during the disclosure record. If disclosure data
is not available for the time period specified, dashes (---) are shown in the place of a heart
rate value.
• The third column contains a PVC/min. value. The PVC value shown is the value that was
obtained during the disclosure record. If disclosure data is not available for the time
period specified, dashes are shown in the place of a PVC value.
• The fourth column contains a label for the waveform data being displayed in the report.
The waveform label shown is the source of data for the disclosure record.
• The fifth column contains the events that occurred during the period of the disclosure
record. If multiple events occur during the time period specified, the event with the highest
priority is shown. If no events occur during the time period specified, this column remains
empty.
For information regarding the type of events that occur in the Full Disclosure Report, refer
to “Physiological Alarms and Events” on page 13-2.
Non-ECG Waveform Format
The non-ECG waveform format for the Full Disclosure Report includes four columns. This
format is used for reports that show Non-ECG parameter waveforms.
• The first column contains the time (hour and minute) of the disclosure record. The time
format follows the system format specified in the Date/Time tab.
• The second column contains a heart rate (HR) value. The heart rate value shown is from
the last second of data that was collected during the disclosure record. If disclosure data
is not available for the time period specified, dashes are shown in the place of a heart
rate value.
• The third column contains a label for the waveform data being displayed in the report.
The waveform label shown is the source of data for the disclosure record.
• The fourth column contains the events that have occurred during the period of the
disclosure record. If multiple events occurred during the time period specified then the
event with the highest priority is displayed. If no events occurred during the time period
specified, this column remains empty.
For information regarding the type of events that occur in the Full Disclosure Report, refer
to “Physiological Alarms and Events” on page 13-2.
8.1.3.3
Footer
The Full Disclosure Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 11
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab. For more information regarding date/time formats, refer to the
“Date/Time Tab” on page 9-41.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.1.3.4
Printing a Full Disclosure Report (ECG and Non-ECG Layout)
The Full Disclosure Report is printed in portrait orientation, using any of the following
methods:
To print one hour of full disclosure data (ECG layout):
1. Select the Full Disclosure Report button in the Patient Reports tab. The Print
Selection dialog is displayed (shown in FIGURE 8-9).
FIGURE 8-9 Print Selection Dialog Box
2. Select the Print 1 Hour button. The report is sent to the printer.
To print one hour of full disclosure data (non-ECG layout):
1. From the Disclosure tab, select the Display Choices sidebar button. The Display
Choices dialog box is displayed (shown in FIGURE 8-10).
FIGURE 8-10 Display Choices Dialog Box
8 - 12
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
2. Select a non-ECG parameter from the list box, then select the Done button. The
waveforms in the tab will change to the selected non-ECG parameter.
3. From the menu bar, select the Print button. The Print Selection dialog is displayed
(shown in FIGURE 8-9).
4. Select the Print 1 Hour button. The report is sent to the printer.
To print multiple hours of full disclosure data:
1. From the Patient Reports tab, select the Full Disclosure Report button.
2. From the menu bar, select the Print button. The Print Selection dialog is displayed.
3. Select one of the time interval buttons or the Cancel button.
• The choices are print 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
• Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
To print multiple hours of full disclosure data (non-ECG layout):
1. From the Disclosure tab, select the Display Choices sidebar button. The Display
Choices dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a non-ECG parameter from the list box, then select the Done button. The
waveforms in the Disclosure tab will change to the selected non-ECG parameter.
3. From the menu bar, select the Print button. The Print Selection dialog is displayed
(shown in FIGURE 8-9).
4. Select one of the time interval buttons or the Cancel button.
• The choices are print 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
• Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
Requesting either report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 13
Patient Reports Tab
8.1.4
Report Functions
ST Report
The ST Report (shown in FIGURE 8-11 and FIGURE 8-12) includes current and reference
digital values with the associated ST templates, for a selected patient tile. This report includes
a header, ST data and a footer section.
NOTE:
This report is not available when using a WMTS 608
wireless bedside device, during a relearning phase, or
when the selected patient tile is in a Communications Lost,
Standby, or a Waiting for Patient state.
FIGURE 8-11 ST Report (Page 1)
8 - 14
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
FIGURE 8-12 ST Report (Page 2)
8.1.4.1
Header
The ST Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic demographic
information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the patient’s first and last
name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.1.4.2
ST Data
The ST Report’s data section includes current and reference templates for the ST data. ST
data is shown in millimeter (mm) measurements. The ST templates shown in the report are
limited to the ECG lead connections currently in use and selected in the Print Setup tab.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 15
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
• One current and one reference template for the lead being monitored in a 3-lead cable
connection.
• Three current and three reference templates for the leads being monitored in a 5-lead
cable connection.
• Twelve current and twelve reference templates for all of the leads in a 12-lead cable
connection.
Current Templates
The current templates shown in the ST Report are limited to the ECG lead connections
currently in use and the waveforms the patient has selected in the Print Setup tab.
• Current templates in the report contain a label section above the ST data that includes
CUR, the ST lead and the ST measurement.
• Current ST values display in brackets ( [ ] ), if the data represents an alarm condition.
• Current ST values in the report print on a calibrated grid with a scale bar, which
corresponds to the ECG wave gain measurement.
Reference Templates
The reference templates shown in the ST Report are limited to the ECG lead wire set currently
in use and the waveforms selected.
• Reference templates in the report contain a label section above the ST data that includes
REF, the ST lead and the ST measurement.
• Reference ST values display in brackets ( [ ] ), if the data is in an alarm condition.
• Reference ST values in the report print on a calibrated grid with a scale bar, which
corresponds to the ECG wave gain measurement.
8.1.4.3
Footer
The ST Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.1.4.4
Printing an ST Report
The ST Report is printed in landscape orientation, using any of the following methods:
• From the Patient Reports tab, select the ST Report button.
• From the menu bar, select the Print button.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
8 - 16
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.1.5
Patient Reports Tab
Trend List Report
The Trend List Report (shown in FIGURE 8-13 and FIGURE 8-14) shows a patient’s historical
trended digital data. The data displayed is based on the time interval selected in the Trend
Display dialog box, and can be shown over a 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, or 24 hour time period. This
report includes a header, trend records, and a footer.
FIGURE 8-13 Trend List Report (Page 1)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 17
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-14 Trend List Report (Page 2)
8 - 18
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.1.5.1
Patient Reports Tab
Header
The Trend List Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.1.5.2
Trend Records
The Trend List Report’s digital data section includes the digital data that occurred for the
selected patient, based on the time interval selected in the Trend Display dialog box. The
data printed in the report is determined by the device connected to the selected patient tile
and the sensors in use.
The report displays digital data records for each minute of the selected time period. Digital
data records are separated by a solid horizontal line. If data is not available for the selected
time period, the report will not print. Each digital record in the report contains the following:
• The time format follows the system format specified in the Date/Time tab.
• Digital data values for the parameters specific to the device connected to the patient tile
and the sensors used during the specified time period.
• A heart rate (HR) value. The source of the heart rate data is shown in parentheses next to
the HR label. If data is not available for the specified time period, dashes are shown in
the place of a heart rate value.
• Digital Data records in the report use brackets ( [ ] ) to distinguish data in the alarm
condition.
8.1.5.3
Footer
The Trend List Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.1.5.4
Printing a Trend List Report
The Trend List Report is printed in portrait orientation.
To print one hour of trend data:
• From the Patient Reports tab, select the Trend List Report button. The Print Selection
dialog is displayed (shown in FIGURE 8-9).
• Select the Print 1 Hour button. The report is sent to the printer.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 19
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
To print multiple hours of trend data from the Patient Reports tab:
1. Select the Trend List Report button.
2. Select one of the time interval buttons or the Cancel button.
• The choices are print 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
• Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
To print multiple hours of trend data from the Trends tab:
1. From the menu bar, select the Print button. The Print Selection dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Print Current button, a time interval button, or the Cancel button.
• Select the Print Current to create a one page Trend List Report.
• Select one of the time interval buttons. The choices are print 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
• Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
8 - 20
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.1.6
Patient Reports Tab
Event List Report
The Event List Report (shown in FIGURE 8-15 and FIGURE 8-16) shows a patient’s historical
physiological, system and technical alarm events for a 1, 2, 4, 8, 12 and 24 hour time
period. This report includes a header, event records, and a footer.
FIGURE 8-15 Event List Report (Page 1)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 21
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-16 Event List Report (Page 2)
8.1.6.1
Header
The Event List Report’s page header provides the title of the report and basic demographic
information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the patient’s first and last
name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
8 - 22
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.1.6.2
Event Record
The Event List Report’s event record section includes the digital data that occurred during the
specified time period. The data in this report is determined by the events that occurred during
the specified time period.
Event data records are separated by a solid horizontal line. If data is not available for the
selected time period, the report will not print.
• The first page of event records include numbers for the Total Events (the total number of
events in the selected patient’s event database), the Displayed Events (the number of
events shown in the report) and the Event Filter (based on the event filter setting).
• Each event record in the report contains the time (hour and minute) when the event
occurred. The time format follows the system format specified in the Date/Time tab.
• Each Event record in the report contains the name of the event that has occurred for the
selected patient.
• Each physiological event record in the report contains the digital data values for the
specified time period.
• Each Event Data record in the report contains a digital heart rate (HR) value. The source
of the heart rate data is shown in parentheses next to the HR label. If data is not available
for the time period specified, dashes are shown in the place of a heart rate value.
For information regarding the digital data supported by each device, refer to ‘‘Supported
Devices’’ on page 1-3. The column order in which the digital parameter data is printed in
a record is based on the order selected in the Unit Priorities tab.
• Event records in the report use brackets ( [ ] ) to distinguish data in the alarm condition
and dashes (- - -) to distinguish incomplete or missing data.
• System and technical event records in the report do not contain digital data values.
8.1.6.3
Footer
The Event List Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.1.6.4
Printing an Event List Report
The Event List Report is printed in portrait orientation.
To print one hour of event data:
• From the Patient Reports tab, select the Event List Report button. The Print Selection
dialog is displayed (shown in FIGURE 8-9).
• Select the Print 1 Hour button. The report is sent to the printer.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 23
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
To print multiple hours of event data from the Patient Reports tab:
1. Select the Event List Report button.
2. Select one of the time interval buttons or the Cancel button.
• The choices are print 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
• Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
To print multiple hours of trend data from the Events tab:
1. From the menu bar, select the Print button. The Print Selection dialog is displayed.
2. Select one of the Print Current, a time interval button, or the Cancel button.
• Select the Print Current to create a one page Trend List Report.
• Select one of the time interval buttons. The choices are print 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
• Select the Cancel button to close the dialog box without generating the print request.
NOTE:
If the number of hours selected exceeds the amount of data
in system, the report shows only the available data.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
8 - 24
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.1.7
Patient Reports Tab
Patient Alarm Report
The Patient Alarm Report (shown in FIGURE 8-17) is a single page report containing a
patient’s alarm settings information (unit of measure, alarm limits, priority and alarm
responses). This report includes a header, patient alarm data, optional arrhythmia and
paging delay settings, and a footer.
FIGURE 8-17 Patient Alarm Report - Paging Option Disabled
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 25
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-18 Patient Alarm Report - Paging Option Enabled
8.1.7.1
Header
The Patient Alarm Report’s page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.1.7.2
Patient Alarm Data
The Patient Alarm Report’s data section includes alarm information for all of the alarms. The
parameters in a Patient Alarm Report are dependent on the device connected to the selected
patient tile. The columns are described as follows:
• Parameter displays the parameters for which the specified patient has an alarm.
• Units displays the unit of measure in use for the parameter specified.
• High Limit displays the High alarm limit for the parameter specified.
• Low Limit displays the Low alarm limit for the parameter specified.
• Priority displays the alarm priority assigned to the parameter specified.
8 - 26
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Patient Reports Tab
• Print On Alarm displays the Print on Alarm response assigned to the parameter
specified.
• Save to Event displays the Save To Event alarm response that has been assigned to the
parameter specified.
• Page On Alarm displays the Page On Alarm response that has been assigned to the
parameter specified.
8.1.7.3
Arrhythmia Settings
The Patient Alarm Report’s Arrhythmia Settings section includes values for the following:
• Asystole Delay
• V-Tach Threshold
• All Arrhythmia On/Off
• V-Tach Rate
8.1.7.4
Paging Delay Settings
The Patient Alarm Report’s Paging Delay section includes the system paging delay value that
was configured in the System Alarms tab.
8.1.7.5
Footer
The Patient Alarm Report contains a footer at the bottom of the page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.1.7.6
Printing a Patient Alarm Report
The Patient Alarm Report is printed in portrait orientation, using any of the following
methods:
• From the Patient Reports tab, select the Patient Alarm Report button.
• From the Alarm Limits tab, select the Print menu bar button.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
8.1.8
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Patient Reports tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
All report buttons are disabled.
A patient is not currently
selected.
Select a patient before trying to
print a report.
The ST Report button is
disabled.
The selected patient does not
have ST enabled.
Enable ST for the selected
patient before trying to print an
ST report.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 27
Patient Reports Tab
Report Functions
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
A WMTS 608 wireless bedside
device is in use.
No solution required.
The selected patient tile is
relearning phase, or is in a
Communications Lost or
Standby state.
Wait for the patient tile to
resume monitoring.
The ST Report button is
hidden.
The selected patient tile is in a
Waiting for Patient state.
Activate the destination device.
The Print All Strips report
button is disabled.
The selected patient tile is in a
Communications Lost or
Standby state.
Wait for the patient tile to
resume monitoring.
The Print All Strips button is
hidden.
The selected patient tile is in a
Waiting for Patient state.
Activate the destination device.
The report will not print
There are several reasons that
a report would not print. There
could be a communication
problem between the printer
and the Panorama Central
Station and/or there could be
a problem with the printer.
If there is an error that appears
such as Printer out of
Paper you will need to
remedy that situation.
If the No Printer connected
or Printer not Available
error is displayed, verify that
the printer was properly
configured with the Panorama
Central Station. Refer to the
Panorama Printer
Configuration Manual (P/N
0070-00-0561).
The Delta T parameter does not
display in the All Strips report.
One of the two temperature
sources used to calculate the
Delta T value is not valid.
Verify that the two temperature
sources have been properly
configured.
Page On Alarm column not
displayed in Patient Alarm
Report
Paging option is not enabled at
the central station.
If available, enable Paging
option. If feature unavailable,
no solution required.
All Arrhythmia On/Off setting
set to Off
Arrhythmia is disabled for a
selected patient tile.
If available, enable arrhythmia
for the selected patient tile. If
feature or license is
unavailable, no solution
required.
In the Patient Alarm Report’s
Arrhythmia Settings section, a
“---” is displayed as the value
for Asystole Delay, V-Tach
Threshold, and V-Tach Rate
Arrhythmia is disabled for a
selected patient tile.
If available, enable arrhythmia
for the selected patient tile. If
feature or license is
unavailable, no solution
required.
Paging Delay Settings section
not displayed in the Patient
Alarm Report.
This section will only be
displayed when Paging is
enabled at the central station.
If available, enable Paging
option. If feature unavailable,
no solution required.
*
8 - 28
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.2
System Reports Tab
System Reports Tab
The System Reports tab (shown in FIGURE 8-20) is used to generate reports on a system
level. A patient tile does not have to be selected to generate a system report.
The following reports can be printed from the System Reports tab:
• Accessing the System Reports Tab
• All Strips (All Patients) Report
• Equipment Report
• Paging Report
8.2.1
Accessing the System Reports Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the Report button.
2. Select the System Reports tab. The System Reports tab is displayed.
FIGURE 8-19 System Reports Tab
FIGURE 8-20 System Reports Tab - Paging Option Enabled
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
The Paging Report button will only be displayed when the
Paging Option is enabled at the central station.
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 29
System Reports Tab
8.2.2
Report Functions
All Strips (All Patients) Report
The All Strips (All Patients) Report (shown in FIGURE 8-21 and FIGURE 8-22) contains
real-time monitoring data for all the active patients monitored by the Panorama Central
Station. This report contains all current numeric values and waveforms. It is similar to the All
Strips Report, except that it prints for all active patients. The report includes a header, digital
data, waveform data and a footer.
FIGURE 8-21 All Strips (All Patients) Report (Page 1)
8 - 30
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
System Reports Tab
FIGURE 8-22 All Strips (All Patients) Report (Page 2)
8.2.2.1
Header
The All Strips (All Patients) Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height, and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number, and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 31
System Reports Tab
8.2.2.2
Report Functions
Digital Data
The All Strips (All Patients) Report’s digital data section displays measurements for the digital
data parameters currently available for the selected patient tile. The displayed parameter
order is determined by the system Unit Priorities tab. The digital data section contains the
following:
• A parameter label
• A numeric measurement
• A unit of measure label
• A heart rate (HR) value
• Dashes (--) to indicate missing or invalid digital data.
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) to indicate alarming parameter values
NOTE:
8.2.2.3
Digital Data is only shown on the first page of the report.
Waveform Data
The waveforms that print in the All Strips (All Patients) Report’s waveform data section are
limited to which leads are currently in use, and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup
function.
The first page of this report contains up to two waveforms while subsequent pages contain up
to three waveforms. Each waveform in this report represents approximately 10 seconds of
data; five seconds prior to the time of the print request and 5 seconds after the print request.
A waveform label (i.e., ECG Lead II) is shown above each strip to identify the data source
and the unit of measurement (i.e.,%, RPM, BPM, mmHg, kPa). Pleth, ECG and Respiration do
not display a unit of measurement. The waveforms displayed in the report are shown on a
calibrated grid and contain a scale bar.
For pacemaker patients that have Pacer Enhancement enabled, the report displays a vertical
bar to indicate the firing of the pacemaker impulse.
ECG Waveforms
The ECG waveforms shown in the All Strips (All Patients) Report are based on the ECG lead
wire set currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup tab. The ECG
waveform report displays with the following:
8 - 32
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
System Reports Tab
• An ECG lead label
• A wave gain scale bar and a calibration pulse for wave gains less than 30 mm/mV
• A calibrated grid
• Current ECG monitoring label
• A continuous straight line for active ECG leads that are not connected
Non-ECG Waveforms
The non-ECG waveforms shown in the All Strips (All Patients) Report are based on the
non-ECG waveforms that are in use and the non-ECG waveforms that are selected to be
printed. The report only includes non-ECG parameters if they are in use at the time of the
print request.
All non-ECG waveforms in the report contain a parameter label and a unit of measure label.
Non-ECG waveforms in the report may contain a wave gain scale bar. If a non-ECG
waveform is unavailable at the time of the print request, the report prints blank data for the
specified time period.
• If the IBP waveform was labeled at the bedside monitor, the report contains that IBP label.
• If the Anesthetic Agent was identified at the bedside monitor, the report contains that
Agent label.
8.2.2.4
Footer
The report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.2.2.5
Printing an All Strips (All Patients) Report
The All Strips (All Patients) Report prints in portrait orientation, using the following method:
• From the System Reports tab, select the Print All Strips/All Patients button.
Selecting this button sends a print request, for each patient, to the printer.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 33
System Reports Tab
8.2.3
Report Functions
Equipment Report
The Equipment Report (shown in FIGURE 8-23) contains a list of devices currently assigned to
the Panorama Central Station. This report displays a maximum of 32 devices per page and
includes a header, six columns and a footer.
NOTE:
The Equipment Report is not available at the ViewStation.
FIGURE 8-23 Equipment Report
8.2.3.1
Header
The header of the Equipment Report displays a centered report title.
8.2.3.2
Equipment Information
The Equipment Report contains six columns. They are describes as follows:
8 - 34
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
System Reports Tab
• Label displays the equipment device label. For additional information regarding Device
ID’s, refer to the ‘‘Equipment Setup Tab’’ on page 9-33.
• Type displays the type of device that is attached to the central station. For example, a
Telepack-WMTS or a Passport 2®.
• Tile displays the tile the device is attached to. Six dashes (- - - - - -) display in this column
if the tile number associated with the device in the Equipment Setup dialog is None.
• Device ID displays the ID of the device or unit. Six dashes display in this column if the
device is a Panorama Central Station.
• Patient Name displays the first name and last name of the patient attached to the
device. If a patient is not attached to the device, the report displays six dashes in this
column. Dashes also display if the device attached to the patient does not have the
patient’s first and last name entered.
• Patient ID displays the identification number of the patient attached to the device. Six
dashes display in this column if the device attached to the patient does not have the
Patient ID entered.
8.2.3.3
Footer
The Equipment Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
• The serial number of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.2.3.4
Printing the Equipment Report
The Equipment Report is printed in portrait orientation, using any of the following methods:
• From the System Report tab, select the Equipment Report button.
NOTE:
The Equipment Report button is not available at the
ViewStation.
• From the Equipment Setup tab, select the Print menu bar button.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
8.2.4
Paging Report
The Paging Report (shown in FIGURE 8-24) prints all the currently assigned pagers, lists who
each pager is assigned to, and specifies which patient tiles are assigned to which pagers.
This report contains a row for every pager listed in the Paging tab and can contain a
maximum of 100 pager assignments. Depending on the number of assigned pagers, this
report may contain more than one page.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
The Paging Report is not available at the ViewStation.
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 35
System Reports Tab
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-24 Paging Report
8.2.4.1
Header
The Paging Report’s header provides the title of the report.
8.2.4.2
Pager Information
The Paging information section of the report contains all the pager information as they are
configured at the central station at the time the report was generated.
The following pager information is shown in three columns:
8 - 36
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
System Reports Tab
• Pager Number displays the number that has been assigned to the pager. This column
can display a maximum of 14 alphanumeric characters.
• Pager Assignment displays which person or department the pager is assigned to.
• Tile displays which patient tile number the pager is assigned to. This column can display
a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters. In addition, this column can display a
maximum of 8-12 patient tiles when using a single display or a dual display
configuration. The Tile column uses a comma (,) as a separator when more than one
patient tile is assigned to a pager.
8.2.4.3
Footer
The Paging Report contains a footer at the bottom of the report page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.2.4.4
Printing a Paging Report
The Paging Report is printed in portrait orientation, using any of the following methods:
• From the System Reports tab, select the Paging Report button.
• From the Paging tab, select the Print menu bar button.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 37
Print Status Tab
8.3
Report Functions
Print Status Tab
The Print Status tab (shown in FIGURE 8-25) contains a list of current print requests. Once
the status of a print request changes or the report prints, the list updates automatically without
having to refresh the list.
.
FIGURE 8-25 Print Status Tab
8.3.1
Print Status Tab List Box
Once a new print request is submitted, specific information displays in the Print Status tab.
The list box contains the following information:
• Time displays the time the print request was submitted. The print time format follows the
system format specified in the Date/Time tab.
• Job displays the name of the requested report. For example, if the Full Disclosure Report
was requested, the Job column displays Full Disclosure Report.
• Tile ID displays the Tile ID associated with the print request. For example, if the All
Strips Report is requested and tile six is selected, the Tile ID column displays 6.
• Status displays the current status of the print request. There are five possible status
options available:
In Job Queue
Indicates that a print request was generated
Printing
Indicates that the print request is currently printing
Deleting
Indicates that the print request is currently being deleted
Spooling
Indicates the time between when the print request is made, and
when the request is printed
Error
Indicates that there is an error at the printer that requires user
intervention
The information available in this column is real-time. For example, once the status of a print
request changes or the report prints, the list updates accordingly.
• Printer displays the name of the printer associated with the print request.
8.3.2
Removing Print Jobs from the Print Queue
Once print requests are submitted, they can be cancelled or deleted by using the following
buttons.
8 - 38
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Print Status Tab
Cancel Selected Print Job
Select the Cancel Selected Print job button to delete the selected print request from the
job queue. When this button is selected, the multi-column list box Status column displays
Deleting, and the request is removed from the multi-column list box.
Delete All Print Jobs
Select the Delete All Print Jobs button to cancel all print requests in the job queue. When
this button is selected, the multi-column list box Status column displays Deleting for each
print request and the requests are removed from the multi-column list box.
8.3.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar button is used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
8.3.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Print Status tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Report is not printing
Printer not selected at the
Panorama Central Station.
Refer to the Panorama Printer
Configuration document (P/N
0070-00-0561).
Printer is not turned on.
Turn the printer on.
Printer is offline.
Verify that the printer is online.
Printer is out of paper.
Verify that the printer paper
tray contains paper.
Verify that the printer is
connected to the Panorama
Central Station.
Print a test page. Refer to the
the Panorama Printer
Configuration document (P/N
0070-00-0561).
Verify that the printer
configuration settings are
correct.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 39
Additional Reports
8.4
Report Functions
Additional Reports
The Panorama Central Station is capable of generating additional reports from areas other
than the Reports menu button.
Reports generated by the Panorama Central Station, but cannot be generated from the
Reports menu button include:
• Event Zoom In Report
• Full Disclosure Zoom In Report
• Graphic Trend Report
• 12-lead Report
• Telepack Error Log Report
• System Alarm Report
8.4.1
Accessing Additional Reports
These reports can be accessed from different areas throughout the system. For specific
instructions on how request each of these reports, refer to each reports printing section.
8.4.2
Event Zoom In Report
The Event Zoom In Report (shown in FIGURE 8-26 and FIGURE 8-27) shows all of a patient’s
historical digital and waveform data for a selected event. This report includes a header,
digital data, waveform data and a footer.
FIGURE 8-26 Event Zoom In Report (Page 1)
8 - 40
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Additional Reports
FIGURE 8-27 Event Zoom In Report (Page 2)
8.4.2.1
Header
The Event Zoom In Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.4.2.2
Digital Data
The Event Zoom In Report’s digital data section displays measurements for the digital data
parameters currently available for the selected patient tile. The displayed parameter order is
determined by the system Unit Priorities tab. The digital data section contains the
following:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 41
Additional Reports
Report Functions
• A parameter label
• A numeric measurement
• A unit of measure label
• A heart rate (HR) value
• Dashes (--) to indicate missing or invalid digital data.
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) to indicate alarming parameter values
8.4.2.3
NOTE:
Digital Data is only shown on the first page of the report.
NOTE:
ST digital data includes Current (C) and Reference (R) values.
Waveform Data
The waveforms that print in the Event Zoom In Report’s waveform data section depend on
which leads are currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup function.
The first page of this report contains four waveforms. The middle pages of the report will
contain six waveforms while the last page may contain two, four, or six waveform strips
depending on the waveforms available. Each waveform in this report represents
approximately 10 seconds of data; five seconds prior to the time of the print request and 5
seconds after the print request. A waveform label (i.e., ECG Lead II) is shown above each
strip to identify the data source and the unit of measurement (i.e.,%, RPM, BPM, mmHg, kPa).
Pleth, ECG and Respiration do not display a unit of measurement. The waveforms displayed
in the report are shown on a calibrated grid and contain a scale bar.
For pacemaker patients that have Pacer Enhancement enabled, the report displays a vertical
bar to indicate the firing of the pacemaker impulse.
8.4.2.4
ECG Waveforms
The ECG waveforms shown in the Event Zoom In Report are limited to the ECG lead wire set
currently in use, and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup tab. The ECG waveform
report is displayed with the following:
• An ECG lead label
• A wave gain scale bar and a calibration pulse for wave gains less than 30 mm/mV
• A calibrated grid
• Current ECG monitoring label
• A continuous straight line for active ECG leads that are not connected
8 - 42
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.4.2.5
Additional Reports
Non-ECG Waveforms
The non-ECG waveforms shown in the Event Zoom In Report are limited to the non-ECG
waveforms that are in use, and the non-ECG waveforms that are selected to be printed.
All non-ECG waveforms in the report contain a parameter label and a unit of measure label.
Non-ECG waveforms in the report may contain a wave gain scale bar. If a non-ECG
waveform is unavailable at the time of the print request, the report prints blank data for the
specified time period.
• If the IBP waveform was labeled at the bedside monitor, the report contains that IBP label.
• If the Anesthetic Agent was identified at the bedside monitor, the report contains that
Agent label.
8.4.2.6
Footer
The Event Zoom In Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.4.2.7
Printing an Event Zoom In Report
The Event Zoom In Report prints in landscape orientation using the following method:
• From the Waveforms View of the Events tab, select the Print menu bar button.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
8.4.3
Full Disclosure Zoom In Report
The Full Disclosure Zoom In Report (shown in FIGURE 8-28 and FIGURE 8-29) provides
historical digital and waveform data available for the selected patient tile. The amount of
disclosure data available for a patient is dependent on the amount of disclosure data
allowed by the Panorama Central Station license. This report includes a header, digital data,
waveform data and a footer.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 43
Additional Reports
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-28 Full Disclosure Zoom In Report (Page 1)
FIGURE 8-29 Full Disclosure Zoom In Report (Page 2)
8 - 44
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.4.3.1
Additional Reports
Header
The Full Disclosure Zoom In Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and
basic demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8.4.3.2
Digital Data
The Full Disclosure Zoom In Report’s digital data section displays measurements for the
digital data parameters currently available for the selected patient tile. The displayed
parameter order is determined by the system Unit Priorities tab. The digital data section
contains the following:
• A parameter label
• A numeric measurement
• A unit of measure label
• A heart rate (HR) value
• Dashes (--) to indicate missing or invalid digital data.
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) to indicate alarming parameter values
8.4.3.3
NOTE:
Digital Data is only shown on the first page of the report.
NOTE:
ST digital data includes both Current (C) and Reference (R)
values.
Waveform Data
The waveforms that print in this Full Disclosure Zoom In Report’s waveform data section are
limited to which leads are currently in use, and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup
function.
The first page of this report contains four waveforms. The middle pages of the report contains
six waveforms while the last page may contain two, four, or six waveforms depending on the
waveforms available. Each waveform in this report represents approximately 10 seconds of
data, five seconds prior to the time of the print request and 5 seconds after the print request.
A waveform label (i.e., ECG Lead II) is shown above each strip to identify the data source
and the unit of measurement (i.e.,%, RPM, BPM, mmHg, kPa). Pleth, ECG and Respiration do
not display a unit of measurement. The waveforms displayed in the report are shown on a
calibrated grid and contain a scale bar.
For pacemaker patients that have Pacer Enhancement enabled, the report displays a vertical
bar to indicate the firing of the pacemaker impulse.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 45
Additional Reports
Report Functions
ECG Waveforms
The ECG waveforms shown in the Full Disclosure Zoom In Report are limited to the ECG lead
wire set currently in use and on the waveforms selected in the Print Setup tab. The ECG
waveform report displays with the following:
• An ECG lead label
• A wave gain scale bar and a calibration pulse for wave gains less than 30 mm/mV
• A calibrated grid
• Current ECG monitoring label
• A continuous straight line for active ECG leads that are not connected
Non-ECG Waveforms
The non-ECG waveforms shown in the Full Disclosure Zoom In Report are based on the
non-ECG waveforms that are in use and the non-ECG waveforms that are selected to be
printed.
All non-ECG waveforms in the report contain a parameter label and a unit of measure label.
Non-ECG waveforms in the report may contain a wave gain scale bar. If a non-ECG
waveform is unavailable at the time of the print request, the report prints blank data for the
specified time period.
• If the IBP waveform was labeled at the bedside monitor, the report contains that IBP label.
• If the Anesthetic Agent was identified at the bedside monitor, the report contains that
Agent label.
8.4.3.4
Footer
The Full Disclosure Zoom In Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer
includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.4.4
Printing a Full Disclosure Zoom In Report
The Full Disclosure Zoom In Report is printed in landscape orientation. Follow these steps to
print this report:
1. From the Disclosure tab, select a portion of the compressed waveform view, then select
the Zoom In button. The magnified view of the selected section is displayed in the
Waveforms view.
2. Select the Print menu bar button. The report is sent to the printer.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
8 - 46
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.4.5
Additional Reports
Graphic Trend Report
The Graphic Trend Report (titled Trend Graphic Report in FIGURE 8-30 and FIGURE 8-31)
displays the trends for the selected patient tile in a graphical format. Graphic Trends are
viewed by selecting the Graphic button in the Trends tab. This report includes a header,
Digital data, Graphic data and a footer section.
FIGURE 8-30 Graphic Trend Report (Page 1)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 47
Additional Reports
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-31 Graphic Trend Report (Page 2)
8.4.5.1
Header
The Graphic Trend Report’s first page header provides the title of the report and basic
demographic information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the
patient’s first and last name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
Page headers on subsequent pages of the report provide the report title, the date and time
the data was collected, and limited demographic information about the patient (first and last
name, identification number and bed number), if it is available.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
8 - 48
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.4.5.2
Additional Reports
Digital Data
The Graphic Trend Report’s digital data section displays measurements for the digital data
parameters currently available for the selected patient tile. The displayed parameter order is
determined by the system Unit Priorities tab. The digital data section contains:
• A parameter label
• A numeric measurement
• A unit of measure label
• A heart rate (HR) value
• Dashes (--) to indicate missing or invalid digital data.
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) to indicate alarming parameter values
NOTE:
8.4.5.3
Digital Data is only shown on the first page of the report.
Graphic Data
The graphic data section of the Graphic Trend Report displays a cursor time, parameter list
and a graphical representation of the parameter measurements that occurred during the
selected time period.
• The cursor time represents the time that was selected in the Trends (Graphic) tab. The
cursor time in the report follows the system Date/Time format.
• The parameters shown in this report display on the left side of the report. Each parameter
has its own graphical layout which includes a parameter label, a unit of measure label, a
scale bar and the scale bar range of values.
• For historical purposes, the Graphic Data section of the report shows all the selected
parameters, even if the parameters are currently turned off.
• The report shows a vertical line on the graph to represent the occurrence of a
physiological alarm.
• The report shows nine time periods across the top of the graph for a more representative
look at the parameter data. The time periods will be shown in the system default
time/date format.
• The time periods shown in the report are equal sections of the total time interval selected
in the graphic report. For example, if a 4 hour interval is selected, graphical data is
plotted in 30 minute increments and if an 8 hour interval is selected, data is plotted in 60
minute increments. This report is capable of plotting graphical data in 2, 4, 6 and 8 hour
time intervals. The report is printed in the time interval specified in the Trends (Graphic)
tab.
Time intervals are changed in the Trends (Graphic) tab by selecting the Zoom In and
Zoom Out buttons.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 49
Additional Reports
Report Functions
• This report shows a cursor line in the graph for the Cursor Time posted on the report.
• The data plotted in the Graphic Trend Report reflects the trend data records that were
collected based on the Trend Display interval configuration.
• The report shows one plotted point for each parameter sensor.
• Dual sensor parameters (such as INSP/ET CO2) are plotted individually then connected
with a line (for example, inspired and end tidal values).
• Multiple sensor parameters (such as NIBP) are plotted individually then the systolic and
diastolic points are connected and a single point is shown for the Mean measurement.
8.4.5.4
Footer
The Graphic Trend Report contains a footer at the bottom of every page. The footer includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station from which the report was generated.
8.4.5.5
Printing a Graphic Trend Report
The Graphic Trend Report is printed in landscape orientation, using any of the following:
• Select a valid plot point, then select the Print menu bar button from the Trends
(Graphic) tab.
• From the bedside monitor, verify that Select Printer option is configured to print
remotely, and that the trends graphic option is active, then press the PRINT TREND
button.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
8 - 50
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.4.6
Additional Reports
12-lead Report
The 12-lead Report (shown in FIGURE 8-32) provides analysis of 12 vectors of ECG data for
the selected patient tile. This report includes a header and waveform data. All of the data
contained in this report is obtained from the bedside monitor.
NOTE:
This report is not available when using a WMTS 608 bedside
device.
NOTE:
The 12-lead Report is not available at the ViewStation.
FIGURE 8-32 12-lead Report
8.4.6.1
Header
The 12-lead Report’s page header provides the title of the report and basic demographic
information, if it is available. The demographic information includes the patient’s first and last
name, identification number, bed number, weight, height and doctor.
If the demographic data was not previously entered in the system, only the demographic
label is shown.
• Interpretation Area: The Interpretation area of the 12-lead report shows an analysis of the
collected data.
If data is missing from the report, the message Unable to Obtain Interpretation.
Enter Patient Date of Birth and Gender is displayed.
If the patient’s Patient Size is not set to Adult, the message Unable to Obtain
Interpretation. Patient not an adult is displayed.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 51
Additional Reports
Report Functions
If the patient is less than 18 years old, the message Unable to Obtain
Interpretation. Patient Must Be At Least 18 Years Old is displayed.
• Unconfirmed Report: The 12-lead Report is marked as an Unconfirmed Report when
interpretation strings are printed on the report. This indicates that a physician must review
the report for a diagnosis confirmation.
8.4.6.2
Waveform Data
The 12-lead Report section displays 2.5 seconds of waveform data for each of the 12 leads
monitored at the bedside monitor, a 10-second ECG rhythm strip for Lead II, a calibration
pulse and a wave gain setting of 1 millivolt.
8.4.6.3
Printing a 12-lead Report
The 12-lead Report prints when a print request is received from a connected bedside monitor.
This report prints in landscape orientation.
Before this report is requested, the following must be configured at the bedside monitor:
• A View 12™ card must be in use
• The monitor must be in the View All ECG Mode
• Remote printing must be enabled
To print the report, select the STRIP button from the bedside monitor. A print request is sent
from the bedside monitor to the Panorama Central Station’s selected printer.
Please refer to the Spectrum™ Operating Instructions (P/N 0070-00-0648-XX) for more
specific printing instructions.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
8 - 52
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.4.7
Additional Reports
Telepack Error Log Report
The Telepack Error Log Report (shown in FIGURE 8-33) is a one page report that shows all
logged errors for any wireless Telepack devices connected to the Panorama Central Station
in service mode. This report includes a header, error log data and a footer.
NOTE:
The Telepack Error Log Report is not available at the
ViewStation.
FIGURE 8-33 Telepack Error Log Report
8.4.7.1
Header
The Telepack Error Log Report header provides the title of the report and the connected
Device ID for the connected wireless device.
8.4.7.2
Error Log Data
The Telepack Error Log Report’s error log data section displays all of the logged error
messages for any connected Telepack device in a columnar format. These messages are used
to diagnose a problem with the connected wireless device.
8.4.7.3
Footer
The Telepack Error Log Report contains a footer at the bottom the page. The footer includes:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 53
Additional Reports
Report Functions
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab. For more information regarding date/time formats, refer to the
“Date/Time Tab” on page 9-41.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.4.7.4
Printing a Telepack Error Log Report
The Telepack Error Log Report prints in a landscape orientation. Follow these steps to print
this report:
1. From the Wireless tab, select the Error Log sidebar button.
2. Select the Print menu bar button.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
8 - 54
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
8.4.8
Additional Reports
System Alarm Report
The System Alarm Report (shown in FIGURE 8-34) shows all of the system default settings for
the parameter alarms available in the Panorama Central Station. The report includes header,
System Alarm data, optional arrhythmia and paging delay settings, and a footer section.
FIGURE 8-34 System Alarm Report - Paging Option Disabled
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 55
Additional Reports
Report Functions
FIGURE 8-35 System Alarm Report - Paging Option Enabled
8.4.8.1
Header
The System Alarm Report’s header provides the title of the report.
8.4.8.2
System Alarm Information
The System Alarm section of the report will display all of the system alarm default settings, as
configured at the Panorama Central Station. Alarm limits are listed for the Adult, Pediatric
and Neonate patient sizes.
The following alarm information is shown in the report:
• Parameter displays the name of the parameter for which the alarm is set.
• Units displays the default unit of measure in which the parameter is shown. If the unit of
measure is not applicable to the parameter, dashes (---) display instead of a unit of
measure.
8 - 56
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Report Functions
Additional Reports
• High Limit displays the high limit for the alarm setting. Measurements that exceed this
setting will trigger an alarm condition. If a high limit is not applicable to the parameter,
dashes (---) display instead of the high limit.
• Low Limit displays the low limit for the alarm setting. Measurements below this setting
trigger an alarm condition. If a low limit is not applicable to the parameter, dashes (---)
display instead of the low limit.
• Priority displays the importance rating for the alarm. The alarm priorities available to
each parameter may differ.
• Print On Alarm displays whether or not the parameter data should be printed during
an alarm condition. Print On Alarm settings include ON and OFF.
• Save To Event displays whether or not the parameter data should be saved as an event
during an alarm condition. Save To Event settings include ON and OFF.
Alarm settings can be customized to a patient using the patient Alarms tabs.
8.4.8.3
Arrhythmia Settings
The System Alarm Report’s Arrhythmia Settings section includes values for the following:
• Asystole Delay
• V-Tach Threshold
• All Arrhythmia On/Off
• V-Tach Rate
• ECG Noise Delay
8.4.8.4
Paging Delay Settings
The System Alarm Report’s Paging Delay section includes the system paging delay value that
was configured in the System Alarms tab.
8.4.8.5
Footer
The System Alarm Report contains a footer at the bottom of the report page. The footer
includes:
• The date and time of the print request. The format displayed is taken from the System
Date/Time tab.
• A centered page number.
• The name of the Panorama Central Station where the report was generated.
8.4.8.6
Printing a System Alarm Report
The System Alarm Report is printed in portrait orientation. Follow these steps to print this
report:
1. From the System Alarms tab, select the System Alarm Limits sidebar button.
2. Select the Print menu bar button. The report is sent to the printer.
Requesting this report posts a print job in the system Print Status tab. For additional
information, refer to the “Print Status Tab” on page 8-38.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
8 - 57
Additional Reports
8.4.9
Report Functions
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while trying to
print an additional report.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The report will not print
There are several reasons that
would cause a report not to
print. It could be a problem
with the communication
between the printer and the
Panorama Central Station or
simply a problem with the
printer.
If there is an error that appears
such as Printer out of
Paper you will need to
remedy that situation.
If the No Printer connected
or Printer not Available
error is displayed check that
the printer was properly
configured with the Panorama
Central Station. Refer to the
Printer Configuration manual
(P/N 0070-00-0561).
*
8 - 58
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
9.0
System Setup Functions
This section outlines the tabs and default configuration settings associated with the Panorama
Central Station, the ViewStation, and the WorkStation.
• Parameter Color Tab
• Touch Screen Tab
• Installation Setup Tab
• Care Group Tab
• Volume Tab
• System Alarms Tab
• Passwords Tab
• Equipment Setup Tab
• More Tab
• Previous Tab
• Date/Time Tab
• Print Setup Tab (System)
• Unit Priorities Tab
• Unit Choices Tab
• Wave Gain Tab (System)
• Wireless Tab
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9-1
Parameter Color Tab
9.1
System Setup Functions
Parameter Color Tab
The Parameter Color tab (shown in FIGURE 9-1) selects the system default colors for the
parameters which will be displayed in the patient tile. This tab is available at the ViewStation
and the WorkStation, and it functions in the same manner as it does at the host central
station. Parameter Color tab changes made at the central station or remote workstations are
independent of each other.
9.1.1
Accessing the Parameter Color Tab
• From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The tabs associated with the
System Setup button are displayed. By default, the Parameter Color tab is
displayed first.
FIGURE 9-1 Parameter Color Tab
9.1.2
Selecting a Color for Parameter Data
This section outlines assigning a color to a parameter in the Parameter Color tab.
1. Select a color tile button.
• A checkmark indicates that the colored tile is selected.
• An empty tile indicates that a colored tile is not selected.
2. Select a parameter in the Parameter list box (use the scroll bars to view all of the
parameters). When a parameter is selected, the associated label changes from a black
background with white text to a white background with black text.
3. Choose the Select button to accept the parameter selection. The color is assigned to the
selected parameter and the color icon is shown in the list box to the left of the parameter
name.
9.1.3
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9-2
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.1.4
Parameter Color Tab
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Parameter Color tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9-3
Touch Screen Tab
9.2
System Setup Functions
Touch Screen Tab
The Touch Screen tab provides a means to turn the touch screen on and off and recalibrate
(or reset) the touch screen. This tab is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation, and
it functions in the same manner as it does at the host central station. Touch Screen tab
changes made at the central station or remote workstations are independent of each other.
9.2.1
Accessing the Touch Screen Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup
tabs is displayed.
2. Select the Touch Screen tab. A Touch Screen On/Off and Recalibrate Touch
Screen button is displayed in the tab (shown in FIGURE 9-2).
3. For further instructions, refer to sections Turning the Touch Screen On or Off and
Recalibrating the Touch Screen.
FIGURE 9-2 Touch Screen tab
9.2.1.1
Turning the Touch Screen On or Off
The touch screen may be turned on or off by selecting the Touch Screen On/Off button. If the
touch screen is turned off, a mouse is required to navigate. When the touch screen is turned
off, the message Touch Screen Off will be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen
in the System Status line. By default, the touch screen is turned on.
9.2.1.2
Recalibrating the Touch Screen
The touch screen should be recalibrated whenever the touch interface becomes difficult to
maneuver. By default the
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup
tabs is displayed.
2. Select the Touch Screen tab.
3. Select the Recalibrate Touch Screen button. The recalibration process is initiated
(shown in FIGURE 9-3).
9-4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Touch Screen Tab
FIGURE 9-3 Recalibration Screen (Part I)
4. Touch the red targets on the screen as instructed. Three calibration targets will be
displayed.
NOTE:
The messages in the Recalibrate Touch Screen display are
always displayed in the English language.
NOTE:
During the recalibration process, the patient tiles, menu bar,
and sidebar buttons will be replaced by the recalibration
screen.
5. Once the three targets have been touched, the message Touch the screen. Does the
cursor follow your finger? is displayed (shown in FIGURE 9-5).
Select either the
or
button.
• Select the
button if the targets moved as they were selected. Once selected, the
screen is recalibrated.
• Select the
button if the targets did not move as they were selected. Once selected,
the recalibration process begins again.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
When the central station, ViewStation, or WorkStation uses
a dual display configuration, recalibration will affect both
touch screen displays. The first touch screen display will be
calibrated and then the second.
0070-10-0707-02
9-5
Touch Screen Tab
System Setup Functions
FIGURE 9-4 Recalibration Screen (Part II)
9.2.2
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.2.3
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur Touch Screen
tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Recalibration settings not
accepted
The Recalibration screen timed
out because the first target was
not touched within 30 seconds.
Try to recalibrate again and
touch the first target before the
30 second time out.
Recalibration steps are
repeated
The
button was
selected in error.
Recalibrate again and if the
targets moved as they were
selected, select the
button.
Touch Screen OFF
The Touch Screen On button
was selected.
Use the mouse to navigate. If
touch screen functionality is
needed, press the Touch
Screen OFF button again to
reactivate the touch screen.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Contact your local Service Representative if recalibration of the touch screen does not
improve the performance of the touch screen display.
9-6
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.3
Installation Setup Tab
Installation Setup Tab
The system Installation Setup tab (shown in FIGURE 9-5) controls access to restricted
central station functions. This tab is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation, and it
functions in the same manner as it does at the host central station. The Installation Setup
tab is password protected.
9.3.1
Accessing the Installation Setup Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup tabs
is displayed.
2. Select the Installation Setup tab. The Installation Setup tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-5 Installation Setup Tab
9.3.2
Entering a Password
To gain access to the protected central station system functions, the correct password must be
entered in the Installation Setup tab’s password box. The password required for the
Installation Setup tab is defined in the system Password tab.
1. Select the Password text box in the Installation Setup tab. The keyboard dialog
box is displayed.
2. Using the keyboard dialog box, enter the System password that was established in the
Passwords tab (maximum 15 characters). For security purposes asterisks (*) are
shown for each character entered.
3. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information
about using the keyboard dialog box, refer to ‘‘Keyboard Dialog Box’’ on page 2-18.
The following tabs can be accessed at the central station after the correct password has been
entered in the Installation Setup tab: Care Group, Volume, System Alarms,
Passwords, Equipment Setup, More/Previous, Date/Time, Unit Priorities, Unit
Choices, Wave Gain, and Wireless.
The following tabs can be accessed at the ViewStation and the WorkStation after the correct
password has been entered in the Installation Setup tab: Volume, System Alarms,
Passwords, Date/Time, and Unit Choices.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9-7
Installation Setup Tab
9.3.3
System Setup Functions
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.3.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Installation Setup tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Incorrect password.
Please try again.
The wrong password was
entered in the Password text
box.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter the
correct password in the text
box.
The password was entered in
the wrong case.
Re-enter the password turning
on/off the keyboard dialog
Caps Lock key.
Incorrect password. This
is your last chance.
Please try again.
The wrong password was
entered two consecutive times
in the Password text box.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter the
correct password in the text
box.
The Installation Setup tab
closes and the Panorama
Central Station is returned to a
full screen monitoring display
The wrong password was
entered three consecutive times
in the Password text box.
Reopen the Installation
Setup tab and enter the
correct password in the text
box.
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
*
9-8
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.4
Care Group Tab
Care Group Tab
The system Care Group tab (shown in FIGURE 9-6) allows for the default assignment of
selected patient tiles to specific system care groups. This enables a patient tile to
automatically be assigned to a specific care group upon admission to the Panorama Central
Station. The central station supports up to twelve care groups. Each care group is associated
with a unique color indicator and a unique reference label. The Care Group tab and the
associated colorized indicator are not available at the ViewStation or the WorkStation.
Care groups may be used to indicate a special meaning with regard to a patient tile. For
example, care groups may be used to represent a specific care-giver, hospital department, or
a critical monitoring condition. Contact the System Administrator before making adjustments
to the system care groups.
9.4.1
Accessing the Care Group Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed. By default, the Care Group tab is displayed first.
FIGURE 9-6 Care Group Tab
9.4.2
Editing Care Group Labels
This section outlines editing the system Care Group reference label.
Selecting a Patient’s Care Group
1. Select a care group by choosing the colored tile below the care group label. When a
care group is selected, the reference label changes from a black background with white
text to a white background with black text.
2. Select the Edit Labels button. The keyboard dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the name for the selected care group (maximum of 6 characters). The name is
displayed in the white text box.
4. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information
about using the keyboard dialog box, refer to ‘‘Keyboard Dialog Box’’ on page 2-18.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9-9
Care Group Tab
9.4.3
System Setup Functions
Assigning a Patient Tile to a Care Group
The assignment of a system care group occurs when a patient is admitted to a tile at the
Panorama Central Station. When a patient tile is assigned to a care group, the color
associated with the care group will be shown in vertical bar beside the patient tile VIEW
button. To adjust the care group assignment of an active patient tile, refer to the
‘‘Demographics Tab’’ on page 5-2.
This section outlines assigning system default care group settings to specific patient tiles.
Selecting/Editing a Patient’s Care Group
1. Select a care group tile by selecting the colored tile below the care group label. When a
tile is selected the associated label changes from a black background with white text to
a white background with black text.
2. Select the tile number to be assigned to the selected care group. When a tile is selected
it changes from a black background with white text to a white background with black
text.
3. Accept or reject the care group assignment.
• Select the Add button to assign the selected patient to the care group. The care group
icon is displayed next to the selected patient tile in the care group list box.
• Select the Clear button to delete the care group currently assigned to the selected
patient.
9.4.4
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.4.5
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
system Care Group tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
*
9 - 10
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.5
Volume Tab
Volume Tab
The system Volume tab (shown in FIGURE 9-7 and FIGURE 9-8) adjusts the system default
volume levels. Volume levels can be adjusted for system alarms and physiological alarms.
This tab is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation, and it functions in the same
manner as it does at the host central station. Volume tab changes made at the central station
or remote workstations are independent of each other.
9.5.1
Accessing the Volume Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The Parameter Color tab is
displayed.
2. Select the Installation Setup tab. The Installation Setup tab is displayed.
3. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
4. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
5. Select the Volume tab. The Volume tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-7 Volume Tab (Central Station)
FIGURE 9-8 Volume Tab (ViewStation and WorkStation)
CAUTION:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Do not block the speakers. Set the volume levels so that
alarms can be heard at all times, as described in this
Operation Manual.
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 11
Volume Tab
System Setup Functions
Setting a System Alarms Volume Level
The System Alarms volume setting determines the volume of the sound associated with the
Panorama Central Station alarm settings.
Characteristics of the System Alarms volume setting:
• A volume level range of 10-100%
• A factory default setting of 30%
• It cannot be turned OFF
NOTE:
Adjustments to the System Alarms volume setting will take
effect immediately.
To adjust the System Alarms volume level:
• Move the volume control scroll bar box or the scroll bar arrows up (to maximize sound) or
down (to minimize sound)
Setting a Physiological Alarms Volume Level
The Physiological Alarm volume level is a system setting that applies to enabled numeric and
arrhythmia alarm violations. The Panorama Central Station allows up to three time specified
volume settings to be configured for physiological alarms. This feature allows user- defined
volume settings for physiological alarms to be specified, based on the time of day.
Characteristics of the Physiological Alarm volume setting:
• The time period format for physiological alarms will follow the system’s time format
• A volume level range of 10-100%
• A factory default setting of 100%
• It cannot be turned OFF
CAUTION:
Do not block the speakers. Set the volume levels so that
alarms can be heard at all times, as described in this
Operation Manual.
1. Select the colored tile that corresponds to the time period for which the volume level is
being adjusted.
• A checkmark in the colored tile indicates that the tile has been selected and the
From/To fields are displayed.
• A colored tile without a checkmark indicates that the tile has not been selected.
2. Select the From/To fields to enter a time period for the selected physiological alarm.
The keypad dialog box displays.
• Delete existing hour and minute data by using the CLEAR or CE buttons on the
keypad.
• When using the 12-hour time format, the AM/PM toggle button switches between the
AM and PM settings.
NOTE:
9 - 12
Time periods are mutually exclusive. When a new time
period is entered, the time periods for the other
physiological alarms are automatically adjusted to prevent
overlapping of time periods.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Volume Tab
3. Set the volume level for the selected physiological alarm.
To adjust the volume level, move the volume control scroll bar box or the scroll bar arrows
up (to maximize sound) or down (to minimize sound). The colored icon to the right of the
scroll bar is automatically moved when the volume level is adjusted.
4. Select the Done button to save the physiological alarm volume adjustments. The
Physiological Alarm volume adjustments will take effect once the Done button is
selected.
9.5.2
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.5.3
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Volume tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 13
System Alarms Tab
9.6
System Setup Functions
System Alarms Tab
The System Alarms tab (shown in FIGURE 9-10, FIGURE 9-11, and FIGURE 9-11) controls
the default settings for system alarm options, specific alarm limits, and alarm response
functions. This tab is available at the ViewStation and the WorkStation, and it functions in the
same manner as it does at host central station with fewer buttons. System Alarms tab changes
made at the central station or remote workstations are independent of each other.
For information regarding individual patient alarm settings, refer to the ‘‘Patient Alarm Setup
Tab (Optional)’’ on page 6-2.
9.6.1
System Alarms (Options) Tab
The System Alarms (System Alarm Options) tab controls the system default settings for
patient alarms.
9.6.1.1
Accessing the System Alarm (Options) Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the System Alarms tab. The System Alarms (System Alarm Options) tab is
displayed.
FIGURE 9-9 System Alarms (System Alarm Options) Tab (Central Station)
FIGURE 9-10 System Alarms (System Alarm Options) Tab - Paging Option Enabled
(Central Station)
9 - 14
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
System Alarms Tab
FIGURE 9-11 System Alarms (System Alarm Options) Tab (ViewStation)
FIGURE 9-12 System Alarms (System Alarm Options) Tab (WorkStation)
9.6.1.2
Setting the System Alarms Options (Central Station)
This section outlines selecting system alarm option defaults.
1. Select the Latch Alarms toggle button to either enable or disable the latch alarms
function. Latch Alarm options include ON and OFF. The factory default setting is ON.
Alarm latching allows physiological alarms to continue their alarm behaviors until the
alarm is acknowledged by the user.
• The ON option indicates that alarm latching is enabled.
• The OFF option indicates that alarm latching is disabled.
NOTE:
The Latch Alarms option will not affect apnea alarms, lethal
arrhythmias, and non-lethal arrhythmias.
NOTE:
Changes to the Latch Alarms option will only affect new
alarm violations.
2. Select the Mute Duration button to select the mute duration period for alarms in the
Panorama Central Station. The mute duration period is the amount of time an alarm
parameter will be silenced. Mute Duration periods include 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 30
seconds, 45 seconds, 60 seconds, and 120 seconds. The factory default setting is 30
seconds.
NOTE:
Changes to the Mute Duration period will take effect within
ten (10) seconds of the change.
NOTE:
Using the Mute Duration button will not affect the visual
indicators associated with an alarm.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 15
System Alarms Tab
System Setup Functions
3. Select the Technical Events Sounds toggle button to enable or disable sound during
a technical event. Technical Events Sounds options include ON and OFF. The
factory default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that Technical Events Sounds will be heard during a
technical event.
• The OFF options indicates that Technical Events Sounds will not be heard during
a technical event.
NOTE:
Changes to the Technical Events Sounds option will affect all
patients within ten (10) seconds of the change.
4. Select the Apnea Latching toggle button to either enable or disable the apnea
latching function. Apnea latching is the ability to set Apnea alarms to continue the alarm
behaviors until the alarm is acknowledged by the user. Apnea latching options include
ON and OFF. The factory default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that Apnea Latching will be enabled.
• The OFF options indicates that Apnea Latching will not be enabled.
NOTE:
Changes to the Apnea option will affect all new Apnea
alarms.
5. Select the Paging Delay button to select a paging delay for the system. This button will
only be available when the paging option has been enabled. The Paging Delay options
include 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 25 seconds, and 30 seconds.
The factory default setting is 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Changing the Paging Delay will only be applied to newly
admitted patients and will not affect patients currently
being monitored or to currently alarming parameters.
NOTE:
This option will only be displayed if the Paging option is
enabled at the central station.
6. Select the Password Protection toggle button to either enable or disable the
password protection for the Patient Alarms tab in the Panorama Central Station or
the WorkStation. Password Protection options include ON and OFF. The factory
default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that Password Protection will be enabled when trying to
access the Patient Alarms tab.
• The OFF options indicates that Password Protection will not be enabled when
trying to access the Patient Alarms tab.
NOTE:
Changes to the Password Protection option will affect all
patients upon entering the Patient Alarms tab.
7. Select the Suspend Alarms toggle button to either enable or disable the ability to
suspend all, all non-lethal, or disable the ability to suspend any alarms. Suspend Alarms
options include All, OFF, and Non-Lethal. The factory default setting is All.
• The All option indicates that the Suspend All Alarms and the Suspend
Non-Lethal sidebar button will be available in the Patient Alarms tabs.
• The Non-Lethal option indicates that only the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar
button will be available in the Patient Alarms tabs.
• The OFF option indicates that neither the Suspend All Alarms nor the Suspend
Non-Lethal sidebar buttons will be accessible in the Patient Alarms tab.
9 - 16
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
System Alarms Tab
NOTE:
Changes to the Suspend Alarms option will affect all
patients upon entering the Patient Alarms tab.
8. Select the ST Alarm Delay button to set an alarm delay for ST alarms. ST alarm
delay is the period of time that the Panorama Central Station will wait before ST alarm
notification. ST Alarm Delay options include 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 1 minute, 90
seconds, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 seconds.
NOTE:
ST Alarm Delay only affects new ST alarms for Telepack
devices. When using a bedside monitor, the ST alarm delay
settings are transferred to the central station.
9. Select the Alarm Delay button to set an alarm delay for the Panorama Central Station.
The alarm delay is the period of time that the Panorama Central Station will wait before
alarm notification. Alarm Delay options include None, 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds,
4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds. The factory default setting
is None.
NOTE:
Alarm Delay only affects new alarms for Telepack devices.
When using a bedside monitor, the ST alarm delay settings
are transferred to the central station.
10. Select the Suspend All Timeout button to temporarily suspend all alarms or all
non-lethal alarms for a configured time period. This button is only enabled when the
Suspend Alarms option is set to All. When this option is enabled, and a time period
is selected, either the Suspend All Alarms or the Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar
button in the Patient Alarm Limits and Patient Alarm Responses tab must be selected
before the alarm suspension begins. Suspend All Timeout options include 2 minutes,
3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, and None. The factory default setting is 2 minutes.
9.6.1.3
Setting the System Alarm Options (ViewStation and WorkStation)
This section outlines selecting system alarm option defaults at the ViewStation and the
WorkStation.
The ViewStation and the WorkStation are independent of each other. For example, if an
option is selected at the ViewStation, the WorkStation will not be affected unless the same
option is selected at the WorkStation.
1. Select the Password Protection toggle button to either enable or disable the
password protection for the Patient Alarms tab at the WorkStation. Password
Protection options include ON and OFF. The factory default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that Password Protection will be enabled when trying to
access the Patient Alarms tab.
• The OFF options indicates that Password Protection will not be enabled when
trying to access the Patient Alarms tab.
NOTE:
The Password Protection toggle button is not available at
the ViewStation.
NOTE:
Changes to the Password Protection option will affect all
patients upon entering the Patient Alarms tab at the
WorkStation.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 17
System Alarms Tab
System Setup Functions
2. Select the Mute All button to select the mute duration period for alarms. The mute
duration period is the amount of time an alarm parameter will be silenced. Mute
duration periods include 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 60
seconds, 120 seconds, and Permanent. The factory default setting is 30 seconds.
NOTE:
The host central station will not have a Mute All button.
NOTE:
The Mute All button will affect all patient tiles at the
ViewStation and WorkStation (if selected at both sites). The
Mute All function will not affect the patient tiles at the host
central station.
NOTE:
Selecting the Mute All button will not affect the visual
indicators associated with an alarm.
3. Select the Technical Events Sounds toggle button to enable or disable sound during
a technical event. Technical Events Sounds options include ON and OFF. The
factory default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that Technical Events Sounds will be heard during a
technical event.
• The OFF options indicates that Technical Events Sounds will not be heard during
a technical event.
NOTE:
9.6.2
Changes to the Technical Events Sounds option will affect all
patients within ten (10) seconds of the change.
System Event Filtering
Select the Events Filtering sidebar button to control the system default event filters that will
initially be used when a selected patient tile’s Events tab is opened.
System Event filters can be configured based on time, parameters, or both. ViewStation and
WorkStation patient tiles will initially display the same event filter settings of the associated
patient tile at the host central station.
For information regarding patient level event filtering, refer to ‘‘Event Filtering’’ on page
7-27.
9.6.2.1
Accessing the Events Filter
To access the system events filter view (shown in FIGURE 9-13), select the Events Filtering
sidebar button from the System Alarms Options tab.
Event Filter
Text Box
FIGURE 9-13 System Alarms - Events Filtering (Central Station)
9 - 18
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.6.2.2
System Alarms Tab
Components of the Events Filter
Event Filter Text Box
The Event Filter text box is where the selected filter settings are displayed. The factory default
Event Filter text box lists “All” as the initial filter, which indicates that there are no active event
filters being used.
Done Button
Select the Done button to close the All Event Filter view and return to the System Alarm
Options tab.
Cancel Button
Select the Cancel button to close the All Event Filter view and return to the System
Alarm Options tab.
9.6.2.3
Time Filters
By indicating a start time and an end time, only events included within the configured time
period will be displayed.
Accessing the Time Filter
To access the Time Filter view (shown in FIGURE 9-14), select the Time sidebar button from
the Events Filter view. If any previously selected time ranges were specified, they will be
displayed in the Event Filter text box beside the Time: label, and in the Start Time and End
Time text boxes.
FIGURE 9-14 Time Event Filter
Clearing Time Filters
To remove previously entered time filters, select the Clear button from the Time Filter view.
Configuring a Time Filter
To enter a start time:
1. Select the Start Time text box. The Start Time dialog box (shown in FIGURE 9-15) is
displayed.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 19
System Alarms Tab
System Setup Functions
FIGURE 9-15 Start Time Dialog Box
2. Rotate the dial controls to select the hour and minute values.
3. Rotate the dial controls to select the month, day, and year values.
4. Accept or reject the selection made in the Start Time dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the selections. When the Done button is selected, the date
and time selected populates the Start Time text box, End Time text box, and the Event
Filter text box.
• The Cancel button discards the selections, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Time Event Filter view.
To enter an end time:
1. Select the End Time text box. The End Time dialog box (shown in FIGURE 9-16) is
displayed.
FIGURE 9-16 End Time Dialog Box
2. To enter the end time, follow steps 2, 3, and 4 from the previous section (entering a start
time).
9.6.2.4
Parameter Filters
By indicating a parameter filter, only the selected parameters will be displayed. Parameter
filters can be configured for physiological and technical events.
9 - 20
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
System Alarms Tab
Accessing the Parameter Filter
To access the Parameter Filter (shown in FIGURE 9-17), select the Param sidebar button
from the All Events view. By default, the physiological events are shown first. If any
previously selected parameters were specified, they will be displayed in the Event Filter text
box beside the Param: label.
FIGURE 9-17 Parameter Event Filter View
Configuring a Parameter Filter
To configure a parameter filter:
1. If a technical event filter is needed, select the Tech button.
NOTE:
By default, the physiological events are displayed when the
Param sidebar is selected.
2. Move/remove the selected events by using any of the buttons described in the following
table:
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Remove All
Removes all the events listed in the Selected Events list box and
from the Event Filter text box.
Add/Right Arrow
Adds the selected event to the Selected Events list box, and to the
Event Filter text box.
Remove/Left Arrow
Removes the chosen event from the Selected Events list box and
from the Event Filter text box.
NOTE:
A maximum of five physiological and/or technical events
may be added to the Selected Events list at one time.
3. Select the Done button to apply the selected event filter and return to the List view or
select the Cancel button to restore the previously chosen filter settings.
9.6.2.5
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 21
System Alarms Tab
System Setup Functions
System Alarm Limits
Select the System Alarm Limits sidebar button to display the System Alarm Limits
tab. For additional information regarding system alarm limits, refer to ‘‘System Alarms (Alarm
Limits) Tab’’ on page 9-23.
NOTE:
The System Alarm Limits sidebar button is not available at
the ViewStation or the WorkStation.
System Alarm Responses
Select the System Alarm Responses sidebar button to display the System Alarm
Responses tab. For information regarding system alarm responses, refer to ‘‘Accessing the
System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) Tab’’ on page 9-26.
NOTE:
The System Alarm Responses sidebar button is not available
at the ViewStation or the WorkStation.
Events Filtering
This sidebar button was previously described on page 9-18.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.6.2.6
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
System Alarm Options tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on a Panorama
display and cannot be opened
on multiple displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on which it is opened.
The Paging Delay button is
not displayed.
The central station where the
patient tile resides does not
have the Paging option
enabled.
If the Paging feature was
purchased, enable it.
The System Alarm Limits
and System Alarm
Responses tab is not
available at the ViewStation or
WorkStation.
System alarm limits and
responses must be changed at
the central station.
Change the alarm limits and
responses from the central
station.
Suspend All Timeout button
is disabled.
The Suspend Alarms option is
set to OFF or Non-Lethal.
Change the Suspend Alarms
option to All.
*
9 - 22
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.6.3
System Alarms Tab
System Alarms (Alarm Limits) Tab
The System Alarms (System Alarm Limits) tab (shown in FIGURE 9-18) controls the system
default settings for the following alarm limits, according to patient size:
• Heart Rate (HR)
• PVC/min
• ST Single
• ST Dual
The remaining default parameter alarm limits are taken directly from the bedside device. The
System Alarms (Alarm Limits) is available at the Panorama Central Station and the
WorkStation. The ViewStation does not have an Alarm Limits tab. ViewStation Alarm limit
settings are transferred from the host central to the ViewStation when the patient tile is
assigned.
9.6.3.1
Accessing the System Alarms (System Alarm Limits) Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the System Alarms tab. The System Alarms (System Alarm Options) tab is
displayed.
5. Select the System Alarm Limits sidebar button. The System Alarms (System Alarm
Limits) tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-18 System Alarms (System Alarm Limits) Tab (Central Station)
9.6.3.2
Setting the System Alarm Limits
This section outlines setting system defaults for alarm limits, according to patient size.
The following steps should be performed for each patient size.
1. Select the Patient Size button to set the system alarm limit defaults for a specific patient
size. Patient Size options include Adult, Pediatric, and Neonate. The factory default
setting is Adult. When a Patient Size is selected, the button will change from black text
on a grey background to grey text on a grey background.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 23
System Alarms Tab
System Setup Functions
2. Use the horizontal scroll bar in the System Alarms (System Alarm Limits) tab to locate
the slider controls that need to be set or modified. Each page can show a maximum of
six slider controls and a minimum of one slider control on each screen.
• Select the double arrow scroll bar buttons to display the next/previous page of
available parameter slider controls (until the first/last page is reached).
• Select the single arrow scroll bar buttons to display the next/previous slider control
(until the last/first control is shown).
3. Manually set the alarm limits for the selected parameter.
To set a high alarm limit:
• Select the upper alarm limit button to the left of the parameters slider bar. This button is
either labeled with the word OFF or with the high alarm limit setting.
• To set an upper alarm limit, either select the up/down arrow buttons on the parameters
vertical scroll bar or drag and drop the scroll box in the scroll bar.
To set a low alarm limit:
• Select the lower alarm limit button to the left of the parameters slider bar. This button is
either labeled with the word OFF or with the low alarm limit setting.
• To set a lower alarm limit, either select the up/down arrow button on the parameter’s
vertical scroll bar or drag and drop the scroll box in the scroll bar.
For additional information on the default alarm limit ranges, refer to the ‘‘System Alarms
Tab’’ on page 9-14.
9.6.3.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
System Alarm Options
Select the System Alarm Options sidebar button to display the System Alarm
Options tab. For additional information regarding System Alarm Options, refer to the
‘‘System Alarms Tab’’ on page 9-14.
System Alarm Responses
Select the System Alarm Responses sidebar button to display the System Alarm
Responses tab. For additional information regarding System Alarm Responses, refer to the
‘‘System Alarms Tab’’ on page 9-14.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9 - 24
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.6.3.4
System Alarms Tab
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
System Alarm Limits tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on a Panorama
display and cannot be opened
on multiple displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on which it is opened.
The System Alarm Limits
and System Alarm
Responses tab is not
available at the ViewStation or
WorkStation.
System alarm limits and
responses must be changed at
the central station.
Change the alarm limits and
responses from the central
station.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 25
System Alarms Tab
9.6.4
System Setup Functions
System Alarms (Alarm Responses) Tab
The System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) tab (shown in FIGURE 9-19 and
FIGURE 9-20) controls the system default settings for alarm responses at the Panorama
Central Station and the WorkStation. This tab is not available at the ViewStation or the
WorkStation. Alarm response settings are transferred from the host central to the ViewStation
and the WorkStation when the patient tile is assigned.
9.6.4.1
Accessing the System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) Tab
The System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) tab (shown in FIGURE 9-20) controls the
system default settings for alarm responses.
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the System Alarms tab. The System Alarms (System Alarm Options) tab is
displayed.
5. Select the System Alarm Responses sidebar button. The System Alarms (System
Alarm Responses) tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-19 System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) Tab (Central Station)
FIGURE 9-20 System Alarms (System Alarm Responses) Tab - Paging Option Enabled
(Central Station)
9 - 26
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.6.4.2
System Alarms Tab
Setting the System Alarms Responses
This section outlines setting system defaults for alarm responses.
1. Select a parameter in the System Alarm Limits (System Alarm Responses) tab to
make adjustments.
• The alarm responses list box shows a list of the available alarm conditions.
• When an alarm is selected, it will be highlighted in white with black text and will be
displayed on the left side of the Priority button.
2. Select the alarm Priority button to select the alarm priority for the selected alarm. The
Alarm Priority setting determines the audio and visual indicators the central station will
elicit when an alarm condition occurs. Alarm Priority is based on the severity of the
alarm condition. Every alarm condition will have predetermined alarm priority choices.
The Alarm Priorities available include Off, 1, 2, and 3, depending on the alarm.
• Priority 1 alarms are the most severe alarms (lethal alarms). Priority 1 alarms are
shown in red.
• Priority 2 alarms include alarms of medium severity (most physiological numeric
alarms). Priority 2 alarms are shown in yellow.
• Priority 3 alarms are the least severe alarms (technical alarms). Priority 3 alarms are
shown in yellow.
• When Alarm Priorities are turned OFF there will be no audio feedback for alarms at
the Panorama Central Station.
3. Select the Print on Alarm button to determine if the data for the alarm should be
printed when the alarm occurs.
• Select the ON option to automatically print the alarmed event when the alarm
condition occurs.
• Select the OFF option to suspend printing the alarmed event when the alarm condition
occurs.
4. Select the Save To Event button to determine if the alarm data is saved in the Event
database when the alarm condition occurs.
• Select the ON option to automatically save the alarm event when the alarm condition
occurs.
• Select the OFF option and the alarm event will not be saved to the Events database
when the alarm condition occurs.
5. Select the Page On Alarm button to determine if a page should be sent when the
alarm condition occurs.
• Select the ON option to automatically send a page when the alarm condition occurs.
• Select the OFF option and a page will not be sent when the alarm condition occurs.
9.6.4.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
System Alarm Options
Select the System Alarm Options sidebar button to display the System Alarm
Options tab. For additional information regarding System Alarm Options, refer to the
‘‘System Alarms Tab’’ on page 9-14.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 27
System Alarms Tab
System Setup Functions
System Alarm Limits
Select the System Alarm Limits sidebar button to display the System Alarm Limits
tab. For additional information regarding System Alarm Limits, refer to the ‘‘System Alarms
Tab’’ on page 9-14.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.6.4.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
System Alarm Responses tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
The Page On Alarm button
is not displayed.
The central station where the
patient tile resides does not
have the Paging option
enabled.
If necessary, enable the Paging
option.
The System Alarm Limits
and System Alarm
Responses tab is not
available at the ViewStation or
WorkStation.
System alarm limits and
responses must be changed at
the central station.
Change the alarm limits and
responses from the central
station.
* Messages are shown in all bold text.
9 - 28
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.7
Passwords Tab
Passwords Tab
The system Passwords tab (shown in FIGURE 9-21 through FIGURE 9-24) establishes and
modifies the passwords used to access the System Setup and Patient Alarm Setup
areas of the Panorama Central Station. This tab is available at the ViewStation and the
WorkStation, and it functions in the same manner as it does at the host central station but
does not contain an Alarm button. Passwords tab changes made at the central station or
remote workstations are independent of each other.
9.7.1
Accessing the Installation Setup Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the Passwords tab. The Passwords tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-21 Passwords Tab - Paging Option Disabled (Central Station)
FIGURE 9-22 Passwords Tab - Paging Option Enabled (Central Station)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 29
Passwords Tab
System Setup Functions
FIGURE 9-23 Passwords Tab (ViewStation)
FIGURE 9-24 Passwords Tab (WorkStation)
9.7.2
Modifying a Default Password
The Passwords tab changes the password that provides access to the Patient Alarms and
System Alarms tab.
1. Select either the Alarm, System, or Paging (displayed if Paging option is enabled)
button. The Old Password text box is displayed.
NOTE:
The Alarm button is not available at the ViewStation.
2. Select the Old Password text box. The keyboard dialog box is displayed.
3. Using the keyboard dialog box, enter the alarm password that was previously
established in ‘‘Recording Password Changes’’ on page 9-31. The Alarm and System
password is case sensitive and can be a maximum of 15 characters.
4. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information
about using the keyboard dialog box, refer to ‘‘Keyboard Dialog Box’’ on page 2-18.
9 - 30
NOTE:
The factory default Alarm password is ‘alarm’. The factory
default System password is ‘system’. The factory default
Paging password is ‘paging’.
NOTE:
Passwords are case sensitive.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Passwords Tab
5. Select the New Password text box. The keyboard dialog box is displayed.
6. Using the keyboard dialog box, enter the new alarm password. The Alarm password is
case sensitive and can be a maximum of 15 characters.
7. Accept the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information about
using the keyboard dialog box, refer to ‘‘Keyboard Dialog Box’’ on page 2-18.
8. Select the Confirm text box. The keyboard dialog box is displayed.
9. Using the keyboard dialog box, re-enter the new alarm password. Accept or reject the
text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information about using the
keyboard dialog box, refer to ‘‘Keyboard Dialog Box’’ on page 2-18.
The password is changed and the Passwords tab is returned to its original state.
Recording Password Changes
CAUTION:
If passwords are changed from the factory defaults, users
MUST ensure that they document new passwords in the
space provided in this manual. For additional information
refer to ‘‘Passwords Tab’’ on page 9-29. Failure to recall
user defined passwords will render the system UNUSABLE.
NOTE:
Restrict access among hospital staff to the System
password.
Record password changes in the following table:
9.7.3
PROVIDES ACCESS TO
DEFAULT PASSWORD
Patient Alarms
alarm
System Menus
system
Paging Tab (optional)
paging
USER DEFINED
PASSWORD
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.7.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Passwords tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Incorrect password.
Please try again.
The wrong password was
entered in the text box.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter the
correct password in the dialog
box.
The password was entered in
the wrong case.
Re-enter the password turning
on/off the keyboard dialog
Caps Lock key.
An illegal character (anything
other than A-Z and/or 0-9)
was entered in the keyboard
dialog box.
Try re-entering a password that
contains only the letters A-Z
and/or numbers 0-9.
Illegal Password. Please
choose a new password.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 31
Passwords Tab
System Setup Functions
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Illegal Password.
Password should be 1 to
15 characters.
When entering a New
Password in the keyboard
dialog, the Enter key was
selected in the keyboard
dialog before any characters/
numbers were selected.
Enter a password that contains
at least 1 character before
selecting the Enter key.
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
central station display and
cannot be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
The Alarm button is not
displayed in the Passwords
tab.
System Alarm tab is being
viewed from a ViewStation.
If password maintenance is
necessary for this function,
access the Alarm button from
a host central station.
The Paging button is not
displayed in the Passwords
tab.
The central station where the
patient tile resides does not
have the Paging option
enabled.
If necessary, enable the Paging
option.
*
9 - 32
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.8
Equipment Setup Tab
Equipment Setup Tab
The Equipment Setup tab (shown in FIGURE 9-25 and FIGURE 9-26) adds, deletes, and
modifies the equipment used with the Panorama Central Station. The Equipment Setup
tab includes an equipment list that shows the types of equipment that may communicate with
the central station. This tab is not available at the ViewStation or the WorkStation. Equipment
maintenance can only be performed at the host central station.
9.8.1
Accessing the Equipment Setup Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the Equipment Setup tab. The Equipment Setup tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-25 Equipment Setup Tab
FIGURE 9-26 Equipment Setup Tab (with Device Setup Area shown)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 33
Equipment Setup Tab
System Setup Functions
• The first column of the equipment list box displays the device Label for the equipment
listed.
• The second column of the equipment list box displays the Type of device listed.
• The third column of the equipment list box displays the Tile number associated with the
equipment.
• The fourth column of the equipment list box displays the Device ID number for the
equipment listed.
Device ID Format
9.8.2
DEVICE
STARTING
CHARACTER
# OF CHARACTERS
ENDING
CHARACTER
Telepack WMTS
M or m
6
X or x
Passport 2
E or e
6
X or x
Passport 2 WMTS
U or u
6
X or x
Spectrum
S or s
6
X or x
Spectrum WMTS
B or b
6
X or x
Spectrum OR
D or d
6
X or x
Entering New Equipment
This section outlines adding new equipment to the Panorama Central Station equipment list.
1. Select the New button below the equipment list box. The Device Setup Area (shown in
FIGURE 9-26) is displayed.
2. Select the Tile button. In the Tile Number dialog box, select the tile number for the
new monitoring device.
• The tile numbers available for a single 8 tile display include NONE (when no tile
number is assigned to the equipment) and 0 to 7.
• The tile numbers available for a single 12 tile display include NONE (when no tile
number is assigned to the equipment) and 0 to 11.
• The tile numbers available for a dual 16 tile display include NONE (when no tile
number is assigned to the equipment) and 0 to 15.
Select the Done button to accept the selection.
Select the Cancel button to discard the selection.
The tile number is displayed in the Tile field.
NOTE:
The Tile button will be disabled and display a dash (-) if the
type of equipment being entered is a Panorama Server or a
Panorama Central Station.
3. Select the Type button. In the Device Type dialog box, select the device type of the
new monitoring device.
The equipment list supports the following types of equipment: Telepack, Telepack WMTS,
Passport 2, Passport 2 WMTS, Spectrum, Spectrum WMTS, and Spectrum OR.
Select the Done button to accept the selection or the Cancel button to discard the
selection.
The device type is displayed in the Type field.
9 - 34
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Equipment Setup Tab
4. Select the Label text box to enter a label for the new equipment.
5. Use the keyboard dialog box to enter the device label for the new equipment. A device
label must be entered in the equipment list and can only use alphanumeric characters
and underscores ( _ ). There is a maximum of 15 characters.
6. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information
about using the keyboard dialog box, refer to ‘‘Keyboard Dialog Box’’ on page 2-18.
NOTE:
All Device Labels in the Equipment List must be unique and
cannot be duplicated.
7. Select the Device ID text box.
8. Use the keyboard dialog box to enter the device identification number for the new
equipment. A Device ID must be entered in the equipment list for Passport 2, Telepack,
Spectrum™, and Panorama Telemetry Server devices (maximum of 8 characters). For
additional information about Device ID formats, refer to ‘‘Device ID Format’’ on page
9-34.
NOTE:
All Device IDs in the equipment list must be unique and
cannot be duplicated.
NOTE:
The Device ID field will display a dash (-) and be disabled if
the type of equipment being entered is a Panorama Central
Station.
9. Accept or reject the text entered in the keyboard dialog box. For additional information
about using the keyboard dialog box, refer to ‘‘Keyboard Dialog Box’’ on page 2-18.
10. Select the Done button. The equipment is added to the equipment list.
9.8.3
Modifying Equipment Included in the Equipment List
This section outlines modifying equipment added to the Panorama Central Station Equipment
List.
1. From the equipment list box, select the monitoring device to be modified. A monitoring
device has been selected when it changes from white text on a black background to
black text on a white background.
2. Select the Edit button under the Equipment list box. The Device Setup Area is displayed.
3. Select the area in the Device Setup to be modified. For additional information about
modifying the Device Setup area, refer to ‘‘Entering New Equipment’’ on page 9-34.
NOTE:
The Label text field is the only field that can be modified for
a monitoring device currently monitoring a patient.
4. Select the Done button. The equipment is added to the Equipment List.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 35
Equipment Setup Tab
9.8.4
System Setup Functions
Deleting Equipment in the Equipment List
This section outlines deleting equipment from the Panorama Central Station Equipment List.
1. From the equipment list box, select the monitoring device to be modified. A monitoring
device has been selected when it changes from white text on a black background to
black text on a white background.
2. Select the Delete button below the equipment list box.
NOTE:
Only equipment not actively monitoring a patient can be
deleted.
3. The message Are you sure you want to delete this device? message box is
displayed.
• Select the Yes button to delete the selected device and close the dialog box.
• Select the No button to keep the selected device and close the dialog box.
NOTE:
9.8.5
If an associated patient tile has been assigned at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation, or both, the connection
between the patient tiles will continue to exist, even if the
equipment is deleted at the host central station.
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
WMTS Device
This sidebar button should not be used without assistance from a Service Representative.
WMTS All
This sidebar button should not be used without assistance from a Service Representative.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.8.6
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Equipment tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Equipment list is full
This message appears when
the New button is pressed and
the equipment list contains the
maximum number of
equipment list entries.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Delete a device
from the equipment list.
Illegal Device Tile. Device
Tile must be defined.
Please try again.
This message appears when
the Done button is pressed in
the Equipment Setup tab
before a tile number is
selected.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a tile
number in the Tile Number
dialog box.
*
9 - 36
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Equipment Setup Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Tile button is disabled and
a dash (-) is shown in the Tile
field.
The type of equipment being
entered in the equipment list is
either a Panorama Server or a
Panorama
A tile number cannot be
entered for the Panorama
Server or the Panorama
equipment types.
Invalid Device Type
This message appears when
the Done button is pressed in
the Equipment Setup tab
before a device type is
selected.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a device
type in the Device Type dialog
box.
Illegal Device Label.
Device Label must be
defined. Please try again.
This message appears when
the Done button is pressed in
the Equipment Setup tab
before a device label is
selected.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a device
label in the Device Label
dialog box.
Device Label already
exists! Please enter a
new one
This message appears when a
duplicate device label is
entered in the Device Label
field.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter a new
device label in the Device
Label field.
Invalid characters
entered. Please enter a
new label.
This message appears when
invalid characters have been
entered in the Device Label.
The device label can only
contain alphanumeric
characters and underscores
(_).
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter a valid
Device label.
Illegal Device ID. Please
enter a new one.
This message appears when
the Done button is pressed in
the Equipment Setup tab
before a device ID is selected.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter a Device
ID in the Device ID dialog box.
Device ID must be 8
characters in length.
This message appears when
the Device ID that was entered
is less than 8 characters in
length. Please refer to the
Device ID setup rules in the
Setting up New Equipment
section.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter a Device
ID in the Device ID dialog box.
Device ID must start with
the proper device prefix
This message appears when
the incorrect device prefix is
entered in the Device ID box.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter the
correct Device ID prefix.
Suffix of Device ID last
character must be ‘x’ or
‘X’.
This message appears when
the incorrect device suffix is
entered in the Device ID box.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter the
correct Device ID suffix.
This Device ID already
exists!
This message appears when a
duplicate Device ID is entered
in the Device ID field.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Enter a new
Device ID in the Device ID
field.
You have reached the
maximum number of
channel licenses
available.
This message appears when all
available channels on the
Panorama Central Station are
occupied.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Delete a piece
of equipment from an existing
channel if it is no longer in use.
The system administrator can
also purchase additional
channel licenses.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 37
Equipment Setup Tab
System Setup Functions
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
This version of software
does not support more
than 16 monitored
patients.
This message appears when
the maximum number of
patients is being monitored on
the Panorama Central Station.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Discharge a
patient if the patient is no
longer being monitored.
System Setup menu button is
disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
Cannot delete a device
connected to a patient
The device cannot be deleted
because it is currently
connected to a patient.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Disconnect the
patient from the selected
device before attempting to
delete it.
The Tile button, Type button
and Device ID field are
disabled.
The selected equipment cannot
be edited because it is
currently monitoring a patient.
This equipment cannot be
edited until a patient discharge
is performed.
Unable to perform
operation on tile: Central
to Central Transfer In in
progress.
Equipment Setup tab Delete
button was selected for
equipment that was not
actively monitoring a patient,
while a Central to Central
Transfer In is in progress to that
same device.
Wait for the Central to Central
Transfer to complete, then try
again.
*
9 - 38
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.9
More Tab
More Tab
The More tab (shown in FIGURE 9-27) is used for navigational purposes and when selected,
will display another set of System Setup tabs at the Panorama Central Station. This tab is
not available at the ViewStation or the WorkStation.
9.9.1
Accessing Additional (More) Tabs
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
More Tab
FIGURE 9-27 More Tab
FIGURE 9-28 Tabs available when More tab is selected
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 39
Previous Tab
9.10
System Setup Functions
Previous Tab
The Previous tab (shown in FIGURE 9-29) is used for navigational purposes and when
selected, will display another set of system setup tabs at the Panorama Central Station. This
tab is not available at the ViewStation or the WorkStation.
9.10.1
Accessing Previous Tabs
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup
tabs is displayed.
2. Select the Installation Setup tab. The Installation Setup tab is displayed.
3. Enter the correct system password.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Previous tab to display the first set of tabs (shown in FIGURE 9-30)
associated with the System Setup tab.
Previous Tab
FIGURE 9-29 Previous Tab
FIGURE 9-30 Tabs available when Previous tab is selected
9 - 40
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.11
Date/Time Tab
Date/Time Tab
The Date/Time tab (shown in FIGURE 9-31) sets the system date and time and configures
the default date and time formats at the Panorama Central Station. This tab is available at the
ViewStation and the WorkStation, and it functions in the same manner as it does at the host
central station. Date/Time tab changes made at the central station or remote workstations are
independent of each other.
NOTE:
9.11.1
The host central station, ViewStation, and WorkStation
system times are independent of each other.
Accessing the Date/Time Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The Password tab is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Date/Time tab. The Date/Time tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-31 Date/Time Tab (Central Station)
FIGURE 9-32 Date/Time Tab (WorkStation)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 41
Date/Time Tab
System Setup Functions
FIGURE 9-33 Date/Time Tab (ViewStation)
9.11.2
Set Date/Time
The settings configured in the Date/Time tab are the settings that will be used for all date/
time related functions in the Panorama Central Station.
NOTE:
When generating the Full Disclosure Report, Event List
Report, etc., the Data Time indicated below the report title is
based on the system time the data was collected at the host
central station, not the system time displayed at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
Setting a Date in the Date/Time Tab
1. From the Date/Time tab, select the Day field. The keypad dialog box is displayed.
The range available is shown on the bottom of the dialog box.
2. Using the keypad dialog box, enter the number that represents the current day of the
month.
• Select the Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the text box
• Select CE button to delete a single number from the text box
• Select Cancel button to discard changes and close the dialog box
• Select OK button to accept changes. The Day field will remain unchanged until the
OK button is pressed.
3. Select the Month field. The keypad dialog box is displayed. The range available is 1 to
12.
4. Using the keypad dialog box, enter the number that represents the current month.
• Select the Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the text box
• Select CE button to delete a single number from the text box
• Select Cancel button to discard changes and close the dialog box
• Select OK button to accept changes. The Month field will remain unchanged until the
OK button is pressed.
5. Select the Year field. The keypad dialog box is displayed. The range available is 1970
to 2037.
6. Using the keyboard dialog box, enter the number that represents the current year.
• Select the Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the text box
• Select CE button to delete a single number from the text box
9 - 42
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Date/Time Tab
• Select Cancel button to discard changes and close the dialog box
• Select OK button to accept changes. The Month field will remain unchanged until the
OK button is pressed.
7. Select the Date button to select the desired date format.
The date formats available include DD-MM-YYYY, MM-DD-YYYY and YYYY-MM-DD
(default).
8. Select the Done button to change the system date format.
The Are you sure you want to change the date/time settings? confirmation
box is displayed.
9. Select the Yes or No button in the dialog box.
• Select the Yes button to change the system date format
• Select the No button to discard the changes that were made to the system date format
Setting a Time in the Date/Time Tab
1. From the Date/Time tab, select the Hour field.The keypad dialog box is displayed.
The range available is 1 to 12.
2. Using the keypad dialog box, enter the number for the current hour.
• Select the Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the text box
• Select CE button to delete a single number from the text box
• Select Cancel button to discard changes and close the dialog box
• Select OK button to accept changes. The Hour field will remain unchanged until the
OK button is pressed.
3. Select the Min. field. The keypad dialog box is displayed. The range available is 0 to
59.
4. Using the keypad dialog box, enter the number that represents the current minute.
• Select the Clear button to delete all of the numbers in the text box
• Select CE button to delete a single number from the text box
• Select Cancel button to discard changes and close the dialog box
• Select OK button to accept changes. The Min. field will remain unchanged until the
OK button is pressed.
5. Select the AM/PM toggle button to select either AM or PM.
NOTE:
The AM/PM button is only available if the current time
format is in 12 hour mode.
6. Select the Time button to select the desired time format.
The time formats available include HH:MM (12H), HH:MM:SS (12H) (default), HH:MM
(24H) and HH:MM:SS (24H).
NOTE:
Whenever the central station is set to a language other than
English, it will be in the 24-hour time format.
7. Select the Done button to change the system time format.
The Are you sure you want to change the date/time settings? confirmation
box is displayed.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 43
Date/Time Tab
System Setup Functions
8. Select the Yes or No button in the dialog box.
• Select the Yes button to change the system time format
• Select the No button to discard the changes that were made to the system time format
9.11.3
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.11.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Date/Time tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is opened.
*
9 - 44
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.12
Print Setup Tab (System)
Print Setup Tab (System)
The Print Setup tab (shown in FIGURE 9-34 and FIGURE 9-35) defines the printer(s) that
will be used to print standard (defined as reports that do not contain waveforms) and strip
reports (such as the All Strips, Event Zoom-In, and Full Disclosure Zoom-In Reports). This tab is
available at the ViewStation and WorkStation, and it functions in the same manner as the
host central station. The central station and each remote workstation is capable of
communicating with two network printers simultaneously.
Print Setup tab changes made at the central station or remote workstations are
independent of each other.
NOTE:
The network printer(s) must be properly configured to
communicate with the central station.
For information regarding individual patient print setup configuration, refer to “Print Setup
Tab (Patient)” on page 5-55.
For information regarding printer configuration, refer to the Panorama Printer Configuration
Guide (P/N 0070-00-0561).
9.12.1
Accessing the Print Setup Tab (Central Station)
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button.
2. Select the Print Setup tab. The Print Setup tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-34 System Print Setup Tab (Central Station)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 45
Print Setup Tab (System)
9.12.2
System Setup Functions
Accessing the Print Setup Tab (ViewStation and WorkStation)
• Follow steps from the "Accessing the Print Setup Tab (Central Station)" section on
page 9-45.
FIGURE 9-35 System Print Setup Tab (ViewStation and WorkStation)
9.12.3
Setting the System Default Print Setup
This section outlines using the Print Setup tab to establish to which default printer print
requests will be directed. To set system default print requests:
1. Select a printer’s check box button to enable/disable the printing of reports to the
selected printer. The options available include Laser jet 1 and Laser jet 2. Print setup
settings are changed instantly.
• A check mark in a printer’s check box indicates that if the printer was properly
configured with the Panorama Central Station, it will be capable of printing Panorama
reports.
• An empty check box button indicates the printer is not selected and will not print
Panorama reports.
2. Select the printer’s check box button to enable/disable the printing of strips. The print
setup settings are changed instantly.
• A check mark in a printer’s check box button indicates that if the printer was properly
configured with the Panorama Central Station, it will be capable of printing waveform
strips.
• An empty check box indicates the printer is not selected and will not print waveform
strips.
9.12.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
System Print Setup tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display where it is open.
*
9 - 46
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.13
Unit Priorities Tab
Unit Priorities Tab
The Unit Priorities tab (shown in FIGURE 9-36) determines the initial order in which
parameters in the Main Screen, Bedside tab, Trends tab, and Events (List) are displayed.
This tab is not available at the ViewStation or the WorkStation. Unit priority settings are
transferred from the host central station to the ViewStation and the WorkStation when the
patient tile is assigned.
9.13.1
Accessing the Unit Priorities Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup tabs
is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Unit Priorities tab. The Unit Priorities tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-36 Unit Priorities Tab
9.13.2
Setting a Default Order in the Unit Priorities Tab
This section outlines how to select the parameter order in the Unit Priorities tab.
Selecting the Unit Priority Order
1. Select a Unit Priority number button.
The parameter with the number 1 priority will always be Heart Rate.
2. Select a parameter tile from the Parameter list.
A parameter has been selected when it changes from white text with a black
background to black text with a white background.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Parameters show their current unit priority position in
parentheses next to their name in the Parameter list.
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 47
Unit Priorities Tab
System Setup Functions
3. Choose the Select button. The selected parameter is assigned its new unit priority
position and will be shown in the box on the right of the selected unit priority.
4. Repeat steps 2-3 until the parameters are in the desired order.
5. Select the Done button. All priority changes in the Unit Priorities tab have now been
confirmed. The changes that were made will only be applied to newly admitted patients
and will not affect patients currently being monitored.
9.13.2.1
Setting the Waveform System Defaults
Select the Wave Defaults sidebar button to select the system default patient tile waveforms.
1. Select the Wave Defaults sidebar button in the Unit Priorities tab. The Wave
Defaults dialog box (shown in FIGURE 9-37) is displayed.
FIGURE 9-37 Wave Defaults Dialog Box
1. Select the Waveform 1 button until the desired ECG waveform is displayed.
The settings available for the ECG waveform include ECG I through V6. The factory
default setting is ECG II.
2. Select the Waveform 2 button until the desired ECG waveform is displayed.
The settings available for the ECG waveform include ECG I through V6, IBP1-IBP4, Resp,
Pleth, CO2, O2, Agent, and OFF. The factory default setting is OFF.
3. Accept or reject the selections made in the dialog box.
• Select the Done button to accept the selections.
• Select the Cancel button to discard the selections, close the dialog box and return to
the Unit Priorities tab.
9.13.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Wave Defaults
This sidebar button was previously described on page 9-48.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9 - 48
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.13.4
Unit Priorities Tab
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur Unit Priorities
tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Please select a parameter
button before selecting
from the list
This message appears when
the Select button is pressed
before a Unit Priority button is
selected.
Select the OK button to close
the dialog box. Select a Unit
Priority button.
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on another
Panorama display and cannot
be opened on multiple
displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on where it is open.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 49
Unit Choices Tab
9.14
System Setup Functions
Unit Choices Tab
The Unit Choices tab (shown in FIGURE 9-38, FIGURE 9-39, and FIGURE 9-40) determines
the initial units of measure, configures the default pacemaker settings, and selects which
patient demographic information is displayed. This tab is available at the ViewStation and
WorkStation, and it functions in the same manner as it does at the host central station but
contains different buttons. Unit Choices tab changes made at the central station or remote
workstations are independent of each other.
9.14.1
Accessing the Unit Choices Tab (Central Station)
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup tabs
is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Unit Choices tab. The Unit Choices tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-38 Unit Choices Tab - Paging Option Disabled (Central Station)
FIGURE 9-39 Unit Choices Tab - Paging Option Enabled (Central Station)
9.14.2
Accessing the Unit Choices Tab (ViewStation and WorkStation)
1. Follow steps 1-4 from the "Accessing the Unit Priorities Tab" section.
2. Select the Unit Choices tab. The Unit Choices tab is displayed.
9 - 50
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Unit Choices Tab
FIGURE 9-40 Unit Choices Tab (ViewStation and WorkStation)
9.14.2.1
Setting the Unit Choices (Central Station)
This section outlines selecting system defaults for pacemaker settings, order of demographic
data and units of measurement.
1. Select the Discharge at Bedside button to set the system default for allowing patient
discharge from the central station.
Discharge at Bedside options include ON and OFF. The factory default setting is OFF.
• The ON option indicates that Discharge at Bedside is enabled.
• The OFF option indicates that Discharge at Bedside is disabled.
NOTE:
The Discharge at Bedside button only affects bedside
monitors. This button setting has no affect when a Telepack
device is in use.
NOTE:
Changing the Discharge at Bedside option will take affect
the next time the Discharge tab is entered.
2. Select the Pacer Enhancement button to set the system default setting for Pacer
Enhancement. Pacer enhancement will visually mark pacemaker-induced ECG
complexes with a colored vertical spike.
The Pacer Enhancement settings for a specific patient can be changed in the Pacer
Settings dialog box in the Demographics tab. Pacer Enhancement options include
ON and OFF. The factory default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that Pacer Enhancement is enabled.
• The OFF option indicates that Pacer Enhancement is disabled.
NOTE:
Changing the Pacer Enhancement option will affect all
newly admitted patients and will have no affect on patients
currently being monitored.
NOTE:
The Pacer Enhancement option is not available at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 51
Unit Choices Tab
System Setup Functions
3. Select the Pacer Reject button to select the system default pacer reject period. Pacer
Reject adjusts the time period at which pacemaker-induced ECG complexes are filtered
for ECG sampling processes.
Pacer Reject options include 0 to 80 milliseconds (ms) in 20-second increments. The
factory default setting is 40 ms.
NOTE:
Changing the Pacer Reject option will affect all newly
admitted patients and will have no affect on patients
currently being monitored.
NOTE:
The Pacer Reject option is not available at the ViewStation
or the WorkStation.
4. Select the Paging Demographics button to define which demographic information is
sent to the paging system when a page is requested. Paging Demographics options
include Bed, Bed + Last Name, and Bed + ID. The factory default setting is Bed.
Refer to the following tables for formatting examples:
9 - 52
OPTION
ALARM TYPE
FORMAT EXAMPLES
Bed
Heart Rate
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 Low Heart Rate Alarm
Bed
Arrhythmia
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 Asystole
Bed
Not HR or
arrhythmia alarm
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 High Temperature 1
Bed
ST alarm
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 ST Single Alarm
OPTION
ALARM TYPE
FORMAT EXAMPLES
Bed + Last
Name
Heart Rate
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 Name:Patient Last Name
Low Heart Rate Alarm
Bed + Last
Name
Arrhythmia
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 Name:Patient Last Name
Asystole
Bed + Last
Name
Not HR or
arrhythmia alarm
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 Name:Patient Last Name
High Temperature 1
Bed + Last
Name
ST alarm
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 Name:Patient Last Name ST
Single Alarm
OPTION
ALARM TYPE
FORMAT EXAMPLES
Bed + ID
Heart Rate
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 ID:Patient ID Low Heart Rate
Alarm
Bed + ID
Arrhythmia
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 ID:Patient ID Asystole
Bed + ID
Not HR or
arrhythmia alarm
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 ID:Patient ID High
Temperature 1
Bed + ID
ST alarm
central name:XXXBed:ICU10 ID:Patient ID ST Single
Alarm
NOTE:
The amount of data that is displayed in the pager display
window may differ slightly due to the type of pager being
used.
NOTE:
Changing the Paging Demographics option will take effect
immediately.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Unit Choices Tab
NOTE:
This option will only be displayed if the Paging option is
enabled at the central station.
5. Select the Paging Password Protection button to enable and/or disable password
protection for the Paging tab. Paging Protection options include ON and OFF. The
factory default setting is ON.
• The ON option indicates that Paging Password Protection is enabled.
• The OFF option indicates that Paging Password Protection is disabled.
NOTE:
This option will only be displayed if the Paging option is
enabled at the central station.
6. Select the Demographic Line Position 1 button to select the system default
demographic data to be shown in the first demographic line position of the Patient
Status line in the Main Screen of the Panorama Central Station.
Demographic Line Position 1 options include Last Name, First Name, Bed, ID, and
Demo Off. The factory default setting is Last Name.
NOTE:
Changing the Demographic Line Position 1 option will affect
all patients with the next update of the Patient Status line in
the patient tile.
7. Select the Demographic Line Position 2 button to select the system default
demographic data to be shown in the second demographic line position of the Patient
Status line in the Main Screen of the Panorama Central Station.
Demographic Line Position 2 options include First Name, Bed, ID, Demo Off, and
Last Name. The factory default setting is First Name.
NOTE:
Changing the Demographic Line Position 2 option will affect
all patients with the next update of the Patient Status line in
the patient tile.
8. Select the Demographic Line Position 3 button to select the system default
demographic data to be shown in the third demographic line position of the Patient
Status line in the Main Screen of the Panorama Central Station.
Demographic Line Position 3 options include Bed, ID, Demo Off, Last Name, and
First Name. The factory default setting is Bed.
NOTE:
Changing the Demographic Line Position 3 option will affect
all patients with the next update of the Patient Status line in
the patient tile.
9. Select the Demographic Line Position 4 button to select the system default
demographic data to be shown in the fourth demographic line position of the Patient
Status line in the Main Screen of the Panorama Central Station.
Demographic Line Position 4 options include ID, Demo Off, Last Name, First
Name, and Bed. The factory default setting is ID.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Changing the Demographic Line Position 4 option will affect
all patients with the next update of the Patient Status line in
the patient tile.
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 53
Unit Choices Tab
System Setup Functions
10. Select the Disable ECG button (available on version 8.7.1 and above) to select the
system default for displaying the Disable ECG sidebar button on the unit Display Tab. If
ON is selected, the Disable ECG sidebar button is displayed on the unit Display tab if
a Telepack with SpO2 module is connected. If OFF is selected, the Disable ECG
sidebar button is not displayed, and the ECG waveforms will be re-enabled. The factory
default setting is OFF.
11. Select the Height Units button to select the system default unit of measurement to be
used for the height variable in the Panorama Central Station. Height Unit options
include cm (centimeters) and in (inches). The factory default setting is cm.
NOTE:
Changing the Height Units option will affect new Telepack
patients upon entering the Demographics tab.
NOTE:
The Height Units option is not available at the ViewStation
or the WorkStation.
12. Select the Weight Units button to select the system default unit of measurement to be
used for measuring weight at the Panorama Central Station. Weight Unit options include
lbs (pounds) and kg (kilograms). The factory default setting is lbs.
NOTE:
Changing the Weight Units option will affect new Telepack
patients upon entering the Demographics tab.
NOTE:
The Weight Units option is not available at the ViewStation
or the WorkStation.
13. Select the Temperature Units button to select the system default temperature unit to
be used for measuring temperature at the Panorama Central Station. Temperature unit
options include F (Fahrenheit) and C (Celsius). The factory default setting is F.
NOTE:
Changing the Temperature Units option will affect all new
patients upon entering the System Alarm Limits tab.
NOTE:
The Temperature Units option is not available at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
14. Select the CO2 button to select the system default CO2 unit to be used for measuring
CO2 at the Panorama Central Station. CO2 unit options include %, kPa, and mmHg. The
factory default setting is %.
NOTE:
Changing the CO2 Units option will affect all new patients
upon entering either the System Alarm Limits or System
Wave Gain tabs.
NOTE:
The CO2 Units option is not available at the ViewStation or
the WorkStation.
15. Select the Trend Display button to configure the interval at which a patient’s trend
data will be displayed in the Trends tab.
Interval periods include 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1
hour, and 2 hours. The factory default setting is 1 minute.
9 - 54
NOTE:
Trend data is automatically stored in one minute intervals.
The Trend Display interval selected does not affect how
trend information is stored in the database, just how it is
displayed.
NOTE:
The Trend Display option is not available at the ViewStation
or the WorkStation.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.14.2.2
Unit Choices Tab
Setting the Unit Choices (ViewStation and WorkStation)
• Follow steps 6 - 9 from the "Setting the Unit Choices (Central Station)" section on page
9-51.
9.14.2.3
Arrhythmia Setup (Telepack)
Select the Arrhythmia sidebar button to:
• Enable or disable arrhythmia analysis for a Telepack device
NOTE:
If using a Passport 2® or a Spectrum™, arrhythmia analysis
must be enabled or disabled at the beside monitor.
• Adjust the default V-Tach Rate, Asystole Delay, V-Tach Thresholds, and ECG Noise
Delay for a Telepack device
NOTE:
The Arrhythmia sidebar button is not available at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
NOTE:
When using a bedside device, the arrhythmia settings are
taken from the bedside monitor upon admission.
1. Select the All Arrhythmia On/Off check box button in the Arrhythmia Menu dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 9-41) to enable or disable arrhythmia analysis for a Telepack device.
FIGURE 9-41 Arrhythmia Menu Dialog Box
• A checkmark in the All Arrhythmia On/Off box indicates that arrhythmia analysis is
enabled.
• An empty box indicates that arrhythmia analysis is disabled.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Arrhythmia analysis can be enabled for Telepack devices if
an Arrhythmia license is available. When arrhythmia
analysis is enabled, a license is automatically assigned to a
patient.
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 55
Unit Choices Tab
System Setup Functions
2. Use the dial control to change the system default V-Tach Rate. The range available is
100-180 bpm, in 5 bpm increments. The factory default setting is 120 bpm.
3. Select the Asystole Delay button to change the system default asystole delay time for
Arrhythmia processing. The range available is 3-10 seconds. The factory default setting
is 4 seconds.
4. Select the V-Tach Threshold button to change the system default V-Tach threshold
settings. The range available is 3-15 beats. The factory default setting is 3 beats.
5. Select the ECG Noise Delay button to change the system default noise delay setting.
The range available is 3-30 seconds. The factory default setting is 6 seconds.
NOTE:
The ECG Noise Delay button settings only affect Telepack
monitoring devices.
NOTE:
When using a bedside device, these settings are taken from
the bedside upon admission.
6. Accept or reject the selections made in the dialog box.
• Select the Done button to accept the selections.
• Select the Cancel button to discard the selections, close the dialog box and return to the
Unit Choices tab.
9.14.2.4
Settings (Telepack)
Select the Settings sidebar button to establish the default ECG monitoring filter that will be
used by the Telepack, and to select the ECG leads for ST monitoring.
NOTE:
The Settings sidebar button is not available at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
• The Monitor mode for ECG filtering establishes the frequency response range for non-ST
ECG monitoring.
• The ST mode for ECG filtering establishes the frequency response range for ST diagnostic
monitoring.
NOTE:
The Telepack can only have one type of ECG filtering
enabled at any given time (Monitor mode or ST mode).
To configure the default ECG monitoring filter:
1. Select the Settings sidebar button in the Unit Choices tab. The Settings dialog box
(shown in FIGURE 9-42) is displayed.
FIGURE 9-42 Settings Dialog Box
9 - 56
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Unit Choices Tab
2. Select the ST check box to enable or disable ST analysis for the selected patient.
• A checkmark in the ST box indicates that ST analysis is enabled.
• An empty box indicates that ST analysis is disabled.
• When the ST check box is empty, the Monitor filter is automatically enabled.
NOTE:
If ST licenses are available, an ST license is automatically
assigned to the patient when ST is enabled.
NOTE:
When using a 5-wire lead set or a View 12™ card, ST is
performed on the leads available.
When using a 3-wire lead set, ST is performed on the lead
being viewed.
3. Select the Monitor or ST filter mode.
NOTE:
One filter box must always be populated. When a filter
mode is selected, the other mode is automatically disabled.
• A checkmark in the Monitor filter box indicates that the Monitor filter is enabled and
ST analysis is disabled.
• A checkmark in the ST filter box indicates that the ST analysis is enabled and the
Monitor filter is disabled.
4. Accept or reject the selections made in the dialog box.
• Select the Done button to accept the selections.
• Select the Cancel button to discard the selections, close the dialog box and return to
the Unit Choices tab.
9.14.3
Configuring Default Report Waveform Parameters
Select the Strip Setup sidebar button (shown in FIGURE 9-38) to select the default
waveform parameters that will print in the All Strips, Event Zoom-In, and Full Disclosure
Zoom-In reports.
NOTE:
The Strip Setup sidebar button is not available at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation.
To select the default waveform parameters:
1. From the Unit Choices tab, select the Strip Setup sidebar button.
FIGURE 9-43 Strip Setup View of the Unit Choices Tab
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 57
Unit Choices Tab
System Setup Functions
2. Select the waveform check box button to enable/disable the printing of waveforms in
strip reports. The print setup settings are changed instantaneously.
• A check mark in a waveform’s check box button indicates the waveform is selected to
print in reports when that parameter is in use.
• An empty check box button indicates the waveform is not selected and will not print in
reports.
3. To return to the Unit Choices tab, select the Previous sidebar button.
For additional information about customizing the waveform strips printed for a particular
patient, refer to the ‘‘Print Setup Tab (Patient)’’ on page 5-55.
9.14.4
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Strip Setup
This sidebar button was previously described on page 9-57.
Previous
This sidebar button was previously described on page 9-57.
Arrhythmia
This sidebar button was previously described on page 9-55.
Settings (Telepack)
This sidebar button was previously described on page 9-56.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.14.5
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Unit Choices tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on a Panorama
display and cannot be opened
on multiple displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on which it is opened.
The Strip Setup sidebar
button is not displayed.
Unit Choices tab is being
viewed from a ViewStation.
If strip setup is necessary,
access the Strip Setup button
from a central station.
*
9 - 58
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.15
Wave Gain Tab (System)
Wave Gain Tab (System)
The Wave Gain tab (shown in FIGURE 9-44) is used to change the initial wave gain
settings. This tab is not available at the ViewStation or the WorkStation. Wave gain settings
are transferred from the host central station to the ViewStation and the WorkStation when the
patient tile is assigned.
For information regarding individual patient tile wave gain settings, refer to the ‘‘Wave Gain
Tab (Patient)’’ on page 5-52.
NOTE:
9.15.1
The changes made in the Wave Gain tab (System) will apply
to newly admitted patients.
Accessing the Wave Gain Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup tabs
is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Wave Gain tab. The Wave Gain tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-44 Wave Gain Tab (System)
9.15.2
Changing the System Default Wave Gain Settings
This section outlines entering and modifying the system default wave gain settings.
1. Select the ECG mm/mV button until the desired ECG wave gain is displayed.
The settings available for the ECG wave gain include 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 20.0, and 30.0
mm/mV. The factory default setting is 10.0 mm/mV.
2. Select the IBPx mmHg buttons until the desired IBPx wave gains is displayed. There
are four IBP buttons.
The settings available for the IBP wave gains include 0-20, 0-40, 0-80, 60-140, 0-160,
0-225,0-320, and (-10) -10 mmHg. The factory default setting is 0-320 mmHg.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
If the IBPx button(s) have been labeled at the bedside
monitor, the same label(s) will be displayed on the
individual wave gain button(s).
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 59
Wave Gain Tab (System)
System Setup Functions
NOTE:
Changing the ECG wave gain does not affect the arrhythmia
analysis.
3. Select the Resp Gain button until the desired Resp Gain wave gain is displayed.
The settings available for the Resp Gain wave gain include 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. The factory
default setting is 1.
4. Select the CO2 (%, kPa, mmHG) button until the desired CO2 wave gain is
displayed.
• The settings available for the CO2 % wave gain include 5.0, 7.5, and 10.0 %. The
factory default setting is 10.0 %.
• The settings available for the CO2 kPa wave gain include 5.0, 7.5, and 10.0 kPa. The
factory default setting is 10.0 kPa.
• The settings available for the CO2 mmHg wave gain include 40, 60, and 100 mmHg.
The factory default setting is 100 mmHg.
5. Select the O2 % button until the desired O2 wave gain is displayed.
The settings available for the O2 wave gain include 18 - 30, 18 - 60, and 18 - 100 %.
The factory default setting is 18 - 100%.
6. Select the AGENT % button until the desired Agent wave gain is displayed.
The settings available for the agent wave gains include 0 - 1.0, 0 - 2.5, 0 - 5.0, 0-10.0,
0-15.0, and 0-20.0 %. The factory default setting is 0-20.0%.
9.15.3
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9 - 60
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.15.4
Wave Gain Tab (System)
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
System Wave Gain tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on a Panorama
display and cannot be opened
on multiple displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on which it is opened.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 61
Wireless Tab
9.16
System Setup Functions
Wireless Tab
The Wireless tab manages the devices on the Panorama wireless network. It can be used to
retrieve information from a wireless device as well as to program it. The Wireless tab
should only be used when a wireless monitoring device is assigned to the selected patient
tile. The Wireless tab is not available at the ViewStation or the WorkStation. Wireless
device maintenance can only be performed from the host central station.
NOTE:
9.16.1
The layout and functionality of the Wireless tab changes,
based on the type of monitoring equipment attached to the
programming cable.
Accessing the Wireless Tab
1. From the menu bar, select the System Setup button. The first set of System Setup
tabs is displayed.
2. Follow the directions in the "Entering a Password" section on page 9-7.
3. Once the correct password has been entered, the tabs associated with the System
Setup button are displayed.
4. Select the More tab. The next set of System Setup tabs is displayed.
5. Select the Wireless tab. The Wireless tab is displayed.
FIGURE 9-45 Wireless Tab (device unread)
9 - 62
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
9.16.2
Wireless Tab
Entering Wireless Settings (Telepack-2.4)
This section outlines the settings available in the Wireless tab for the Telepack-2.4. The
settings in the Wireless tab are shown by selecting the Read button and configured by
selecting the Program button.
NOTE:
Programming and assigning of the Telepack must be
performed by authorized service personnel only.
The fields shown in these images are described on the following pages.
FIGURE 9-46 Wireless Tab After Telepack-2.4 Connected
Device ID
The Device ID field displays the identification number that was assigned to the connected
wireless device. A Device ID has a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters. Data is shown in
the Device ID field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button is selected. If the read was
not successful the Device ID field will remain blank. To view the connection status of the
wireless device check the message in the Connect field. The Device ID field cannot be edited
and has a factory default setting of blank.
The Device ID for a monitoring device is set up in the Equipment List tab. For additional
information on setting up a Device ID, refer to the ‘‘Equipment Setup Tab’’ on page 9-33.
Telepack IP
The Telepack IP field displays and enables editing of the IP address of the assigned
wireless device. The IP address provides a unique device address of the device on the
Panorama network.
NOTE:
Each Telepack-2.4 device must be configured with a unique
IP address from all other devices on the network.
• Data is shown in the Telepack IP Address field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar
button is pressed and the read is successful. The default value of the Telepack IP is
0.0.0.0. If the read is not successful, an error message will be displayed. To view the
connection status for the wireless device, check the message in the Connect field.
• A Telepack IP Address can be programmed in a connected device by selecting the
Program sidebar button.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 63
Wireless Tab
System Setup Functions
NOTE:
The Telepack IP Address field will not be shown if the device
cannot be recognized or if there is a Read error.
Subnet Mask
The Subnet Mask field displays and enables editing of the Subnet Mask IP address for the
assigned wireless device. It sets the subnet mask of the attached device.
• Data is shown in the Subnet Mask IP Address field when the Wireless tab’s Read
sidebar button is pressed and the read is successful. The default value of the Telepack
IP is 0.0.0.0. If the read is not successful, an error message will be displayed. To view
the connection status of the wireless device, check the message in the Connect field.
• A Subnet Mask IP Address can be programmed in a connected device by selecting the
Program sidebar button.
NOTE:
The Subnet Mask IP Address field will not be shown when
the device cannot be recognized or there is a Read error.
Network Name
The Network Name field displays the name of the network on which the assigned device
resides. It sets the Network Name of the attached device.
• Data is shown in the Network Name field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar
button is pressed and the read is successful. If the read is not successful, an error
message will be displayed. To view the connection status, check the message in the
Connect field.
• A Network Name can be assigned to a connected device by selecting the Program
sidebar button. The Network Name can contain up to 8 characters. The default value
is blank (no characters).
NOTE:
The Network Name field will not be shown when the device
cannot be recognized or there is a Read error.
Encryption Key
The Encryption Key field provides communication security for the connected wireless
device on the network. A valid entry for the encryption key must consist of 26 hexadecimal
characters, which include letters A to F and numbers 0-9.
• Data is shown in the Encryption Key field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar
button is pressed and the read is successful. If the read is not successful, an error
message will be displayed. To view the connection status, check the message in the
Connect field.
• An encryption key can be assigned to a connected device by selecting the Program
sidebar button.
9 - 64
NOTE:
The Encryption Key field will not be shown when the device
cannot be recognized or there is a Read error.
NOTE:
The Encryption Key is not case sensitive.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Wireless Tab
Connect Field
The Connect field displays the status of the connection between the Panorama Central
Station and the wireless device. A connection status is shown in the Connect field when the
Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button is selected. The status in the Connect field cannot be
edited and has a factory default setting of blank.
The messages shown in the Connect field include:
MESSAGE
REASON
Connected to 2.4 Telemetry
The connection with the Telepack-2.4 was
successful.
Not Connected
The connection with the wireless device was not
successful.
Error: Could not receive data
The connection with the wireless device was not
successful. Either there was no response from the
device or the device is not connected.
Software Version
The Software Version field displays the version of software currently in use by the wireless
device. Data is shown in the Software Version field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar
button is selected. The factory default setting is blank. If the read was not successful, an error
message will be displayed and the Software Version field will remain blank. To view the
connection status of the wireless device check the message in the Connect field.
Hardware Version
The Hardware Version field displays the version of hardware in use by the connected
device. Data is shown in the Hardware Version field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar
button is selected and has a factory default setting of blank. If the read was not successful, an
error message will be displayed and the Hardware Version field will remain blank. To view
the connection status of the wireless device check the message in the Connect field.
Security Selection
The Security Selection Toggle Choice Control displays the current security protocol.
Currently, the only available Security Selection is “WEP128”, which sets the security protocol
to 128-bit encryption.
Lead Selection
The Lead Selection button is applicable only to 3-wire lead sets. The Lead Selection
button sets and displays the ECG lead for the attached wireless device. ECG lead selection
options include Lead I, Lead II and Lead III. The default setting is Lead II.
• Data is shown in the Lead Selection field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button
is selected. Lead Selection has a factory default setting of blank. If the read was not
successful, an error message will be displayed and the Lead Selection field will remain
blank. To view the connection status check the message in the Connect field.
• The Lead to be monitored by a connected device can be assigned by selecting the
Program sidebar button.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 65
Wireless Tab
System Setup Functions
NOTE:
9.16.3
The Lead Selection button will not be shown when the
device cannot be recognized or there is a Read error.
Entering Wireless Settings (Telepack-608)
This section outlines the settings available in the Wireless tab. The settings in the Wireless
tab are shown by selecting the Read button and configured by selecting the Program
button.
NOTE:
Programming and assigning of the Telepack must be
performed by authorized service personnel only.
.The fields shown in these images are described on the following pages.
FIGURE 9-47 Wireless Tab after Telepack-608 connected
FIGURE 9-48 Wireless Tab after 608 Instrument Radio connected
Device ID
The Device ID field displays the identification number that was assigned to the connected
wireless device. A Device ID has a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters. Data is shown in
the Device ID field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button is selected. If the read was
not successful the Device ID field will remain blank. To view the connection status of the
wireless device check the message in the Connect field. The Device ID field cannot be edited
and has a factory default setting of blank.
The Device ID for a monitoring device is set up in the Equipment List tab. For additional
information on setting up a Device ID, refer to the ‘‘Equipment Setup Tab’’ on page 9-33.
9 - 66
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Wireless Tab
Connect Field
The Connect field displays the status of the connection between the Panorama Central
Station and the wireless device. A connection status is shown in the Connect field when the
Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button is selected. The status in the Connect field cannot be
edited and has a factory default setting of blank.
The messages shown in the Connect field include:
MESSAGE
REASON
Connected to 608 Telemetry
The connection with the Telepack-608 was
successful.
Connected to 608 Instrument Telemetry
The connection with the 608 Instrument Radio
was successful.
Not Connected
The connection with the wireless device was not
successful.
Error: Could not receive data
The connection with the wireless device was not
successful. Either there was no response from the
device or the device is not connected.
Software Version
The Software Version field displays the version of software currently in use by the wireless
device. Data is shown in the Software Version field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar
button is selected. The factory default setting is blank. If the read was not successful the
Software Version field will remain blank. To view the connection status of the wireless device
check the message in the Connect field.
Hardware Version
The Hardware Version field displays the version of hardware in use by the connected
device. Data is shown in the Hardware Version field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar
button is selected and has a factory default setting of blank. If the read was not successful the
Hardware Version field will remain blank. To view the connection status of the wireless
device check the message in the Connect field.
Lead Selection
The Lead Selection button displays the ECG Lead to be monitored by the assigned device.
It sets the lead to be monitored by the attached device. ECG lead selection options include
Lead I, Lead II and Lead III.
• Data is shown in the Lead Selection field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button
is selected. Lead Selection has a factory default setting of blank. If the read was not
successful the Lead Selection field will remain blank. To view the connection status
check the message in the Connect field.
• The Lead to be monitored by a connected device can be assigned by selecting the
Program sidebar button.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
The Lead Selection button will not be shown when the
device cannot be recognized or there is a Read error.
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 67
Wireless Tab
System Setup Functions
Protocol Selection
The Protocol Selection button displays the protocol selection for the assigned device. It
sets the protocol of the attached device.
• Data is shown in the Protocol Selection field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar
button is pressed and has a factory default setting of blank. If the read was not
successful the Protocol Selection field will remain blank. To view the connection status
check the message in the Connect field.
• A Protocol Selection data can be programmed in a connected device by selecting the
Program sidebar button.
NOTE:
The Protocol Selection button will not be shown when the
device cannot be recognized or there is a Read error.
Channel Type
The Channel Type button displays the selected channel for the assigned device. It selects
the channel type of the attached device. Channel type options include Medium and High.
• Data is shown in the Channel Type field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button
is pressed and has a factory default setting of blank. If the read was not successful the
Channel Type field will remain blank. To view the connection status check the message
in the Connect field.
• A Channel type can be programmed in a connected device by selecting the
Program sidebar button.
NOTE:
The Channel Type button will not be shown when the device
cannot be recognized or there is a Read error.
DL Pair
The DL Pair button displays the channel that will be used for transferring data (i.e.,
demographics, alarms, arrhythmia) from the central station to the wireless bedside device. DL
Pair options include 1,2,3, and Auto. Options 1,2, and 3 should be used for networks that
are configured for roaming. The Auto setting should be used for networks that are not
configured for roaming.
NOTE:
The DL Pair option affects wireless bedside devices using
instrument radios.
• Data is shown in the DL Pair field when the instrument radio has previously been
programmed.
• A DL Pair can be programmed in a connected device by selecting the Program
sidebar button.
9.16.4
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar buttons are used to expand the functionality of this tab.
9.16.4.1
Read
Select the Read sidebar button to retrieve status parameters from the connected wireless
device when it is connected to the Panorama Central Station in Service mode.
9 - 68
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Wireless Tab
Selecting the Read button will attempt to obtain a reading from the connected wireless
device.
• A successful read from a known device will display the fields and sidebar buttons
appropriate to the attached device.
• An unsuccessful read will only display a connect status in the Connect field. The Device
ID, Software Version, and Hardware Version fields will be blank.
9.16.4.2
Program
Select the Program sidebar button to program information in a wireless device when it is
connected to the Panorama Central Station in Service mode.
NOTE:
The Program sidebar button will be disabled until a valid
device has been detected by the Panorama Central Station.
Selecting the Program sidebar button will display the message Are you sure you want
to program the wireless device?.
• Select the Yes button to program the wireless device. The message Wireless device
programmed successfully. is displayed.
• Select the No button to cancel the programming of the connected device.
9.16.5
Error Log Sidebar Button
Select the Error Log sidebar button to display the log of error messages for the connected
wireless device. Selecting the Error Log sidebar button will bring up the Error log for the
connected wireless device. When the Error Log sidebar button is selected the button is
changed to the Telepack sidebar button. FIGURE 9-49 shows the Error Log for the
Wireless tab.
FIGURE 9-49 Error Log for the Wireless Tab
NOTE:
The Error Log sidebar button will be disabled until a valid
device has been detected by the Panorama Central Station.
Printing a Telepack Error Log Report
A Telepack Error Log Report can be printed from this tab by selecting the Print menu bar
button.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 69
Wireless Tab
System Setup Functions
For additional information regarding this report, refer to the ‘‘Telepack Error Log Report’’ on
page 8-53.
9.16.6
Device ID
The Device ID field displays the identification number that was assigned to the connected
wireless device. A Device ID has a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters. Data is shown in
the Device ID field when the Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button is selected. If the read was
not successful the Device ID field will remain blank. To view the connection status of the
wireless device check the message in the Connect field. The Device ID field cannot be edited
and has a factory default setting of blank.
Device ID is set up in the Equipment List tab. For additional information on setting up a
Device ID and the requirements of a Device ID, refer to the ‘‘Equipment Setup Tab’’ on page
9-33.
9.16.7
Connect Field
The Connect field displays the status of the connection between the Panorama Central
Station and the wireless device. A connection status is shown in the Connect field when the
Wireless tab’s Read sidebar button is selected. The status in the Connect field cannot be
edited and has a factory default setting of blank.
The messages shown in the Connect field include:
MESSAGE
REASON
Connected to 608 Telemetry
The connection with the Telepack-608 was
successful.
Connected to 608 Instrument Telemetry
The connection with the 608 Instrument Radio
was successful.
Not Connected
The connection with the wireless device was not
successful.
Error: Could not receive data
The connection with the wireless device was not
successful. Either there was no response from the
device or the device is not connected.
List Box
The Error Log list box contains the error messages that occurred at the connected wireless
device. The following information is collected in an Error log:
• Filename column
The Filename column shows the names of the files in the error list.
• Line Number column
The Line Number column shows the line numbers for the items in the error list.
• Message column
The Message column shows the messages that were sent to the Panorama system by the
Telepack-608 device.
9 - 70
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Wireless Tab
• Arg1 column
The Arg 1 column is populated by the text fields sent to the Panorama system by the
Telepack-608 device.
• Arg2 column
The Arg 1 column is populated by the text fields sent to the Panorama system by the
Telepack-608 device.
Error Log Read Sidebar Button
Select the Read sidebar button to retrieve error log messages from the connected wireless
device when it is connected to the Panorama Central Station in Service mode. A device is in
Service mode when it is connected to the Panorama Central Station’s serial port 2 via the
device’s programming cable.
Selecting the Read button will attempt to read the Error log from the connected wireless
device.
• A successful read from a known device will display the fields and sidebar buttons
appropriate to the attached device.
• An unsuccessful read will only display a connect status in the Connect field.
Clear Sidebar Button
The Error Log contains a Clear sidebar button. Select the Clear sidebar button to delete the
contents of the Telepack Error log. Selecting the Clear sidebar button produces a pop-up
confirmation dialog on the screen that states Are you sure you want to clear the
error log? Selecting Yes will Delete all Data.
• The choices for the Error Log confirmation dialog are No and Yes.
• Selecting the No button in the Error Log confirmation dialog does not clear the error log.
• Selecting the Yes button in the Error Log confirmation dialog deletes the contents of the
Error log.
Telepack Sidebar Button
The Error Log contains a Telepack sidebar button. Select the Telepack button to return the
tab to the Wireless tab display.
For additional information regarding printer setup, refer to the Panorama Printer
Configuration Guide (P/N 0070-00-0561).
For additional information regarding the Telepack Error Log Report, refer to ‘‘Additional
Reports’’ on page 8-40.
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 71
Wireless Tab
9.16.7.1
System Setup Functions
Free Channel Sidebar Button
Select the Free Channel sidebar button to free an allocated channel for a wireless device.
Selecting the Free Channel sidebar button will request a list of the wireless devices on the
wireless network.
NOTE:
9.16.7.2
The Free Channel sidebar button will be disabled until a
valid device has been detected by the Panorama Central
Station.
Free Connected Channel Sidebar Button
Select the Free Connected Channel sidebar button to free a channel from a connected
device that supports channels.
NOTE:
9.16.7.3
The Free Connected Channel sidebar button will be disabled
until a valid device has been detected by the Panorama
Central Station.
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
9.16.8
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Wireless tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The System Setup menu
button is disabled.
The System Setup function is
already open on a Panorama
display and cannot be opened
on multiple displays.
Close the System Setup
function on the Panorama
display on which it is opened.
You must enter all fields
to program the wireless
device
All of the fields in the
Wireless tab were not
completed before the
Program button was pressed.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Complete all of the fields in the
Wireless tab before selecting
the Program button.
Program Failure: Invalid
Data
The wireless device was not
successfully programed.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Recheck the accuracy of the
data to be entered in the
wireless device.
Warning: Attached device
is already programmed
with a channel. Allocated
channel will be lost if not
freed first. Do you want
to continue
The connected device has
already been programmed and
allocated with a channel.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
*
9 - 72
•
Select the YES button to
discard the previously
allocated channel and try
to obtain a new channel.
•
Select the NO button to
keep the previously
obtained channel.
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
System Setup Functions
Wireless Tab
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Program Failure: Unable
to obtain a channel.
The system tried to obtain a
channel from the Panorama
Central Station but was
unsuccessful.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Free up any unused channels.
Try again to obtain a channel
from the system. The system
administrator can also
purchase additional channels.
Network Error: Unable to
obtain device list.
The system requested a device
list from the wireless network
but did not receive one within
the allocated request time.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Request a device list from the
wireless network again.
There are no devices
available
An empty device list was
received from the wireless
network.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Enter the device in the
Panorama Equipment list.
Free Error: Device not
found
The device channel was not
successfully freed.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Try to free a different channel
from the system. The system
administrator can also
purchase additional channels.
Program Failure: The
channel was successfully
freed but an error was
encountered when
programming the device.
The device must now be
programmed over its
existing channel.
The channel was successfully
freed but there was a problem
with the programming of the
device.
Select the OK button to close
the error message dialog box.
Program the device over its
existing channel.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
9 - 73
Wireless Tab
System Setup Functions
This page intentionally left blank.
9 - 74
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
10.0
Telepack (Optional)
This section outlines the Panorama Telepack:
• Introduction
• Button Indicators
• Indicator Lights
• Operating Instructions
• Telepack with Nonin SpO2 Module (Optional)
• Approved Telepack Accessories
• Troubleshooting
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
10 - 1
Introduction
10.1
Telepack (Optional)
Introduction
The Panorama Telepack is a battery powered ambulatory device that acquires ECG
information from an adult patient and transmits it to the Panorama Central Station for
analysis. For the Telepack-608, the transmission to the Panorama Central Station is via the
Panorama Telemetry Server; for the Telepack-2.4, the transmission is direct to the Panorama
Central Station. The Panorama Central Station is capable of performing data analysis
functions such as Heart Rate determination, R-wave detection, and ECG filtering.
The Telepack is controlled through the use of buttons which are located on the front and side
of the device. The status of the unit is shown by the LED indicator lights. The Telepack will not
turn off unless the batteries are removed from the unit or when the batteries are depleted.
The Telepack has the following key features:
• Uni-directional data transmission (between ambulatory patient and Panorama Central
Station) using wireless communication technology in the WMTS band or ISM band
• Functions such as Nurse Call, Attendant Present, Lead Select, Remote Print, and Lead/
Battery/Link tests are easily performed using buttons
• LED lights are used to indicate link status, battery status, and ECG lead connection status
• 3-wire and 5-wire Lead ECG support
CAUTION:
The Panorama Telepack and Instrument Radio are wireless
devices and may be subject to intermittent signal dropout.
Panorama wireless devices are designed to perform with a
maximum cumulative signal dropout of one minute in a
24-hour period under ideal conditions. A crowded wireless
environment or interference from other medical or nonmedical devices, either intentional (e.g., VOIP phones,
pagers, asset tracking systems, etc.) or unintentional (e.g.,
AC motors, microwave ovens, paper shredders, etc.), may
result in a significantly increased amount of signal dropout
experienced by any one or multiple wireless device(s).
See ‘‘Technical Alarms and Events’’ on page 13-11 for
troubleshooting intermittent signal dropout of the wireless
device.
CAUTION:
10 - 2
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Mindray DS USA, Inc. could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
10.2
Button Indicators
Button Indicators
The following buttons are located on the Telepack device:
• One Nurse Call button:
• Two Attendant Present button:
• One LEAD SELECT button:
• One CHECK button:
CHECK
• One RECORD button:
10.2.1
LEAD
SELECT
buttons
(domestic),
(domestic),
RECORD
(domestic), or
(international)
(international)
(international)
Nurse Call Button
Press the Nurse Call button to request the presence of a clinician. When this button is
pressed:
• A message displays on the Panorama Central Station indicating that the Nurse Call
button was pressed.
• If configured, an event is recorded and posted to the Events tab Event list. For additional
information about configuring this option, refer to “Alarm Responses Tab (Patient)” on
page 6-12.
10.2.2
Attendant Present Buttons
Press the Attendant Present buttons simultaneously to indicate the presence of a clinician
at the patient’s bedside. When these buttons are pressed:
• A message posts to the Events list indicating that the Attendant Present buttons were
pressed.
• The Nurse Call alarm is acknowledged, if the Nurse Call button was pressed.
10.2.3
LEAD SELECT Button
LEAD
SELECT
Press the ECG LEAD SELECT button to:
• Change the active lead when using a 3-wire lead set
• The ECG LED that is active will turn on for 2 seconds
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
10 - 3
Indicator Lights
10.2.4
Telepack (Optional)
CHECK Button
CHECK
Press the CHECK button to verify LED indicator lights are functioning, ECG Lead connection,
link status, and battery status.
For information on interpreting the status of the ECG Lead, Link Status and Battery Status LED
indicator lights, refer to the following sections: “ECG Lead Diagram LED Indicator Lights” on
page 10-4, “Link Status LED Indicator Light” on page 10-6, and “Battery Status LED Indicator
Light” on page 10-6.
10.2.5
RECORD Button
RECORD
Press the RECORD button to remotely print the “All Strips Report” to the Panorama Central
Station default printer.
10.3
Indicator Lights
The Telepack uses LED indicator lights to verify the functionality of the device. The indicator
lights on the device include:
• 3-wire and 5-wire ECG lead indicator lights
• 1 Link Status indicator light
• 1 Battery Status indicator light
10.3.1
ECG Lead Diagram LED Indicator Lights
The Telepack ECG Lead diagram’s LED indicator lights show the status of the lead
connections with the patient. The Telepack‘s ECG Lead LED indicator lights (shown in
FIGURE 10-1 and FIGURE 10-2), include five green LED indicators that correspond to the
following lead connections:
10 - 4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
Indicator Lights
FIGURE 10-1 Front View of Telepack (AHA) FIGURE 10-2 Front View of Telepack (AHA)
with Domestic Overlay
with International Overlay
Domestic Overlay
International Overlay
• White RA (right arm)
• Red R (right arm)
• Black LA (left arm)
• Yellow L (left arm)
• Brown V (chest)
• White C (chest)
• Green RL (right leg)
• Black N (right leg)
• Red LL (left leg)
• Green F (left leg)
The ECG Lead LED indicator lights remain off except during the initial power up phase and
during a lead test sequence. For additional information, refer to “Lead Placement
Procedures” on page 4-2.
Press the CHECK button to verify the Telepack’s ECG lead connections.
NOTE:
When the CHECK button is pressed, all of the device LED
indicator lights are tested simultaneously.
This test determines if the patches are connected based on thoracic impedance. If a patch
adhesive is not sticking, a patch is dry, or the skin gel is dry, the test fails.
The Telepack’s ECG Lead LED indicator lights remains on for approximately 10 seconds
during the test sequence, indicating that the Telepack has good lead connectivity. An unlit
ECG Lead LED light indicates that the Telepack has no lead connectivity.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
10 - 5
Indicator Lights
Telepack (Optional)
NOTE:
10.3.2
If a 3-wire Lead set is used, a maximum of three lights will
illuminate. If a 5-wire Lead set is used, a maximum of five
lights will illuminate.
Link Status LED Indicator Light
The Telepack Link Status LED indicator light verifies the Telepack’s connection to the
Panorama Patient Monitoring Network.
The Link Status LED indicator light remains on for approximately 10 seconds during the initial
power up and during the test sequence.
Press the CHECK button to verify the Telepack’s link status with the wireless network.
NOTE:
When the CHECK button is pressed, all of the device LED
indicator lights are tested simultaneously.
The Telepack’s Link Status LED indicator light shows the results of the link status test as follows:
TELEPACK
LED STATUS
DESCRIPTION
Telepack-2.4
On
The Telepack-2.4 has established communication with the
access point.
Flashing
The Telepack-2.4 is trying to establish communication with
the access point.
Off
The Telepack-2.4 has not been configured for operation,
or the Telepack-2.4 is in system startup.
On
The Telepack-608 has been configured for operation.
This is not an indication of being in range of the wireless
network.
Telepack-608
10.3.3
Flashing
The Telepack-608 has not been configured for operation.
Off
The Telepack-608 batteries need replacement.
Battery Status LED Indicator Light
The Telepack Battery Status LED indicator light verifies the status of the Telepack’s batteries.
Press the CHECK button to verify the Telepack’s battery status.
NOTE:
When the CHECK button is pressed, all of the device LED
indicator lights are tested simultaneously.
During this test sequence, the Battery Status LED indicator light will remain on for
approximately 10 seconds if the Telepack batteries have more than 2 hours of battery life
remaining. A flashing Battery Status LED light indicates the Telepack batteries have less than
2 hours of battery life remaining. An unlit Battery Status LED light indicates the Telepack
batteries should be replaced immediately, or that they have been incorrectly inserted.
10 - 6
NOTE:
The Telepack device should not be used for battery storage
purposes.
NOTE:
When a Telepack is assigned to a patient tile, the battery
charge percentage integer, and percent sign (%) are
displayed in the digital data tile at the central station.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
Operating Instructions
NOTE:
10.4
The Telepack batteries used may be subject to local
regulations regarding disposal. At the end of the battery
life, never dispose of the batteries in a fire. Batteries should
be disposed of in accordance with any local regulations.
Operating Instructions
This section of the manual provides instructions for programming the Telepack device for use
with the Panorama Central Station.
10.4.1
Initial Setup of Telepack
The Panorama Central Station should be installed and running before you begin to set up the
Telepack device. For additional information, refer to the Panorama Service Manual
(P/N 0070-00-0634).
The following items are required to initially install and program the Telepack:
• Telepack device
• 2 AA size alkaline batteries (P/N 0146-00-0077-01)
• Telepack service mode cable
10.4.1.1
Inserting Batteries
To activate the Telepack device, insert the 2 AA size alkaline batteries in the Telepack battery
compartment. Use the label on the back of the Telepack as a guide. Secure the end cap of
the battery compartment by twisting firmly in the clockwise direction.
The Telepack automatically performs an initial system check if the batteries are installed
properly.
AA
AA
FIGURE 10-3 Telepack, rear panel (right side of image intentionally blurred)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
10 - 7
Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
WARNING: Do not incinerate batteries, possible explosion may occur.
CAUTION:
Visually inspect the battery compartment for any foreign
object prior to use.
CAUTION:
The Telepack may not function if the batteries installed in the
device are corroded. Use only approved batteries (P/N
0146-00-0077-01) in the Telepack and observe proper
polarity. Installing batteries with the incorrect polarity may
cause the batteries to become excessively warm.
The Telepack will not transmit data to the Panorama Central Station once the batteries have
become depleted. To test the batteries, press the CHECK button and confirm that both the
Link LED and the Battery LED is lit.
When not in use, the Telepack device should be stored without batteries.
10.4.1.2
Programming the Telepack
This section describes how to program the Telepack. For additional information, refer to the
“Wireless Tab” on page 9-62.
NOTE:
Programming and assigning of the Telepack must be
performed by authorized service personnel only.
CAUTION:
The Telepack should not be attached to the patient when the
device is being programmed into the system.
To program the Telepack:
1. Connect the Telepack service mode cable from the Panorama Central Station to the
serial port provided on the base of the Telepack device.
2. Insert the batteries into the device. For additional information, refer to “Inserting
Batteries” on page 10-7.
3. From the central station main screen, select the System Setup menu button.
4. Select the Installation Setup tab, and enter the System password. For additional
information, refer to “Entering a Password” on page 6-2.
5. Select the More tab, then select the Wireless tab. The Wireless tab is displayed
(shown in FIGURE 10-4).
FIGURE 10-4 Wireless Tab
10 - 8
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
Operating Instructions
6. Select the Read sidebar button. The information from the Telepack device is displayed
in the appropriate fields.
7. Select the Program sidebar button. A dialog box appears.
8. Change any editable fields as necessary.
9. Select the Yes button to confirm. The message Wireless device programmed
successfully appears is displayed confirming that the Telepack was programmed
correctly.
NOTE:
10.4.1.3
If the Telepack device is not connected properly or if the
Panorama Central Station is unable to detect the device, the
message, “Error: Could not receive data” is displayed at the
Panorama Central Station.
Entering the Telepack to the Equipment List
The Telepack device should be entered to the Panorama Central Station Equipment List using
the Equipment Setup tab. For additional information about entering a Telepack device to
the Panorama Central Station, refer to “Entering New Equipment” on page 9-34.
The Device ID is found on the back of the Telepack device. After assigning the device to the
Panorama Central Station, the Telepack is ready for patient use.
10.4.1.4
Telepack Power Up Sequence
The Telepack goes through a power up sequence each time the batteries are inserted in the
device. The power up sequence includes a hardware and software check, an ECG Lead
connection status test, a link status test, and a battery status test. A successful power up
sequence is indicated when the LED indicator lights illuminate for approximately 10 seconds.
For additional information on the status tests performed by the Telepack during the start up
sequence, refer to the “LEAD SELECT Button” on page 10-3.
After the Telepack device powers up, it is ready to be programmed and assigned to a
patient.
10.4.1.5
Telepack Communication Range
Telepack-2.4
The range for the Telepack-2.4 device to communicate and transfer data is generally within
100 feet of a network access point. This distance is subject to site survey, and is affected by
building materials. The device is for indoor use only.
Telepack-608
The range for the Telepack-608 device to communicate and transfer data is generally within
30 feet of a Panorama Antenna. This distance is subject to site survey, and is affected by
building materials. The device is for indoor use only.
10.4.2
Securing the Telepack Device
Secure the Telepack to the patient after the ECG leads are connected to the device. The
device should be secured in a telemetry pouch or in the pocket of a patient gown.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
10 - 9
Telepack with Nonin SpO2 Module (Optional)
10.5
Telepack (Optional)
Telepack with Nonin SpO2 Module (Optional)
This section of the manual provides instructions for installing the Nonin SpO2 module in the
Telepack.
10.5.1
Introduction
The Telepack with Nonin SpO2 module is an optional accessory used to monitor and display
SpO2 data for a patient that is being monitored at the Panorama Central Station. The SpO2
data includes SpO2 waveform, SpO2 numeric data, and numeric pulse rate.
10.5.2
Installing the SpO2 Module on the Telepack
1. Using care, remove the flexible cover from the connector on the bottom of the Telepack
by using a small flat-blade screw driver or other similar tool (shown in FIGURE 10-5).
FIGURE 10-5 Removing Telepack Flexible Cover
2. Install the flexible cover (removed in step 1) on the connector on the bottom of the SpO2
Module.
FIGURE 10-6 Installing Flexible Cover in SpO2 Module
10 - 10
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
Telepack with Nonin SpO2 Module (Optional)
3. Turn the Telepack off by rotating the battery cap in a counter-clockwise direction. The
Telepack is turned off.
FIGURE 10-7 Removing Telepack Battery Cap
4. Align the two devices (shown in FIGURE 10-8) and then slide the SpO2 Module into the
Telepack. First, the connectors are mated; Continue pushing the devices together firmly
until a loud audible "click" is heard as the mechanical latch is engaged.
FIGURE 10-8 Inserting Telepack into SpO2 Module
5. Turn the Telepack on by securing the end cap of the battery compartment by twisting
firmly in the clockwise direction.
10.5.3
Removing the SpO2 Module from the Telepack
1. Turn the Telepack off by rotating the battery cap in a counter-clockwise direction. The
Telepack is turned off.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
10 - 11
Telepack with Nonin SpO2 Module (Optional)
Telepack (Optional)
2. Press the large button on the right side of the SpO2 module (shown in FIGURE 10-9) until
a loud audible click is heard. The click sound indicates that the latch has been properly
disengaged from the Telepack.
FIGURE 10-9 SpO2 Module Release Button
NOTE:
As a safety feature, the connectors should remain connected
even after the mechanical latch is disengaged.
3. Separate the SpO2 Module from the Telepack.
4. Remove the flexible cover from the bottom of the SpO2 Module.
5. To avoid electrostatic sensitivity, install the flexible cover on the connector on the bottom
of the Telepack.
NOTE:
10.5.4
The Telepack may automatically reset due to an electrostatic
event if the flexible cover is not replaced.
Installing the Patient Cable
A patient cable is needed to collect the SpO2 data.
1. Mate the 8-pin connector on the cable with the matching connector on the bottom of the
SpO2 Module. The connector should be firmly pressed in place to ensure that it is
properly placed.
FIGURE 10-10 Inserting Patient Cable in SpO2 Module
10 - 12
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
Telepack with Nonin SpO2 Module (Optional)
2. Route the cable in the channel on the back of the unit. The channel regions (shown in
FIGURE 10-11) should also be pressed firmly to ensure that they are properly placed.
FIGURE 10-11 Securing the Patient Cable
10.5.5
Attaching the Finger Clip Sensor
1. Insert the finger (preferably the index, middle, or ring finger) into the Nonin finger clip
until the end of the finger reaches the finger stop (shown in FIGURE 10-12). Keep the
fingernail facing the sensor top. Ensure that long fingernails are not interfering with the
proper finger position.
NOTE:
Disposable finger sensors (shown in FIGURE 10-13) may
also be used. Follow the packaging directions carefully to
ensure proper application.
FIGURE 10-12 Reusable finger clip
sensor
FIGURE 10-13 Disposable sensor
NOTE:
For best results, when using the sensor for data collection,
secure the sensor cable independently from the sensor with
medical device tape, preferably around the base of the
finger. Be sure that the tape securing the cable does not
restrict the blood flow.
CAUTION:
Tissue damage or inaccurate SpO2 measurements may be
caused by incorrect sensor application or use, such as
wrapping too tightly, applying supplemental tape, failing to
inspect the sensor site periodically, or failing to position
appropriately. Carefully read the sensor directions for use,
the Panorama Operating Instructions, and all precautionary
information before use.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
10 - 13
Telepack with Nonin SpO2 Module (Optional)
CAUTION:
10.5.6
Telepack (Optional)
Inaccurate SpO2 measurements may be caused by:
•
Incorrect sensor application or use
•
Significant levels of dysfunctional hemoglobins, (e.g.,
carboxyhemoglobin or methemoglobin)
•
Intra-vascular dyes such as indocyanine green or
methylene blue
•
Exposure to excessive illumination such as surgical
lamps (especially ones with a xenon light source),
bilirubin lamps, fluorescent lights, infrared heating
lamps, or excessive ambient light. In such cases, cover
the sensor site with opaque material.
•
Excessive patient movement
•
Venous pulsations
•
Electro-surgical interference
•
Placement of a sensor on an extremity that has a blood
pressure cuff, arterial catheter, or intra-vascular line.
•
Cold extremities due to reduced circulation.
•
Nail polish or fungus
CAUTION:
In certain situations in which perfusion and signal strength
are low, such as in patients with thick or pigmented skin,
inaccurately low SpO2 readings will result. Verification of
oxygenation should be made, especially in patients with
chronic lung disease, before instituting any therapy or
intervention.
CAUTION:
Many patients suffer from poor peripheral perfusion due to
hypothermia, hypovolemia, severe vasoconstriction,
reduced cardiac output, etc. These symptoms may cause a
loss in vital sign readings.
CAUTION:
Prolonged and continuous monitoring may increase the risk
of skin erosion and pressure necrosis at the site of the
sensor. Check the SpO2 sensor site frequently to ensure
proper positioning, alignment and skin integrity at least
every eight (8) hours; with the Adult and Pediatric re-usable
finger sensor, check every four (4) hours; for patients of
poor perfusion or with skin sensitive to light, check every 2
- 3 hours; more frequent examinations may be required for
different patients. Change the sensor site if signs of
circulatory compromise occur.
Removing the Patient Cable
• The patient cable is removed by gently pulling the cable from its channel, and then
gripping and pulling the pull tab, to disconnect the connectors.
10 - 14
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
10.6
Approved Telepack Accessories
Approved Telepack Accessories
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Telepack-608
0998-00-0191-06 (Domestic)
0998-00-0191-07 (International)
Telepack-2.4
0998-00-0707-01 (Domestic)
0998-00-0707-02 (International)
Electrodes
0681-00-0100-01 (Box of 600)
0681-00-0100-02 (Box of 60)
ECG Lead Set for Telepack, 18”
0012-00-1503-04
0012-00-1503-01
0012-00-1503-13
0012-00-1503-10
(3-wire
(5-wire
(3-wire
(5-wire
lead
lead
lead
lead
set,
set,
set,
set,
domestic)
domestic)
international)
international)
ECG Lead Set for Telepack, 24”
0012-00-1503-05
0012-00-1503-02
0012-00-1503-14
0012-00-1503-11
(3-wire
(5-wire
(3-wire
(5-wire
lead
lead
lead
lead
set,
set,
set,
set,
domestic)
domestic)
international)
international)
ECG Lead Set for Telepack, 36”
0012-00-1503-06
0012-00-1503-03
0012-00-1503-15
0012-00-1503-12
(3-wire
(5-wire
(3-wire
(5-wire
lead
lead
lead
lead
set,
set,
set,
set,
domestic)
domestic)
international)
international)
ECG Plug
0012-00-1527-32
0012-00-1527-34
0012-00-1527-33
0012-00-1527-35
(RL-Green plug, domestic)
(V-Brown plug, domestic)
(N-Black plug, international)
(C-White plug, international)
Kit, Telepack Programming
0020-00-0485-01
Telepack SpO2 Module
0998-00-0192-01
Adult Single Patient Use Nonin Sensor, 10 pack
0600-00-0139-10
Adult Reusable Nonin SpO2 Sensor, 1 each
0600-00-0140-01
Interface Cable for Single Patient Use Adult SpO2
Sensor
0012-00-1542-01
Kit, Adult Nonin SpO2 Sensors
0020-00-0167
SpO2 Module Cleaning Plug
0003-00-0055
Batteries (Alkaline, size AA)
0146-00-0077-01
Panorama Telepack Pouch
0202-00-0179-02 (Bag of 25)
ECG AAMI (DOMESTIC) LEAD WIRES
Lead Wire, LA-Black, 18”
0012-00-1527-04
Lead Wire, LL-Red, 18”
0012-00-1527-03
Lead Wire, RA-White, 18”
0012-00-1527-02
Lead Wire, RL-Green, 18”
0012-00-1527-05
Lead Wire, V-Brown, 18”
0012-00-1527-01
Lead Wire, LA-Black, 24”
0012-00-1527-14
Lead Wire, LL-Red, 24”
0012-00-1527-13
Lead Wire, RA-White, 24”
0012-00-1527-12
Lead Wire, RL-Green, 24”
0012-00-1527-15
Lead Wire, V-Brown, 24”
0012-00-1527-11
Lead Wire, LA-Black, 36”
0012-00-1527-24
Lead Wire, LL-Red, 36”
0012-00-1527-23
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
10 - 15
Approved Telepack Accessories
Telepack (Optional)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Lead Wire, RA-White, 36”
0012-00-1527-22
Lead Wire, RL-Green, 36”
0012-00-1527-25
Lead Wire, V-Brown, 36”
0012-00-1527-21
ECG IEC (INTERNATIONAL) LEAD WIRES
Lead Wire, N-Black, 18”
0012-00-1527-10
Lead Wire, R-Red, 18”
0012-00-1527-07
Lead Wire, C-White, 18”
0012-00-1527-06
Lead Wire, F-Green, 18”
0012-00-1527-08
Lead Wire, L-Yellow, 18”
0012-00-1527-09
Lead Wire, N-Black, 24”
0012-00-1527-20
Lead Wire, R-Red, 24”
0012-00-1527-17
Lead Wire, C-White, 24”
0012-00-1527-16
Lead Wire, F-Green, 24”
0012-00-1527-18
Lead Wire, L-Yellow, 24”
0012-00-1527-19
Lead Wire, N-Black, 36”
0012-00-1527-30
Lead Wire, R-Red, 36”
0012-00-1527-27
Lead Wire, C-White, 36”
0012-00-1527-26
Lead Wire, F-Green, 36”
0012-00-1527-28
Lead Wire, L-Yellow, 36”
0012-00-1527-29
WARNING: The Telepack should not be used adjacent to or stacked with
other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the
Telepack should be observed to verify normal operation in
the configuration in which it will be used.
10 - 16
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Telepack (Optional)
10.7
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using a
Telepack device.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Telepack/LED’s not turning on
Batteries are not installed
correctly, batteries are
depleted, or batteries
corroded.
Visually inspect the battery
compartment for any foreign
object.
Replace the batteries.
Telepack not transmitting data
to the Panorama Central
Station.
Batteries are discharged.
Press the CHECK button to
verify that the batteries are
depleted. Replace as
necessary.
Flashing Battery Status LED
indicator light
Batteries in the Telepack are
weakening.
Replace batteries
The message Error: Could
not receive data is
displayed, while attempting to
program the Telepack
Telepack is not connected
properly, or the Panorama
Central Station is unable to
detect the Telepack.
Verify that the service mode
cable is properly connected to
the device.
Retry programming.
Check batteries.
Unlit ECG Lead LED indicator
light
Telepack has no lead
connectivity.
Connect the electrode.
Check batteries.
Communications Lost
Telepack’s radio signal is out of
range with the wireless
network.
For Telepack-2.4, verify the
Telepack is within 100 feet of a
network access point.
For Telepack-608, verify the
Telepack is wthin 30 feet of a
network access point.
Check batteries.
Flashing Link Status LED
indicator light
Telepack is not communicating
with the Panorama Central
Station.
Verify that Device ID is
registered on the Panorama
Central Station.
Verify that Panorama Central
Station is functioning.
Additionally for Telepack-2.4,
verify that the Access Point and
Network Name are properly
configured on the Telepack.
For Telepack-608, the unit may
be defective.
Contact Technical Support.
SpO2 waveform has not been
selected in the Display tab.
Go to the Display tab and
select the SpO2 waveform from
the Parameter list to display in
the Waveform 2 position. For
additional information
regarding the Display tab,
refer to ‘‘Configuring the
Display Tab’’ on page 5-45.
SpO2 module is not properly
connected to the Telepack.
Power down the Telepack and
reconnect the SpO2 module to
the Telepack.
Battery cap on the Telepack
was not secured.
Verify that the Telepack battery
cap is secured.
SpO2 waveform not displayed
at the Panorama Central
Station patient tile
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
10 - 17
Troubleshooting
Telepack (Optional)
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
SpO2 Check Sensor
An SpO2 sensor issue was
detected.
Select the digital tile or
waveform tile area, or select
the View button to
acknowledge the technical
event.
*
10 - 18
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
11.0
User Maintenance
This section of the manual outlines proper maintenance of the Panorama Central Station
touch screen and Telepack device.
• Touch Screen User Maintenance
• Telepack User Maintenance
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
11 - 1
Touch Screen User Maintenance
11.1
User Maintenance
Touch Screen User Maintenance
The Panorama display uses a touch screen overlay for more simple navigation of the system.
(A mouse can also be used for point-and-click navigation of the system.)
For instructions on turning the touch screen on and off, refer to ‘‘Touch Screen Tab’’ on page
9-4.
11.1.1
Care and Cleaning of the Touch Screen
For the best performance, it is recommended that the Panorama Central Station touch screen
be kept clean. Observe the following precautions when cleaning the touch screen:
CAUTION:
To avoid potential system issues, deactivate the touch screen
before cleaning.
CAUTION:
DO NOT spray glass cleaner directly on a display as it could
possibly leak inside a non-sealed unit and cause damage.
CAUTION:
Follow your hospital protocol for handling of blood and
body fluids.
• Always remember to use a cloth or towel to apply glass cleaner to the touch screen.
• Any standard glass cleaner can be used to clean the touch screen. DO NOT use abrasive
cleaning materials to clean a touch screen. DO NOT use alcohol or solvents containing
chlorinated hydrocarbons.
• Remove fingerprints and stains by using a liquid lens cleaner and a soft cloth.
• Use a fine soft-hair brush to carefully brush away dust and dirt particles.
11 - 2
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
User Maintenance
11.2
Telepack User Maintenance
Telepack User Maintenance
The following sections provide information about storing and cleaning the Telepack device
and the Nonin SpO2 module.
11.2.1
Storing the Telepack
When not in use, carefully store the Telepack by wrapping the lead set loosely around the
casing of the Telepack device, or with the lead set attached and hanging freely. Do not wrap
the lead set tightly around the casing of the Telepack as it may damage the wires.
CAUTION:
Ensure that the batteries are removed when the Telepack is
being stored.
To remove the batteries, twist the endcap of the battery compartment in a counter-clockwise
direction. Removing the batteries helps preserve battery life and could prevent potential
damage to the Telepack due to battery leakage.
NOTE:
The Telepack remains on until the batteries are removed or
depleted.
The Telepack has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
The Telepack generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If the Telepack does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the Telepack off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
11.2.2
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Telepack Device
The information in this section pertains to cleaning and disinfecting the Telepack and its
accessories. The components that need to be cleaned and disinfected are:
• Telepack device
• Battery compartment
• ECG Lead sets
• Nonin SpO2 module
• SpO2 Finger Clip Sensor
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
The Telepack should be cleaned and disinfected before and
after each patient’s use.
0070-10-0707-02
11 - 3
Telepack User Maintenance
User Maintenance
The solutions used to clean the Telepack should be compatible with the cleaning solutions
used to clean the ECG lead sets, if they are going to remain attached while the Telepack is
cleaned. If the cleaning solution is not compatible, ensure that the ECG leads do not come in
contact with the cleaning solution used to clean the Telepack. Only hospital-approved
disinfecting procedures like those recommended by AAMI or AORN should be used to
disinfect the Telepack unit.
The cleaning solutions that can be used are:
• Soap and water
• Glutaraldehyde 2% (for example, Cidex)
• Dilute chlorine bleach (sodium hypochlorite), 10% solution, freshly prepared in past 24
hours
• Isopropyl alcohol 70%
• Ethyl alcohol
Guidelines for Cleaning the Telepack
• Remove the batteries, and reattach the end cap of the battery compartment firmly. Clean
the empty Telepack using a cloth moistened with cleaning solution, by gently wiping the
outside of the Telepack.
• Remove the ECG lead wire from the device to clean around the ECG connector.
NOTE:
Do not immerse the Telepack in the cleaning solution.
• Any excess cleaning solution should be wiped away with a cloth moistened with distilled
water.
• A lint free cloth should be used to dry the Telepack unit thoroughly.
11.2.2.1
Cleaning the Battery Compartment
To clean the battery compartment, follow these guidelines:
• Remove the batteries from the battery compartment by twisting the endcap in a counterclockwise direction. Visually inspect for fluids or foreign matter.
• Use a gauze pad or long handle swab moistened with soap, water or alcohol to clean
the battery compartment.
• Excess cleaning solution should be wiped away with a cloth moistened with distilled
water.
• A lint free cloth should be used to wipe the inside of the battery compartment. Air dry the
battery compartment prior to re-inserting the batteries.
NOTE:
11.2.2.2
Ensure that the battery contact leads and the battery
compartment are dry prior to re-inserting the batteries for
use.
Cleaning the ECG Lead Sets
To clean the ECG lead sets, use any one of the following cleaning solutions:
11 - 4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
User Maintenance
Telepack User Maintenance
• Soap and water
• Glutaraldehyde 2% (for example, Cidex)
• Dilute chlorine bleach (sodium hypochlorite), 10% solution, freshly made in past 24 hours
• Ethyl Alcohol 30% (for example, green soap tincture)
To clean the ECG lead sets, remove them from the Telepack, and follow these guidelines:
• Use the cleaning solution to wipe and rinse the lead set.
• The cleaning solution should be wiped away with a cloth moistened with distilled water.
• A lint free cloth should be used to dry the lead set thoroughly.
WARNING: The Telepack should not be used adjacent to or stacked with
other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the
Telepack should be observed to verify normal operation in
the configuration in which it will be used.
Sterilization of the Lead Sets
CAUTION:
Prior to sterilization, lead sets must be removed from the
Telepack. The Telepack and/or the Telepack with Nonin
SpO2 must not be sterilized.
Use EtO to sterilize the leadsets. The sterilization should be performed by following the
hospital-approved procedure for EtO sterilization, such as those recommended by AAMI. The
leadsets remain effective up to 10 exposures to EtO sterilization cycles.
NOTE:
11.2.3
Damage to the lead sets will result if steam or gamma
radiation is used for the sterilization process.
Cleaning the SpO2 Module
In the event that the SpO2 Module becomes soiled, a cleaning plug (P/N 0003-00-0055)
should be used to cover the serial connector on the SpO2 Module before it is cleaned.
CAUTION:
Use the designated cleaning plug (P/N 0003-00-0055)
when cleaning and disinfecting the Nonin SpO2 module. If
fluids enter the device, it may affect the functionality of the
module or render it unusable.
Approved Cleaning Solutions
Please refer to the approved cleaning solutions described in ‘‘Cleaning and Disinfecting the
Telepack Device’’ on page 11-3.
Inserting the Cleaning Plug
1. Carefully cover the connector by aligning the cleaning plug with the lower portion of the
SpO2 Module.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
11 - 5
Telepack User Maintenance
User Maintenance
2. Press downward while angling the top arm of the plug into the shallow circular recess.
FIGURE 11-1 Inserting the Cleaning Plug
FIGURE 11-2 Securing the Cleaning Plug
NOTE:
The cleaning plug should remain in place during cleaning.
Removing the Cleaning Plug
• Remove the cleaning plug by pulling the tip of the top arm from the recess in the SpO2
module.
11.2.4
Cleaning the SpO2 Finger Clip Sensor
Clean the sensor with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent or isopropyl alcohol.
Ensure that all tape residue is removed. To ensure proper functioning of the finger clip sensor,
do not:
• pour or spray any liquid on the sensor
• immerse in liquid
• use abrasive cleaning materials to clean
11.2.5
Disposal of the Telepack Device
Adhere to the following guidelines when disposing of any Telepack device and its
accessories.
11 - 6
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
User Maintenance
Telepack User Maintenance
• The Telepack should be disposed of in a manner adhering to local or country regulations
regarding disposal of electronic and computer accessories.
• If your state/country laws recommend recycling, you can dispose of the device by
following the recycling program offered by state/federal run agencies.
11.2.6
Disposing of Batteries
Adhere to the following note when disposing the batteries.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
The Telepack batteries used may be subject to local
regulations regarding disposal. At the end of the battery
life, never dispose of the batteries in a fire. Batteries should
be disposed of in accordance with any local regulations.
0070-10-0707-02
11 - 7
Telepack User Maintenance
User Maintenance
This page intentionally left blank.
11 - 8
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
12.0
Parameter Specifications
This section is for reference only. The Parameter Specifications section lists the allowable
range specifications for all of the parameters measured by the Panorama Central Station and
the invalidation of parameter data. It includes the following items:
• Parameter Specifications
• Invalid Data Display
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
12 - 1
Parameter Specifications
12.1
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
The parameters displayed on the Panorama Central Station are dependent on the type of
equipment connected to the Panorama system.
12.1.1
Heart Rate: HR
The Heart Rate parameter obtains data from ECG and IBP sources.
Unit of Measure:
Beats Per Minute (bpm)
Resolution:
1 bpm
Heart Rate Source: ECG
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (bpm)
MAXIMUM VALUE (bpm)
Neonate
30
350
Pediatric
30
300
Adult
30
300
The Panorama Central Station displays ECG waveforms when using 3-wire, 5-wire, and 12
lead cable. The ECG leads available at the Panorama Central Station are dependent on the
lead cable connected to the patient.
LEAD
WAVEFORM LEADS AVAILABLE
3-wire lead set
I, II, III
5-wire lead set
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V
View 12™ card
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
Unit of Measure:
mV
Heart Rate Source: IBP
PATIENT SIZE
12.1.2
MINIMUM VALUE (bpm)
MAXIMUM VALUE (bpm)
Neonate
30
350
Pediatric
30
300
Adult
30
300
Respiration: Resp
The Respiration parameter obtains data from ECG, CO2 or Gas Module sources.
12 - 2
Unit of Measure:
Respirations Per Minute (rpm)
Resolution:
1 rpm
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
Respiration Source: ECG Thoracic Impedance
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (rpm)
MAXIMUM VALUE (rpm)
Neonate
4
199
Pediatric
4
199
Adult
4
199
Respiration Source: CO2
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (rpm)
MAXIMUM VALUE (rpm)
Neonate
0
150
Pediatric
0
150
Adult
0
150
Respiration Source: Gas Module
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (rpm)
MAXIMUM VALUE (rpm)
Neonate
4
60
Pediatric
4
60
Adult
4
60
The Panorama Central Station supports respiration waveforms.
12.1.3
NIBP
The NIBP parameter includes measurements for the Systolic (Sys), Diastolic (Dia), Mean and
Elapsed Time (ET).
Unit of Measure:
mmHg
Resolution:
1 mmHg
ET
Unit of Measure:
minute
Resolution:
1 minute
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
12 - 3
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
NIBP (Sys)
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
Neonate
45
120
Pediatric
55
160
Adult
55
235
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
Neonate
20
100
Pediatric
30
150
Adult
30
200
NIBP (Dia)
NIBP Mean
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE
MAXIMUM VALUE
Neonate
mmHg greater than the NIBP (Dia) value
mmHg less than the NIBP (Sys) value
Pediatric
mmHg greater than the NIBP (Dia) value
mmHg less than the NIBP (Sys) value
Adult
mmHg greater than the NIBP (Dia) value
mmHg less than the NIBP (Sys) value
NIBP (ET)
PATIENT SIZE
12.1.4
MINIMUM VALUE (MIN.)
MAXIMUM VALUE (MINUTES)
Neonate
0
999
Pediatric
0
999
Adult
0
999
SpO2
The SpO2 parameter includes measurements from Masimo SET® and Nellcor® SpO2
sensors.
Unit of Measure:
%
Resolution:
1%
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
---
100
Pediatric
---
100
Adult
---
100
The Panorama Central Station supports SpO2 waveforms.
12 - 4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Parameter Specifications
12.1.5
Parameter Specifications
Nonin SpO2
The Nonin SpO2 parameter includes measurements from Nonin sensors.
Unit of Measure:
%
Resolution:
1%
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
N/A
N/A
Pediatric
N/A
N/A
Adult
---
100
The Panorama Central Station supports SpO2 waveforms.
12.1.6
IBP: mmHg
The Panorama Central Station supports up to four invasive blood pressure parameters. The
measurements shown for each pressure include Systolic (Sys), Diastolic (Dia) and Mean.
NOTE:
IBP parameter labels include IBP, Art, UA, LV, PA, CVP,
ICP, LA, and RA. The label used is based on the label
selected at the bedside monitor.
Resolution:
1 mmHg
IBP (Sys)
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
Neonate
-30
300
Pediatric
-30
300
Adult
-30
300
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
IBP (Dia)
PATIENT SIZE
Neonate
-30
300
Pediatric
-30
300
Adult
-30
300
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
IBP Mean
PATIENT SIZE
Neonate
-30
300
Pediatric
-30
300
Adult
-30
300
The Panorama Central Station supports IBP waveforms. The Panorama Central Station will
not display an IBP waveform if the IBP cable is not connected to the system.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
12 - 5
Parameter Specifications
12.1.7
Parameter Specifications
CO2
The Panorama Central Station supports the mmHg, kPa and % measurements for CO2.
NOTE:
The unit of measure shown for CO2 is based on the selection
made at the bedside monitor.
Units of Measure:
mmHg, %, kPa
Resolution:
1 mmHg, 1 %, 1 kPa
INSP/ET CO2
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
Neonate
0
99
Pediatric
0
99
Adult
0
99
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
0
13
Pediatric
0
13
Adult
0
13
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (KPA)
MAXIMUM VALUE (KPA)
Neonate
0
13
Pediatric
0
13
Adult
0
13
The Panorama Central Station supports a CO2 waveform.
12.1.8
O2
The Panorama Central Station supports INSP/ET O2.
12.1.9
Unit of Measure:
%
Resolution:
1%
INSP/ET O2
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
0
99
Pediatric
0
99
Adult
0
99
The Panorama Central Station supports an O2 waveform.
12 - 6
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Parameter Specifications
12.1.10
Parameter Specifications
N2O
The Panorama Central Station supports INSP/ET N2O.
Unit of Measure:
%
Resolution:
1%
INSP/ET N2O
PATIENT SIZE
12.1.11
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
0
99
Pediatric
0
99
Adult
0
100
Anesthetic Agents: Iso, Enf, Des, Sev, Hal, Agent
The Panorama Central Station supports the INSP and ET measurements of the Isofluorane
(Iso), Enflurane (Enf), Desflurane (Des), Sevoflurane (Sev), and Halothane (Hal) anesthetic
agents.
NOTE:
The Panorama Central Station will display general Agent
values when the Gas Module cannot identify the agent.
The Anesthetic Agent label used is based on the labeling provided by the bedside monitor.
Unit of Measure:
%
Resolution:
1%
Iso, Enf and Hal INSP/ET Ranges
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
0
Not Applicable
Pediatric
0
Not Applicable
Adult
0
Not Applicable
Des INSP/ET Ranges
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Neonate
0
Not Applicable
Pediatric
0
Not Applicable
Adult
0
Not Applicable
MINIMUM VALUE (%)
MAXIMUM VALUE (%)
Sev INSP/ET Ranges
PATIENT SIZE
Neonate
0
Not Applicable
Pediatric
0
Not Applicable
Adult
0
Not Applicable
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
12 - 7
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
• The Panorama Central Station supports Iso, Enf, Sev, Hal and Des waveforms.
• The Panorama Central Station displays a Generic Agent waveform when the Gas Module
cannot identify a specific agent.
12.1.12
Premature Ventricular Contraction (PVC)
The Panorama Central Station supports PVC data.
12.1.13
Unit of Measure:
PVC/min
Resolution:
1 PVC/min
PATIENT SIZE
LEADS
MINIMUM VALUE
MAXIMUM VALUE
Neonate
3 lead, 5 lead, or
12 lead
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Pediatric
3 lead, 5 lead, or
12 lead
0 PVC/min
Less than the Current HR value
(PVCs/min)
Adult
3 lead, 5 lead, or
12 lead
0 PVC/min
Less than the Current HR value
(PVCs/min)
Temp: T1,T2, Delta T, and T Blood
The Panorama Central Station supports four temperature measurements.
Units of Measure:
F° and C°
Resolution:
0.1 F° and 0.1 C°
T1 and T2
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (F°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (F°)
Neonate
59
113
Pediatric
59
113
Adult
59
113
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (C°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (C°)
Neonate
15
45
Pediatric
15
45
Adult
15
45
MINIMUM VALUE (F°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (F°)
Delta T Values
PATIENT SIZE
12 - 8
Neonate
0
9.9
Pediatric
0
9.9
Adult
0
9.9
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (C°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (C°)
Neonate
0
5.5
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Parameter Specifications
Parameter Specifications
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (C°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (C°)
Pediatric
0
5.5
Adult
0
5.5
MINIMUM VALUE (F°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (F°)
Neonate
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Pediatric
63.7
109.1
Adult
63.7
109.1
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (C°)
MAXIMUM VALUE (C°)
Neonate
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Pediatric
17.5
43
Adult
17.5
43
T Blood Values
PATIENT SIZE
12.1.14
ST
The ST parameter provides an ST measurement using ECG leads to acquire data.
PARAMETER LABELS
3-wire lead set
5-wire lead set
ST - I, ST - II, ST - III, ST - aVR, ST - aVL, ST - aVF, ST - V
View 12™ card
ST - I, ST - II, ST - III, ST - aVR, ST - aVL, ST - aVF, ST - V1, ST - V2, ST - V3,
ST - V4, ST - V5, ST - V6
Unit of Measure:
mm
Resolution:
0.1 mm
PATIENT SIZE
12.1.15
ST - I, ST - II, ST - III
MINIMUM VALUE (MM)
MAXIMUM VALUE (MM)
Neonate
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Pediatric
-10.0
10.0
Adult
-10.0
10.0
NOTE:
A (C) next to an ST measurement indicates that the value
represents a Current measurement.
NOTE:
An (R) next to an ST measurement indicates that the value
represents a Reference measurement.
Cardiac Output
Unit of Measure:
lpm
Resolution:
0.1 lpm
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (LPM)
MAXIMUM VALUE (LPM)
Adult
0.2
20.0
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
12 - 9
Parameter Specifications
12.1.16
12.1.17
12.1.18
12 - 10
Parameter Specifications
Cardiac Index
Unit of Measure:
lpm/m2
Resolution:
0.1 lpm/m2
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (LPM/M2)
MAXIMUM VALUE (LPM/M2)
Adult
0.1
20.0
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure (PAWP)
Unit of Measure:
mmHg
Resolution:
1 mmHg
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
MAXIMUM VALUE (mmHg)
Pediatric
-30
300
Adult
-30
300
Battery Percentage
Unit of Measure:
%
Resolution:
1%
PATIENT SIZE
MINIMUM VALUE
MAXIMUM VALUE
Adult
5%
100 %
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Parameter Specifications
12.2
Invalid Data Display
Invalid Data Display
The Panorama Central Station uses dashes (---), Xs (XX) or a straight line (waveform) to show
invalid data.
Dashes (---) Digital Data
Digital data is replaced with dashes (---) for the following reasons:
• Data is above the maximum value
• Data is below the minimum value
• Parameter is not available
• Lead or a sensor is off
• Sensor is not zeroed
• Parameter is zeroing
• Measurement has not been taken
• Measurement is being taken
• Measurement has timed out
• Measurement is being retried
• Parameter is turned off
• View 12™ card is relearning
• PVC/min counter reset
• Gas module or the source agent is occluded
• Gas module or the source agent is purging
• Gas module is turned off
• ST license is not available
• Learning ST Values
Xs (XX) Digital Data
Digital data is replaced with Xs (XX) for the following reasons:
• IBP parameter is not zeroed
• NIBP parameter failed to obtain a reading
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
12 - 11
Invalid Data Display
Parameter Specifications
Straight Line (Waveforms)
Waveform data is replaced with a continuous straight line for the following reasons:
• ECG leads are disconnected
• ECG cable is not connected to the system
• Respiration parameter is disabled at the bedside monitor and the source is ECG
• Respiration parameter is using a View 12™ card at the bedside monitor and the source is
ECG
• SpO2 cable is connected but not in use
• IBP cable is connected but not zeroed or is zeroing
• CO2 filter line is not in use or is zeroing
• O2 parameter is not in use
• Gas module is connected but the agent is not in use
• Gas module is connected but the agent is not detected
12 - 12
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
13.0
Alarms and Events
The alarms available at the Panorama Central Station are dependent on the patient
monitoring devices in use and on how the alarm options are configured at the Panorama
Central Station.
This section outlines the alarm types and briefly describes the events that cause alarm
conditions.
• Physiological Alarms and Events
• Physiological Alarms and Events: Arrhythmias
• Technical Alarms and Events
• System Event Messages and Error Codes
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
13 - 1
Physiological Alarms and Events
13.1
Alarms and Events
Physiological Alarms and Events
The Panorama Central Station uses physiological alarms to indicate that a patient’s
physiological alarm thresholds have been violated.
13.1.1
Alarm Limit Settings
This section identifies high and low alarm limit settings, and available alarm priorities for
each physiological alarm, by patient size. It also differentiates which alarm limit setting are
available at each monitoring device.
13 - 2
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Heart Rate Units: bpm
Heart Rate Units: bpm
0070-10-0707-02
Respiration
Units: rpm
SpO2
Units: %
SpO2 (Nonin)
Units: %
ALARM
PRIORITY
1 or 2
Factory Default: 2
1 or 2
Factory Default: 2
1, 2, and 3
Factory Default: 3
1 and 2
Factory Default: 2
1 and 2
Factory Default: 2
ALARM LIMIT
NEONATE
PEDIATRIC
ADULT
DEVICES
High Limit
Off, 100-350
Factory Default: 200
Off, 100-300
Factory Default:180
Off, 60-250
Factory Default:150
Passport 2®
Spectrum™/Spectrum OR™
Telepack
Low Limit
Off, 30-200
Factory Default: 100
Off, 30-150
Factory Default: 80
Off, 30-120
Factory Default: 50
High Limit
N/A
N/A
Off, 60-250
Factory Default:150
Low Limit
N/A
N/A
Off, 30-120
Factory Default: 50
When the central station language is configured for French, the
Heart Rate (HR) high/low alarm limit cannot be turned Off.
NOTE:
When the selected device is a Telepack, the Low Heart Rate alarm
will be called when the heart rate becomes invalid because the rate
is underrange.
Off, 30-200
Factory Default: Off
Off, 15-150
Factory Default: Off
Off, 10-100
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 5-50
Factory Default: 5
Off, 5-40
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-30
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 80-100%
Factory Default: Off
Off, 80-100%
Factory Default: Off
Off, 80-100%
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
50-99%
Factory Default: 92%
50-99%
Factory Default: 90%
50-99%
Factory Default: 85%
High Limit
N/A
N/A
Off, 80-100%
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
N/A
N/A
50-99%
Factory Default: 85%
N/A - Not Applicable
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Telepack with Nonin SpO2
module
The SpO2 high/low alarm limit will always be displayed in the
digital tile portion of the Bedside tab All Waveforms view.
High Limit
Off, 5-180
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-240
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-300
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 0-130
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-130
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-150
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
13 - 3
Physiological Alarms and Events
NOTE:
IBPx Sys.
Units: mmHg*
Telepack with Nonin SpO2
module
NOTE:
High Limit
Alarms and Events
Panorama® Operating Instructions
ALARM
ALARM
PRIORITY
IBPx Dia.
Units: mmHg*
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
IBPx Mean
Units: mmHg*
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
ALARM LIMIT
NEONATE
PEDIATRIC
ADULT
DEVICES
High Limit
Off, 0-70
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-140
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2®
Spectrum™/Spectrum OR™
Low Limit
Off, 0-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 0-120
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 5-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-150
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 2-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-100
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Physiological Alarms and Events
13 - 4
ALARM
All IBPx alarm limits apply to IBP1, IBP2, IBP3, IBP4, ART, UA, LV, PA, CVP, ICP, LA, and RA.
The Panorama Central Station is capable of monitoring up to four IBP measurements.
NOTE:
x = 1, 2, 3 or 4 (IBP3 and 4 only available if Spectrum/Spectrum OR External Parameter Module
(EPM) is installed)
NIBP Sys.
Units: mmHg
0070-10-0707-02
NIBP Dia.
Units: mmHg
NIBP Mean
Units: mmHg
INSP CO2 (mmHg)
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
Off, 40-180
Factory Default: Off
Off, 40-180
Factory Default: Off
Off, 70-240
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2
Spectrum™/Spectrum OR
Low Limit
Off, 15-130
Factory Default: Off
Off, 15-130
Factory Default: Off
Off, 15-150
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 50-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 50-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 40-130
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 10-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 10-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 30-120
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 40-160
Factory Default: Off
Off, 50-180
Factory Default: Off
Off, 60-200
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 10-70
Factory Default: Off
Off, 10-100
Factory Default: Off
Off, 40-140
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 5-30
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-30
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-30
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Low Limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
INSP CO2 (%)
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
High Limit
Low Limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
INSP CO2 (kPa)
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
High Limit
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-4
Factory Default: Off
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Low Limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A - Not Applicable
Alarms and Events
Panorama® Operating Instructions
High Limit
ET CO2 (mmHg)
ET CO2 (%)
ET CO2 (kPa)
T1/T2
Units: F°
ALARM
PRIORITY
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
ALARM LIMIT
NEONATE
PEDIATRIC
ADULT
DEVICES
High Limit
Off, 20-80
Factory Default: 60
Off, 20-80
Factory Default: 60
Off, 20-80
Factory Default: 60
Passport 2®
Spectrum™/Spectrum OR™
Low Limit
Off, 5-50
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5- 0
Factory Default: Off
Off, 5-50
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Low Limit
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Off, 2-10
Factory Default: 8
Low Limit
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-6
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 95-110°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 95-110°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 95-110°
Factory Default: Off
Alarms and Events
Panorama® Operating Instructions
ALARM
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
T1 Passport 2 and Spectrum/
Spectrum OR
0070-10-0707-02
T2 optional for Spectrum/
Spectrum OR
T1/T2
Units: C°
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
Low Limit
Off, 80-100°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 80-100°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 80-100°
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 35-43°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 35-43°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 35-43°
Factory Default: Off
T1 Passport 2 and Spectrum/
Spectrum OR
T2 optional for Spectrum/
Spectrum OR
Delta T
Units: F°
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
NOTE:
13 - 5
N/A - Not Applicable
Off, 26-38°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 26-38°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 26-38°
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 2-10°
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-5°
Factory Default: Off
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Only available if Spectrum/Spectrum OR External Parameter Module (EPM) is installed and sensor is
attached
Physiological Alarms and Events
Delta T
Units: C°
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
Low Limit
ALARM
PRIORITY
T Blood
Units: F°
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
T Blood
Units: C°
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
NOTE:
ST Single
Units: mm
0070-10-0707-02
ST Dual
Units: mm
ALARM LIMIT
NEONATE
PEDIATRIC
ADULT
DEVICES
Low Limit
N/A
Off, 80-100°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 80-100°
Factory Default: Off
Spectrum™/Spectrum OR™
High Limit
N/A
Off, 95-110°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 95-110°
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
N/A
Off, 26-38°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 26-38°
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
N/A
Off, 35-43°
Factory Default: Off
Off, 35-43°
Factory Default: Off
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Physiological Alarms and Events
13 - 6
ALARM
Only available if Spectrum/Spectrum OR External Parameter Module (EPM) is installed and sensor is
attached
1, 2 or 3
Factory Default: 2
1, 2 or 3
Factory Default: 2
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
Apnea Delay
Units: Seconds
2 or 3
Factory Default: 3
N/A
Off,
0.50 to10.0
Factory Default: Off
Off,
0.50 to 10.0
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
N/A
Off,
(-0.5) to
(-10.0)
Factory Default: Off
Off,
(-0.5) to
(-10.0)
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
N/A
Off,
0.50-10.0
Factory Default: Off
Off,
0.50-10.0
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
N/A
Off,
(-0.5) - (-10.0)
Factory Default: Off
Off,
(-0.5) - (-10.0)
Factory Default: Off
High Limit
N/A
Off, 1-30
Factory Default: Off
Off, 1-30
Factory Default: Off
Low Limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
High Limit
10-20
Factory Default: 15
10-20
Factory Default: 15
10-60
Factory Default: 60
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Telepack
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Telepack
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Telepack
Passport 2
Spectrum/Spectrum OR
Low Limit
N/A - Not Applicable
Alarms and Events
Panorama® Operating Instructions
PVC
Units:
PVCs/min
High Limit
Alarms and Events
13.1.2
Physiological Alarms and Events
Physiological Alarm Event Messages
This section lists the alarm messages that may appear at the Panorama Central Station when
an Physiological alarm event occurs.
PANORAMA CENTRAL
STATION MESSAGES
REASON
Heart Rate (HR)
High Heart Rate Alarm
Low Heart Rate Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
Respiration (ECG
Thoracic
Impedance, CO2,
and Gas Module)
High Respiration Rate
Alarm
Low Respiration Rate
Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
SpO2 (Masimo
SET®, Nellcor®,
Nonin)
High SpO2 Alarm
Low SpO2 Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
IBPx (Sys) Labels
include: IBP1,
IBP2, IBP3, IBP4,
ART, UA, LV, PA,
CVP, ICP, LA, RA
High IBPx Systolic Alarm
Low IBPx Systolic Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
IBPx (Dia) Labels
include: IBP1,
IBP2, IBP3, IBP4,
ART, UA, LV, PA,
CVP, ICP, LA, RA
High IBPx Diastolic Alarm
Low IBPx Diastolic Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
IBPx (Mean)
Labels include:
IBP1, IBP2, IBP3,
IBP4, ART, UA, LV,
PA, CVP, ICP, LA,
RA
High IBPx Mean Alarm
Low IBPx Mean Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
PARAMETER
NOTE:
x = 1, 2, 3 or 4 (IBP3 and 4 are only available if the
Spectrum/Spectrum OR External Parameter Module
(EPM) is installed.)
INSP CO2
(mmHg, %, kPa)
High CO2 Inspired Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher than
the set alarm limits.
ET CO2
(mmHg,%, kPa)
High CO2 ET Alarm
Low CO2 ET Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
INSP O2
O2 Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the O2 Inspired
alarm.
ET O2
O2 ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the O2 ET alarm.
INSP N2O
N2O Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the N2O Inspired
alarm.
ET N2O
N2O ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the N2O ET alarm.
Agent
Agent Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Agent Inspired
alarm.
Agent ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Agent ET
alarm.
INSP Iso
Agent Iso Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Iso Inspired
alarm.
ET Iso
Agent Iso ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Iso ET alarm.
INSP Enf
Agent Enf Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Enf Inspired
alarm.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
13 - 7
Physiological Alarms and Events
13 - 8
Alarms and Events
PARAMETER
PANORAMA CENTRAL
STATION MESSAGES
REASON
ET Enf
Agent Enf ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Enf ET alarm.
INSP Des
Agent Des Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Des Inspired
alarm.
ET Des
Agent Des ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Des ET alarm.
INSP Sev
Agent Sev Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Sev Inspired
alarm.
ET Sev
Agent Sev ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Sev ET alarm.
INSP Hal
Agent Hal Inspired Alarm
There has been a violation of the Hal Inspired
alarm.
ET Hal
Agent Hal ET Alarm
There has been a violation of the Hal ET alarm.
NIBP (Sys)
High NIBP Sys Alarm
Low NIBP Sys Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
NIBP (Dia)
High NIBP Dia Alarm
Low NIBP Dia Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
NIBP (Mean)
High NIBP Mean Alarm
Low NIBP Mean Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
T1 (F/C)
High Temp 1 Alarm
Low Temp 1 Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
T2 (F/C)
High Temp 2 Alarm
Low Temp 2 Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
Delta T (F/C)
High Delta T Alarm
Low Delta T Alarm
Current value either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
T Blood (F/C)
Low T Blood Alarm
High T Blood Alarm
Current value is either equal to or higher/lower
than the set alarm limits.
ST Single
ST Single Alarm
Current value of one ST lead is either equal to or
higher/lower than the set alarm limits.
A separate ST Single alarm will be shown for
each lead of ST that independently violates the
alarm.
ST Dual
ST Dual Alarm
Current value for two or more ST leads are either
equal to or higher/lower than the set alarm
limits.
A separate ST Dual alarm will be shown for
every two leads of ST that independently violate
the alarm.
Apnea
Apnea Alarm
Apneic episode is either equal to or longer than
the set alarm limits.
PVC
High PVC Alarm
Current PVCs/per minute threshold is in
violation.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Alarms and Events
13.2
Physiological Alarms and Events: Arrhythmias
Physiological Alarms and Events: Arrhythmias
This section lists the alarm messages that may appear at the Panorama Central Station when
an Arrhythmia alarm occurs.
Arrhythmia Alarms
ALARM
PRIORITY
PANORAMA
CENTRAL STATION
MESSAGES
1
V-Tach
The configured number of consecutive
PVCs is reached at a rate equal to or
greater than the V-Tach threshold. The
range of the V-Tach heart rate is
between 100 to 180 beats per minute.
The range of the V-Tach threshold is 3-15
bpm.
V-Fib1
1
V-Fib
There is an absence of recognizable P,
QRS or T waves.
Asystole1
1
Asystole
There are no QRS complexes detected
for the configured time period in the
absence of Ventricular Fibrillation.
When using a View 12™ card, the time
period range for an Asystole alarm is
between three (3) and ten (10) seconds,
and between three (3) and eight (8)
seconds when using a 3 or 5-wire lead
set.
Bigeminy
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
Bigeminy
There are three or more cycles of one
PVC followed by a normal beat.
Couplet
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
Couplet
There are two consecutive PVCs
detected between normal beats.
Irregular HR
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
Irregular HR
The measured variation in the R-R
interval over a period of time exceeds a
preset limit established by the
arrhythmia algorithm.
Run
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
Run
There are a number of consecutive PVCs
occurring at a rate that exceeds the
configured V-Tach rate.
Trigeminy
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
Trigeminy
Three or more cycles of one PVC
coupled to two normal beats are
detected.
V-Rhythm
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
V-Rhythm
The number of consecutive PVCs is
greater than two and the ventricular rate
is less than the configured V-Tach
threshold.
PVC
2,3 or Off
Factory
Default: 3
High PVC
The number of PVCs detected per minute
exceeds the configured threshold.
EVENT
V-Tach
1
2
3
1
REASON
Indicates alarm is latched.
Alarm will only be detected when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm will not be detected when using a View 12™ card.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
13 - 9
Physiological Alarms and Events: Arrhythmias
EVENT
ALARM
PRIORITY
PANORAMA
CENTRAL STATION
MESSAGES
REASON
Brady3
1 or Off
Factory
Default: 1
Brady
Heart rate fell to a value 10 % lower
than the configured low heart rate
alarm.
Pause2
1,2,3 or
Off
Factory
Default: 2
Pause
No beat is detected during an interval
that is greater than 1.8 R-R and when
the next beat is not a PVC.
1
2
3
13 - 10
Alarms and Events
Indicates alarm is latched.
Alarm will only be detected when using a View 12™ card.
Alarm will not be detected when using a View 12™ card.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Alarms and Events
13.3
Technical Alarms and Events
Technical Alarms and Events
The Panorama Central Station uses Technical alarms to indicate that a patient specific
technical issue has occurred.
This section provides the technical event messages that may be posted to the Events database
and shown in white text (with the exception of the All Alarms Suspended and Non-Lethal
Alarms Suspended events) in the Patient Status line. When a number is indicated beside the
event message, refer to the table footnotes.
Technical Events
MESSAGE
REASON
All Alarms Suspended
1,2
The Suspend All Alarms sidebar button was
selected in the Patient Alarms tabs.
NOTE: This event message will display
in red text in the Patient Status
line.
Resume All Alarms
1,2,3
A patient’s alarms are to resume.
Non-Lethal Alarms Suspended
1,2
The Suspend Non-Lethal sidebar button is
selected in the Patient Alarms tabs.
NOTE: This event message will display
in yellow text in the Patient
Status line.
Resume Non-Lethal Alarms
Communications Lost
1,2,3
4,5
A patient’s non-lethal alarms are set to resume.
The connection between the Panorama Central
Station and the attached monitoring equipment
has been interrupted.
Central Communications Lost 4
The connection between the host central station
and the ViewStation has been interrupted.
Signal Lost-Limited Arrhythmia4
A Telepack is in use, arrhythmia analysis is
enabled, and there are multiple disruptions of
data that may affect the performance of the
arrhythmia algorithm.
Signal Lost 4
A Telepack is in use, arrhythmia analysis is
disabled, and there are multiple disruptions of
data.
Standby
1,2
A patient was placed into Standby mode. In
Standby mode, all of the patient’s monitoring
activity is suspended.
NOTE: Message will not be shown in
the Patient Status line. Instead,
message and/or Standby
location will be shown in the
patient’s digital data tile in pink
text.
Resume Monitoring
1
2
3
4
5
1,2
The patient was removed from Standby mode.
Event cannot be deleted from Event database
Event will not elicit technical event sound
Event will not display in Patient Status line
Event will always elicit the technical event sound regardless of the Technical Event sound setting
Event will post a Page request when the central station has the paging option enabled and the alarm is
configured to send a page
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
13 - 11
Technical Alarms and Events
Alarms and Events
Technical Events (Continued)
MESSAGE
REASON
Low Battery
5
The monitoring equipment battery is low.
NOTE: If the Low Battery message
appears and the monitoring
device is a Telepack, the Battery
Percentage digital data tile will
flash yellow until the issue is
resolved.
Cooling Fan Failure
Admit
The bedside monitor cooling fan is not
operational and the monitor is running on AC
power.
2,3
A patient is admitted to the Panorama Central
Station.
Discharge
The patient was discharged from the Panorama
Central Station.
Arrhythmia On
1,2,3
The Arrhythmia option is enabled on a patient’s
monitoring equipment.
Arrhythmia Off
1,2,3
The Arrhythmia option is disabled on a patient’s
monitoring equipment.
ST On 1,2,3
The ST option is enabled on a patient’s
monitoring equipment.
ST Off 1,2,3
The ST option is disabled on a patient’s
monitoring equipment.
ST Relearn
2,3
The ST algorithm completes a learning phase.
Arrhythmia Relearn
2,3
The arrhythmia algorithm completes a learning
phase.
Central User Marked Event
2,3
Bedside User Marked Event
Calipers Marked Event
Central Transfer
Room Transfer
2,3
2,3
2,3
The user has marked an event at the central
station.
The user has marked an event at the bedside
monitor.
The user has marked a caliper event at the
Panorama Central Station
A central-to-central transfer has been successfully
completed at the central station.
2,3
A room-to-room transfer has been successfully
completed at the central station.
HEART RATE TECHNICAL EVENTS
Check Lead Connections
4,5
The RA lead is not connected to the patient, ECG
lead I or II is selected while using a 3-wire lead
set, 5-wire lead set or a View 12™ card.
LA Lead Off
4,5
The LA lead is not connected to the patient, ECG
lead I or III is selected while using a 3-wire lead
set, 5-wire lead set, or a View 12™ card.
1
2
3
4
5
13 - 12
The bedside monitor detects a lead off condition.
RA Lead Off
Event cannot be deleted from Event database
Event will not elicit technical event sound
Event will not display in Patient Status line
Event will always elicit the technical event sound regardless of the Technical Event sound setting
Event will post a Page request when the central station has the paging option enabled and the alarm is
configured to send a page
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Alarms and Events
Technical Alarms and Events
Technical Events (Continued)
MESSAGE
REASON
4,5
LL Lead Off
Leads Off
The LL lead is not connected to the patient, ECG
lead II or III is selected while using a 3-wire lead,
5-wire lead set, or View 12™ card.
4,5
V Lead Off
Two or more of the ECG leads are not connected
to the patient and a 3-wire lead set, 5-wire lead
set or a View 12™ card is in use. It will also be
shown when using a 3-wire lead set and ECG I,
II, or III is shown and the LL, LA, or RA leads are
off, respectively. When using a View 12™ card
and two or more leads are off, unless one of the
disconnected leads is the RL lead. If a 5-wire lead
set is in use and the RL lead is off.
4,5
V1-V6 Lead Off
A V lead is not connected to the patient and a
5-wire lead set is in use.
4,5
A V1-6 lead is not connected to the patient and a
View 12™ card is in use.
ECG Noise 4
Noise is present on one or more leads.
RESPIRATION (ECG THORACIC IMPEDANCE) TECHNICAL EVENTS
Respiration CVA Present
A CVA condition is detected for the monitored
patient.
SPO2 (MASIMO SET® AND NELLCOR®) TECHNICAL EVENTS
SpO2 System Check
There is an SpO2 system check.
SpO2 Communication Error
There is interference in the communication
between the SpO2 source and the bedside
monitor.
SpO2 Failure
A faulty 5V power supply or a faulty positive or
negative 15V power supply is detected on the
SpO2 board.
SpO2 Board Fault
The SpO2 board fails.
SpO2 Unrecognized Cable
The system detects an unrecognized SpO2 cable.
SpO2 Pulse Search
The SpO2 sensor is attempting to detect a pulse.
SpO2 Weak Pulse
The SpO2 sensor detects a weak pulse.
SPO2 (MASIMO) TECHNICAL EVENTS
SpO2 Low Perfusion
The SpO2 Masimo sensor detects low perfusion.
SpO2 Too Much Light
The SpO2 Masimo sensor detects too much light.
SpO2 Unrecognized Sensor
An unrecognized SpO2 Masimo sensor is
detected by the system.
SpO2 Sensor Off
The SpO2 Masimo sensor is off.
1
2
3
4
5
Event cannot be deleted from Event database
Event will not elicit technical event sound
Event will not display in Patient Status line
Event will always elicit the technical event sound regardless of the Technical Event sound setting
Event will post a Page request when the central station has the paging option enabled and the alarm is
configured to send a page
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
13 - 13
Technical Alarms and Events
Alarms and Events
Technical Events (Continued)
MESSAGE
REASON
SpO2 No Sensor
The SpO2 Masimo sensor is not plugged in.
SpO2 Sensor Failed
Communication with the SpO2 Masimo sensor
failed.
SpO2 Interference
There is interference in the communication with
the SpO2 Masimo sensor.
SPO2 (NELLCOR) TECHNICAL EVENTS
SpO2 Motion
The SpO2 Nellcor sensor detects motion.
SpO2 Check Sensor
The SpO2 Nellcor sensor detects a problem.
SpO2 No Pulse
The SpO2 Nellcor sensor does not detect a pulse.
SPO2 (NONIN) TECHNICAL EVENTS
SpO2 (NONIN) Communication Error
There is interference in the communication
between the SpO2 source and the Telepack.
SpO2 Check Sensor
The SpO2 (Nonin) sensor detects a problem.
SpO2 No Sensor
The SpO2 (Nonin) sensor is not plugged in or the
sensor is inoperable.
SpO2 Low Perfusion
The SpO2 (Nonin) sensor detects low perfusion.
SpO2 Pulse Search
The SpO2 (Nonin) sensor is attempting to detect a
pulse.
IBPX TECHNICAL EVENTS
IBPx (Labels include: Art, UA, LV, PA, CVP,
ICP, LA,RA) Not Calibrated/Zeroed
NOTE:
The IBP device is not calibrated or zeroed.
x = 1, 2, 3 or 4 (IBP3 and 4 are only available if the
Spectrum/Spectrum OR External Parameter Module
(EPM) is installed)
CO2 TECHNICAL EVENTS
CO2 Not Calibrated/Zeroed
The CO2 device is not calibrated.
CO2 Occlusion
The CO2 device detects a blockage in the filter
line.
O2 TECHNICAL EVENTS
O2 Not Calibrated/Zeroed
The O2 device is not calibrated.
O2 Zeroing
The O2 device is zeroing.
O2 Occlusion
The O2 device detects a blockage in the filter
line.
N2O TECHNICAL EVENTS
N2O Not Calibrated/Zeroed
The N2O device is not calibrated.
N2O Zeroing
The N2O device is zeroing.
N2O Occlusion
The N2O device detects a blockage in the filter
line.
1
2
3
4
5
13 - 14
Event cannot be deleted from Event database
Event will not elicit technical event sound
Event will not display in Patient Status line
Event will always elicit the technical event sound regardless of the Technical Event sound setting
Event will post a Page request when the central station has the paging option enabled and the alarm is
configured to send a page
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Alarms and Events
Technical Alarms and Events
Technical Events (Continued)
MESSAGE
REASON
AGENT TECHNICAL EVENTS
Agent Not Calibrated/Zeroed
The Agent device is not calibrated.
NIBP TECHNICAL EVENTS
NIBP Cuff Overpressure
The patient’s NIBP cuff has an overpressure
episode.
NIBP Unable to Measure
The patient’s NIBP cuff is unable to take a valid
measurement.
NIBP Retry
There is an NIBP measurement retry.
NIBP Pump Higher
The patient’s NIBP cuff needs additional pressure
to take a measurement.
NIBP Measuring
The patient’s NIBP cuff is inflating.
NIBP Deflating
The patient’s NIBP cuff is deflating.
CARDIAC OUTPUT TECHNICAL EVENTS
New CO Measurement
NOTE:
2,3
The Cardiac Output run was accepted at the
bedside monitor.
The CO parameter is only available when the Spectrum/
Spectrum OR External Parameter Module (EPM) is
installed.
PAWP TECHNICAL EVENTS
New PAWP Measurement
2,3
The PAWP value was accepted on the bedside
monitor.
NURSE CALL TECHNICAL EVENTS
Nurse Call
4
The Nurse Call button on the Telepack was
selected.
ATTENDANT PRESENT TECHNICAL EVENTS
Attendant Present
2,3
The Attendant Present buttons on the Telepack
were selected.
BEDSIDE PRINTER TECHNICAL EVENTS
Printer out of paper
The bedside monitor local printer is out of paper.
Printer Door is Open
The bedside monitor local printer has an open
door condition.
CENTRAL COMMUNICATION TECHNICAL EVENTS
Central Communications Lost
1
2
3
4
5
The connection between the ViewStation and the
host central station was interrupted.
Event cannot be deleted from Event database
Event will not elicit technical event sound
Event will not display in Patient Status line
Event will always elicit the technical event sound regardless of the Technical Event sound setting
Event will post a Page request when the central station has the paging option enabled and the alarm is
configured to send a page
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
13 - 15
System Event Messages and Error Codes
13.4
Alarms and Events
System Event Messages and Error Codes
The Panorama Central Station displays system event messages and error codes to indicate
system-wide issues at the central station and/or at the ViewStation. They are listed based on
the system violation, and are resolved when the system-wide condition no longer exists.
This section provides the system event messages and error codes that may be shown in the
System Status line in white text.
System Event Messages and Error Codes
MESSAGE
REASON
No Printer Selected or
Available
When the print request was made at the central station or remote
workstation, no printer was selected, printer was unavailable, or
printer was not properly configured.
Printer Offline
The central station or remote workstation default printer’s Offline
button is selected.
NOTE: Button may not be labeled "Offline." Refer to
printer user guide for specific button name.
13 - 16
Printer Paper Jam
The central station or remote workstation default printer paper
tray is removed as the print job is starting to print.
Printer Out of Paper
The central station or remote workstation default printer is out of
paper.
Clock Adjusted
The central station or remote workstation system time or date was
adjusted.
Print Halted…Print Queue
Full
The central station or remote workstation default printer has been
halted because the print queue is full.
Printer error - no toner
The central station or remote workstation default printer toner is
low.
Printer in error state
The central station or remote workstation default printer has an
error that is not related to any of the previous messages.
All Alarms Muted for x:xx
secs
The Mute All menu button was selected at the ViewStation or
WorkStation.
All Alarms Muted
Permanently
The Mute All menu button was selected at the ViewStation or
WorkStation and the Permanent option was selected.
Touch Screen OFF
The central station or remote touch screen if off.
System Service required Contact Mindray or
Authorized Mindray
Distributor (100)
This message will be displayed after the central station and/or
workstation automatically restarted because a system issue was
detected.
System Service required Contact Mindray or
Authorized Mindray
Distributor (101)
This message will be displayed if the system performed an
auto-reboot due to the GUI process not running.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Alarms and Events
Operator Position
System Event Messages and Error Codes
13.5
MESSAGE
REASON
System Service required Contact Mindray or
Authorized Mindray
Distributor (104)
This message will be displayed if a fatal system error has
occurred.
System Service required Contact Mindray or
Authorized Mindray
Distributor (300)
The central station or remote workstation has detected a hard
drive error.
CAUTION:
It is important to notify Service
personnel when the system event
message “System Service required Contact Mindray or Authorized
Mindray Distributor ... (300).” is
displayed. This message indicates that
while data was being written to or
read from the system hard drive, an
error was detected. Until service
personnel correct this issue, patient
data may be lost (for example,
demographic information, alarm
configurations, and historical patient
data). Real time parameter monitoring
and alarm checking will not be
affected by this message. This
message will be displayed until reset
by service personnel.
Operator Position
The operator of the device should be positioned in front of the Panorama Patient Monitoring
Network Display at a distance of no more than 1m.
13.6
Alarm Verification
Alarms can be verified by creating an alarm condition on a connected patient monitor and
verifying the alarm is present on the Panorama Patient Monitoring Network Display in a
normal operator's position.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
13 - 17
Alarm Verification
Alarms and Events
This page intentionally left blank.
13 - 18
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
14.0
Network Tab (Optional)
This section outlines how to configure a ViewStation or a WorkStation to display patient tiles
from a Panorama Central Station(s) using the Network tab.
•
Network Tab
•
Troubleshooting
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
14 - 1
Network Tab
14.1
Network Tab (Optional)
Network Tab
The Network tab (shown in FIGURE 14-1) is where the accessible patient tiles currently
monitored on the C-LAN are displayed. These patient tiles may be selected for viewing at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation. The Network tab can only be seen from a ViewStation or
a WorkStation and is not available from the host central station. The ViewStation and
WorkStation are independent of each other. For example, if a patient is added to a patient
tile at a ViewStation, the WorkStation will not be affected unless the same patient is added to
a patient tile at the WorkStation.
NOTE:
14.1.1
The host central station(s) C-LAN configuration settings and
the software installed at the remote location dictates the
functionality available for each patient tile. For additional
information, refer to ‘‘The ViewStation and the
WorkStation’’ on page 2-4.
Accessing the Network Tab
•
From the ViewStation or WorkStation menu bar (shown in FIGURE 2-8 on page 2-11),
select the Network button. The Network tab is displayed (shown in FIGURE 14-1).
FIGURE 14-1 Network Tab
14.1.2
Sorting the Contents of the Network Tab List Box
When the Network tab is first accessed, it will automatically be sorted in ascending order,
by the numerical tile assignment number. To sort by another column in the list box, select
another column heading, and the rows will be resorted based on the selection. Any changes
made to the list after it has been sorted, for example a tile assignment is removed, another
Network tab dialog is opened from another remote location, or the Network tab is
closed, will cancel the previous sort order.
14.1.3
Assigning Patient Tiles in the Network Tab
The Add button assigns a ViewStation or WorkStation tile number to the selected row in the
Network tab list box. Once a patient in the Network tab list box is assigned a tile
number, the patient’s data (which is monitored at the host central station) can be seen at the
ViewStation or WorkStation.
14 - 2
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Network Tab (Optional)
Network Tab
NOTE:
Once a tile is assigned to an associated tile at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation, the association to the host
patient tile will continue to exist, even if the patient is
discharged or the monitoring equipment is removed from
the Equipment List at the host central station. Therefore,
when a new patient is admitted to the host central station,
the patient data will automatically be displayed at the
associated ViewStation or the WorkStation tile.
NOTE:
To determine which host patient tile the ViewStation or the
WorkStation tile is associated with, scroll to the Central
column in the Network tab.
To assign a patient tile in the Network tab:
1. Select a row in the Network tab list box that does not contain a tile assignment
number.
2. Select the Add button. The Tile Number list box is displayed (shown in FIGURE 14-2).
FIGURE 14-2 Tile Number List Box
NOTE:
The ViewStation or WorkStation single or dual display
configuration dictates the maximum number of tiles that can
be assigned. Table 14-1 shows how many tiles can be
assigned when using a single or dual display configuration.
TABLE 14-1
VIEW ONLY WORKSTATION CONFIGURATION
NUMBER OF TILES
Single display - 8 tiles
0-7
Single display - 12 tiles
0 - 11
Dual display - 24 tiles
0 - 23
3. Select a tile from the list box.
4. Accept or reject the selection.
• Select the Done button to accept the tile assignment and display the patient’s data,
from the assigned tile, at the ViewStation or WorkStation within five (5) seconds.
• Select the Cancel button to reject the tile assignment and close the Tile Number list
box.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
14 - 3
Network Tab
14.1.4
Network Tab (Optional)
Removing a Patient Tile Assignment in the Network Tab
The Remove button clears the selected rows’ patient tile assignment from the Network tab
list box and discontinues displaying the selected host patient tile’s data at the ViewStation or
WorkStation.
NOTE:
Removing a patient tile assignment at the ViewStation or
WorkStation will eliminate the connection to the associated
host central station patient tile. Therefore, when a patient is
admitted to the host central station tile, the patient data will
not be displayed at the ViewStation or the WorkStation until
another tile association has been established.
To remove a single tile assignment from the Network tab:
1. Select a row in the Network tab multi-column list box that contains a number in the
Tile Assignment column.
2. Select the Remove button. The message Are you sure? is displayed.
• Select the Yes button to remove the number displayed in the Tile Assignment
column, discontinue displaying monitored data for the selected patient tile at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation, and close the message box.
• Select the No button to continue displaying monitored data for the selected patient tile
at the ViewStation or the WorkStation, cancel the remove request, and close the
message box.
14.1.5
Removing All Patient Tile Assignments in the Network Tab
The Remove All button clears all previously assigned patient tile numbers from the
Network tab list box and discontinues displaying all of the patient tiles monitored data at
the ViewStation or WorkStation.
To clear all the tile assignments from the Network tab:
•
From the Network tab, select the Remove All button. The message Are you sure?
is displayed.
• Select the Yes button to erase all the assigned tile numbers in the Tile Assignment
column, discontinue displaying monitored data for all the tiles at the ViewStation or the
WorkStation, and close the message box.
• Select the No button to continue displaying monitored data for all patients at the
ViewStation or the WorkStation, cancel the remove all request, and close the message
box.
14.1.6
Refreshing the Network Tab List Box
The Refresh button updates the Network tab list box for any changes that may have
occurred while the Network tab was open. Once the Refresh button is selected, the
Network tab list box will regenerate if:
14 - 4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Network Tab (Optional)
14.1.7
Network Tab
•
Any new equipment is added at the host central station
•
Any existing equipment is removed from the host central station
•
Any existing equipment is edited at the host central station
•
Any patient demographic information (Last Name, First Name, ID, Bed, Doctor) or
Central Station name/tile number is edited at the host central station
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Network tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
The Add button disabled.
No row has been selected in
the Network tab list box.
Select a row in the Network
tab list box.
Selected row is already
assigned to a tile at the
ViewStation or WorkStation.
Select a different row.
The Remove button is
disabled.
The selected row(s) in the
Network tab does not
currently have a tile
assignment(s) or no tile(s) have
been assigned at the
ViewStation or WorkStation.
Establish tile assignment(s) at
the ViewStation or
WorkStation.
The Remove All button is
disabled.
No tile(s) have been assigned
at the ViewStation or
WorkStation.
Establish tile assignment(s) at
the ViewStation or
WorkStation.
You have reached the
maximum number of
channel licenses
available.
All the tiles at the ViewStation
or WorkStation are currently
occupied.
Remove a patient from one of
the patient tiles at the
ViewStation or WorkStation.
Patient tile no longer
displaying patient data at
ViewStation or WorkStation.
Communication between the
host central station and the
ViewStation or WorkStation
has been interrupted (Central
Communication Lost state).
Contact a Service
Representative.
A Room to Room Without
Device transfer out for the host
tile has been completed.
Refresh the Network tab list
box, and then assign the
transferred patient tile to an
available tile at the
ViewStation or WorkStation.
A Central to Central Without
Device transfer out for the host
tile has been accepted.
Refresh the Network tab list
box, and then assign the
transferred patient tile to an
available tile at the
ViewStation or WorkStation.
Host tile at central station is in
a Discharge state.
Retrieve patient from Discharge
list, if possible, then reassign
the retrieved patient tile to an
available tile at the
ViewStation or WorkStation.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
14 - 5
Network Tab
Network Tab (Optional)
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
ViewStation or WorkStation tile
goes into a Communication
Lost state
Host tile at central station is in
a Lost Communication state.
Reestablish communication at
host central station, and if
necessary, contact a Service
Representative.
ViewStation or WorkStation tile
goes into a Standby state
Host tile at central station is in
a Standby state.
Wait for host patient tile to be
removed from Standby state.
Patient tile not available in
Network tab list box
Network tab needs to be
refreshed.
Select the Network tab
Refresh button.
ViewStation or WorkStation is
in a Central Communication
Lost state.
Contact a Service
Representative.
Patient not currently being
monitored on any of the C-LAN
central stations.
Admit the patient to a central
station on the C-LAN, then
assign the patient to an
available tile at the
ViewStation or WorkStation.
Host patient tile information is
displayed at the host central
station but not at the
ViewStation or WorkStation
Association between host
central station patient tile and
ViewStation or WorkStation
patient tile has not been
established.
Assign the tile in the Network
tab at the ViewStation or
WorkStation.
Selected tile is currently
assigned.
Attempted to assign a patient
tile at the ViewStation or
WorkStation that is already
assigned.
Assign the patient to another
tile number, if one is available.
*
14 - 6
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
15.0
Paging Tab (Optional)
This section outlines the functionality of the Paging tab and describes how to configure
pagers to properly function with the Panorama Central Station(s), when this option has been
purchased.
• Paging Password Tab
• Paging Tab
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
15 - 1
Paging Password Tab
15.1
Paging Tab (Optional)
Paging Password Tab
The Paging password tab (shown in FIGURE 15-1) provides password protected access to
the system paging configuration tab. When the correct password is entered, the Paging tab
is opened.
The Paging password tab is only shown if the Paging Password Protection option is set to
ON in the Unit Choices tab. If Paging Password Protection is OFF, the Paging menu
button provides direct access to the Paging tab. For additional information regarding the
Unit Choices tab, refer to “Unit Choices Tab” on page 9-50.
The Paging tab is not available at the ViewStation.
15.1.1
Accessing the Paging Tab
From the Menu Bar, select the Paging menu button. The Paging password tab is displayed.
FIGURE 15-1 Paging Password tab
15.1.2
Entering a Password
To enter a password:
1. Select the Password text box in the Paging password tab. The keyboard dialog box
is displayed.
2. Use the keyboard dialog box to enter the password that was created in the Passwords
tab (maximum 15 characters). For security purposes asterisks (*) are shown for each
typed character. For additional information regarding passwords, refer to the
‘‘Passwords Tab’’ on page 9-29 or contact your System Administrator.
NOTE:
Passwords are case sensitive.
• The Backspace (<==) button clears a single character in the edit box
• The Caps Lock button enables/disables the caps lock function. A Caps Lock
indicator is shown when Caps Lock is enabled.
• The Close button discards the changes
• The Enter button accepts changes
15 - 2
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Paging Tab (Optional)
Paging Password Tab
3. The Paging tab (shown in FIGURE 15-2) is displayed after the correct password is
entered.
15.1.3
Sidebar Buttons
The following sidebar button is used to expand the functionality of this tab.
Normal Screen
Select the Normal Screen sidebar button to return the display to the full screen mode, and
close all tabs, message boxes, and dialog boxes.
15.1.4
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Paging password tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Incorrect password.
Please try again.
The wrong password was
entered in the Password text
box.
Select the OK button to close the
dialog box. Enter the correct
password in the text box.
The password was entered in
the wrong case.
Re-enter the password turning on/off
the keyboard dialog Caps Lock key.
Incorrect password.
This is your last
chance. Please try
again
The wrong password was
entered two consecutive times
in the Password text box.
Select the OK button to close the
dialog box. Enter the correct
password in the text box.
The Paging password tab
closes and the central
station is returned to a full
screen monitoring display.
The wrong password was
entered three consecutive
times in the Password text
box.
Reopen the Paging password tab
and enter the correct password in the
text box.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
15 - 3
Paging Tab
15.2
Paging Tab (Optional)
Paging Tab
The Paging tab allows for the configuration of pager information for a Panorama Central
Station that has the paging option enabled. If the central station does not have a Paging
button on the system Menu Bar, this is an indication that the workstation does not have the
Paging option installed.
15.2.1
Accessing the Paging Tab
1. From the Menu Bar, select the Paging button.
2. If the Paging password tab is displayed, enter the password in the Password text
box. The Paging tab is displayed (shown in FIGURE 15-2).
NOTE:
The Paging tab list box is displayed in ascending order by
pager number.
FIGURE 15-2 Paging Tab
15.2.2
Adding a Pager
To add a pager:
1. From the Paging tab, select the Add Pager sidebar button. The Pager Details dialog
(shown in FIGURE 15-3) is displayed.
NOTE:
The Pager Number and Pager Assignment are required
fields.
FIGURE 15-3 Pager Details Dialog
2. Select the Pager Number text box. The keypad dialog box is displayed.
3. Use the numeric keypad to enter the pager number (maximum of 14 alphanumeric
characters), then select the OK button. The numeric keypad closes and the Pager
Details dialog is displayed.
15 - 4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Paging Tab (Optional)
Paging Tab
NOTE:
Pager numbers must be unique. If an existing pager number
is entered, the message “Pager Number already exists!
Please enter a new number.” is displayed.
4. Enter the name of the person who will be responsible for the pager or some other
identifying information in the Pager Assignment text box (maximum of 30
alphanumeric characters).
NOTE:
Pager assignments must be unique. If an existing pager
assignment is entered, the message “This Pager Assignment
already exists. Please enter a new assignment.” is
displayed.
5. Accept or reject the entry made in the keyboard dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the entry, closes the dialog box, and updates the Paging
tab list box.
• The Cancel button discards the entry, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Paging tab.
NOTE:
15.2.3
The decimal button shall be disabled in the Pager
Assignment keyboard.
Assigning a Patient Tile
To assign a patient tile to a pager:
1. From the Paging tab list box, select a pager.
2. Select the Add Tile button. The Tile Number dialog box (shown in FIGURE 15-4) is
displayed. The number of tiles that are displayed is dependent on the number of
configured central station displays and available patient tiles. For additional
information, refer to TABLE 15-1 .
FIGURE 15-4 Tile Number dialog box
TABLE 15-1
CENTRAL STATION CONFIGURATION
PATIENT TILE NUMBER
Single display - 8 tiles
0-7
Single display - 12 tiles
0 - 11
Dual display - 16 tiles
0 - 15
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
15 - 5
Paging Tab
Paging Tab (Optional)
3. Select a tile number.
NOTE:
The list box will only include patient tiles that are not
currently assigned to the selected pager.
NOTE:
A patient tile number can be assigned to a maximum of 10
pagers.
4. Accept or reject the selections made in the list box.
• The Done button accepts the selection, closes the dialog box, and updates the
Paging tab list box.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Paging tab.
5. Repeat steps 2 - 4 to continue adding patient tiles to the selected pager, if necessary.
NOTE:
15.2.4
Multiple tile assignments will be separated by a comma (,)
in the Tile column.
Adding All Patient Tiles to a Pager
To assign all available patient tiles to a pager:
1. From the Paging tab list box, select a pager.
2. Select the Add All Tiles button. The Are you sure you want to Add All Tiles?
question dialog box is displayed.
• The Yes selection confirms the selection, closes the question dialog box, and updates
the Tile column in the Paging tab list box.
• The No selection cancels the selection, closes the confirmation dialog, and returns to
the Paging tab list box.
15.2.5
Removing a Patient Tile Assignment
To remove an existing tile assignment from a pager:
1. From the Paging tab list box, select a pager.
2. Select the Remove Tile button. The Tile Number dialog box (shown in FIGURE 15-4) is
displayed. The number of tiles that are displayed is dependent on the number of patient
tiles assigned to the selected pager.
3. Select a patient tile.
4. Accept or reject the selections made in the list box.
• The Done button accepts the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Paging tab where the list box updates are displayed.
• The Cancel button discards the selection, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Paging tab.
15.2.6
Removing All Patient Tiles from a Pager
To remove all patient tiles assignments from a pager:
1. From the Paging tab list box, select a pager.
15 - 6
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Paging Tab (Optional)
Paging Tab
2. Select the Remove All Tiles button. The Are you sure you want to Remove All
Tiles? question dialog box is displayed.
• The Yes selection confirms the selection, closes the question dialog box, and updates
the Tile column in the Paging tab list box.
• The No selection cancels the selection, closes the confirmation dialog, and returns to
the Paging tab list box.
15.2.7
Editing a Pager
To edit an existing pager number or pager assignment:
1. Select the pager from the Paging tab list box.
2. Select the Edit Pager sidebar button. The Pager Details dialog box is displayed.
FIGURE 15-5 Pager Details (Edit Mode)
3. Edit the pager information.
NOTE:
The Pager Number and Pager Assignment are required
fields.
4. Accept or reject the changes made in the dialog box.
• The Done button accepts the changes, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Paging tab where the list box updates are displayed.
• The Cancel button discards the changes, closes the dialog box, and returns to the
Paging tab.
15.2.8
Removing a Pager
To remove a pager:
1. Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "Editing a Pager" section.
2. Select the Remove Pager button in the Pager Details dialog box.
3. Verify the selection. The Are you sure you want to delete this pager and all
its assignments? question dialog box is displayed.
• The Yes selection confirms the deletion, closes the question dialog box, and removes
the pager from the Paging tab list box.
• The No selection cancels the deletion, closes the confirmation dialog, and returns to
the Paging tab list box.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
15 - 7
Paging Tab
15.2.9
Paging Tab (Optional)
Resending a Failed Page
If an attempt was made to send a page and was unsuccessful, the page will be added to the
Failed Pages view. The Failed Pages view contains a list box that can display a
maximum of 100 failed pages. The list box orders the failed pages chronologically in
descending order.
NOTE:
If the system is reset, all failed pages listed in the “Failed
Pages” view will be removed.
To resend a failed page:
1. Select the Failed Page sidebar button. The Failed Pages view (shown in
FIGURE 15-6) is displayed.
NOTE:
The Failed Page sidebar button will only be available if
there is failed page information in the Failed Pages view.
FIGURE 15-6 Failed Pages View
2. Select a failed page from the list box using the navigational buttons.
3. Select the Resend sidebar button. The failed page is resent and the row is removed
from the list box if the page was successfully resent. If the page was not successfully
resent, a new row will be added to the top of the Failed Pages view list box with an
updated date and time stamp.
Navigating in the Failed Pages View
To navigate in the Failed Pages view, select any of the following buttons to:
BUTTON
DESCRIPTION
Display the oldest failed pages in the list box.
Scroll down the list one page at a time.
Scroll down one row in the list at a time.
Scroll up one row in the list at a time.
15 - 8
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Paging Tab (Optional)
Paging Tab
BUTTON
DESCRIPTION
Scroll up the list one page at a time.
Display the newest failed pages in the list box.
15.2.10
Generating a Paging Report
To review all of the currently assigned pagers, determine who each pager is assigned to, and
to which tile the pager is assigned, generate a Paging Report. This report can be generated
directly from the Paging tab by selecting the Print button from the Menu Bar.
For additional information regarding the Paging Report, refer to the ‘‘Paging Report’’ on
page 8-35.
15.2.11
Troubleshooting
This section lists some of the potential messages and issues that may occur while using the
Paging tab.
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
You have reached the
maximum number of
pagers that can be
assigned to a tile.
A patient tile cannot be
assigned to more than 10
pagers.
Remove one pager assignment from
the patient tile.
The Add Tile button is
disabled.
There are no pagers listed in
the Paging tab’s list box.
Add a pager and then assign it to a
tile.
All the patient tiles at the
central station are already
assigned to the selected
pager in the Paging tab’s list
box.
Assign the pager to another patient
tile.
There are no pagers listed in
the Paging tab’s list box.
Add a pager and then assign it to a
tile.
None of the patient tiles at the
central station are assigned to
the selected pager in the
Paging tab’s list box.
Assign a pager to one of the patient
tiles.
Are you sure you
want to Add All Tiles?
The Add All Tiles button
was selected in the Paging
tab’s list box.
Confirm that this was the intended
function, then select the Yes button
to confirm or the No button to cancel
the function and return to the
Paging tab.
Some tiles could not
be assigned to this
pager.
The Add All Tiles button
was selected.
Some of the patient tiles already
contain 10 pager assignments.
Are you sure you
want to Remove All
Tiles?
The Remove All Tiles
button was selected in the
Paging tab’s list box.
Confirm that this was the intended
function, then select the Yes or No
button.
The Remove Tile button is
disabled.
*
Messages are shown in all bold text.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
15 - 9
Paging Tab
Paging Tab (Optional)
MESSAGE/ISSUE *
REASON
SOLUTION
Are you sure that you
want to delete the
selected event/s?
The Delete or Delete All
sidebar button was selected
while in the Failed Pages
view.
Confirm that this was the intended
function, then select the Yes button
or the No button.
The Done button in the
Pager Details dialog box is
disabled.
No data has been entered
into the Pager Number and/
or the Pager Assignment text
box.
Enter a Pager Number and/or Pager
Assignment in the Pager Details
dialog box.
Pager Number
already exists! Please
enter a new number.
Pager numbers must be
unique. The pager number
entered is a duplicate of an
existing pager number.
Enter a unique pager number, then
select the OK button.
Was not able to enter 18
alpha numerics in the
Pager Number field.
A maximum of 15
alphanumeric characters can
be entered to the Pager
Number field.
Verify the Pager Number is correct.
While entering a Pager
Assignment, could not
continue adding
alphanumeric characters.
A maximum of 30
alphanumeric characters can
be added to the Pager
Assignment field.
Abbreviate the assignee name or
identifying title.
A failed page was
removed from the Failed
Pages list box.
The failed page was
successfully resent which
removes the page from the
Failed Pages view.
Locate the event in the Events List and
verify that a page was sent for the
event.
The list box maximum of 100
records was reached and the
failed page was automatically
deleted from the database.
Periodically delete or resend the
failed pages from the Failed Pages
list box to avoid the automatic
deletion of failed pages.
A failed page was removed from the
Failed Pages list box.
If the system is reset, all failed
pages listed in the “Failed
Pages” view will be removed.
—
The selected event has
been deleted.
The failed page event has
been deleted from the
database because it reached
its maximum number of
records.
Select another failed page from the
list box.
You have reached the
maximum number of
pagers.
The Add Pager sidebar push
button was selected when the
the maximum number of
pagers has already been
assigned at the central station.
Review the list and remove any
unused pagers from the list.
This Pager
Assignment already
exists. Please enter a
new assignment.
The pager assignment entered
in the Pager Assignment text
box is a duplicate of a pager
assignment that already
exists.
Enter a different pager assignment.
*
15 - 10
Messages are shown in all bold text.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
16.0
Performance Specifications
This section outlines performance specifications for the Panorama Patient Monitoring
Network.
• ECG Performance Requirements
• ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements
• Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
• Keyboard
• Mouse
• Displays
• Network Printer
• Access Points/Antennas
• Telepack Specifications
• Nonin SpO2 Module Specifications
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 1
ECG Performance Requirements
16.1
Performance Specifications
ECG Performance Requirements
Three Lead Displayable Leads:
I, II, III (one vector at a time)
Five Lead Displayable Leads:
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V
Twelve Lead Displayable Leads:
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6
Standardizing Voltage:
The ECG size is indicated by a scale bar displayed on
the left of the waveform window with a scale indicating
the height of the bar in mV. Printed output to have
standardizing pulse printed at beginning of strip
Time base selection
25 mm/s
(Non-permanent display)
Time base error
±10%
(Non-permanent display)
Impulse Response
0.1 mV max
0.3 mV/sec max slope
Aspect Ratio
0.4 ± 0.08 sec/mV (met by 25 mm/s)
Overall System Error
Greater of 5% or 40 µV
ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.7.1 (a)
16 - 2
ECG Input dynamic range
+/- 5mV max
Channel Width
30 mm. min
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
ECG Performance Requirements
Waveform Displays
Each waveform in the All Strips, Event List Zoom-In, Full
Disclosure Zoom-In and ST reports will be displayed on
a calibrated grid (5mm x 5mm) that conforms to ANSI/
AAMI EC13: 2002.4.2.9.7d.
Each second of the waveforms in the All Strips, Event List
Zoom-In, Full Disclosure Zoom-In and ST reports will be
marked with a time annotation marker that conforms to
ANSI/AAMI EC13: 2002.4.2.9.7e.
Heart Rate Meter Accuracy and
Per ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1e.
Response to Irregular Rhythm
paragraph 3a, Ventricular Bigeminy, the Heart Rate
meter response is in the range of 39 bpm to 80 bpm.
Per ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1e.
paragraph 3b, Slow alternating Ventricular Bigeminy,
the Heart Rate meter response is in the range of 45 bpm
to 62 bpm.
Per ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1e.
paragraph 3c, Rapid alternating Ventricular Bigeminy,
the Heart Rate meter response is constant at 60 bpm.
Per ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1e.
paragraph 3d, Bidirectional systoles, the Heart Rate
meter response is constant at 90 bpm.
Time to Alarm for Tachycardia
The alarm response time for Tachycardia is less than 5
seconds in accordance with ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002
Section 4.1.2.1g.
Pacer Rejection
The heart rate meter rejects pulses of amplitude signals
from ±2mV to ±700mV and duration 0.1ms to 2ms with
no tail according to ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section
4.1.4.1 (No tails).
Pacemaker Pulse Rejection
The pacer detector’s slew rate is 6.024V/s
Capability
NOTE:
The heart rate meter does not reject Pacemaker pulses with
tails.
NOTE:
The heart rate meter does not reject Pacemaker with fast
ECG signals.
NOTE:
There is no Pacemaker pulse auxiliary output.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 3
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements
16.2
Performance Specifications
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance
Requirements
Range:
30 to 300 bpm Adult/Pediatric ANSI/AAMI
EC13–2002, 4.2.7
30 to 350 bpm Neonatal ANSI/AAMI
EC13–2002, 4.2.7
Resolution:
16.2.1
1 bpm
Alarm Response
High HR alarm Range
Off
60-250 bpm Adult
100-300 bpm Pediatric
100-350 bpm Neonatal
(ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.1)
Low HR alarm Range
Off
30-120 bpm Adult
30-150 bpm Pediatric
30-200 bpm Neonatal
(ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.1)
Resolution
5 bpm max.
(ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.2)
Accuracy
± 5 bpm or ± 10%
(ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.3)
Time to alarm
Less than 10 seconds for 60 bpm low limit alarm to
Step Change Response Time
sound when stepping from a heart rate of 80 to 40 bpm
(ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.4 and 4.2.8.5).
Less than 10 seconds for 100 bpm high limit alarm to
sound when stepping from a heart rate of 80 to 120
bpm (ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, 4.2.8.6)
16.2.2
ST Segment Analysis
Enabling:
Enabled in Adult and Pediatric (from a bedside monitor
only) modes only. ST for Telepack units may be enabled
at the Panorama Central Station.
16 - 4
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements
Default ST Measurement Point:
80 ms after J point for heart rates <=120 bpm
60 ms after the J point for heart rates >120 bpm
User Selectable ST
Measurement Points:
40, 60 and 80 ms after J point (heart rate independent)
Or 60/80 Heart Rate Dependent
Default ISO Point:
Located between the P and Q waves.
User adjustable ISO Point:
User adjustable from “R peak” - 10 ms to “R peak” 200 ms in 8 ms increments.
Default J Point:
The end of the QRS complex.
User adjustable J Point:
User adjustable from “R peak” - 10 ms to “R peak” 200 ms in 8 ms increments.
Numerical ST Update Rate:
3/5 Lead Wire: every 10 seconds
View 12 card: every 2 seconds
16.2.3
Arrhythmia Analysis
Arrhythmia analysis identifies ventricular arrhythmia.
The following arrhythmia calls will be displayed:
16.2.4
Asystole
Pause
Bigeminy
Run
Bradycardia (Brady)
Trigeminy
Couplet
Ventricular Fibrillation (V-Fib)
Irregular Heart Rate
Ventricular Rhythm
PVCs per minute
Ventricular Tachycardia (V-Tach)
NIBP Performance Characteristics
Systolic Pressure Measurement
Range:
55 to 235 mmHg in Adult mode
55 to 160 mmHg in Pediatric mode
45 to 120 mmHg in Neonatal mode
Resolution:
16.2.4.1
1 mmHg
Diastolic Pressure Measurement
Range:
30 to 200 mmHg in Adult mode
30 to 150 mmHg in Pediatric mode
20 to 100 mmHg in Neonatal mode
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 5
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements
Performance Specifications
Resolution:
16.2.4.2
1 mmHg
Pulse Rate
Range:
35-245 bpm, for Adults/Pediatric
70– 245 bpm, for Neonate
Resolution:
16.2.5
1 bpm
IBP Pressure Range
Range:
16.2.6
30 to 300 mmHg
IBP Heart Rate Meter
Range:
30 to 300 bpm Adult/Pediatric
30 to 333 bpm Neonatal
Resolution:
16.2.7
1 bpm
Temperature Performance Requirements
Scale:
Range:
Selectable Celsius or Fahrenheit
15 °C to 45 °C
59 °F to 113 °F
Resolution:
0.1 °C
0.1 °F
16.2.8
16.2.9
16 - 6
ECG Respiration Performance Requirements
Range:
4 to 199 breaths per minute
Resp. Scale:
1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 with standard ECG cable
SpO2
SpO2 Range:
70% to 100%
Pulse Rate Range:
30 to 235
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
16.2.10
16.2.11
16.2.12
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter Performance Requirements
Nonin SpO2
SpO2 Range:
0% to 100%
Pulse Rate Range:
18 to 300
CO2 Performance Requirements
Range:
0 - 13%s
Respiration Rate Range:
0 - 150 breaths/minute
CO2 Alarm
ET CO2 High Alarm Range:
Off, 20 to 80 mmHg
ET CO2 Low Alarm Range:
Off, 5 to 50 mmHg
Insp. CO2 High Alarm Range:
Off, 5 to 30 mmHg
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 7
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
16.3
Performance Specifications
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry
Server
Panorama Central Station hardware consists of a computer, hard drives, Ethernet,
display controllers, case and a power supply.
There is one basic hardware platform for the Panorama Central Station computer system. It
contains the following:
• CPU Motherboard and processor
• 1 GB of RAM
• 1280 x 1024 dpi 24-bit (16.7 million colors) display controllers
• 80 GB system hard drive, minimum
• Four channel serial interface for touch screen inputs, Telepack programming, and future
features
• 2 on-board Ethernet connectors
• CD-R/W
Panorama Telemetry Server hardware consists of a computer, hard drives, Ethernet,
display controllers, case and a power supply. The system is populated with the following:
• CPU Motherboard and processor
• 1 GB of RAM, minimum
• 800 x 600 dpi display controllers
• 80 GB system hard drive, minimum
• 1 channel serial port
• 2 on-board Ethernet connectors
• CD-R/W
16.3.1
Real Time Clock
This is used for various time-related functions in the Panorama Central Station and the
Panorama Telemetry Server.
16 - 8
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
16.3.2
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
Power Supply
Voltage
• 100-240 VAC (±10%)
Frequency
• 60/50 Hz (±3Hz)
Panorama Central Station Power Consumption Maximum
• 115 VAC @ 1.4 A + 20%
• 230 VAC @ 0.6 A + 20%
16.3.3
Operating Temperature
• +5 to +40 º C (Panorama Central Station)
• +10 to +40 º C (Panorama Telemetry Server)
16.3.4
Operating Humidity
• 20% to 80% Relative Humidity Maximum, non-condensing, maximum wet bulb 29 º C
16.3.5
Operating Altitude
• 1060 to 700 hPa (-1250 to 9889 feet ASL) (-380 - 3014 m) (795 to 525 mmHg)
16.3.6
Storage Temperature
• -20 to +60 º C
16.3.7
Storage Humidity
• 5% to 80% Relative Humidity Maximum, non-condensing, maximum wet bulb 35 º C
(Panorama Central Station)
• 5% to 80% Relative Humidity Maximum, non-condensing, maximum wet bulb 29 º C
(Panorama Telemetry Server)
16.3.8
Storage Altitude
• 1060 to 700 hPa (-1250 to 9889 feet ASL) (-380 - 3014 m) (795 to 525 mm Hg)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 9
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
16.3.9
Performance Specifications
Standards
The Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server comply with the following
standards:
SAFETY
UL 60950-1:2003
Safety of Information Technology Equipment
CSA-C22.2 60950-1-03
Safety of Information Technology Equipment
EN 60601-1-4:1996
Programmable Electrical Medical Systems
EN 1041:1998
Information supplied by the manufacturer with medical
systems
IEC 60601-1-8:2006
Electrically-generated alarm signals
(Except section 201.8.3 for Alarm Icons. The monitor
instead maintains the icons specified by IEC 60417.)
SAFETY DESIGNATIONS
(SEE SECTION 16.3.11 (TABLE 16-1, TABLE 16-2, TABLE 16-3, TABLE 16-4)
Mode of Operation
Continuous
Protection Against Hazards of Explosion
Non Protected (ordinary)
Protection Against Ingress of Liquids
IPX0 (ordinary, non-protected)
Degree of Mobility
Stationary, Intra Hospital
PERFORMANCE
ANSI/AAMI EC11:1991
Diagnostic Electrocardiographic devices
ANSI/AAMI EC13:2002
Cardiac monitors, heart rate meters, and alarms
EN ISO 21647:2004
Basic safety and essential performance of respiratory gas
monitors
EN ISO 9919:2005
Basic safety and essential performance of pulse oximeter
equipment for medical use.
AAMI SP10:1992
Electronic or automated sphygmomanometer
FCC 47CFR, Part 95, Sub Part H, Wireless Medical Telemetry Service (WMTS), for 608 MHz devices
and components of the system
HAZARD ANALYSIS
EN 14971:2000
Application of Risk management to medical devices
ENVIRONMENTAL / EMC
IEC 60601-1-2:2001
Electromagnetic compatibility
SHIPPING
ISTA Test Procedure 2A
16 - 10
Shipping Integrity test
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
16.3.10
Information Display and Control
16.3.10.1
Audio Indicators
Audio alarms are in accordance with IEC60601-1-8.
The measured sound pressure level for the high audio alarm is 72 dB.
The measured sound pressure level for the medium audio alarm is 65 dB.
The measured sound pressure level for the low audio alarm is 60 dB.
16.3.10.2
Recovery from Power Loss
16.3.10.2.1 Alarm Restoration from Power Loss
If the Panorama system experiences a power loss, all alarm settings will be restored upon
power reset. For the Telepack, alarm settings will be restored from the Panorama Patient
Monitoring Central Station.
CAUTION:
If the Panorama system experiences a communication loss,
all Telepack ST and/or arrhythmia alarms that were active
at the time of communication loss will not produce central
station alarm notifications once communication is restored.
This is due to the automatic relearn function of the ST and/or
arrhythmia algorithm after communication is restored.
16.3.10.2.2 Data Logging after Power Loss
All logs will be restored following a power loss of any duration. Logs consist of the event log
(service only), error log (service only), and the patient database.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 11
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
16.3.11
Performance Specifications
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The Panorama Central Station, Panorama Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless
Transceiver meet the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2:2001.
NOTE:
The Panorama Central Station, Panorama Telemetry Server,
and Panorama Wireless Transceiver (120V only) needs
special precautions regarding Electro Magnetic Compatibility
(EMC) and needs to be installed and put into service
according to the EMC information provided in this section.
NOTE:
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can
affect the Panorama Central Station and Panorama
Telemetry. Refer to Table 16-1 on page 16-12, Table 16-2 on
page 16-13, and Table 16-4 on page 16-15.
TABLE 16-1
GUIDANCE AND DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless Transceiver (120V only) is
intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the
Panorama Central Station and Telemetry Server should assure that it is used in such an environment.
COMPLIANCE
RF emissions CISPR 11
Group 1
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry
Server, and Panorama Wireless
Transceiver uses RF energy only for its
internal function and external data
transmission. However, its RF emissions
are very low and are not likely to cause
any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Class A
Harmonic emissions
IEC 61000-3-2 *
Class A
Voltage fluctuations/
Flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3 *
Complies
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry
Server, and Panorama Wireless
Transceiver is suitable for use in all
establishments other than domestic and
those directly connected to the public
low-voltage power supply network that
supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes
*
16 - 12
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
EMISSIONS TEST
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server only
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
TABLE 16-2
GUIDANCE AND DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless Transceiver is intended for
use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the Panorama
Central Station and Telemetry Server should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
Floors should be wood, concrete or
ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the relative humidity
should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast
transient/burst
IEC 61000-4-4
±2 kV for power
supply lines ±1
kV for input/
output lines
± 2 kV for power
supply lines
± 1 kV for input/
output lines
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment.
Surge IEC
61000-4-5
±1 kV
differential
mode ±2 kV
common mode
± 1 kV
differential mode
± 2 kV common
mode
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment.
Voltage dips,
short
interruptions and
voltage
variations on
power supply
input lines IEC
61000-4-11
<5% UT (>95%
dip in UT) for
0,5 cycle
<5% UT (>95%
dip in UT) for 0,5
cycle
40% UT (60%
dip in UT) for
5 cycles
40% UT (60%
dip in UT) for
5 cycles
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment. If the user requires
continued operation during power
mains interruptions, it is recommended
that the device be powered from an
uninterruptible power supply or a
battery.
70% UT (30%
dip in UT) for
25 cycles
70% UT (30%
dip in UT) for
25 cycles
< 5% UT (>95%
dip in UT) for 5
sec
< 5% UT (>95%
dip in UT) for
3 A/m
3 A/m
Power frequency
(50/60 Hz)
magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8
Power frequency magnetic fields
should be at levels characteristic of a
typical location in a typical commercial
or hospital environment.
UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and
Panorama Wireless Transceiver, that are rack mounted,
shall be powered down prior to cable and/or Panorama
Licensing Key attachment or disconnect.
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 13
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
Performance Specifications
TABLE 16-3
GUIDANCE AND DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless Transceiver is intended for
use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the Panorama
Central Station and Telemetry Server should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENT GUIDANCE
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any part
of the Telepack, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation applicable to the frequency of
the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
P
Conducted
RF IEC
61000-4-6
3 Vrms 150
kHz to 80
MHz
3 Vrms
d = 1.2 x
Radiated RF
IEC
61000-4-3
3 V/m 80
MHz to 2.5
GHz
3 V/m
d = 1.2 x P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 2.3 x P 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Where P is the maximum output power rating of
the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in meters
(m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey*
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range.
Interference may occur in the vicinity
of equipment marked with the
following symbol:
NOTE:
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range
applies.
NOTE:
These guidelines may not apply in all situations.
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
*
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment, due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength where the Telepack is
used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level, the Telepack should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or
relocating the Telepack.
NOTE:
16 - 14
Panorama Central Station equipment should not be used
in the presence of high energy amplitude modulated (AM)
signals that are operating within the audible range. These
signals are not normally found in the hospital
environment.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Panorama Central Station and Panorama Telemetry Server
TABLE 16-4
RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES BETWEEN PORTABLE AND MOBILE RF
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND THE PANORAMA CENTRAL STATION AND
TELEMETRY SERVER
The Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless Transceiver is intended for
use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The
customer or the user of the Panorama Central Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless
Transceiver can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the Panorama Central
Station, Telemetry Server, and Panorama Wireless Transceiver as recommended below, according to
the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
RATED MAXIMUM
OUTPUT POWER OF
TRANSMITTER W (WATTS)
SEPARATION DISTANCE ACCORDING TO FREQUENCY
OF TRANSMITTER M (METERS)
150 KHZ TO
80 MHZ
D = 1.2 x
P
80 MHZ TO
800 MHZ
D = 1.2 x
P
800 MHZ TO
2.5 GHZ
D = 2.3 x
0.01
0.12
0.12
0.23
0.1
0.38
0.38
0.73
1
1.2
1.2
2.3
10
3.8
3.8
7.3
100
12
12
23
P
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE:
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the
higher frequency range applies.
NOTE:
These guidelines may not apply in all situations.
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 15
Keyboard
16.3.12
Performance Specifications
Physical Characteristics
Maximum Size (Rack Mount (2U) CPU Case)
• Depth: 28.0" (711.2 mm)
• Height: 3.5" (88.9 mm)
• Width: 19.3" (490.2 mm)
Maximum Weight
• 36.0 lbs (16.33 kg)
Maximum Size (Vertical CPU Case)
• Depth: 17.5" (445.5 mm)
• Height: 17.0" (431.8 mm)
• Width: 7.5" (190.5 mm)
Maximum Weight
• 30.0 lbs (13.6 kg)
16.4
Keyboard
• Keyboard is supported for system diagnostics only.
• This keyboard is offered in English language only and is not required for normal
operation, but will be required for non-application system maintenance.
• The System will not require a keyboard to boot up and enter Panorama Central Station
application software.
16.5
Mouse
• The mouse is supported for system diagnostics and user interface.
• Supported as an interface control device.
• The mouse operates independent of a touch screen interface.
• The mouse/touch screen is used together with the display to make selections from various
menus and screens.
16.6
Displays
16.6.1
21" CRT Display
(Used with earlier versions of the Panorama Central Station software.)
This is an integrated monitor that includes an internal touch screen controller and has the
following features:
16 - 16
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Displays
• SXGA
• 1280 x 1024 dpi capability
• 0.27mm dot pitch
• 19" viewable image measured diagonally
16.6.2
20" CRT Display
(Used with earlier versions of the Panorama Central Station software.)
This is an integrated monitor that includes an internal touch screen controller and has the
following features:
• SXGA
• 1280 x 1024 dpi capability
• 0.27mm dot pitch
• 18.9" viewable image measured diagonally
16.6.3
19" Flat Panel
(Used with current versions of the Panorama Central Station software.)
This is an integrated monitor that includes an internal touch screen controller and has the
following features:
• SXGA
• 1280 x 1024 dpi capability
• 0.28mm dot pitch
• 19.0" viewable image measured diagonally
16.6.4
18.1" Flat Panel
(Used with earlier versions of the Panorama Central Station software.)
This is an integrated monitor that includes an internal touch screen controller and has the
following features:
• SXGA
• 1280 x 1024 dpi capability
• 0.28mm dot pitch
• 18.1" viewable image measured diagonally
WARNING: The 18.1" flat panel may tip over, if the display head is
inclined to an angle greater than 45° backward tilt. If the
user elects to have the display head inclined to an angle
greater than 45° backward tilt, the flat panel must be
attached to a secure mounting surface via three screw
locations on the bottom of the base.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 17
Network Printer
16.6.5
Performance Specifications
Touch Screen
• A Surface Acoustical Wave (SAW) touch screen is supported as the standard input device
on the 18.1", 19”, 20", and/or 21" display.
• The touch screen operates independent of a mouse interface.
• The actual touch screen and its controller are integrated into the display.
• The touch screen communication is accepted by Panorama Central Station via a serial
port.
• Use of the touch screen does not preclude the use of a mouse.
16.7
Network Printer
• The network printer is the standard hard copy output device for the output of Panorama
Central Station waveform strip-charts and reports.
• There is no provision to support a printer mounted within Panorama Central Station CPU
enclosure.
• The printer connects to the system via the Panorama Central Network (C-LAN).
• Two network laser printers are supported per Panorama Central Station.
For additional information, refer to the Panorama Printer Configuration Guide (P/N
0070-00-0561).
16.7.1
Requirements
Communications connection:
10/100 Base-TX Ethernet with internal print server
Speed:
17 pages per minute printing at full resolution
Resolution:
1200-dpi output
Media:
Plain paper sheets
Media sizes:
8.5 in. by 11 in. and A4
NOTE:
16.8
Please refer to the manufacturer’s printer manual for
specific instructions regarding the printer.
Access Points/Antennas
The Panorama Telemetry Server will require Symbol® Technologies Access Points with
antennas as described in the Panorama Installation Guide (P/N 0070-00-0635) when ISM
communication is required. If using Telepack-2.4 units, the Panorama Central Station will
require Cisco Access Points.
16 - 18
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas/Cable Repeaters
16.9
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas/
Cable Repeaters
16.9.1
Panorama Wireless Transceiver
16.9.1.1
Power Supply
Voltage
• 100-120 VAC (± 10%)
Frequency
• 60 Hz (± 3 Hz)
Power Consumption
• 1.25 Amps (maximum)
16.9.1.2
Physical Characteristics
Maximum Size
• Depth: 16.2" (411.48 mm)
• Height: 5.2" (132.08 mm)
• Width: 17" (431.8 mm)
Maximum Weight
• 12.35 lbs (5.6 kg)
16.9.1.3
Frequency Range
Receiver Range
• 608-614 MHz
Transmit Range
• 1395-1400 MHz and 1427-1429.5 MHz
16.9.2
Panorama Antenna
Physical Characteristics
Maximum Size
• Depth: 7.6" diameter (193.04 mm)
• Height: 5.5" (139.7 mm)
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 19
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas/Cable Repeaters
Performance Specifications
Maximum Weight
• 0.88 lbs (0.4 kg)
Frequency Range
• Receiver Range: 608-614 MHz
• Transmit Range:1395-1400 MHz and 1427-1429.5 MHz
16.9.3
Cable Repeater
Physical Characteristics
Maximum Size
• Depth: 4.75" (120.65 mm)
• Height: 6.75" (171.45 mm)
• Width: 9.75” (247.65 mm)
Maximum Weight
• 3.96 lbs. (1.8 kg)
Frequency Range
• Receiver Range: 608-614 MHz
• Transmit Range:1395-1400 MHz and 1427-1429.5 MHz
16.9.4
Splitter
Physical Characteristics
Maximum Size
• Depth: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Height: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Width: 1.25” (31.75 mm)
Maximum Weight
• 0.22 lbs. (0.1 kg)
16.9.5
Environmental Characteristics for the Panorama Wireless
Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas
16.9.5.1
Operating Temperature
• +5 to +40 º C
16 - 20
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
16.9.5.2
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/Splitters/Antennas/Cable Repeaters
Operating Humidity
• 20 % to 80 % Relative Humidity Maximum, non-condensing, maximum wet bulb 29 º C
16.9.5.3
Operating Altitude
• 1060 to 700 hPa (-1250 to 9889 feet ASL) (795 to 525 mmHg)
16.9.5.4
Storage Temperature
• -20 to +60 º C
16.9.5.5
Storage Humidity
• 5% to 80% Relative Humidity Maximum, non-condensing, maximum wet bulb 35 º C
16.9.5.6
Storage Altitude
• 1060 to 700 hPa (-1250 to 9889 feet ASL) (795 to 525 mmHg)
16.9.5.7
Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility
Refer to sections 16.3.9 and 16.3.11.
16.9.5.8
FCC Labeling
Panorama Wireless Transceiver
FCC ID: DXXVT0190-00000
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules.
NOTE:
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 21
Telepack Specifications
16.10
Performance Specifications
Telepack Specifications
The following are the specifications for the Telepack:
TABLE 16-5
SPECIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
Acquired Leads
ECG 3-Lead: I, II, III (one vector at a time)
ECG 5-Lead: Three vectors (I, II, III, aVR, aVF, V(n))
Battery Type and Runtime
40 hrs minimum (Telepack-608)
24 hrs minimum (Telepack-608 with Nonin SpO2 module)
24 hrs minimum (Telepack 2.4)
16 hrs minimum (Telepack 2.4 with Nonin SpO2 module)
Conditions: All Telepack units using two (2) AA alkaline cells with
ECG at a HR of 60 bpm common to the Panorama Central
Station (using battery P/N 0146-00-0077-XX)
16.10.1
Battery Shelf Life
The battery shelf life is indicated on the battery casing.
Lead Current
Max lead current: 25nA
Safety Designations
TABLE 16-6
DESIGNATION
DESCRIPTION
Degree of protection against
electric shock
ECG-Type CF defibrillation protected.
Supply Connection
3 VDC Internal Battery
Mode of Operation
Continuous
Protection Against Hazards of
Explosion
Not Protected (Ordinary)
Degree of Electrical Connection
between Equipment and Patient
Equipment designed for direct electrical connection to the patient
Degree of Mobility
Transportable, Intra Hospital
Protection against ingress of liquid (please refer to your device):
Protected against splashing
water
16.10.2
IPX4 (with or without SpO2 module attached)
Panorama Server Analysis
The bedside monitor collects and analyses patient information and then transfers its analysis
to the Panorama Central Station through the Panorama Telemetry Server; therefore, no
calculations are performed by the Panorama Telemetry Server.
16 - 22
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
16.10.3
Telepack Specifications
Environmental Characteristics
The environmental characteristics of the Telepack device are as follows:
TABLE 16-7
16.10.4
SPECIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
Maximum Size (Telepack)
Height: 5.10” (129.54 mm)
Width: 2.95” (74.93 mm)
Depth: 1.23” (31.24 mm)
Operating Environment
Temperature: + 5 °C to + 40 °C (+41 °F to +104 °F)
Altitude:
1060 hPa to 700 hPa
-1250 feet to 9889 feet ASL
-380 m to 3014 m
795 mmHg to 525 mmHg
Operating and Storage
Humidity
Storage: 10% to 90% maximum, non-condensing
Operating: 15% to 90% maximum, non-condensing
Storage Temperature
--20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage Altitude
1,060 hPa to 700 hPa
-1250 feet to 9,889 feet ASL
-380 m to 3,014 m
795 mmHg to 525 mmHg
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The following section describes the electromagnetic compatibility of the Telepack device.
NOTE:
The Telepack needs special precautions regarding Electro
Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) and needs to be installed and
put into service according to the EMC information provided
in this section.
NOTE:
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can
affect the Telepack. See Table 16-8 on page 16-24,
Table 16-9 on page 16-24, Table 16-10 on page 16-26 and
Table 16-11 on page 16-27.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 23
Telepack Specifications
Performance Specifications
TABLE 16-8
GUIDANCE AND DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS
It is important that the Telepack is used in the electromagnetic environment specified in the following
table.
EMISSIONS
TEST
COMPLIANCE
ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1
The Telepack uses RF energy only for its internal function
and external data transmission. However, its RF
emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any
interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Class A
Harmonic
emissions IEC
61000-3-2
N/A
The Telepack is suitable for use in all establishments other
than domestic establishments and those directly
connected to the public low-voltage power supply
network that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes.
IEC
61000-3-3
Voltage
fluctuations/
Flicker
emissions
N/A
TABLE 16-9
GUIDANCE AND DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
It is important that the Telepack is used in the electromagnetic environment specified in the following
table.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
Floors should be wood, concrete or
ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the relative humidity
should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast
transient/burst
IEC 61000-4-4
±2 kV for power
supply lines ±1
kV for input/
output lines
N/A *
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment.
Surge IEC
61000-4-5
±1 kV
differential
mode ±2 kV
common mode
N/A *
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment.
UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
*
Telepack operates only from the internal battery
16 - 24
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Telepack Specifications
TABLE 16-9 (Continued)
GUIDANCE AND DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
It is important that the Telepack is used in the electromagnetic environment specified in the following
table.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
Voltage dips,
short
interruptions and
voltage
variations on
power supply
input lines IEC
61000-4-11
<5% UΤ (>95%
dip in UT) for
0,5 cycle
N/A *
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment. If the user requires
continued operation during power
mains interruptions, it is recommended
that the device be powered from an
uninterruptible power supply or a
battery.
3 A/m
Power frequency magnetic fields
should be at levels characteristic of a
typical location in a typical commercial
or hospital environment.
40% UT (60%
dip in UT) for
5 cycles
70% UT (30%
dip in UT) for
25 cycles
< 5% UT (>95%
dip in UT) for 5
sec
Power frequency
(50/60 Hz)
magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8
3 A/m
UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
*
Telepack operates only from the internal battery
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 25
Telepack Specifications
Performance Specifications
TABLE 16-10
GUIDANCE AND DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
It is important that the Telepack is used in the electromagnetic environment specified in the following
table.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
Conducted RF
IEC 61000-4-6
3 Vrms 150 kHz
to 80 MHz
N/A
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to
any part of the Telepack, including
cables, than the recommended
separation distance calculated from the
equation applicable to the frequency of
the transmitter.
Recommended separation
distance
d = 1.2 x
Radiated RF IEC
61000-4-3
3 V/m 80 MHz
to 2.5 GHz
3 V/m
P
d = 1.2 x P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 2.3 x P 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended
separation distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
as determined by an electromagnetic
site survey* should be less than the
compliance level in each frequency
range.
Interference may occur in the
vicinity of equipment marked
with the following symbol:
NOTE:
At 80 MHz and 2.5 GHz MHz, the higher frequency range
applies.
NOTE:
The EMC guidelines in Table 16-10 on page 16-26 may
not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures,
objects and people.
*
16 - 26
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment, due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength where the Telepack is
used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level, the Telepack should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or
relocating the Telepack.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Telepack Specifications
TABLE 16-11
RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES BETWEEN PORTABLE AND MOBILE RF
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND THE TELEPACK
The Telepack is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment where radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. Prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between
portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the Telepack as recommended
in the following table, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
RATED MAXIMUM
OUTPUT POWER OF
TRANSMITTER W (WATTS)
SEPARATION DISTANCE ACCORDING TO FREQUENCY
OF TRANSMITTER M (METERS)
150 KHZ TO
80 MHZ
D = 1.2 x
P
80 MHZ TO
800 MHZ
D = 1.2 x
P
800 MHZ TO
2.5 GHZ
D = 2.3 x
0.01
0.12
0.12
0.23
0.1
0.38
0.38
0.73
1
1.2
1.2
2.3
10
3.8
3.8
7.3
100
12
12
23
P
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE:
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the
higher frequency range applies.
NOTE:
The separation distances guidelines in Table 16-11 on
page 16-27 may not apply in all situations.
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 27
Telepack Specifications
16.10.5
Performance Specifications
FCC Labeling
• Radio Transceiver - The Telepack-608 (FCC ID:DXXWT0191-00000) utilizes the
frequency range 608 MHz - 614 MHz. Modulation is 2-level FSK.
• This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Radio Transceiver - The Telepack-2.4 (FCC ID DXXWT0707-00000) utilizes the frequency
range 2400 MHz to 2500 MHz typical.
• This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference
Causing Equipment Regulations. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Cet appareillage numérique de la classe B répond à toutes les exigences de l'interférence
canadienne causant des règlements d'équipement. L'opération est sujette aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) ce dispositif peut ne pas causer l'interférence nocive, et (2) ce
dispositif doit accepter n'importe quelle interférence reçue, y compris l'interférence qui
peut causer l'opération peu désirée.
• The Telepack-2.4 complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. The Telepack-2.4 is in direct contact with the body of the user
under normal operating conditions. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
16.10.6
Compliance
The Telepack complies with the following standards:
AGENCY AND INDUSTRY STANDARDS
EN 60601-1:1990/IEC 60601-1:1988 and A1:1991 and A2:1995
EN 60601-2-27:1994/IEC 60601-2-27:1994
IEC 60601-1-2:2001
UL2601-1:1997
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 601.1 M90
ANSI/AAMI EC 13:2002
IEEE 802.11 Std 802.11:1999 - Part 11
ISTA: Test Procedure 2A
FDA Reviewer Guidance for Pre-Market Notification Submissions (1993 Draft) (m)(7)(ii)(f)
FCC:47CFR, Part 15, Sub Part C-Computing Devices, Part 95, Sub Part H - Wireless Medical
Telemetry Service (WMTS)
16 - 28
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
16.10.7
Telepack Specifications
Specific Absorption Rate
The Panorama Telepack meets the government’s requirements for exposure to radio waves.
The Telepack is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to
exceed limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set forth by the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government and by Industry Canada. These
limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the
general population. These guidelines are based on standards that were developed by
independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific
studies. These standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of
all persons, regardless of age or health.
The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption
Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC and Industry Canada is 1.6 W/kg.
The Panorama Telepack has been evaluated for body-worn Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
compliance under FCC Bulletin OET 65C and found to be compliant to the requirements as
set forth in CFR 47 Sections 2.1093 and 15.242 addressing RF exposure from radio
frequency devices. The highest SAR level measured was 0.002 W/kg.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 29
Nonin SpO2 Module Specifications
Performance Specifications
16.11
Nonin SpO2 Module Specifications
16.11.1
Environmental Characteristics
The environmental characteristics for the Nonin SpO2 module device are:
TABLE 16-12
16.11.2
SPECIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
Maximum Size of Telepack
with Nonin SpO2 module
Height: 6.25” (158.75 mm)
Width: 3.55” (90.17 mm)
Depth: 1.75” (44.45 mm)
Maximum Weight
(Nonin SpO2 module)
4.5 oz. excluding cable and sensor
Temperature
Operating: + 5 °C to + 40 °C
Storage: - 20 °C to + 50 °C
Humidity
Operating:10% to 90% maximum, non-condensing
Storage: 10% to 95% maximum, non-condensing
Measurement Specifications
The measurement specifications for the Nonin SpO2 module are:
SPECIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
Oxygen Saturation Range
0 to 100%
Pulse Rate Range
18 to 300 pulses per minute
Measurement wavelength red
660 nanometers @3mW nominal
NOTE:
Measurement wavelength infrared
Information about wavelength range
can be especially useful to clinicians.
910 nanometers @3mW nominal
NOTE:
Information about wavelength range
can be especially useful to clinicians.
SPO2 ACCURACY
SpO2 (70-100%) (±1 standard deviation)
No Motion
reusable finger clip ± 2 digits
disposable ± 3 digits
low perfusion ± 2 digits
Motion
reusable finger clip ± 2 digits
low perfusion ± 2 digits
PULSE RATE ACCURACY
no motion adults (18-300 bpm): ± 3 digits
motion adults (40-240 bpm): ± 5 digits
low perfusion adults (40-240 bpm): ± 3 digits
DATA UPDATE RATE
SpO2 value and heart rate is updated 3 times per second
16 - 30
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
16.11.3
Nonin SpO2 Module Specifications
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The following section describes the electromagnetic compatibility of the Nonin SpO2 device.
The Nonin SpO2 module meets the requirements of:
• IEC 60601-1-2
• ISO 9919
TABLE 16-13
GUIDANCE AND DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS
It is important that the Nonin SpO2 module is used in the electromagnetic environment specified in
the following table.
EMISSIONS
TEST
COMPLIANCE
ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1
The Nonin SpO2 module uses RF energy only for its
internal function and external data transmission.
However, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely
to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Class B
Harmonic
emissions IEC
61000-3-2
N/A
The Nonin SpO2 module is suitable for use in all
establishments other than domestic establishments and
those directly connected to the public low-voltage power
supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes.
IEC
61000-3-3
Voltage
fluctuations/
Flicker
emissions
N/A
TABLE 16-14
GUIDANCE AND DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
It is important that the Nonin SpO2 module is used in the electromagnetic environment specified in
the following table.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
Floors should be wood, concrete or
ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the relative humidity
should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast
transient/burst
IEC 61000-4-4
N/A
N/A*
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment.
*
The Nonin SpO2 module receives power from the Telepack which operates only from an internal
battery.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 31
Nonin SpO2 Module Specifications
Performance Specifications
TABLE 16-14 (Continued)
GUIDANCE AND DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
It is important that the Nonin SpO2 module is used in the electromagnetic environment specified in
the following table.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
Surge IEC
61000-4-5
N/A
N/A*
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment. If the user of the device
required continued operation during
power mains interruptions, it is
recommended that the device be
powered from an uninterruptible power
supply or battery pack.
Voltage dips,
short
interruptions and
voltage
variations on
power supply
input lines IEC
61000-4-11
N/A
N/A*
Mains power quality should be typical
of a commercial or hospital
environment. If the user requires
continued operation during power
mains interruptions, it is recommended
that the device be powered from an
uninterruptible power supply or a
battery.
Power frequency
(50/60 Hz)
magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8
3 A/m
3 A/m
Power frequency magnetic fields
should be at levels characteristic of a
typical location in a typical commercial
or hospital environment.
*
16 - 32
The Nonin SpO2 module receives power from the Telepack which operates only from an internal
battery.
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Performance Specifications
Nonin SpO2 Module Specifications
TABLE 16-15
GUIDANCE AND DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
It is important that the Nonin SpO2 module is used in the electromagnetic environment specified in the
following table.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the
device, including cables, than the recommended separation calculated from the equation applicable
to the frequency of the transmitter.
IMMUNITY
TEST
IEC 60601
TEST LEVEL
COMPLIANCE
LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
Conducted RF
IEC 61000-4-6
3 Vrms
150 kHz to 80
MHz
3V
Recommended separation
distance
d = 1.17 x
Radiated RF
IEC 61000-4-3
3 V/m
80 MHz to 2.5
GHz
3 V/m
P
d = 1.17 x P 80 MHz to 800
MHz
d = 2.33 x P 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended
separation distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
as determined by an electromagnetic
site survey,a should be less than the
compliance level in each frequency
range.b
Interference may occur in the
vicinity of equipment marked
with the following symbol:
NOTE:
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range
applies.
NOTE:
The EMC guidelines in Table 16-15 on page 16-33 may
not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures,
objects and people.
a
b
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment, due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength where the Nonin SpO2
module is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level, the Nonin SpO2 module should be observed to
verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary,
such as reorienting or relocating the Nonin SpO2 module.
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
16 - 33
Panorama Instrument Radio-608
Performance Specifications
TABLE 16-16
RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES BETWEEN PORTABLE AND MOBILE RF
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND THE NONIN SPO2 MODULE
The Nonin SpO2 module is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment where radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. Prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the Nonin SpO2
module as recommended in the following table, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.
RATED MAXIMUM
OUTPUT POWER OF
TRANSMITTER W (WATTS)
SEPARATION DISTANCE ACCORDING TO FREQUENCY
OF TRANSMITTER M (METERS)
150 KHZ TO
80 MHZ
D = 1.17 x
P
80 MHZ TO
800 MHZ
D = 1.17 x
800 MHZ TO
2.5 GHZ
P
D = 2.33 x
0.01
0.12
0.12
0.23
0.1
0.37
0.37
0.74
1
1.2
1.2
2.3
10
3.7
3.7
7.4
100
12
12
23
P
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE:
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the
higher frequency range applies.
NOTE:
The separation distances guidelines in Table 16-16 on
page 16-34 may not apply in all situations.
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
16.12
Panorama Instrument Radio-608
16.12.1
Approved Accessory
Kit, Instrument Radio-608, Passport 2®/Spectrum™ (P/N 0040-00-0361-01)
16.12.2
FCC Label
• Radio Transceiver - The Panorama Instrument Radio-608 (FCC ID:DXXRA0743-00000)
utilizes the frequency range 608 MHz - 614 MHz and 1427MHz -1429.5 MHz.
Modulation is 4-level FSK.
• This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: 1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
16 - 34
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
17.0
Glossary
This section provides a glossary of terminology used throughout the Panorama Operating
Instructions.
• Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
17 - 1
Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations
17.1
Glossary
Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations
TERMS
DEFINITIONS
Agent
The gas used to anesthetize a patient during surgery
Arrhythmia
Abnormal ECG rhythms
Bedside Monitor
A monitoring device that has its own user interface and does
not require the Panorama Central Station to be its primary
monitoring source
BSA
Body Surface Area
CI
Cardiac Index
CO
Cardiac Output
Heart Rate
Number of heartbeats detected during a one minute time
period
Internet Protocol (IP)
TCP/IP is the standard protocol that defines the IP datagram as
the unit of information passed across an Internet. IP provides
the basis for connectionless, best effort packet delivery of
services.
Invasive Blood
Method of obtaining blood pressure using an internal pressure
Pressure (IBP)
sensor
Monitoring Device
The instrumentation connected to the patient. The monitoring
device acquires the patient data and then transmits it onto the
network.
Non-Invasive Blood
Method of obtaining blood pressure using an external cuff
Pressure (NIBP)
Panorama Central
Supports hardwired communication between Panorama
Network
Central Stations and laser printers
Panorama Patient
Supports hardwired communication of the real-time patient
Network
data collected by monitoring devices attached to the patient
Panorama Wireless
Supports wireless communications between the wireless
Network
monitoring devices and the Panorama Server.
PAWP
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure
Persistent
Data or settings maintained and remain available until
purposely edited or deleted
17 - 2
Respiration
Number of breaths during a one minute time period
SpO2
Level of Oxygen Saturation in the blood
ST
The ST portion of the ECG waveform
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Glossary
Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations
ACRONYMS/
DEFINITIONS
ABBREVIATIONS
ADT
Admit Discharge Transfer
AHA
American Heart Association
American Hospital Association
ART
Arterial Line
bpm
Beats per minute
C
Current ST
Chest Lead (IEC)
cm
Centimeters
CIS
Clinical Information System
C-LAN
Panorama Central Network
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
CVA
Cardiovascular Artifact
CVP
Central Venous Pressure
Des
Desoflurane
DL
Down Link
ECG
Electrocardiogram
E-LAN
Panorama Patient Network
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Enf
Enflurane
EMR
Electronic Medical Records
EPM
Spectrum/Spectrum OR External Parameter Module
ET
End-Tidal when referencing CO2/O2/N2O/Agent parameters
Elapsed Time when referencing NIBP
F
Left Leg when referring to ECG Leads (IEC)
Hal
Haloflurane
HIS
Hospital Information System
HR
Heart Rate
IBP
Invasive Blood Pressure
ICP
Intracranial Pressure
IEC
International Electro-Technical Commission
in
Inches
INSP
Inspired
IP
Internet Protocol
ISO
Isoflurane when referencing Agent
Panorama® Operating Instructions
0070-10-0707-02
17 - 3
Terms, Acronyms, and Abbreviations
ACRONYMS/
Glossary
DEFINITIONS
ABBREVIATIONS
Isoelectric when referencing ST monitoring
kg
Kilograms
kPa
Kilopascals Per Atmosphere
L
Left Arm when referring to ECG Leads (IEC)
LA
Left Arm when referring to ECG Leads (AHA)
lbs
Pounds
LL
Left Leg when referring to ECG Leads (AHA)
LV
Left Ventricle
MAP
Mean Arterial Pressure
MDD
Medical Device Directive
mmHg
Millimeters of Mercury
N
Right Leg when referring to ECG Leads (IEC)
N2O
Nitrous Oxide
NIBP
Non-Invasive Blood Pressure
NSR
Normal Sinus Rhythm
O2
Oxygen
PA
Pulmonary Artery
Pleth
Plethysmograph
PVC
Premature Ventricular Contraction
R
Right Arm when referring to ECG Leads (IEC)
Referenced ST
RA
Right Atrium when referring to IBP
Right Arm when referring to ECG Leads (AHA)
17 - 4
RESP
Respiration Rate
RL
Right Leg when referring to ECG Leads (AHA)
rpm
Respirations per minute
Sev
Sevoflurane
SpO2
Oxygen Saturation
TEMP
Temperature
UA
Umbilical Artery
V
Chest Lead (AHA)
0070-10-0707-02
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Index
A
Abbreviations, 17-2
AC Dropout, 16-16
Access Points/Antennas, 16-18
(ISM), 16-18
Access Points/Antennas (ISM),
16-18
Accessing
Additional (More) Tabs, 9-39
Additional Reports, 8-40
Alarm Limits tab, 6-4
Alarm Responses tab, 6-12
All ECG Mode from the
Bedside tab, 7-8
Bedside tab, 7-2
Care Group tab, 9-9
Date/Time tab, 9-41
Demographics tab, 5-3
Discharge tab, 5-36
Disclosure tab, 7-40
Display tab, 5-40
Equipment Setup tab, 9-33
Events tab, 7-23
Events tab Waveforms View,
7-33
Installation Setup tab, 9-7,
9-29
Parameter Color tab, 9-2
Patient Alarm Setup tab, 6-2
Patient Reports tab, 8-2, 8-29
Previous Tabs, 9-40
Print Setup tab, 5-55, 9-45
Recalibrate Touch Screen
tab, 9-4
ST tab, 7-53
Standby tab, 5-49
Transfer tab, 5-22
Trends tab, 7-13
Unit Choices tab, 9-50
Unit Priorities tab, 9-47
Volume tab, 9-11
Wave Gain tab, 9-59
Wave Gain tab (Patient),
5-52
Wireless tab, 9-62
Acronyms, 17-2
Adding
a Pager, 15-4
All Patient Tiles to a Pager,
15-6
Adding a Pager, 15-4
Adding All Patient Tiles to a
Pager, 15-6
Additional Reports, 8-40
Adjusting
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Patient Wave Gain Settings,
5-53
System Wave Gain Settings,
9-59
AHA and IEC, Lead Placement
Methods, See also Lead
Placement Methods, 4-3
Alarm
Behaviors, 3-2, 3-6
Delay, 3-4
Indicator Area, 7-20
Indicators, 7-25
Limit Settings, 13-2
Limits, 2-24
Limits tab (Patient), 6-4
Options, 3-3, 3-6
Priorities, 3-4
Responses, 2-24, 3-6
Responses tab (Patient), 6-12
Alarm Behaviors, 3-2, 3-6
Alarm Limit Settings, 13-2
Alarm Limits (Patient) tab
sidebar buttons, 6-7
Alarm Limits Tab (Patient), 6-4
Alarm Options, 3-3, 3-6
Alarm Priorities, 3-4
Alarm Priority
1, 3-5
2, 3-5
3, 3-5
Off, 3-5
Alarm Response, 16-4
Alarm Responses, 3-6
Alarm Responses Tab (Patient),
6-12
Alarm Responses tab (Patient)
sidebar buttons, 6-15
Alarms, 5-24, 5-28
technical, 13-11
All
Patient Tiles from a Pager,
Removing, See also
Removing, 15-6
Strips Report (All Patients) See
also Report, 8-30
All ECG sidebar button, 7-7, 7-49
All Patient Tile Assignments in the
Network tab, Removing, See
also Removing, 14-4
All Strips (All Patients) Report,
8-30
All Strips Report, 8-2
AllECG sidebar button, 7-7, 7-37
Anesthetic Agents
Iso, Enf, Des, Sev, Hal,
Agent, 12-7
Apnea Latching, 3-4
0070-10-0707-02
Approved Accessories, 10-15
Approved Accessory, 16-34
Approved Telepack Accessories,
10-15
Arrhythmia, 5-19, 9-58
(Telepack), 9-58
Alarms, 4-13
Algorithm, 4-10
Analysis, 16-5
Setup, 5-12, 9-55
Arrhythmia Alarms, 4-13
Arrhythmia Algorithm, 4-10
Arrhythmia Analysis, 16-5
Arrhythmia Settings, 8-27, 8-57
Arrhythmia Setup, 5-12
Arrhythmia Setup (Telepack), 9-55
Arrow buttons
Double Down Arrow button,
7-35, 7-47
Double Left Arrow button,
7-35, 7-47
Double Right Arrow button,
7-36, 7-48
Double Up Arrow button,
7-35, 7-47
Down Arrow button, 7-35,
7-47
Left Arrow button, 7-35,
7-36, 7-47, 7-48
Right Arrow button, 7-35,
7-36, 7-48, 7-49
Up Arrow button, 7-35, 7-47
Assigning
Patient Tile to a Care Group,
9-10
Patient Tiles, 15-5
Patient Tiles in the Network
tab, 14-2
Assigning a Patient Tile to a Care
Group, 9-10
Assigning Patient Tiles in the
Network Tab, 14-2
Asystole Alarm, 4-14
Attaching the Finger Clip Sensor,
10-13
Attendant Present Buttons, 10-3
Attendant Present buttons ,
Telepack, See also Telepack,
10-3
Audio Indicators, 3-2, 3-6
Auto Set Alarms button, 6-6
Auto-Admitting a Patient, 2-21
Auto-Admitting a Patient, Quick
Reference Guide, See also
Quick Reference Guide, 2-21
Index - 1
Index
B
Battery
Percentage, 12-10
Status LED Indicator Light,
10-6
Battery Percentage, 12-10
Battery Status LED Indicator Light,
10-6
Beat Detection and Typing, 4-12
Bed field, 5-4
Bedside
Alarm Tracking, 3-3
Bedside Tab, 7-2
Bedside tab, 7-2
All ECG View, 7-8
All Waveforms View, 7-3
sidebar buttons, 7-6, 7-10
Bedside Tab (All ECG View), 7-8
Bedside Tab (All Waveforms
View), 7-3
Bigeminy Alarm, 4-15
Bradycardia (Brady) Alarm, 4-15
C
Cable Repeater, 16-20
physical characteristics,
16-20
Cancel
selected print job, 8-39
selected print job button,
8-39
Cardiac
Index, 12-10
Output, 12-9
Cardiac Index, 12-10
Cardiac Output, 12-9
Care
and Cleaning of the Touch
Screen, 11-2
Group, 5-19
Care and Cleaning of the Touch
Screen, 11-2
Care Group
Indicator, 2-8
Care Group Tab, 9-9
Care Group tab, 9-9
Care Group tab (System), 9-9
Central To Central Transfer
Without Device, 5-24
Changing
a Patient’s Wave Gain
Settings, 5-53
Displayed Waveform, 7-43
Patient’s Print Setup, 5-56
Index - 2
System Wave Gain Settings,
9-59
Changing a Patient’s Print Setup,
5-56
Changing a Patient’s Wave Gain
Settings, 5-53
Changing the Displayed
Waveform, 7-43
Changing the System Default
Wave Gain Settings, 9-59
Channel Type, 9-68
CHECK Button, 10-4
CHECK button, 10-4
Choice Controls, 2-17
Cleaning
ECG Lead Sets, 11-4
Telepack battery
compartment, 11-4
Telepack device, 11-3
Cleaning and Disinfecting the
Telepack Device, 11-3
Cleaning the Battery
Compartment, 11-4
Cleaning the ECG Lead Sets, 11-4
Cleaning the SpO2 Finger Clip
Sensor, 11-6
Cleaning the SpO2 Module, 11-5
Clear sidebar button, 9-71
Clearing Time Filters, 7-28, 9-19
Clear button, 7-28, 9-19
CO2, 12-6
Alarm, 16-7
Performance Requirements,
16-7
CO2 , Parameter specifications,
See also Parameter
specifications, 12-6
CO2 Alarm, 16-7
CO2 Performance Requirements,
16-7
Colored Vertical Cursor Line,
7-34, 7-46
Comments
field, 5-11
sidebar button, 7-38, 7-50
Comments Dialog Box (Optional),
7-37, 7-49
Common Controls and Elements,
2-16
buttons, 2-16
Communication Range
Telepack, 10-9
Communications with the
Panorama Gateway, 5-2
Compliance, 16-28
Components
Bedside tab, 7-3
0070-10-0707-02
Bedside tab All ECG View,
7-9
Disclosure tab Zoomed Out
View, 7-41
Display tab, 5-41
Events tab Events Filter, 7-27,
9-19
Events tab List View, 7-24
ST tab, 7-54
Trends tab Graphic View,
7-19
Trends tab List View, 7-14
Components of the All ECG View,
7-9
Components of the All Waveforms
View, 7-3
Components of the Compressed
View, 7-41
Components of the Display Tab,
5-41
Components of the Events Filter,
7-27, 9-19
Components of the Graphic View,
7-19
Components of the List View,
7-14, 7-24
Components of the ST Tab, 7-54
Components of the Waveforms
View, 7-33, 7-46
Config ST sidebar button, 7-57
Configuring
Alarm Responses, 6-14
Care Groups, 5-14
Default Report Waveform
Parameters, 9-57
Events tab Time Filters, 7-28,
9-19
Parameter Filter, 7-30, 9-21
Patient Alarm Limits, 6-5
ST, 7-56
ST (Device Dependent), 7-56
the Display tab, 5-45
Trend Display Interval, 5-46,
7-15
Configuring a Trend Display
Interval, 5-46, 7-15
Configuring Alarm Responses,
6-14
Configuring Care Groups, 5-14
Configuring Default Report
Waveform Parameters, 9-57
Configuring Patient Alarm Limits,
6-5
Configuring ST (Device
Dependent), 7-56
Configuring the Display Tab, 5-45
Connect Field, 9-70
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Index
Couplet Alarm, 4-16
Customizing a Patient’s Print
Setup, 5-56
D
Dashes (---) Digital Data, 12-11
Data Display Area, 7-4, 7-9,
7-34, 7-46
All ECG Mode, 7-9
Normal Display Mode, 7-4
Date
and Time Text area, 7-36,
7-48
area, 7-34
field, 7-46
Of Birth field, 5-10
Date Of Birth field
ranges, 5-10
Date/Time
area, 7-20
Date/Time Tab, 9-41
Date/Time tab, 9-41
Delete
All Print Jobs, 8-39
All Print Jobs button, 8-39
Events button, 7-26
Failed Patient, 5-29
Single Event button, 7-25
Deleting
Equipment in the Equipment
List, 9-36
Event Records, 7-25
Deleting Equipment in the
Equipment List, 9-36
Deleting Event Records, 7-25
Delta T Values, 12-8, 12-9
Demographics, 5-24, 5-27
Demographics Tab, 5-2
Demographics tab, 5-2
Bed field, 5-4
Comments field, 5-11
Device Label field, 5-4
Doctor field, 5-11
Entering data, 5-4
First Name field, 5-5
First name field, 5-5
Gender field, 5-7
Height field, 5-6
ID field, 5-6
Last Name field, 5-5
DES INSP/ET ranges, 12-7
Destination Panorama, 5-25
Device
ID, 9-66, 9-70
Label field, 5-4
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Device ID, 9-70
Diastolic Pressure Measurement,
16-5
Digital
Data, 8-4, 8-32, 8-41, 8-45,
8-49
Data Area, 7-4, 7-9, 7-34
Data field, 7-46
Data Tile, 2-9
Parameter Data, 5-41
Digital Data, 8-4, 8-32, 8-41,
8-45, 8-49
Discharge, 2-22
Quick Reference Guide, 2-22
Discharge Tab, 5-36
Discharging a Patient from a
Telepack Device,
5-38
Discharging a Patient from
the Central Station,
5-37
Discharging a Patient from
the Central Station
and the Bedside
Monitor, 5-36
Normal Screen button, 5-38
Discharge tab, 5-36
Accessing, 5-36, 7-40, 7-53
Normal Screen button, 7-45,
7-58
Discharge, Quick Reference
Guide, See also Quick
Reference Guide, 2-22
Discharging a Patient, 5-36, 5-38
Discharging a Patient from a
Telepack-608 Device, 5-38
Discharging a Patient from the
Central Station, 5-37
Discharging a Patient from the
Central Station and the
Bedside Monitor, 5-36
Disclosure Data
locating, 7-43
Disclosure Tab, 7-40
Disclosure tab, 7-40
Waveforms View, 7-45
Zoomed In View, 7-45
Disclosure Tab (Waveforms
View), 7-45
Display, 2-23, 5-23, 5-27
18.1" Flat Panel, 16-17
19" Flat Panel, 16-17
20" CRT, 16-17
20" CRT Display, 16-17
21" CRT, 16-16
21" CRT Display, 16-16
Choices sidebar button, 7-44
0070-10-0707-02
Time Interval, 7-20
Display Tab, 5-40
Display tab, 5-40
sidebar buttons, 5-48
Display, Quick Reference Guide,
See also Quick Reference
Guide, 2-23
Displays, 16-16
Disposal of the Telepack-608
Device, 11-6
Disposing of Batteries, 11-7
Doctor field, 5-11
Double
Down Arrow button, See also
Arrows, 7-35, 7-47
Left Arrow button, See also
Arrows, 7-35, 7-47
Right Arrow button, See also
Arrows, 7-36, 7-48
Up Arrow button, See also
Arrows, 7-35, 7-47
Down Arrow button, See also
Arrows, 7-35, 7-47
E
ECG, 12-2
Amplitude, 4-11
Derived Heart Rate Meter
Performance
Requirements, 16-4
Filters, 4-13
Lead Sets, Cleaning, See also
Cleaning, 11-4
Performance Requirements,
16-2
Respiration Performance
Requirements, 16-6
Thoracic Impedance, 12-3
Waveform Format, 8-11
Waveforms, 8-5, 8-32, 8-42,
8-46
ECG Derived Heart Rate Meter
Performance Requirements,
16-4
ECG Lead Diagram LED Indicator
Lights, 10-4
ECG Performance Requirements,
16-2
ECG Respiration Performance
Requirements, 16-6
ECG Waveform Measurements
performing, 7-5, 7-10
ECG Waveforms, 8-5, 8-42
Editing
Care Group Labels, 9-9
Index - 3
Index
Paging numbers, 15-7
Editing a Pager, 15-7
Editing Care Group Labels, 9-9
Effects of the Transfer, 5-23, 5-27
Electrode Patches, 4-2
Electrode Patches, placement, 4-2
Electrode Placement
neonatal, 4-8
Electromagnetic Compatibility,
16-12, 16-23, 16-31
Entering
Data in the Demographics
tab, 5-4
Data in the Display tab, 5-45
New Equipment, 9-34
Telepack to the Equipment
List, 10-9
Wireless Settings, 9-66
Entering a Password, 6-2, 9-7,
15-2
Entering Data in the
Demographics Tab, 5-4
Entering New Equipment, 9-34
Entering the Telepack-608 to the
Equipment List, 10-9
Entering Wireless Settings, 9-66
Environmental Characteristics,
16-23, 16-30
Environmental Characteristics for
the Panorama Wireless
Transceiver/Splitters/
Antennas, 16-20
Equipment
Report, 8-34
Setup tab, 9-33
Equipment Information, 8-34
Equipment Report, 8-34
Equipment Information, 8-34
Equipment Setup Tab, 9-33
Equipment Setup tab
sidebar buttons, 9-36
Error Log
Data, 8-53
Read sidebar button, 9-71
sidebar button, 9-69
Error Log Data, 8-53
Error Log Sidebar Button, 9-69
ET, 12-3
Event
Filter Text box, 7-27, 9-19
Filtering, 7-27
List Report, 8-21
Markers, 7-41
Record, 8-23
Zoom In Report, 8-40
Event Filtering, 7-27
Event List Report, 8-21
Index - 4
Event Record, 8-23
Event Zoom In Report, 8-40
Events
Filtering, 7-31
Filtering sidebar button, 7-31
List Alarm Indicators, 7-25
List Filter sidebar button, 7-31
Events Filter
Cancel button, 7-28, 9-19
Events Filtering
Time Filters, 7-28, 9-19
Time Interval Area, 7-34
Time Interval field, 7-34, 7-46
Events Tab, 7-23
Events tab, 7-23
Event Description Area, 7-34
Event Description field, 7-46
events filtering, 7-27
List box Area, 7-24
List View, 7-24
See also List View, 7-24
Waveforms View, 7-33
Events Tab (List View), 7-24
Events Tab (Waveforms View),
7-33
F
FCC Label, 16-34
Filtering
Noise and Artifact Variables,
4-10
Pacer Signals, 4-11
First
name, 5-5
First Name field, 5-5
Footer, 8-6, 8-11, 8-16, 8-19,
8-23, 8-27, 8-33, 8-35,
8-37, 8-43, 8-46, 8-50,
8-53, 8-57
Free Channel Sidebar Button,
9-72
Free Channel sidebar button, 9-72
Free Connected Channel Sidebar
Button, 9-72
Free Connected Channel sidebar
button, 9-72
Freeze sidebar button, 7-7
Frequency Range, 16-19
Full Disclosure
Report, See also Reports, 8-6
Zoom In Report, See also
Reports, 8-43
Zoom In ST dialog box, See
also Reports, 7-48
Full Disclosure Report, 8-6
0070-10-0707-02
Full Disclosure Zoom In Report,
8-43
G
Gas Module, 12-3
Gender field, 5-7
General Alarm Behavior, 3-2
Alarm behavior
general, 3-2
Generating a Graphic Trend
Report, 7-21
Generating a Paging Report, 15-9
Generating a Patient Alarm
Report, 6-9
Generating an All Strips Report,
7-7
Generating an ST Report, 7-58
Graphic Data, 8-49
Graphic sidebar button, 7-17
Graphic Trend Report, 8-47
Graphic View of the Trends tab,
7-19
H
Hardware Version field, 9-67
Header, 8-4, 8-10, 8-15, 8-19,
8-22, 8-26, 8-31, 8-34,
8-36, 8-41, 8-45, 8-48,
8-51, 8-53, 8-56
Heart
Rate, 12-2
Rate-HR, 12-2
Heart Rate
HR, 12-2
Meter, 4-11
Source ECG, 12-2
Source IBP, 12-2
Source NIBP, 12-2
Tile, 5-43
Heart Rate Source
ECG, 12-2
IBP, 12-2
NIBP, 12-2
Height
Dial dialog, 2-20
field, 5-6
Height field
ranges, 5-7
Horizontal Measurements
(Amplitude), 7-6
Horizontal Navigation buttons,
7-35
HR, 12-2
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Index
I
IBP, 12-2, 12-5
(Dia), 12-5
(Sys), 12-5
Heart Rate Meter, 16-6
Mean, 12-5
mmHg, 12-5
Pressure Range, 16-6
Systolic, 12-5
IBP Heart Rate Meter, 16-6
IBP Pressure Range, 16-6
ID field, 5-6
Indicator Lights, 10-4
Initial Setup of Telepack, 10-7
Inserting Batteries, 10-7
Inserting batteries
Telepack, 10-7
INSP/ET CO2, 12-6
INSP/ET CO2, Parameter
specifications, See also
Parameter specifications,
12-6
INSP/ET N2O, 12-7
INSP/ET O2, 12-6
Installation Setup Tab, 9-7
Installation Setup tab, 9-7
Installing the Patient Cable, 10-12
Installing the SpO2 Module on the
Telepack-608, 10-10
Introduction, 10-2, 10-10
Invalid Data Display, 12-11
Irregular Heart Rate Alarm, 4-16
Iso
Enf, Des, Sev, Hal, Agent
,See also Anesthetic
Agents, 12-7
Iso Enf and Hal INSP/ET ranges,
12-7
K
Keyboard, 16-16
Keypad dialog box, 2-18
L
Last Name field, 5-5
Latching, defined, 3-3
Lead
Placement Procedures, 4-2
Selection, 9-67
Lead II Monitoring, 4-6
Lead Placement Methods
AHA and IEC, 4-3
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Lead Placement Procedures, 4-2
LEAD SELECT Button, 10-3
LEAD SELECT button, 10-3
Lead Set
10-wire, 4-5
3-wire, 4-4
5-wire, 4-4
Lead sets
sterilizing, 11-5
Lead sidebar button, 7-49
Learning, 4-11, 4-13
Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms, 4-14
Licensing Key, 1-2
Licensing Key, defined, 1-2
Link Status LED Indicator Light,
10-6
List box, 9-70
List sidebar button, 7-21
List View
Events tab, 7-24
Trends tab, 7-13
locating , See also Disclosure
Data, 7-43
Locating Specific Disclosure Data,
7-43
M
Main Screen, defined, 2-7
Mark Event sidebar button, 7-7
Measure sidebar buttons, 7-7,
7-37, 7-50
Measurement Specifications,
16-30
Menu Bar, 2-10
Menu Bar, defined, 2-10
Menu buttons, defined, 2-11
Message dialog boxes, defined,
2-17
Modified Chest Lead (MCL)
Monitoring
MCL, 4-7
Modifying
a Default Password, 9-30
an Alarm Password, 9-30
Equipment Included in the
Equipment List, 9-35
Equipment included in the
Equipment List, 9-35
Modifying a Default Password,
9-30
Modifying Equipment Included in
the Equipment List, 9-35
Monitoring a Pacemaker Patient,
4-9
More Tab, 9-39
0070-10-0707-02
More tab, 9-39
Mouse, 16-16
Setting the Waveform System
Defaults, 9-48
Muting Alarms, 2-25
N
N2O, 12-7
N2O INSP/ET, 12-7
Navigating in the
Bedside tab All ECG Mode,
7-10
Bedside tab All ECG View,
7-10
Bedside tab All Waveforms
View, 7-5
Disclosure tab Waveform
Area, 7-42
Graphic View of the Trends
tab, 7-20
List View of the Events tab,
7-25
List View of the Trends tab,
7-14
List View of Trends tab, 7-14,
7-25
Normal Display Mode, 7-5
Waveforms View of the
Events tab, 7-34,
7-47
Navigating in the All ECG View,
7-10
Navigating in the All Waveforms
View, 7-5
Navigating in the Graphic View,
7-20
Navigating in the List View, 7-14,
7-25
Navigating in the Waveform
Area, 7-42
Navigating in the Waveforms
View of the Disclosure Tab,
7-47
Navigating in the Waveforms
View of the Events Tab, 7-34
Neonatal Electrode Placement,
4-8
Network Printer, 1-14, 16-18
Network Tab, 14-2
Network tab, 14-2
Next Event button, 7-14, 7-36,
7-42, 7-48
NIBP, 12-2, 12-3
(Dia), 12-4
(ET), 12-4
Index - 5
Index
(Sys), 12-4
Area, 7-3, 7-9, 7-34
Diastolic, 12-4
Mean, 12-4
NIBP Area, 7-3
NIBP field, 7-46
NIBP Performance Characteristics,
16-5
NIPB
Systolic, 12-4
Noise and Artifact, 4-10
Variables, Filtering, See also
Filtering, 4-10
Non-ECG
Waveform Format, 8-11
Waveforms, 8-5, 8-33, 8-43,
8-46
Non-ECG Waveforms, 8-43
Nonin SpO2, 12-5, 16-7
Nonin SpO2 Module
Specifications, 16-30
Non-Lethal Arrhythmia Alarms,
4-15
Normal Screen
button, 7-45, 7-58
Normal Screen button, 5-38
Normal Screen Sidebar Button,
5-38
Nurse Call Button, 10-3
Nurse Call button, 10-3
Nurse Call button , Telepack, See
also Telepack, 10-3
O
O2, 12-6
O2 INSP/ET, 12-6
Operating Altitude, 16-9, 16-21
Operating Humidity, 16-9, 16-21
Operating Instructions, 10-7
operating instructions, Telepack,
See also Telepack, 10-7
Operating Temperature, 16-9,
16-20
P
Pacemaker Patient
monitoring, 4-9
Pacer, 5-19
Signals, Filtering, See also
Filtering, 4-11
Pacer Configuration, 5-11
Pager Information, 8-36
Pager, Removing a, See also
Removing a, 15-7
Index - 6
Paging
adding a pager, 15-4
Adding All Patient Tiles to a
Pager, 15-6
Comments sidebar button,
7-38, 7-50
Password tab, 15-2
Report, 8-35
resending a failed page,
15-8
Paging Delay Settings, 8-27, 8-57
Paging Password Tab, 15-2
Paging Report, 8-35
Paging Tab, 15-4
Paging tab, 15-4
Panorama
Central Station, about, 2-2
Instrument Radio-608, 16-34
Patient Monitoring Network,
defined, 2-xvii
Telemetry Server, defined,
2-xvii, 1-4
Telemetry System, defined,
2-xvii
Telepack-608, 1-12
ViewStation, 1-3
Wireless Transceiver, 1-4,
16-19, 16-21
Panorama Antenna, 16-19
physical characteristics,
16-19
Panorama Central Station, 1-3
performance specifications,
16-8
Panorama Central Station and
Panorama Telemetry Server,
16-8
operating temperature, 16-9
power supply, 16-9
Panorama Central Station,
defined, 2-2
Panorama Instrument Radio-608,
16-34
Panorama Server Analysis, 16-22
Panorama Telemetry Server, 1-4
Panorama Telepack, 1-12
Panorama ViewStation and
WorkStation, 1-3
Panorama Wireless Transceiver,
1-4, 16-19
Panorama Wireless Transceiver
(Panorama Telepack-608
and Instrument Radio), 1-4
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/
Splitters/Antennas, 16-19
Panorama Wireless Transceiver/
Splitters/Antennas/Cable
0070-10-0707-02
Repeaters, 16-19
Parameter
Areas, 7-20
Color tab, 9-2
Filters, 7-30, 9-20
Specifications, 12-2
Parameter Color Tab, 9-2
Parameter Color tab, 9-2
Parameter Filters, 7-30, 9-20
Parameter Specfications
N2O INSP/ET, 12-7
Parameter Specifications, 12-2
Heart Rate, 12-2
O2, 12-6
Parameter specifications
CO2, 12-3, 12-6
ECG Thoracic Impedance,
12-3
INSP/ET CO2, 12-6
INSP/ET N2O, 12-7
INSP/ET O2, 12-6
O2 INSP/ET, 12-6
Resp, 12-2
SPO2, 12-4
ST, 12-9
Paramter specifications
T Blood Values, 12-9
T1 and T2, 12-8
Passport 2® Bedside Monitor, 1-5
Passport 2® Bedside Monitor, 1-5
Passwords Tab, 9-29
Passwords tab, 9-29
Patient
Alarm Data, 8-26
Alarm Report, 8-25
Demographic Area, 7-24,
7-33
Demographic field, 7-3, 7-9,
7-14, 7-19, 7-41,
7-46, 7-54
Demographic Line, 7-41,
7-54
Reports tab, 8-2
Size field, defined, 5-10
Patient Alarm Data, 8-26
Patient Alarm Report, 8-25
Patient Alarm Setup tab
Optional, 6-2
sidebar buttons, 6-3
Patient Alarm Setup Tab
(Optional), 6-2
Patient Alarms, 2-24
Patient from Standby Mode,
Removing a, See also
Removing a, 5-50
Patient Reports Tab, 8-2
Patient Setup functions
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Index
Demographics tab, 5-2
Discharge tab, 5-36
Display tab, 5-40
Print Setup tab, 5-55
Standby tab, 5-49
Wave Gain tab, 5-52
Patient Size field
entering, 5-10
Patient Status Line, 2-10
Patient tile
REC button, 2-9
Patient Tile Assignment in the
Network tab, Removing a,
See also Removing a, 14-4
Patient Tile Assignment, Removing
a, See also Removing a, 15-6
Patient Tiles, 2-7
Patient Tiles, defined, 2-7
Pause Alarm, 4-16
PAWP, 12-10
performance specifications,
16-20
Performing ECG Waveform
Measurements, 7-5, 7-10
Physical Characteristics, 16-16,
16-19
Physiological
Alarm Event Messages, 13-7
Alarm Responses, 3-4
Physiological Alarm Event
Messages, 13-7
Physiological Alarm Responses,
3-4
Physiological Alarms, 3-2
Physiological Alarms and Events,
13-2
Arrhythmias, 13-9
Placement Procedures, Lead, See
also Lead, 4-2
Placing a Patient in Standby
Mode, 5-49
Power Supply, 16-9, 16-19
power supply, Panorama Central
Station and Panorama
Telemetry Server, See also
Panorama Central Station
and Panorama Telemetry
Server, 16-9
Power Up Sequence
Telepack, 10-9
Premature Ventricular Contraction
(PVC), 12-8
Previous Event button, 7-14, 7-35,
7-42, 7-47
Previous sidebar button, 9-58
Previous Tab, 9-40
Previous tab, 9-40
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Print on Alarm, 3-5
Print Setup Tab (Patient), 5-55
Print Setup tab (Patient), 5-55
sidebar buttons, 5-56
Print Setup Tab (System), 9-45
Print Setup tab (System), 9-45
Print Status Tab, 8-38
Print Status tab, 8-38
Print Status Tab List Box, 8-38
Print Status tab List box, 8-38
Printing a 12-lead Report, 8-52
Printing a Full Disclosure Report
(ECG and Non-ECG Layout),
8-12
Printing a Full Disclosure Report
from the Compressed View,
7-44
Printing a Full Disclosure Zoom In
Report, 8-46
Printing a Full Disclosure Zoom In
Report from the Waveforms
View, 7-50
Printing a Graphic Trend Report,
8-50
Printing a Paging Report, 8-37
Printing a Patient Alarm Report,
8-27
Printing a System Alarm Report,
8-57
Printing a Telepack Error Log
Report, 8-54
Printing a Trend List Report, 8-19
Printing a Trend List Report from
the List View, 7-16
Printing an All Strips (All Patients)
Report, 8-33
Printing an Event List Report, 8-23
Printing an Event Zoom In Report,
8-43
Printing an Event Zoom In Report
from the Waveforms View,
7-38
Printing an Events List Report from
the List View, 7-31
Printing an ST Report, 8-16
Printing the
12-lead Report, 8-52
All Strips (All Patients) Report,
8-33
All Strips Report, 8-6
Equipment Report, 8-35
Event List Report, 8-23
Event Zoom In Report, 8-43
Events List Report from the List
View, 7-31
Full Disclosure Report, 8-12
Full Disclosure Report (ECG
0070-10-0707-02
and Non-ECG
Layout), 8-12
Full Disclosure Report from
the Zoomed Out
View, 7-44
Full Disclosure Zoom In
Report, 8-46
Graphic Trend Report, 8-50
Patient Alarm Report, 8-27
ST Report, 8-16
System Alarm Report, 8-57
Telepack Error Log Report,
8-54, 9-69
Trend Graphic Report, 8-50
Trend List Report, 8-19
Trend List Report from the List
View, 7-16
Printing the Equipment Report,
8-35
Priority
1 Alarms, 3-5
2 Alarms, 3-5
3 Alarms, 3-5
Off, 3-5
Program, 9-69
Program sidebar button, 9-69
Programming the Telepack, 10-8
Progress Bar, 2-17
Protocol Selection, 9-68
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure
(PAWP), 12-10
Pulse Rate, 16-6
PVC, 12-8
PVC/minute Alarm, 4-17
Q
Quick Reference Guide, 2-21
Auto-Admitting a Patient,
2-21
Discharge, 2-22
Display, 2-23
Viewing Disclosure data,
2-26
Viewing Events data, 2-26
Viewing List Trends, 2-25
Quick Reference Guide, Standby,
See also Standby, 2-21
R
Range Bars, 7-20
Read, 9-68
Read sidebar button, 9-68
Real Time Clock, 16-8
REC button, 2-9
Index - 7
Index
Recalibrating the Touch Screen,
9-4
Receiver Range, 16-19
RECORD Button, 10-4
RECORD button, 10-4
Recording Password Changes,
9-31
Recover Patient, 5-28
Reference
ST, 7-55
Templates, 8-16
Refreshing the
Events List, 7-27
List View, 7-27
Network tab List box, 14-4
Refreshing the List View, 7-27
Refreshing the Network Tab List
Box, 14-4
Relearn sidebar button, 6-9
Removing
All Patient Tile Assignments in
the Network tab,
14-4
All Patient Tiles from a Pager,
15-6
Print Jobs from the Print
Queue, 8-38
Removing a
Pager, 15-7
Patient from Standby Mode,
5-50
Patient Tile Assignment, 15-6
Patient Tile Assignment in the
Network tab, 14-4
Removing a Pager, 15-7
Removing a Patient from Standby
Mode, 5-50
Removing a Patient Tile
Assignment, 15-6
Removing a Patient Tile
Assignment in the Network
Tab, 14-4
Removing All Patient Tile
Assignments in the Network
Tab, 14-4
Removing All Patient Tiles from a
Pager, 15-6
Removing Print Jobs from the Print
Queue, 8-38
Removing the Patient Cable,
10-14
Removing the SpO2 Module from
the Telepack, 10-11
Report
12-lead, 8-51
12-lead Report, 8-51
Columns, 8-34
Index - 8
Footer, 8-6, 8-11, 8-16,
8-19, 8-23, 8-27,
8-33, 8-35, 8-43,
8-46, 8-50, 8-53,
8-57
Reports
Additional, 8-40
All Strips Report (All Patients),
8-30
Equipment Report, 8-34
Error Log Report, 8-53
Event List Report, 8-21
Event Zoom In Report, 8-40
Full Disclosure Report, 8-6
Full Disclosure Zoom In
Report, 8-43
Full Disclosure Zoom In ST
dialog box, 7-48
Graphic Trend Report, 8-47
Paging Report, 8-35
Patient Alarm Report, 8-25
ST Report, 8-14
System Alarm Report, 8-55
Telepack Error Log Report,
8-53
Trend Graphic Report, 8-47
Trend List Report, 8-17
Requirements, 16-18
Resending a Failed Page, 15-8
Respiration, 12-2
CO2, 12-3
ECG Thoracic Impedance,
12-3
Gas Module, 12-3
Resp, 12-2
Respiration Source
CO2, 12-3
ECG Thoracic Impedance,
12-3
Gas Module
Parameter specifications
Gas Module, 12-3
Restore Previous Settings sidebar
button, 5-48, 5-54, 5-56,
6-7, 6-15
Retrieve Discharged Pt. sidebar
button, 5-16
Retrieving Discharged Patients,
5-16
Right Arrow button, See also
Arrows, 7-35, 7-36, 7-48,
7-49
Room To Room Transfer Without
Device, 5-22
Run Alarm, 4-17
0070-10-0707-02
S
Safety and Electromagnetic
Compatibility, 16-21
Safety Designations, 16-22
Save To Event, 3-5
Save To Event, defined, 3-5
Scrolling
Parameters, 7-14, 7-20, 7-25
Time Line, 7-21
Trends List, 7-14, 7-25
Securing the Telepack Device,
10-9
Securing the Telepack-608
Device, 10-9
Selecting a Color for Parameter
Data, 9-2
Selecting the
Color for Parameter Data,
9-2
Patient to be Set Up/
Modified, 5-4
Patient’s Parameter Data,
5-45
Unit Priority Order, 9-47
Set Date/Time, 9-42
Setting a Default Order in the Unit
Priorities Tab, 9-47
Setting the
Date in the Date/Time tab,
9-42
Default Order in the Unit
Priorities tab, 9-47
Patient Alarm Limits, 6-5
Physiological Alarms Volume
Level, 9-12
System Alarms Limits, 9-23
System Alarms Options, 9-15
System Alarms Options
(Central Station),
9-15
System Alarms Options
(ViewStation), 9-17
System Alarms Responses,
9-27
System Alarms Volume Level,
9-12
System Default Print Setup,
9-46
Time in the Date/Time tab,
9-43
Unit Choices, 9-51
Unit Choices (Central
Station), 9-51
Unit Choices (ViewStation),
9-55
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Index
Volume Levels, 9-12
Setting the System Alarm Limits,
9-23
Setting the System Alarm Options
(ViewStation and
WorkStation), 9-17
Setting the System Alarms Options
(Central Station), 9-15
Setting the System Alarms
Responses, 9-27
Setting the System Default Print
Setup, 9-46
Setting the Unit Choices (Central
Station), 9-51
Setting the Unit Choices
(ViewStation and
WorkStation), 9-55
Settings (Telepack), 5-15, 9-56
Sev INSP/ET ranges, 12-7
Sidebar Button, 5-38
Sidebar Button - Normal Screen,
5-38, 5-50, 9-2, 9-6, 9-8,
9-10, 9-13, 9-31, 9-44,
9-60, 9-72
Sidebar Buttons, 2-15, 5-19,
5-28, 5-48, 5-54, 5-56, 6-3,
6-7, 6-15, 7-6, 7-10, 7-16,
7-21, 7-31, 7-37, 7-44,
7-49, 7-57, 8-39, 9-21,
9-24, 9-27, 9-36, 9-48,
9-58, 9-68, 15-3
sidebar buttons
defined, 2-15
Simultaneous
Alarm Limit Editing, 6-7
Patient Demographic tab
Editing, 5-17
ST Configuration Editing,
7-57
Simultaneous Alarm Limit Editing,
6-7
Simultaneous Patient
Demographic Tab Editing,
5-17
Simultaneous ST Configuration
Editing, 7-57
Skin Preparation, 4-2
Skip To sidebar button, 7-44
Software Version field, 9-67
Sorting
Network tab List box, 14-2
Sorting the Contents of the
Network Tab List Box, 14-2
Source Panorama, 5-24
Specifications
Heart Rate, 12-2
IBP, 12-5
Panorama® Operating Instructions
NIBP, 12-3
PVC, 12-8
Respiration, 12-2
Telepack, 16-22
Spectrum OR™ Bedside Monitor,
1-10
Spectrum™ Bedside Monitor, 1-8,
1-10
Splitter, 16-20
SPO2, 12-4
SpO2, 12-4, 16-6
ST, 12-9
Alarm Delay, 3-4
button, 7-36, 7-48
Data, 8-15
Report, 8-14
Segment Analysis, 4-12,
16-4
Status field, 7-54
ST Button, 7-36, 7-48
ST Data, 8-15
ST Report, 8-14
ST Segment Analysis, 4-12, 16-4
ST Tab, 7-53
ST tab, 7-53
Current ST, 7-55
Current Templates, 8-16
Done sidebar button, 7-57
ST Template Area (Device
Dependent), 7-55
ST Template Areas, 7-55
Standby, 2-21
Quick Reference Guide, 2-21
Standby Tab, 5-49
Standby tab, 5-49
placing a patient in, 5-49
Sterilization of the Lead Sets, 11-5
Storage Altitude, 16-9, 16-21
Storage Humidity, 16-9, 16-21
Storage Temperature, 16-9,
16-21
Storing the Telepack, 11-3
Straight Line (Waveforms), 12-12
Strip Setup sidebar button, 9-58
Supported Devices, 1-3
Suspend
All Alarms (Optional), 6-8,
6-15
Non-Lethal, 6-8, 6-15
System Alarm
Information, 8-56
Limits, 9-28
Options, 9-24
Report, 8-55
System Alarm Information, 8-56
System Alarm Limits sidebar
button, 9-28
0070-10-0707-02
System Alarm Options sidebar
button, 9-27
System Alarm Report, 8-55
System Alarm Responses, 9-24
System Alarm Responses sidebar
buttons, 9-24
System Alarms, 3-6
System Alarms (Alarm Limits) Tab,
9-23
System Alarms (Alarm Limits) tab,
9-23
System Alarms (Alarm Responses)
Tab, 9-26
System Alarms (Alarm Responses)
tab, 9-26
System Alarms (Options) Tab,
9-14
System Alarms (Options) tab, 9-14
System Alarms Tab, 9-14
System Alarms tab, 9-14
sidebar buttons, 9-21, 9-24,
9-27
System Alarms, defined, 3-6
System Date/Time, defined, 2-14
System Date/Time, location, 2-14
System Event Filtering, 9-18
System Events, 13-16
System Reports Tab, 8-29
System Reports tab, 8-29
System Status Line, defined, 2-11
System Status Line, location, 2-11
T
T Blood Values, 12-9
T1 and T2, 12-8
Tabs, 2-14
Tabs, defined, 2-14
Technical
Alarms, 3-6
Technical Alarms, 3-6
Technical Alarms and Events,
13-11
Technical Event Sound, 3-6
Telepack
analysis of data, 16-22
Attendant Present buttons,
10-3
battery compartment,
Cleaning, See also
Cleaning, 11-4
Communication Range, 10-9
communication range, 10-9
disposal, 11-6
disposal of batteries, 11-7
ECG Lead Indicator Lights,
Index - 9
Index
10-4
Error Log Report, 8-53
FCC labeling, 16-34
guidelines for cleaning, 11-4
indicator lights, 10-4
initial setup, 10-7
inserting batteries, 10-7
Nurse Call button, 10-3
operating instructions, 10-7
Power Up Sequence, 10-9
programming, 10-8
settings, 5-15, 9-56, 9-58
sidebar button, 9-71
skin preparation, 4-2
Specifications, 16-22
storing, 11-3
Test button, 10-4
User Maintenance, 11-3
Telepack Communication Range,
10-9
Telepack device
Cleaning, See also Cleaning,
11-3
securing, 10-9
Telepack Error Log Report, 8-53
Telepack Power Up Sequence,
10-9
Telepack Specifications, 16-22
Telepack User Maintenance, 11-3
Telepack with Nonin SpO2
Module (Optional), 10-10
Telepack,defined, 10-2
Telepack-2.4, 10-9
Telepack-608, 10-9
Temp
T1,T2, Delta T, and T Blood,
12-8
Temperature
T1,T2, Delta T, and T Blood,
12-8
Temperature Performance
Requirements, 16-6
Terms, 17-2
Terms, Acronyms, and
Abbreviations, 17-2
Test, 10-4
Testing Alarm Limits, 6-9
The Main Screen, 2-7
The Panorama Central Station,
2-2
The ViewStation and
WorkStation, 2-4
Tile Display Rearrangement, 5-43
Time Date, and Sensor Label,
7-41
Time Filters, 7-28, 9-19
Touch Screen, 16-18
Index - 10
User Maintenance, 11-2
Touch Screen Tab, 9-4
Touch Screen User Maintenance,
11-2
Transfer
Central To Central Transfer
Without Device,
5-24
destination Panorama, 5-25
effects of, 5-23, 5-27
from Failed List, 5-30
Room To Room Transfer
Without Device,
5-22
source Panorama, 5-24
Transfer Tab, 5-22
Transfer tab, 5-22
sidebar buttons, 5-28
Transmit Range, 16-19
Trend
Display, 5-48, 7-17
Graphic Report, 8-47
List Report, 8-17
Records, 8-19
Storage, 5-48
Trend List Report, 8-17
Trend Records, 8-19
Trends Tab, 7-13
Trends tab, 7-13
Plot Areas, 7-20
Trends Tab (Graphic View), 7-19
Trends tab (Graphic View), 7-19
Trends Tab (List View), 7-13
Trends tab (List View), 7-13
Trends tab, See also List View,
7-13
Trigeminy Alarm, 4-18
Troubleshooting, 1-15, 2-27,
4-18, 5-20, 5-31, 5-38,
5-48, 5-51, 5-54, 5-57, 6-3,
6-10, 6-18, 7-8, 7-11, 7-17,
7-22, 7-31, 7-38, 7-45,
7-50, 7-58, 8-27, 8-39,
8-58, 9-3, 9-6, 9-8, 9-10,
9-13, 9-22, 9-25, 9-28,
9-31, 9-36, 9-44, 9-46,
9-49, 9-58, 9-61, 9-72,
10-17, 14-5, 15-3, 15-9
Additional Reports, 8-58
Admitting a Patient, 2-27
Alarm Limits tab, 6-10
Alarm Options tab, 9-22
Alarm Responses tab, 6-18
Arrythmia & ST Analysis,
4-18
Bedside tab, 7-11
Care Group tab, 9-10
0070-10-0707-02
Date Time tab, 9-44
Demographics tab, 5-20
Discharge Tab, 5-38
Disclosure tab, 7-50
Display tab, 5-48
Equipment tab, 9-36
Events tab, 7-38
Installation Setup tab, 9-8
Parameter Color tab, 9-3
Passwords tab, 9-31
Patient Alarm Setup tab, 6-3
Patient Reports tab, 8-27
Print Setup tab, 5-57, 9-46
Print Status tab, 8-39
Recalibration, 9-6
ST tab, 7-58
Standby tab, 5-51
System Alarm Limits tab, 9-25
System Alarm Responses tab,
9-28
Telepack, 10-17
Transfer tab, 5-31
Trends tab, 7-22
Unit Choices tab, 9-58
Unit Priorities tab, 9-49
Volume tab, 9-13
Wave Gain tab, 5-54, 9-61
Turning the Touch Screen On or
Off, 9-4
U
Unit Choices Tab, 9-50
Unit Priorities Tab, 9-47
Up Arrow button, See also
Arrows, 7-35, 7-47
User Maintenance
Telepack, 11-3
User Selectable ST, 16-5
Using a Transcutaneous Electrical
Nerve Stimulator (TENS), 4-8
V
Ventricular
Rhythm (V-Rhythm) Alarm,
4-18
Tachycardia (V-Tach) Alarm,
4-15
Ventricular-Fibrillation (V-Fib)
Alarm, 4-14
Vertical
Calipers (Time), 7-5
Measurements (Time), 7-5
Navigation buttons, 7-35,
7-47
Panorama® Operating Instructions
Index
View
Print Setup sidebar button,
9-58
View 12™ Card, 4-5
View List sidebar button, 7-37
View Waveforms, 7-31
VIEW/MUTE button, 2-8
Viewing
Disclosure Data, 2-26
Events, 2-26
List Trends, 2-25
Viewing Disclosure Data, 2-26
Viewing Disclosure data, Quick
Reference Guide, See also
Quick Reference Guide, 2-26
Viewing Events, 2-26
Viewing Events data, Quick
Reference Guide, See also
Quick Reference Guide, 2-26
Viewing List Trends, 2-25
Viewing List Trends, Quick
Reference Guide, See also
Quick Reference Guide, 2-25
ViewStation, about, 2-4
Visual Indicators, 3-2, 3-6
Volume Tab, 9-11
Volume tab, 9-11
V-Rhythm Alarm, 4-18
Panorama® Operating Instructions
W
Wave Gain tab, 5-52
(Patient), 5-52
(System), 9-59
Wave Gain Tab (Patient), 5-52
Wave Gain tab (Patient)
sidebar buttons, 5-54
Wave Gain Tab (System), 9-59
Waveform
Area, 7-41
Data, 8-5, 8-11, 8-32, 8-42,
8-45, 8-52
Data Tile, 2-10
Parameter Data, 5-44
Waveforms
CO2, 12-6
DES, 12-8
ECG, 12-2
ENF, 12-8
Generic, 12-8
HAL, 12-8
IBP, 12-5
ISO, 12-8
O2, 12-6
Respiration, 12-3
SEV, 12-8
SPO2, 12-4, 12-5
View sidebar buttons, 7-37,
7-49
View ST dialog box, 7-36
0070-10-0707-02
Waveforms, Non-ECG, See also
Non-ECG, 8-5, 8-33, 8-43,
8-46
Weight
Dial dialog, 2-19
field, 5-7
fields, 5-7
Weight field
ranges, 5-8, 5-9
Wireless Tab, 9-62
Wireless tab, 9-62
Connect field, 9-67, 9-70
hardware version, 9-67
Protocol Selection field, 9-68
sidebar buttons, 9-68
Software Version field, 9-67
WMTS All sidebar button, 9-36
WMTS Device sidebar button,
9-36
X
Xs (XX) Digital Data, 12-11
Z
Zoom
In button, 7-21, 7-42, 7-45
Out, 7-49
Out button, 7-21, 7-42
Index - 11
0070-10-0707-02
Revision B
October 5, 2010
Mindray DS USA, Inc. • 800 MacArthur Boulevard • Mahwah, NJ 07430 • USA •
Dom. Customer Service: 1.800.288.2121 • Intl. Customer Service: +1.201.995.8000 •
Dom. Fax: 1.800.926.4275 • Intl. Fax: +1.201.995.8680 • www.mindray.com
Mindray Medical Netherlands B.V.• P.O. Box 26 • 3870 CA Hoevelaken • The Netherlands •
Tel: +31 33 25 44 911 • Fax: +31 33 25 37 621
Mindray (UK) Limited • 3 Percy Road • St. John’s Park • Huntingdon • Cambridgeshire PE29 6SZ •
United Kingdom • Tel: 01480 416840 • Fax: 01480 436588
Mindray Medical France SARL • Europarc Créteil •123, Chemin des Bassins •
94035 Créteil Cedex • France • Tel: (0)1.45.13.91.50 • Fax: (0)1.45.13.91.51
Mindray Medical German GmbH • Zwischen den Bächen 4 • 64625 Bensheim • Germany •
Tel: +49.6251.17524-0 • Fax: +49.6251.17524-20
Mindray Medical International Ltd. • 2813 Office Tower, Convention Plaza • No 1 Harbour Road •
Wanchai • Hong Kong • Tel: +852 2793 5596 • Fax: +852 2344 8824
0002-08-8918
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement